6SE70..-.E.51; -.E.61; -.E.71 Converters (7.2 MB)

Operating Instructions Edition: AE
simovert
masterdrives
Motion Control / Vector Control
Frequency Converter (AC-AC) Compact Type A-D
08.2009
General
Contents
1
DEFINITIONS AND WARNINGS ..................................................................... 1-1
2
DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 2-1
3
TRANSPORT, STORAGE, UNPACKING........................................................ 3-1
4
FIRST START-UP ............................................................................................ 4-1
5
INSTALLATION ............................................................................................... 5-1
5.1
Installing the unit............................................................................................... 5-1
5.2
Installing the optional boards............................................................................ 5-4
6
INSTALLATION IN CONFORMANCE WITH EMC REGULATIONS .............. 6-1
7
CONNECTING-UP ........................................................................................... 7-1
7.1
Power connections ........................................................................................... 7-4
7.2
7.2.1
Control connections .......................................................................................... 7-8
Terminal strip X9 (only for units with a rated input voltage of
3-ph. 380 – 480 V with "safe stop" option) ..................................................... 7-12
7.3
Setting the fan transformer ............................................................................. 7-16
7.4
Fan fuses ........................................................................................................ 7-17
8
PARAMETERIZATION..................................................................................... 8-1
8.1
Parameter menus ............................................................................................. 8-1
8.2
Changeability of parameters............................................................................. 8-5
8.3
Parameter input via the PMU............................................................................ 8-6
8.4
Parameter input via the OP1S........................................................................ 8-10
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.1.1
8.5.1.2
Parameter input with DriveMonitor ................................................................. 8-14
Installation and connection ............................................................................. 8-14
Installation....................................................................................................... 8-14
Connection...................................................................................................... 8-14
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
0-1
General
08.2009
8.5.2
8.5.2.1
8.5.2.2
8.5.2.3
8.5.3
8.5.3.1
8.5.3.2
Establishing the connection between DriveMonitor and the device ............... 8-15
Setting the USS interface ............................................................................... 8-15
Starting the USS bus scan.............................................................................. 8-17
Creating a parameter set ................................................................................ 8-18
Parameterization............................................................................................. 8-20
Structure of the parameter lists, parameterization with DriveMonitor ............ 8-20
General diagnostics ........................................................................................ 8-25
8.6
Parameter reset to factory setting .................................................................. 8-26
8.7
Parameterizing by download .......................................................................... 8-27
8.8
Parameterizing with parameter modules ........................................................ 8-28
8.9
Motor lists........................................................................................................ 8-41
8.10
Motor identification.......................................................................................... 8-52
8.11
Complete parameterization............................................................................. 8-52
9
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 9-1
9.1
Replacing the fan.............................................................................................. 9-2
9.2
Replacing the PMU........................................................................................... 9-4
10
FORMING ....................................................................................................... 10-1
11
TECHNICAL DATA ........................................................................................ 11-1
11.1
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.1.3.1
11.1.3.2
11.1.3.3
11.1.4
11.1.5
Notes regarding water-cooled units................................................................ 11-8
Notes regarding installation and components ................................................ 11-9
Application .................................................................................................... 11-11
Coolant.......................................................................................................... 11-13
Definition of cooling water............................................................................. 11-13
Antifreeze additive ........................................................................................ 11-14
Corrosion protection agent ........................................................................... 11-16
Protection against condensation .................................................................. 11-17
Notes on materials........................................................................................ 11-18
12
FAULTS AND ALARMS ................................................................................ 12-1
12.1
Faults .............................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2
Alarms........................................................................................................... 12-13
12.3
Fatal errors (FF)............................................................................................ 12-36
13
ENVIRONMENTAL FRIENDLINESS............................................................. 13-1
0-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
1
Definitions and Warnings
Definitions and Warnings
Qualified personnel
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
a "Qualified person" is someone who is familiar with the installation,
mounting, start-up, operation and maintenance of the product. He or
she must have the following qualifications:
♦ Trained or authorized to energize, de-energize, ground and tag
circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
♦ Trained or authorized in the proper care and use of protective
equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
♦ Trained in rendering first aid.
DANGER
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death, serious injury and considerable damage to property.
WARNING
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death, serious injury and considerable damage to property.
CAUTION
used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.
NOTICE
NOTICE used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential
situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or
state.
NOTE
For the purpose of this documentation, "Note" indicates important
information about the product or about the respective part of the
documentation which is essential to highlight.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1-1
Definitions and Warnings
WARNING
08.2009
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during
operation.
Non-observance of the warnings can thus result in severe personal
injury or property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment
This personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warning and
maintenance procedures contained in this documentation.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on
correct transport, proper storage and installation as well as careful
operation and maintenance.
NOTE
This documentation does not purport to cover all details on all types of
the product, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in
connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems
arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes,
the matter should be referred to the local SIEMENS sales office.
The contents of this documentation shall not become part of or modify
any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales
contract contains the entire obligation of SIEMENS AG. The warranty
contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of
SIEMENS AG. Any statements contained herein do not create new
warranties or modify the existing warranty.
Proper use of Siemens products
WARNING
1-2
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in
the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and
components from other manufacturers are used, these must be
recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage,
installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are
required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any
problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be adhered to. The
information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Definitions and Warnings
Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)
CAUTION
The board contains components which can be destroyed by
electrostatic discharge. These components can be easily destroyed if
not carefully handled. If you have to handle electronic boards, please
observe the following:
Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary.
The human body must be electrically discharged before touching an
electronic board.
Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials - e.g.
plastic parts, insulated desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from
man-made fibers.
Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces.
Boards and components should only be stored and transported in
conductive packaging (e.g. metalized plastic boxes or metal
containers).
If the packing material is not conductive, the boards must be wrapped
with a conductive packaging material, e.g. conductive foam rubber or
household aluminum foil.
The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly shown again in the
following diagram:
♦ a = Conductive floor surface
♦ b = ESD table
♦ c = ESD shoes
♦ d = ESD overall
♦ e = ESD chain
♦ f = Cubicle ground connection
d
d
b
b
d
e
e
f
a
f
f
c
c
Sitting
Standing
Fig. 1-1
a
f
f
c
a
Standing / Sitting
ESD protective measures
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1-3
Definitions and Warnings
08.2009
Safety and Operating Instructions
for Drive Converters
(in conformity with the low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC)
1. General
4. Installation
In operation, drive converters, depending on their degree
of protection, m ay have liv e, uninsulated, and p ossibly
also moving or rotating parts, as well as hot surfaces.
The installation and cooling of the appliances sha ll be in
accordance w ith the specifications in the p
ertinent
documentation.
In case of inadmissible removal of the required covers, of
improper use, wrong installation or maloperation, there is
the danger of s erious personal injur y and dama ge to
property.
For further information, see documentation.
The d rive converters sha ll b e protected
against
excessive strains. In parti cular, no components must be
bent or isolating distances altered in
the co urse of
transportation or handling. No contact shall be made with
electronic components and contacts.
All operations serving tran
sport, installation and
commissioning as w ell as mainte nance are to be carried
out by skilled technical personnel (Observe IEC 60364
or CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IE C 60664
or DI N VDE01 10 and nation al accident pre vention
rules!).
Drive converte rs contain
electrostatic se nsitive
components which are liable to damage t
hrough
improper use. Electric com ponents must not be
mechanically da maged or destr oyed (potential health
risks).
5. Electrical connection
For the pu rposes of these basic
safety instr uctions,
"skilled technica l personnel " means persons w ho are
familiar w ith the installation, mounting, commissioning
and operation of the product and have the qualifications
needed for the performance of their functions.
When w orking on live drive converters, the applicable
national accident prevention rules (e.g. BGV A3) must be
complied with.
2. Intended use
Drive converters are com ponents designed for inclusion
in electrical installations or machinery.
In case of installation in machinery, commissioning of the
drive converter ( i.e. the starting of normal ope ration) is
prohibited until the machine ry has been p roved to
conform to the provisions of
the directive 98/37/EG
(Machinery Safe ty Directive - M SD). Account is to be
taken of EN 60204.
Commissioning (i.e. the starting of normal ope ration) is
admissible only where conformity with the EMC di rective
(89/336/EEC) has been established.
The drive converters meet the requirements of the low voltage directive 73/23/EEC.
They a re subject to the harmon ized standards of the
series EN 50178 / DIN VDE 01 60 in conjunction with
EN 60439-1 / DI N VDE 066 0 pa rt 500 and EN 60146 /
VDE 0558.
The technical da ta as well as info rmation concerning the
supply conditions shall be taken from the rating plate and
from the documentation and shall be strictly observed.
3. Transport, storage
The instructions for transport, s
shall be complied with.
torage and pr oper use
The climatic co nditions shall be in conformity with EN
50178.
The electrical
installation shall be carried out in
accordance with the relevant re quirements (e.g. crosssectional areas of conducto rs, f using, PE connection).
For further information, see documentation.
Instructions for the installation in accordance with EMC
requirements, like screening, earthing, location of filters
and w iring, a re contained in
the drive co
nverter
documentation. They must always be complied with, also
for drive convert ers bearing a C E marking. Observance
of the limit values required
b y EMC la w is th e
responsibility of the manufacture r of the installat ion or
machine.
6. Operation
Installations w hich include drive converters s
hall be
equipped with additional control and protective devices in
accordance with the releva
nt applicable safet
y
requirements, e. g. Act res pecting technical equipment,
accident prevention rules etc.
Changes to the drive
converters b y means of the
operating soft ware are
admissible.
After disconnection of the d
rive converter from the
voltage supply, live appliance par ts and po wer terminals
must not be touched immediately b ecause of possibly
energized capacitors. In this respect, the corres ponding
signs and markings on the
drive converter m ust be
respected.
During o peration, all covers a nd doo rs shall be kept
closed.
7. Maintenance and servicing
The manufacturer's documentation shall be followed.
Keep these safety instructions in a safe place!
1-4
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Definitions and Warnings
Residual risks of Power Drive Systems (PDS)
DANGER
The components for the controller and drive of a Power Drive System (PDS) are
authorized for industrial and commercial use in industrial networks. Their use in
public networks requires a different planning and/or additional measures.
It is only permissible to operate these components in enclosed housings or in
superordinate control cabinets and when all protective devices and protective
covers are used.
These components may only be handled by qualified and trained specialist
persons who are familiar with and observe all the safety instructions on the
components and in the relevant technical user documentation.
The machine manufacturer must take into account the following residual risks resulting from the
components for the controller and drive of a Power Drive System (PDS) when evaluating the
risk of his machine in accordance with the EC machinery guideline.
1. Undesired movements of driven machine components during commissioning, operation,
maintenance and repair, e.g. as a result of
• HW and/or SW errors in the sensors, controller, actuators and connection system
• Reaction times of the controller and the drive
• Operation and/or ambient conditions not compliant with the specification
• Errors in parameterization, programming, wiring and installation
• Use of radio units/mobile phones in the direct vicinity of the controller
• External influences/damage.
2. Extraordinary temperatures and emissions of light, noises, particles and gases, e.g. as a
result of
• Comp onent failure
• Software errors
• Operation and/or ambient conditions not compliant with the specification
• External influences/damage.
3. Dangerous contact voltages, e.g. as a result of
• Comp onent failure
• Influence upon electrostatic charging
• Induction of voltages in the case of moving motors
• Operation and/or ambient conditions not compliant with the specification
• Con densation/conductive contamination
• External influences/damage.
4. Operational electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields that may pose a risk to people
with a pacemaker, implants or metallic items if they are too close.
5. Release of pollutants and emissions if components are not operated or disposed of properly.
For additional information on the residual risks emanating from the components of the PDS,
please refer to the relevant chapters of the technical user documentation.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1-5
Definitions and Warnings
DANGER
08.2009
Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields (EMF) that occur during
operation can pose a danger to persons who are present in the direct
vicinity of the product − especially persons with pacemakers, implants,
or similar devices.
The relevant directives and standards must be observed by the
machine/plant operators and persons present in the vicinity of the
product. These are, for example, EMF Directive 2004/40/EEC and
standards EN 12198-1 to -3 pertinent to the European Economic Area
(EEA), as well as accident prevention code BGV 11 and the associated
rule BGR 11 "Electromagnetic fields" of the German employer's liability
accident insurance association pertinent to Germany.
These state that a hazard analysis must be drawn up for every
workplace, from which measures for reducing dangers and their impact
on persons are derived and applied, and exposure and danger zones
are defined and observed.
The safety information in the Storage, Transport, Installation,
Commissioning, Operation, Maintenance, Disassembly and Disposal
sections must also be taken into account.
1-6
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Description
2 Description
Range of application The frequency converter is a power electronics component for feeding
three-phase drives in the output range from 2.2 kW to 37 kW.
The unit can be operated from a three-phase system with a frequency
of 50/60 Hz and a voltage in the range of the values indicated on the
rating plate (380...480 V).
The three-phase current from the system is rectified, smoothed and fed
onto the capacitor DC link.
The inverter enables a variable output frequency between 0 Hz and a
maximum of 600 Hz to be generated from the DC current with the pulse
width modulation method (PWM).
The internal 24 V DC voltage is supplied through an integral power
supply unit from the DC link.
The unit is controlled by the internal closed-loop control electronics, the
functions are provided by the unit software.
Operator control is via the PMU operator control panel, the user-friendly
OP1S operator control panel, the terminal strip or via the serial
interfaces of the bus system. For this purpose, the unit is provided with
a number of interfaces and six slots for the use of optional boards.
Pulse encoders and analog tachometers can be used as encoders on
the motor.
Terminal strip
Optional
boards
PMU
Control electronics
==
24 V
==
Serial
interface
Internal
power
supply
U2/T1
U1/L1
Motor
V2/T2 connecW2/T3 tion
V1/L2
W1/L3
PE
Rectifier
Pre-charging
DC link
Inverter
PE2
C / L+
D/LPE1
Fig. 2-1
Circuit principle of the frequency converter
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
2-1
08.2009
3
Transport
Storage
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
The units and components are packed in the manufacturing plant
corresponding to that specified when ordered. A packing label is
located on the outside of the packaging. Please observe the
instructions on the packaging for transport, storage and professional
handling.
Vibrations and jolts must be avoided during transport. If the unit is
damaged, you must inform your shipping company immediately.
The units and components must be stored in clean, dry rooms.
Temperatures between -25 °C (-13 °F) and +70 °C (158 °F) are
permissible. Temperature fluctuations must not be more than 30 K per
hour.
CAUTION
If the storage period of one year is exceeded, the unit must be newly
formed. See Section ”Forming".
Unpacking
The packing consists of a wooden floor, cardboard and corrugated
cardboard. It can be disposed of in accordance with the local
regulations.
The units and components can be installed and commissioned after
they have been unpacked and checked to ensure that everything is
complete and that they are not damaged. Depending on their degree of
protection and type of construction, the units are mounted on a pallet
either with or without transport rails.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
3-1
08.2009
4 First
Unpack and check the
units
First Start-up
Start-up
After removing the packaging, check that the unit is
intact and undamaged. Only intact units may be started
up. Also check the unit to ensure it is complete and that
the optional boards are correctly equipped on the basis
of the package label (on the outside of the packaging).
Make sure that the techonology option is enabled if this
was included in the order.
See section
"Transport,
Storage,
Unpacking"
Mount the unit and
install optional boards
which have not yet
been fitted
Retrofit any optional boards which have not yet been
installed, if necessary. Then install the units taking into
account the requirements at the point of installation and
the EMC instructions.
See section
"Installation"
and "Installation
in Conformance
with EMC
Regulations"
Form the DC link
capacitors, if necessary
If the DC link of the unit was de-energized for more than
one year, you have to newly form the DC link capacitors
See section
"Forming"
Connect the protective
conductor, the power
cables or buses and, if
present, the ext. 24 V
supply
Beginning with the PE conductor connect the power
See section
cables or the DC link busbars and the 230 V~ for the fan.
"Connecting-up"
If configured, also connect the external 24 V incoming
and
power supply. Pay attention to EMC instructions when
"Installation in
laying the cables. Please do not at this stage connect
Conformance
any control, communication, encoder and motor cables
with EMC
(exception: cable for connecting up an OP1S, if
Regulations"
parameterization is to be effected via the OP1S).
Connect the control
cables, communication
cables, encoder cables
and motor cables
Please connect the remaining control, communication,
encoder and motor cables. Pay attention to the EMC
instructions when laying the cables.
Power up the external
24 V supply or the line
voltage
WARNING
See section
The device must be disconnected from
its voltage supplies (24 V DC electronics "Connecting-up"
and "Installation
supply and DC link / mains voltage)
before the control and encoder leads are in Conformance
with EMC
connected or disconnected!
Failure to observe this advice can result in Regulations"
encoder defects, which may in turn cause
uncontrolled axis movements.
After checking that the cabling has been correctly
connected and that it sits properly, power up the
external 24 V supply or the line voltage. After the
electronics power supply has been started, the unit
initializes itself. The action can take several seconds.
The drive status is subsequently shown on the PMU.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
111
4-1
First Start-up
08.2009
If necessary, carry out
parameter reset to
factory setting
Parameterizing by
download or with
parameter modules
If the PMU does not show status °005 after completion of
the unit initialization, or if the unit has already been
See section
parameterized before, you should carry out a parameter "Parameterization"
reset to factory setting.
See section
"Parameterization"
AAA
De-energize 24 V
supply or line voltage
Function test
siehe
After checking the unit and the cabling once more, power "Anschließen"
up the line voltage or DC link voltage and perform a
und "EMVfunction test according to your parameterization.
gerechter
Aufbau"
WARNING It must be ensured that no danger for
persons and equipment can occur by
energizing the power and the unit. It is
recommended not to couple the driven
machine until the function test has
been successfully completed.
Further start-up and parameterization according to
your specific requirements
4-2
Operating Instructions
siehe "Ans
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Installation
5 Inst
allation
5.1 Inst
alling the unit
WARNING
Safe converter operation requires that the equipment is mounted and
commissioned by qualified personnel taking into account the warning
information provided in these Operating Instructions.
The general and domestic installation and safety regulations for work
on electrical power equipment (e.g. VDE) must be observed as well as
the professional handling of tools and the use of personal protective
equipment.
Death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage could result if
these instructions are not followed.
NOTE
MASTERDRIVES components are designed in accordance with degree
of protection IP20 or IPXXB in accordance with EN 60529 and as opentype devices to UL 50, thus providing protection against electrical
shocks. In order to also ensure protection against mechanical and
climatic stresses the components have to be operated in
housings/cabinets/rooms that are designed according to the
requirements of’ EN 60529 and classified as enclosure type to UL 50.
Clearances
When positioning the units, it must be observed that the mains
connection is located at the top section of the unit and the motor
connection at the lower section of the unit.
The units can be mounted flush with each other.
When mounting in switch cabinets, you must leave a clearance at the
top and the bottom of the units for cooling.
Please refer to the dimension drawings on the following pages
regarding these minimum clearances.
When mounting in switch cabinets, the cabinet cooling must be
dimensioned according to the dissipated power. Please refer to the
Technical Data in this regard.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-1
Installation
08.2009
Requirements at the
point of installation
♦ Forei gn particles
The units must be protected against the ingress of foreign particles
as otherwise their function and operational safety cannot be
ensured.
♦ Dust, gases, vapors
Equipment rooms must be dry and dust-free. Ambient and cooling
air must not contain any electrically conductive gases, vapors and
dusts which could diminish the functionality. If necessary, filters
should be used or other corrective measures taken.
♦ Cooli ng air
The ambient climate of the units must not exceed the values of DIN
IEC 721-3-3 class 3K3. For cooling air temperatures of more than
40°C (104°F) and installation altitudes higher than 1000 m, derating
is required.
NOTICE
Water cooling
When using water-cooled MASTERDRIVES, please take note that no
higher than 1 bar operating pressures are permitted!
If the system is to be operated at higher pressure, the pressure on each
unit must be reduced to 1 bar initial pressure.
100 mm
Mounting surface
250 mm
Cooling air
Fig. 5-1
5-2
Minimum clearances for cooling air requirement
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Installation
Mounting
The unit is mounted directly to a mounting surface, for which you
require the following:
♦ G-type mounting rail according to EN50035 with screws for fixing at
the top
♦ One M6 screw for types A to C, two M6 screws for type D, for fixing
at the bottom
♦ Dimension drawing for types A, B and for types C, D.
Mounting surface
425 mm
425 mm
G-type rail according to EN50035
Cutouts for
M6 screws
45 mm
90 mm
350 mm
Type A
Side view
67.5 mm
135 mm
Type B
Front view (without front panel)
Fig. 5-2
Dimension drawings for installation of types A, B
Mounting surface
600 mm
600 mm
G-type rail according to EN50035
Cutouts for
M6 screws
90 mm
180 mm
350 mm
Type C
Side view
45 mm
180 mm
270 mm
Type D
Front view (without front panel)
Fig. 5-3
Dimension drawings for installation of types C, D
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-3
Installation
5.2
WARNING
08.2009
Installing the optional boards
The boards may only be replaced by qualified personnel.
It is not permitted to withdraw or insert the boards under voltage.
Slots
A maximum of six slots are available in the electronics box of the unit
for installing optional boards. The slots are designated with the letters A
to G. Slot B is not provided in the electronics box. It is used in units of
the Compact PLUS type of construction.
If you wish to use slots D to G, you will additionally require the
following:
♦ Bus expansion LBA (Local Bus Adapter), which is used for mounting
the CU board and up to two adaption boards, and
♦ An adaption board (ADB - Adaption Board) on which up to two
optional boards can be mounted.
The slots are situated at the following positions:
♦ Slot A
CU board
Position: top
♦ Slot C
CU board
Position: bottom
♦ Slot D
Adaption board at mounting position 2
Position: top
♦ Slot E
Adaption board at mounting position 2
Position: bottom
♦ Slot F
Adaption board at mounting position 3
Position: top
♦ Slot G Adaption board at mounting position 3
Position: bottom
Mounting position 1
Mounting position 3
Mounting position 2
Fig. 5-4
5-4
Position of the slots in the electronics box
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Installation
NOTE
Technology boards (T100, T300, T400, TSY) must always be installed
in slot 2.
Mounting positions 2 and 3 can also be used for communication boards
SCB1 and SCB2.
DANGER
The unit has hazardous voltage levels up to 5 minutes after it has been
powered down due to the DC link capacitors. The unit or the DC link
terminals must not be worked on until at least after this delay time.
CAUTION
The optional boards contain components which could be damaged by
electrostatic discharge. These components can be very easily
destroyed if not handled with caution. You must observe the ESD
cautionary measures when handling these boards.
Disconnecting the unit from the supply
DANGER
Preparing
installation
Installing the
optional board
NOTE
Disconnect the unit from the incoming power supply (AC or DC supply)
and de-energize the unit. Remove the 24 V voltage supply for the
electronics. Remove all connecting cables.
Open the front panel.
Remove the CU board or the adaption board from the electronics box
as follows:
♦ Disconnect the connecting cables to the CU board or to the optional
boards.
♦ Undo the fixing screws on the handles above and below the CU
board or the adaption board.
♦ Pull the CU board or the adaption board out of the electronics box
using the handles.
♦ Place the CU board or the adaption board on a grounded working
surface.
Insert the optional board from the right onto the 64-pole system
connector on the CU board or on the adaption board. The view shows
the installed state.
Screw the optional board tight at the fixing points in the front section of
the optional board using the two screws attached.
The optional board must be pressed tightly onto the plug connector, it is
not sufficient to simply tighten the screws!
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-5
Installation
08.2009
Re-installing the unit Re-install the CU board or the adaption board in the electronics box as
follows:
♦ Insert the CU board into mounting position 1 and the adaption board
into mounting position 2 or 3.
NOTE
Mounting position 3 can be used only if an adaption board or a
technology board is already installed in mounting position 2.
Boards should first be installed in mounting position 2, before mounting
position 3 is used.
♦ Secure the CU board/adaption board at the handles with the fixing
screws.
Re-connect the previously removed connections.
Check that all the connecting cables and the shield sit properly and are
in the correct position.
5-6
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
6
Rule 1
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
Installation in Conformance with EMC
Regulations
Basic EMC rules
Rules 1 to 13 are generally applicable. Rules 14 to 20 are particularly
important for limiting noise emission.
All of the metal cabinet parts must be connected through the largest
possible surface areas (not paint on paint). If required, use serrated
washers. The cabinet door must be connected to the cabinet through
grounding straps which must be kept as short as possible.
NOTE
Grounding installations/machines is essentially a protective measure.
However, in the case of drive systems, this also has an influence on the
noise emission and noise immunity. A system can either be grounded
in a star configuration or each component grounded separately.
Preference should be given to the latter grounding system in the case
of drive systems, i.e. all parts of the installation to be grounded are
connected through their surface or in a mesh pattern.
Rule 2
Signal cables and power cables must be routed separately (to eliminate
coupled-in noise). Minimum clearance: 20 cm. Provide partitions
between power cables and signal cables. The partitions must be
grounded at several points along their length.
Contactors, relays, solenoid valves, electromechanical operating hours
counters, etc. in the cabinet must be provided with quenching elements,
for example, RC elements, diodes, varistors. These quenching devices
must be connected directly at the coil.
Non-shielded cables associated with the same circuit (outgoing and
incoming conductor) must be twisted, or the surface between the
outgoing and incoming conductors kept as small as possible in order to
prevent unnecessary coupling effects.
Eliminate any unnecessary cable lengths to keep coupling
capacitances and inductances low.
Connect the reserve cables/conductors to ground at both ends to
achieve an additional shielding effect.
In general, it is possible to reduce the noise being coupled-in by routing
cables close to grounded cabinet panels. Therefore, wiring should be
routed as close as possible to the cabinet housing and the mounting
panels and not freely through the cabinet. The same applies for reserve
cables/conductors.
Tachometers, encoders or resolvers must be connected through a
shielded cable. The shield must be connected to the tachometer,
encoder or resolver and at the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES through a
large surface area. The shield must not be interrupted, e.g. using
intermediate terminals. Pre-assembled cables with multiple shields
should be used for encoders and resolvers (see Catalog DA65).
Rule 3
Rule 4
Rule 5
Rule 6
Rule 7
Rule 8
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
6-1
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
Rule 9
Rule 10
Rule 11
Rule 12
Rule 13
Rule 14
6-2
08.2009
The cable shields of digital signal cables must be connected to ground
at both ends (transmitter and receiver) through the largest possible
surface area. If the equipotential bonding is poor between the shield
connections, an additional equipotential bonding conductor with at least
10 mm² must be connected in parallel to the shield, to reduce the shield
current. Generally, the shields can be connected to ground (= cabinet
housing) in several places. The shields can also be connected to
ground at several locations, even outside the cabinet.
Foil-type shields are not to be favoured. They do not shield as well as
braided shields; they are poorer by a factor of at least 5.
The cable shields of analog signal cables can be connected to ground
at both ends if the equipotential bonding is good. Good equipotential
bonding is achieved if Rule 1 is observed.
If low-frequency noise occurs on analog cables, for example:
speed/measured value fluctuations as a result of equalizing currents
(hum), the shields are only connected for analog signals at one end at
the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES. The other end of the shield should
be grounded through a capacitor (e.g. 10 nF/100 V type MKT).
However, the shield is still connected at both ends to ground for high
frequency as a result of the capacitor.
If possible, the signal cables should only enter the cabinet at one side.
If SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES are operated from an external 24 V
power supply, this power supply must not feed several consumers
separately installed in various cabinets (hum can be coupled-in!). The
optimum solution is for each SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVE to have its
own power supply.
Prevent noise from being coupled-in through the supply.
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES and automation units/control electronics
should be connected-up to different supply networks. If there is only
one common network, the automation units/control electronics have to
be de-coupled from the supply using an isolating transformer.
The use of a radio interference suppression filter is obligatory to
maintain limit value class "First environment" or "Second environment",
even if sinusoidal filters or dv/dt filters are installed between the motor
and SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES.
Whether an additional filter has to be installed for further consumers,
depends on the control used and the wiring of the remaining cabinet.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Rule 15
Rule 16
Rule 17
Rule 18
Rule 19
Rule 20
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
A noise suppression filter should always be placed close to the fault
source. The filter must be connected to the cabinet housing, mounting
panel, etc. through a large surface area. A bare metal mounting panel
(e.g. manufactured from stainless steel, galvanized steel) is best, as
electrical contact is established through the entire mounting surface. If
the mounting panel is painted, the paint has to be removed at the screw
mounting points for the frequency converter and the noise suppression
filter to ensure good electrical contact.
The incoming and outgoing cables of the radio interference suppression
filter have to be spatially separated/isolated.
In order to limit the noise emitted, all variable-speed motors have to be
connected-up using shielded cables, with the shields being connected
to the respective housings at both ends in a low-inductive manner
(through the largest possible surface area). The motor feeder cables
also have to be shielded inside the cabinet or at least shielded using
grounded partitions. Suitable motor feeder cable e.g. Siemens
PROTOFLEX-EMV-CY (4 x 1.5 mm2 ... 4 x 120 mm2) with Cu shield.
Cables with steel shields are unsuitable.
A suitable PG gland with shield connection can be used at the motor to
connect the shield. It should also be ensured that there is a lowimpedance connection between the motor terminal box and the motor
housing. If required, connect-up using an additional grounding
conductor. Do not use plastic motor terminal boxes!
A line reactor has to be installed between the radio interference
suppression filter and the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES.
The line supply cable has to be spatially separated from the motor
feeder cables, e.g. by grounded partitions.
The shield between the motor and SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES must
not be interrupted by the installation of components such as output
reactors, sinusoidal filters, dv/dt filters, fuses, contactors. The
components must be mounted on a mounting panel which
simultaneously serves as the shield connection for the incoming and
outgoing motor cables. Grounded partitions may be necessary to shield
the components.
In order to limit the radio interference (especially for limit value class
"First environment "), in addition to the line supply cable, all cables
externally connected to the cabinet must be shielded.
Examples of these basic rules:
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
6-3
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
Cabinet 1
08.2009
Cabinet 2
Cabinet 3
Netz
Rule
13
*) Keep the radio interference
suppression filters away from
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
air discharge duct, e.g. by
mounting at another level
Netz
Rule
17
~
Rule
14
=
*)
*)
~
=
Rule 12
Control
Rule
9, 10
Fig. 3.5.3
Rule
4, 5, 7
Fig. 3.5.6
Rule
19
Fig 3.5.4
Rule 2
Z
Grounding rail
Fig. 3.5.2
Rule 16
Z
Rule 8
Fig. 6-1
Shield connection
Examples for applying the basic EMC rules
Connect at both ends
to the cabinet housing
through the largest
possible surface area!
Shield rail
Cable retaining bar
Fig. 6-2
6-4
Connecting the motor cable shield where the cable enters the cabinet
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
PG gland
Motor terminal box
Fig. 6-3
Shield connection at the motor
The shield can be connected through a PG or metric gland (nickelplated brass) with a strain relief bar. Thus, the degree of protection IP
20 can be achieved.
For higher degrees of protection (up to IP 68), there are special PG
glands with shield connection, e.g.:
♦ SKINDICHT SHVE, Messrs. Lapp, Stuttgart
♦ UNI IRIS Dicht or UNI EMV Dicht, Messrs. Pflitsch, Hückeswagen
It is not permissible to use plastic motor terminal boxes!
Shield
clamp
Cable connector
Fig. 6-4
Connecting the signal cable shields for SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
6-5
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
08.2009
♦ Every SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES has shield
clamps to connect the signal
cable shields.
♦ For chassis units (sizes ≥ E),
the shields can be additionally
connected using cable
connectors at the shield
connecting locations.
Cable connector
Serrated bar
Connect serrated bars
at both ends to the
cabinet housing
through the largest
possible surface area!
Fig. 6-5
Intermediate terminals
Connecting signal cable shields in the cabinet
Wherever possible, intermediate terminals should not be used as they
reduce the shielding effect!
6-6
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
7
DANGER
Connecting-up
Connecting-up
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES units are operated at high voltages.
The equipment must be in a no-voltage condition (disconnected from
the supply) before any work is carried out!
Only professionally trained, qualified personnel must work on or with
the units.
Death, severe bodily injury or significant property damage could occur if
these warning instructions are not observed.
Only create electrical connections if the unit is in a no-voltage condition!
Hazardous voltages are still present in the unit up to 5 minutes after it
has been powered down due to the DC link capacitors. Thus, the
appropriate delay time must be observed before working on the unit or
on the DC link terminals.
The power terminals and control terminals can still be live even when
the motor is stationary.
If the DC link voltage is supplied centrally, the converters must be
reliably isolated from the DC link voltage!
When working on an opened unit, it should be observed that live
components (at hazardous voltage levels) can be touched (shock
hazard).
The user is responsible that all the units are installed and connected-up
according to recognized regulations in that particular country as well as
other regionally valid regulations. Cable dimensioning, fusing,
grounding, shutdown, isolation and overcurrent protection should be
particularly observed.
NOTICE
Due to their physical characteristics, converters can produce DC
residual currents. If a residual-current protective device (residualcurrent-operated circuit-breaker) is used on the supply side of the
AC/AC converter - or of the rectifier unit in the case of multi-motor
drives - for protective purposes in case of indirect touching, only type B
to IEC 755 is permitted. Due to radio-interference suppression
capacitors and as a result of the parasitic capacity of the motor cable,
leakage currents flow which can lead to undesired responding of the
residual-current protective device.
In general, operation without faults is possible only under the following
conditions:
♦ Rated residual current of the residual-current protective
device ≥ 300 mA
♦ Short motor cables (l < 20 m)
♦ No radio-interference suppression filter built in
• Only one converter connected per residual-current protective device
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-1
Connecting-up
NOTE
08.2009
The converters are suitable for connecting to networks with an earthed
star point (TN networks and TT networks).
For connection to networks with a star point that is not earthed (IT
networks) or networks with an earthed outer conductor, converters with
option L20 are necessary.
The converters are designed for overvoltage category III in accordance
with IEC 60664-1.
Safe Stop,
aux. contactor,
external DC24 V
supply X9
DC link
connection X3
Mains connection X1
U 1 V1 W1 PE1 C
D
L1 L2 L3
L-
L+
Mounting pos. 3
Mounting pos. 2
Optional board
in Slot A
PMU connection X108
S1
Mount.pos. 1 (CUMC)
X101
X103
Encoder card in slot C
S2
Motor connection X2
Shield connections
for control cables
T1 T2 T3
U2 V2 W2 PE2
Cable connecting
adapter for EMC
(option)
Fig. 7-1
7-2
Connection overview of types A - C
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Connecting-up
Safe Stop,
aux. contactor,
external DC24 V
supply X9
DC link
connection X3
Mains connection X1
-F101
-F102
U1
V1 W1 PE1
C
D
Fan fuses
L1 L2
L+ L-
L3
Mount. pos. 1 (CUMC)
Optional board
in slot A
PMU connection X108
S1
Mount. pos. 3
Mount. pos. 2
X101
X103
Encoder card in slot C
S2
T1
T2
T3
Motor connection X2
U2 V2 W2 PE2
Adjustment of
fan voltage
Shield connections
for control cables
Cable connecting
adapter for EMC
(option)
Fig. 7-2
NOTE
Connection overview of type D
A 230 V fan is installed in drive converters, type of construction D. The
fan is supplied via the fan transformer. To supply the fan with 230 V,
the primary side of the fan transformer must be adjusted to the existing
line voltage via the plug connector (Connection 2). (For supply voltage
range, see terminal).
Transformer terminals
Connection 2
Connection 1
X2
0V
Fantransformer
Fig. 7-3
Transformer location (only for converters, type of construction D)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-3
Connecting-up
7.1
WARNING
08.2009
Power connections
Protective conductor
The protective conductor must be connected up both on the mains side
and on the motor side.
On account of leakage current through the interference-suppression
capacitors the following must be observed as per EN 50178
• A minimum cross-section of 10 mm2 Cu must be used or
• If supply connections with cross-sections less than 10 mm2 are
used, two protective conductors have to be connected up. The
cross-section of each of the protective conductors corresponds to
the cross-section of an outer conductor.
NOTE
7-4
If the unit is mounted on a grounded mounting surface via a conductive
connection, the protective conductor cross section can be the same as
that of the phase conductor. The function of the second protective
conductor is afforded by the grounded mounting surface.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Connecting-up
Order No. Rated
input
6SE70...
Line side
cross-section
current VDE
AWG
Motor side
Recommended fuse
gR (SITOR) gL NH
Line
North America
reactor
cross-section
VDE
AWG
[A]
3NE
[A]
3NA1)
16
16
---
10
3803 AJT,LPJ 600
8
3200-1US
1.5
16
1.5
16
16 1813-0
16
3805 AJT,LPJ 600
12
3400-2US
1.5
16
2.5
14
16 1813-0
16
3805 AJT,LPJ 600
15
3400-1US
1.5
16
25
3810 AJT,LPJ 600
17.5
3500-0US
2.5
14
25
3810 AJT,LPJ 600
25
3600-4US
2.5
14
35
3814 AJT,LPJ 600
35
3600-5US
10
6
40 1802-0
50
3820 AJT,LPJ 600
45
3700-2US
10
6
4
50 1817-0
63
3822 AJT,LPJ 600
50
3700-5US
16
4
25
2
63 1818-0
63
3822 AJT,LPJ 600
60
3800-2US
16
4
59.0
25
2
80 1820-0 100
3830 AJT,LPJ 600
80
3800-7US
16
4
72.0
50
00
80 1820-0 100
3830 AJT,LPJ 600
90
3900-2US
25
2
[A]
[mm²]
16-1EA 1
6.1
1.5
18-0EA 1
8.0
21-0EA 1
10.2
21-3EB 1
13.2
2.5
14
20 1814-0
21-8EB 1
17.5
4
10
25 1815-0
22-6EC 1
25.5
10
6
35 1803-0
23-4EC 1
34.0
16
4
23-8ED 1
37.5
16
24-7ED 1
47.0
26-0ED 1
27-2ED 1
Type
[V]
[A]
4EP
[mm²]
AWG: American Wire Gauge
1): The indicated fuses are only valid for converters with AC 3-phase 500 V
input voltage. For converter with a higher input voltage, fuses up to 660 V
must be used. The order numbers of these fuses can be obtained by adding
on the corresponding 500 V fuse “-6”.
e.g.:
for 500 V
3NA3803
for 660 V
3NA3803-6
= 5 corresponds to MASTERDRIVES Motion Control
= 7 corresponds to MASTERDRIVES Motion Control Performance 2
Table 7-1
Cross-sections, fuses
NOTE
The connection cross-sections are determined for copper cables at
40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature and cables with a permissible
operating temperature at the conductor of 70 °C (installation type C in
accordance with DIN VDE 0298-4 / 08.03).
WARNING
gL fuses only provide reliable protection to the cables, and not to the
semiconductors.
If the units are connected to the supply system without a main contactor
which can interrupt the incoming supply in the event of a fault, the unit
may suffer further damage.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-5
Connecting-up
08.2009
Maximum
connectable crosssections, screw
connection,
tightening torque
Type Orde
Finely-stranded
Multi-stranded,
solid
Tightening
torque
mm²
AWG
mm²
AWG
Nm
A
6SE702_-__A__
1.5 to 10
12 to 6
2.5 to 16
12 to 4
2
B
6SE702_-__B__
1.5 to 10
12 to 6
2.5 to 16
12 to 4
2
C
6SE702_-__C__
4 to 16
10 to 4
10 to 25
6 to 2
2
D
6SE702_-__D__
10 to 35
6 to 2
10 to 50
6 to 0
3.5
Table 7-2
X1 – Mains
connection, DC link
connection
r number
Maximum connectable cross-sections
The mains and DC link connections are located on the top section of
the unit on a joint terminal block.
Terminal De
signation
Meaning
Range
1
U1 / L1
Phase U1 / L1
3AC 380 - 480 V
2
V1 / L2
Phase V1 / L2
3AC 380 - 480 V
3AC 380 - 480 V
U1 V1 W1 PE1 C
D
3
W1 / L3
Phase W1 / L3
L1 L2 L3
L-
4
PE1
Protective conductor
connection
5
C / L+
DC link voltage +
DC 510 - 650 V
6
D / L-
DC link voltage -
DC 510 - 650 V
L+
Terminal 1 is at the left when installed.
Table 7-3
X2 – Motor
connection
T1 T2 T3
U2 V2 W2 PE2
Mains, DC link connection
The motor connection is located at the bottom of the unit.
Terminal De
signation
Meaning
Range
1
U2 / T1
Phase U2 / T1
3AC 0 - 480 V
2
V2 / T2
Phase V2 / T2
3AC 0 - 480 V
3
W2 / T3
Phase W2 / T3
3AC 0 - 480 V
4
PE2
Protective conductor
connection
Terminal 1 is at the left when installed.
Table 7-4
7-6
Motor connection
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Connecting-up
X9 - External DC
24 V supply, main
contactor control
The 9-pole terminal strip is used for connecting up to a 24 V voltage
supply and for connecting up a main or bypass contactor.
The voltage supply is required if the converter is connected up via a
main or bypass contactor.
The connections for the contactor control are floating.
Terminal De
signation
Meaning
Range
DC24 V ≤ 2.5 A
1
+24 V (in)
24 V voltage supply
2
0V
(DC 22 V … 30 V)
3
3
Not connected
Not used
4
4
Not connected
Not used
5
Not connected
Not used
6
Not connected
Not used
7
Main contactor control
Main contactor control
8
Not connected
Not used
9
Main contactor control
Main contactor control
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
DC 30 V
0.5 A
Connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
Terminal 1 is at the front when installed.
Table 7-5
Connection of external aux. voltage supply DC24 V, main contactor
control
The unit has a current drain of 2 A from the 24 V voltage supply which
will increase to max. 4 A if optional cards are inserted.
Connections on
optional boards
Each optional board is provided with additional connections which are
necessary for the function of the optional board - encoder connections,
bus connections or additional terminals.
You will find detailed information on the connections of the optional
boards in the corresponding documentation.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-7
Connecting-up
7.2
08.2009
Control connections
Standard
connections
In the basic version, the unit has the following control connections on
the CUMC control board:
♦ Serial interface (RS232 / RS485) for PC or OP1S (interface 1)
♦ One serial interface (USS bus, RS485) (interface 2)
♦ One control terminal strip with digital and analog inputs and outputs.
WARNING
Before the control cables and encoder cables are connected or
disconnected, the unit must be disconnected from the supply (24 V
electronic power supply and DC link/line voltage)!
If this measure is not observed, this can result in defects on the
encoder. A defective encoder can cause uncontrolled axis movements.
WARNING
The external 24 V infeed and all circuits connected to the control
terminals must meet the requirements for safety separation as
stipulated in EN 50178 (PELV circuit = Protective Extra Low Voltage).
NOTE
The earth of the control connections is connected inside the unit to the
PE conductor (earth) (PELV current circuit).
X108
S1
X101
X103
S2
Fig. 7-4
7-8
View of the CUMC
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Connecting-up
X101
P24V
2
M24
Out
In
Out
4
Out/In
5V
6
4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs
7
24V
8
24V
Inputs
5V
In
5V
In
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
9
A
D
10
11
Analog output
D
23
24
Serial interface 2
USS (RS485)
Serial interface 1
USS (RS485)
BOOT
A
12
X103
10 V output
X300
Out
In
RS485N
RS232 TxD
P5V
Analog input
PMU
Out
In
24V
Digital inputs
Slot G
Out
In
In
5
Outputs
Slot D
Slot E
In
Bidirectional
digital inputs
and outputs
Slot C
Slot F
3
Out
Slot A
Microcontroller
25
26
27
28
≥1
P10V
N10V
RS485P
RS485N
UART
RS485P
RS485N
ON OFF
S2
+5V
Switch for USS bus termination
Fig. 7-5
BOOT
RS485P
RS232 RxD
n.c.
Aux. current
supply
Controller
1
ON OFF
S1
+5V
Switch for USS bus termination
Overview of the standard connections
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-9
Connecting-up
X101 - Control
terminal strip
08.2009
The following connections are provided on the control terminal strip:
♦ 4 optionally parameterizable digital inputs and outputs
♦ 2 digital inputs
♦ 1 analog input
♦ 1 analog output
♦ 24 V aux. voltage supply (max. 150 mA, output only!) for the inputs
and outputs
WARNING
If the digital inputs are supplied from an external 24 V supply, this must
be referenced to frame X101.2. Terminal X101.1 (P24 AUX) may not
be connected with the 24V supply.
Terminal De
signation
Meaning
Range
1
P24 AUX
Aux. voltage supply
DC 24 V / 150 mA
2
M24 AUX
Reference potential
0V
3
DIO1
Digital input/output 1
24 V, 10 mA / 20 mA
4
DIO2
Digital input/output 2
24 V, 10 mA / 20 mA
5
DIO3
Digital input/output 3
24 V, 10 mA / 20 mA
6
DIO4
Digital input/output 4
24 V, 10 mA / 20 mA
7
DI5
Digital input 5
24 V, 10 mA
8
DI6
Digital input 6
24 V, 10 mA
9
AI+
Analog input +
11 bit + sign
differential input:
10
AI−
Analog input −
± 10 V / Ri = 40 kΩ
11
AO
Analog output
8 bit + sign
± 10 V, 5 mA
12
M AO
Ground analog output
Connectable cross-section: 0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Terminal 1 is at the top when installed.
Table 7-6
Control terminal strip
In the case of digital inputs, levels below 3 V are interpreted as low and
levels above 13 V as high.
NOTE
7-10
The outputs of the customer terminal can assume undefined states
during power up/board initialization/execution time overflow, unless a
specific response has been expressly defined (and implemented in the
hardware) for these periods.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Connecting-up
X103 - 10 V voltage
output, SCom1,
SCom2
The following connections are provided on the control terminal strip:
♦ 10 V aux. voltage (max. 5 mA) for the supply of external
potentiometers
♦ 2 serial interfaces SCom1 and SCom2 (USS / RS485)
Terminal De
signation
Meaning
Range
23
P10 V
+10 V supply for ext.
potentiometer
+10 V ±1.3 %,
Imax = 5 mA
24
N10 V
-10 V supply for ext.
potentiometer
-10 V ±1.3 %,
Imax = 5 mA
25
RS485 P (SST2)
USS bus connection SCom2
RS485
26
RS485 N (SST2)
USS bus connection SCom2
RS485
27
RS485 P (SST1)
USS bus connection SCom1
RS485
28
RS485 N (SST1)
USS bus connection SCom1
RS485
Connectable cross-section: 0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
The terminals 23 and 24 are short-circuit proof.
Terminal 23 is at the top when installed.
Table 7-7
X300 - Serial
interface
Control terminal strip X103
Either an OP1S or a PC can be connected up via the 9-pole SUB D
socket.
The 9-pole SUB D socket is internally coupled with the USS bus, with
the result that it is possible to exchange data with further converters
and inverters which are linked via the USS bus.
Pin Na
1
5
9
6
me
Range
1
n.c.
Not connected
2
RS232 RxD
Receive data via RS232
RS232
3
RS485 P
Data via RS485
RS485
4
Boot
Control signal for software update
Digital signal, low active
5
M5V
Reference potential to P5V
0V
6
P5V
5 V aux. voltage supply
+5 V, Imax = 200 mA
7
RS232 TxD
Transmit data via RS232
RS232
8
RS485 N
Data via RS485
RS485
9
M_RS232/485
Digital ground (choked)
Table 7-8
Switch settings
Meaning
Serial interface X300
Switch
Meaning
S1
SCom1 (X300): Bus terminating resistor
•
open
•
Resistor open
•
closed
•
Resistor closed
S2
SCom2 (X101/10,11): Bus terminating resistor
•
open
•
Resistor open
•
closed
•
Resistor closed
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-11
Connecting-up
08.2009
7.2.1
Terminal strip X9 (only for units with a rated input voltage of
3-ph. 380 – 480 V with "safe stop" option)
X9 - External
DC 24 V supply,
"Safe STOP",
main contactor
control
The 9-pole terminal strip is used for connecting up a 24 V voltage
supply and for connecting up a main or bypass contactor and for the
"Safe STOP" function.
The voltage supply is required if the inverter is connected up via a main
or bypass contactor.
The connections for the contactor control are floating.
The “Safe STOP” function ensures that no rotating field can occur at
the motor terminals, i.e. the motor cannot rotate. By opening the jumper
between terminals X9.5 and X9.6 (through an external contact), the
"Safe STOP" function is activated. The inverter is delivered with
jumpered terminals X9.5 and X9.6.
Terminal De
1
2
signation
Description
Range
DC 24 V ≤ 2.5 A
1
+24 V (in)
24 V voltage supply
(DC 22 V ... 30 V)
2
0V
3
3
Contact 1
"Safe STOP" checkback
DC 30 V
4
4
Contact 2
"Safe STOP" checkback
1A
5
P24 DC
Supply voltage "safe stop"
DC 24 V /
30 mA
6
Control input
"safe stop"
Rated resistance of field coil
≥ 823 Ω ± 10 % at 20 °C
DC 20 - 30 V
max. operating
frequency: 6/min
7
Main contactor
control
Main contactor control
DC 30 V
8
n.c.
Not connected
0.5 A
9
Main contactor
control
Main contactor control
5
6
7
8
9
Connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Table 7-9
WARNING
7-12
Connection of external aux. voltage supply DC 24 V, safe stop, main
contactor control
The power terminals may still be live even if the "Safe STOP" function
is activated!
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Connecting-up
The field coil of the safety relay is connected at one end to the
grounded electronics frame. When the field coil is supplied via an
external 24 V supply, its negative pole must be connected to ground
potential. The external 24 V supply must comply with the requirements
for PELV circuits to EN 50178 (DIN VDE 0160).
In the shipped state, a jumper is inserted between terminals 5 and 6.
The jumper must be removed before the "SAFE STOP" function can be
used and an external control for selecting the function connected.
If the safety relay is supplied via the internal supply at X9:5, the
external 24 V supply must deliver at least 22 V at terminal X9:1/2 to
ensure that the relay picks up reliably (internal voltage drop).
Terminal strip
- X9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
P24
electronic
P15
Optocoupler /
fibre optics
supply
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-13
Connecting-up
08.2009
The checkback contacts of the safety relay are capable of at least
100,000 switching cycles at the specified load (30 V DC / 1 A). The
mechanical service life is about 106 switching cycles. The safety relay is
an important component in ensuring reliability and availability of the
machine. For this reason, the pcb with the safety relay must be
replaced in the case of malfunction. In this case, the unit must be
returned for repair or replaced. Function checks must be carried out at
regular intervals, which must be defined in compliance with Employer's
Liability Insurance Regulation BGV A3 §39, para. 3. Accordingly,
function checks must be performed as required by the relevant service
conditions, but at least once a year and additionally after initial
commissioning and any modification and/or maintenance work.
P24
Request protective
device enable
open
S2
K2
-Y1
Emerg.
stop
closed
-S1
Mains
K2
Main switch
A1
Y10 Y11 Y12
Y21 Y22
13
23
31
47
57
A1
3TK2828
Y33 Y34
PE
A
2
Y10 Y11 Y12
Y21 Y22
13
23
31
47
3TK2828
14
24
32
48
58
Y33 Y34
Reset
PE
A
2
K1
14
24
32
48
58
S3
K1
-Q1
57
X9
3
4
5
6
U1 V1 W1
P2
4
PV
M
X101
X
Y
OFF3
n=0
-Cu control
board
-K1
-K2
OFF1
SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES
U2 V2 W2
M
X: Binary input, connect to OFF3
e. g. X101.8 --> P558 = 21
Y: Binary output, connect to "Comparison value
reached"
e. g. X101.6 --> P654 = 120; P796 = 0 (comparison value)
Fig. 7-6
7-14
3
M
Sample application of "safe stop" function with contactor safety
combination for monitoring a moving protective device in Safety Category
3 to EN 954-1
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Connecting-up
All external cables relevant to the safety function are protected, e.g.
installed in cable ducts, to preclude the possibility of short circuits.
Cables must be installed in compliance with the requirements of
EN 60204-1, Section 14.
In the circuit shown in Fig. 7-6, the tumbler does not release the moving
protective device until the drive has stopped. It may be possible to omit
the tumbler if the risk assessment of the machine deems this to be
safe. In this case, the NC contact of the protective device is connected
directly to terminals Y11 and Y12 and electromagnet Y1 is omitted.
Binary input X is negated with signal "OFF3", i.e. at 24 V, the converter
decelerates the motor to zero speed along the parameterized
deceleration ramp. The converter signals zero speed via binary output
Y, thus energizing relay K2.
Once the motor has stopped, the safety relay in the converter is opened
and the coil of main contactor K1 remains at 24 V via the checkback
contact. If contacts in the safety relay are sticking, the checkback
contacts do not close and the safety combination on the right
deenergizes main contactor K1 via delayed contacts 47/48 when the
set delay period expires.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-15
Connecting-up
7.3
08.2009
Setting the fan transformer
NOTICE
The fan for cooling the unit is supplied with 230 V by the fan
transformer. The primary side of the fan transformer has several
tappings and has to be connected up according to the current line
voltage. In the default setting the fan transformer is set for the highest
permissible line voltage.
Connecting the fan
transformer
The following table shows how the existing line voltage is assigned for
adjustment by the fan transformer.
Ra
ted input voltage
3 AC 380 V (- 15 %) to 480 V (+ 10 %)
Supply voltage
3 AC 380 V
380 V
3 AC 400 V
400 V
3 AC 415 V
400 V
3 AC 425 V
400 V
3 AC 440 V
440 V
3 AC 460 V
460 V
3 AC 480 V
460 V
Table 7-10
NOTICE
Transformer tappings
Connecting the fan transformer
Converters with a supply voltage of 380 - 480 V AC 3-phase can be
parameterized such as to enable operation at 200 V - 230 V AC
3-phase.
In this case the fan transformer has to be disconnected from the input
busbars U and V.
The fan has to be supplied via the terminal strip -X18 with 230 V AC
single-phase.
For this purpose remove the existing cables from -X18/1 and -X18/5
(= secondary side of the fan transformer) and connect the 230 V at this
point in accordance with the following table. Insulate the ends of the
disconnected cables and fasten them such that they cannot cause a
short-circuit or earth fault.
7-16
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Connecting-up
X18 – Fan supply
NOTE
7.4
Terminal De signation
1
N
2
-
Meaning
Range
Fan supply (neutral conductor)
3
Assigned internally
4
-
5
L
Fan N via fuse F1
Fan supply (phase)
6
-
7
Assigned internally
8
-
9
-
10
Assigned internally
11
Assigned internally
12
Assigned internally
13
Assigned internally
230 V ± 15 % /
50/60 Hz
Fan L via fuse F2
The 1AC 230 V fan supply X18/1 must be grounded (neutral conductor
N connected to protective conductor PE).
Fan fuses
Line voltage AC 380V to 480 V
Order number
Fan fuse
(F1 / F2)
6SE7023-8ED 1
FNQ-R-8/10
6SE7024-7ED 1
FNQ-R-6/10
6SE7026-0ED 1
FNQ-R-6/10
6SE7027-2ED 1
FNQ-R-6/10
Manufacturer:
FNQ-R
Bussmann
= 5 corresponds to MASTERDRIVES Motion Control
= 7 corresponds to MASTERDRIVES Motion Control Performance 2
Table 7-11
NOTE
Fan fuses, type D
The 230 V fan must be supplied with AC 230 V externally via terminal
strip X18 1/5 on the PSU.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-17
08.2009
Parameterization
8 Parameterization
It is possible to parameterize the units of the SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES series by various methods of parameter input. Every
unit can be set via the dedicated parameterizing unit (PMU) without the
need to use additional components.
Each unit is supplied with the user software DriveMonitor and
comprehensive electronic documentation on a DVD. In the case of
installation on a standard PC the units can be parameterized via the
serial interface of the PC. The software provides extensive parameter
aids and a prompted start-up function.
The unit can be further parameterized by entering parameters with the
OP1S manual operator panel and via a controller at the field bus level
(e.g. Profibus).
NOTE
In firmware V.20 (for performance 2 units) BICO parameters can also
be changed in the "Run" drive status (see also parameter list
"Changeable in"). In contrast to firmware v1.x in which BICO
parameters could only be changed in the "Ready" drive status,
structural changes can also be made on performance 2 units with
firmware V2.0 during running operation.
WARNING
Unintentional axis movements may occur as a result of undesired
changes to BICO parameters in the "Run" drive status.
8.1 Parameter
menus
Parameters with related functions are compiled in menus for structuring
the parameter set stored in the units. A menu thus represents a
selection out of the entire supply of parameters of the unit.
It is possible for one parameter to belong to several menus. The
parameter list indicates which individual menus a parameter belongs to.
Assignment is effected via the menu number allocated to each menu.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-1
Parameterization
P60
08.2009
Menu level 1
Select via
P60 Menu Select
Menu level 2
(only on OP1S)
Menu level 3
(only on OP1S)
User parameters
General parameters
SCom1/SCom2
Terminals
Field bus interfaces
Communication
SIMOLINK
Control and status words
SCB/SCI
Parameter menu
Setpoint channel
Motor/encoder
Fixed settings
Motor data
Encoder data
Control/gating unit
Quick
parameterization
Position control
Speed control
Sequence control
Board
configuration
Current control
V/f open-loop control
Gating unit
Drive setting
Download
Diagnostics
Upread/free access
Functions
Faults/alarms
Messages/displays
Trace
Power section
definition
Releases
Free blocks
Basic positioner
Synchronism
Positioning
Technology
Setting up/MDI
By entering a password in P359,
access to the menus in the gray
shaded area can be prohibited to
unauthorized persons
P358 Key
Fig. 8-1
8-2
P359 Lock
Parameter menus
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
Menu levels
The parameter menus have several menu levels. The first level
contains the main menus. These are effective for all sources of
parameter inputs (PMU, OP1S, DriveMonitor, field bus interfaces).
The main menus are selected in parameter P60 Menu Selection.
Examples:
P060 = 0
"User parameters" menu selected
P060 = 1
"Parameter menu" selected
...
P060 = 8
"Power section definition" menu selected
Menu levels 2 and 3 enable the parameter set to be more extensively
structured. They are used for parameterizing the units with the OP1S
operator control panel.
Main menus
P060
Menu
0 User
Description
parameters
•
Freely configurable menu
menu
•
Contains complete parameter set
•
More extensive structure of the functions achieved by using
an OP1S operator control panel
•
Used to perform a parameter reset to a factory or user setting
•
Used for quick parameterization with parameter modules
1 Parameter
2F
3
4 Board
5 Drive
6 Do
7 Upre
8
ixed settings
Quick
parameterization
configuration
setting
wnload
ad/free access
Power section
definition
Table 8-1
•
When selected, the unit switches to status 5 "Drive setting"
•
Used for configuring the optional boards
•
When selected, the unit switches to status 4 "Board
configuration"
•
Used for detailed parameterization of important motor,
encoder and control data
•
When selected, the unit switches to status 5 "Drive setting"
•
Used to download parameters from an OP1S, a PC or an
automation unit
•
When selected, the unit switches to status 21 "Download"
•
Contains the complete parameter set and is used for free
access to all parameters without being restricted by further
menus
•
Enables all parameters to be upread/upload by an OP1S, PC
or automation unit
•
Used to define the power section (only necessary for units of
the Compact and chassis type)
•
When selected, the unit switches to status 0 "Power section
definition"
Main menus
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-3
Parameterization
User parameters
Lock and key
8-4
08.2009
In principle, parameters are firmly assigned to the menus. However, the
"User parameters" menu has a special status. Parameters assigned to
this menu are not fixed, but can be changed. You are thus able to put
together the parameters required for your application in this menu and
structure them according to your needs. The user parameters can be
selected via P360 (Select UserParam).
In order to prevent undesired parameterization of the units and to
protect your know-how stored in the parameterization, it is possible to
restrict access to the parameters by defining your own passwords with
the parameters:
♦ P358 key and
♦ P359 lock.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
8.2
Parameterization
Changeability of parameters
The parameters stored in the units can only be changed under certain
conditions. The following preconditions must be satisfied before
parameters can be changed:
Preconditions
•
Either a function parameter or a BICO
parameter must be involved (identified
by upper-case letters in the parameter
number).
Visualization parameters
(identified by lower-case letters
in the parameter number)
cannot be changed.
•
Parameter access must be granted for
the source from which the parameters
are to be changed.
Release is given in P053
Parameter access.
•
A menu must be selected in which the
parameter to be changed is contained.
The menu assignment is
indicated in the parameter list
for every parameter.
•
The unit must be in a status which
permits parameters to be changed.
The statuses in which it is
possible to change parameters
are specified in the parameter
list.
Table 8-2
NOTE
Examples
Remarks
Preconditions for being able to change parameters
The current status of the units can be interrogated in parameter r001.
Status (r001)
P053
Result
"Ready for ON" (09)
2
P222 Src n(act) can only be changed via the
PMU
"Ready for ON" (09)
6
P222 Src n(act) can be changed via the PMU and
SCom1 (e.g. OP1S)
"Operation" (14)
6
P222 Src n(act) cannot be changed on account of
the drive status
Table 8-3
Influence of drive status (r001) and parameter access (P053) on the
changeability of a parameter
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-5
Parameterization
8.3
08.2009
Parameter input via the PMU
The PMU parameterizing unit enables parameterization, operator
control and visualization of the converters and inverters directly on the
unit itself. It is an integral part of the basic units. It has a four-digit
seven-segment display and several keys.
The PMU is used with preference for parameterizing simple
applications requiring a small number of set parameters, and for quick
parameterization.
Raise key
Seven-segment display for:
Drive statuses
Alarms and
faults
Reversing key
ON key
Parameter numbers
Toggle key
OFF key
Parameter indices
Lower key
X300
Fig. 8-2
8-6
Parameter values
PMU parameterizing unit
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Key
Parameterization
Significance
Function
ON key
•
For energizing the drive (enabling motor activation).
•
If there is a fault: For returning to fault display
OFF key
•
For de-energizing the drive by means of OFF1, OFF2 or OFF3
(P554 to 560) depending on parameterization.
Reversing key
•
For reversing the direction of rotation of the drive.
The function must be enabled by P571 and P572
Toggle key
•
For switching between parameter number, parameter index
and parameter value in the sequence indicated (command
becomes effective when the key is released).
•
If fault display is active: For acknowledging the fault
Raise key
Lower key
Hold toggle key
and depress raise
key
For increasing the displayed value:
•
Short press = single-step increase
•
Long press = rapid increase
For lowering the displayed value:
•
Short press = single-step decrease
•
Long press = rapid decrease
•
If parameter number level is active: For jumping back and forth
between the last selected parameter number and the operating
display (r000)
•
If fault display is active: For switching over to parameter
number level
•
If parameter value level is active: For shifting the displayed
value one digit to the right if parameter value cannot be
displayed with 4 figures (left-hand figure flashes if there are
any further invisible figures to the left)
Hold toggle key
•
and depress lower
key
•
Table 8-4
If parameter number level is active: For jumping directly to the
operating display (r000)
If parameter value level is active: For shifting the displayed
value one digit to the left if parameter value cannot be
displayed with 4 figures (right-hand figure flashes if there are
any further invisible figures to the right)
Operator control elements on the PMU
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-7
Parameterization
Toggle key
(P key)
08.2009
As the PMU only has a four-digit seven-segment display, the 3
descriptive elements of a parameter
♦ Paramete r number,
♦ Parameter index (if the parameter is indexed) and
♦ Paramete r value
cannot be displayed at the same time. For this reason, you have to
switch between the individual descriptive elements by depressing the
toggle key. After the desired level has been selected, adjustment can
be made using the raise key or the lower key.
With the toggle key, you can change
over:
•
from the parameter number to the
parameter index
•
from the parameter index to the
parameter value
•
from the parameter value to the
parameter number
Parameter number
P
P
Parameter
value
Parameter
index
P
If the parameter is not indexed, you
can jump directly from the parameter
number to the parameter value.
NOTE
If you change the value of a parameter, this change generally becomes
effective immediately. It is only in the case of acknowledgement
parameters (marked in the parameter list by an asterisk ‘ * ’) that the
change does not become effective until you change over from the
parameter value to the parameter number.
Parameter changes made using the PMU are always safely stored in
the EEPROM (protected in case of power failure) once the toggle key
has been depressed.
8-8
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
Example
The following example shows the individual operator control steps to be
carried out on the PMU for a parameter reset to factory setting *).
Set P053 to 0002 and grant parameter access via PMU
P053
∇
Ê
Ì
0000
Ê
∇
P Ì
Ê
Ì
0001
Ê
0002
P Ì
P053
Select P060
∇
Ê
Ì
P053
P060
Set P060 to 0002 and select "Fixed settings" menu
Ê
P060
∇
P Ì
Ê
Ì
1
Ê
P Ì
2
P060
Select P970
∇
Ê
Ì
...
P060
P970
Set P970 to 0000 and start parameter reset
Ê
P970
P Ì
Ê
1
∇ Ì
Ê
0
P Ì
°005
*) P70, Order number 6SE70… is retained
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-9
Parameterization
8.4
08.2009
Parameter input via the OP1S
The operator control panel (OP1S) is an optional input/output device
which can be used for parameterizing and starting up the units. Plaintext displays greatly facilitate parameterization.
The OP1S has a non-volatile memory and can permanently store
complete sets of parameters. It can therefore be used for archiving sets
of parameters. The parameter sets must be read out (upread) from the
units first. Stored parameter sets can also be transferred (downloaded)
to other units.
The OP1S and the unit to be operated communicate with each other via
a serial interface (RS485) using the USS protocol. During
communication, the OP1S assumes the function of the master whereas
the connected units function as slaves.
The OP1S can be operated at baud rates of 9.6 kBd and 19.2 kBd, and
is capable of communicating with up to 32 slaves (addresses 0 to 31). It
can therefore be used both in a point-to-point link (e.g. during initial
parameterization) and within a bus configuration.
The plain-text displays can be shown in one of five different languages
(German, English, Spanish, French, Italian). The language is chosen by
selecting the relevant parameter for the slave in question.
Order numbers
Components Orde
r Number
OP1S 6SE70
90-0XX84-2FK0
Connecting cable 3 m
6SX7010-0AB03
Connecting cable 5 m
6SX7010-0AB05
Adapter for installation in cabinet door incl. 5 m 6SX7010-0AA00
cable
NOTE
8-10
The parameter settings for the units connected to the OP1S are given
in the corresponding documentation of the unit (Compendium).
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
8.2 A 25 V
00
# 100.000 min-1
* 100.000 min-1
Run
LED red
LED green
LCD (4 lines x 16 characters)
9-pole SUB-D connector
on rear of unit
Fault
Run
ON key
I
OFF key
O
Reversing key
Raise key
Lower key
P
Key for toggling between control levels
Jog key
Jog
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
+/-
Reset
0 to 9: number keys
Reset key (acknowledge)
Sign key
Fig. 8-3
View of the OP1S
100. 0A 3 80. 0V zz
#- 300. 000Hz
* - 300. 000Hz
Run
Fault
Run
I
O
Jog
P
USS-Bus
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
+/-
Reset
US
OP1S
S
via
RS
48
5
Connecting cable
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
OP1S side:
Unit side:
9-pole SUB D socket
9-pole SUB D connector
Fig. 8-4
NOTE
The OP1S directly connected to the unit
In the as-delivered state or after a reset of the parameters to the factory
setting, a point-to-point link can be adopted with the OP1S without any
further preparatory measures and parameterization can be
commenced.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-11
Parameterization
Key
O
Jog
P
08.2009
Significance
Function
ON key
•
For energizing the drive (enabling motor activation). The
function must be enabled by means of parameterization.
OFF key
•
For de-energizing the drive by means of OFF1, OFF2 or
OFF3, depending on parameterization. This function
must be enabled by means of parameterization.
Jog key
•
For jogging with jogging setpoint 1 (only effective when
the unit is in the "ready to start" state). This function must
be enabled by means of parameterization.
Reversing key
•
For reversing the direction of rotation of the drive. The
function must be enabled by means of parameterization.
Toggle key
•
For selecting menu levels and switching between
parameter number, parameter index and parameter
value in the sequence indicated. The current level is
displayed by the position of the cursor on the LCD
display (the command comes into effect when the key is
released).
•
For conducting a numerical input
•
For leaving menu levels
•
If fault display is active, this is for acknowledging the
fault. This function must be enabled by means of
parameterization.
Reset key
Reset
Raise key
Lower key
+/0
to
9
Short press = single-step increase
•
Long press = rapid increase
•
If motorized potentiometer is active, this is for raising the
setpoint. This function must be enabled by means of
parameterization
For lowering the displayed value:
•
Short press = single-step decrease
•
Long press = rapid decrease
•
If motorized potentiometer is active, this is for lowering
the setpoint. This function must be enabled by means of
parameterization.
Sign key
•
For changing the sign so that negative values can be
entered
Number keys
• Numeric al input
Table 8-5
NOTE
For increasing the displayed value:
•
Operator control elements of the OP1S
If you change the value of a parameter, the change does not become
effective until the toggle key (P) is pressed.
Parameter changes made using the OP1S are always stored safely in
the EEPROM (protected in case of power failure) once the toggle key
(P) has been pressed.
8-12
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
Some parameters may also be displayed without a parameter number,
e.g. during quick parameterization or if "Fixed setting" is selected. In
this case, parameterization is carried out via various sub-menus.
Example of how to proceed for a parameter reset.
2x
Ê
#
*
P Ì
Ê
0.0 A 0 V 00 MotionControl
0.00 min-1 *Menu selection
0.00 min-1 OP: Upread
Ready OP: Download
P Ì
Ê
Menu Selection
*User Param.
Param Menu..
Fixed Set...
∇ Ì
Menu Selection
*User Param.
Param Menu..
#Fixed Set...
Selection of fixed setting
Ê
Fixed Setting
*Select FactSet
FactSet.
∇ Ì
Ê
Fixed Setting
*Select FactSet
#FactSet.
P Ì
Ê
Factory Setting
FactSet.
*No FactSet
∇
P Ì
Ì
Factory Setting
#FactSet.
*No FactSet
Selection of factory setting
P Ì
Ê
wait
Ì
Factory Setting
Menu Selection
#FactSet.
*User Param..
*No FactSet
Param. Menu..
busy............
FixedSet...
Start of factory setting
NOTE
It is not possible to start the parameter reset in the "Run" status.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-13
Parameterization
8.5
08.2009
Parameter input with DriveMonitor
NOTE
Please refer to the online help for detailed information on
DriveMonitor (
8.5.1 Installation
button or F1 key).
and connection
8.5.1.1 Installation
A DVD is included with the devices of the MASTERDRIVES Series
when they are delivered. The operating tool supplied on the DVD
(DriveMonitor) is automatically installed from this DVD. If "automatic
notification on change" is activated for the DVD drive on the PC, user
guidance starts when you insert the DVD and takes you through
installation of DriveMonitor. If this is not the case, start file
"Autoplay.exe" in the root directory of the DVD.
8.5.1.2 Conn
ection
There are two ways of connecting a PC to a device of the SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES Series via the USS interface. The devices of the
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Series have both an RS232 and an
RS485 interface.
RS232 interface
The serial interface that PCs are equipped with by default functions as
an RS232 interface. This interface is not suitable for bus operation and
is therefore only intended for operation of a SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES device.
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
To PC COMx
socket
Fig. 8-5
NOTICE
8-14
9
8
7
6
X300:
1 n.c. (not connected)
(Compact PLUS: RS232 Id)
2 RxD (RS232)
3 Rx+/Tx+ (RS485)
4
5 Ground
6 +5V (OP1S)
7 TxD (RS232)
8 Rx-/Tx- (RS485)
9 Ground
Device side
-X300 (compact PLUS -X103)
9-pin SUB-D connector
Connecting cable for connecting PC COM(1-4) to SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES X300
DriveMonitor must not be operated via the Sub-D socket X300 if the
SST1 interface parallel to it is already being used for another purpose,
e.g. bus operation with SIMATIC as the master.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
RS485 interface
The RS485 interface is multi-point capable and therefore suitable for
bus operation. You can use it to connect 31 SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES with a PC. On the PC, either an integrated RS485
interface or an RS232 ↔ RS485 interface converter is necessary. On
the device, an RS485 interface is integrated into the -X300 (compact
PLUS -X103) connection. For the cable: see pin assignment -X300 and
device documentation of the interface converter.
8.5.2
Establishing the connection between DriveMonitor and the device
8.5.2.1
Setting the USS interface
You can configure the interface with menu Tools Æ ONLINE Settings.
Fig. 8-6
Online settings
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-15
Parameterization
08.2009
The following settings (Fig. 8-7) are possible:
♦ Tab card "Bus Type", options
USS (operation via serial interface)
Profibus DP (only if DriveMonitor is operated under Drive ES).
♦ Tab card "Interface"
You can enter the required COM interface of the PC (COM1 to
COM4) and the required baudrate here.
NOTE
Set the baudrate to the baudrate parameterized in SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES (P701) (factory setting 9600 baud).
Further settings: operating mode of the bus in RS485 operation;
setting according to the description of the interface converter
RS232/RS485
♦ Tab card "Extended"
Request retries and Response timeout; here you can increase the
values already set if communication errors occur frequently.
Fig. 8-7
8-16
Interface configuration
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
8.5.2.2
Parameterization
Starting the USS bus scan
DriveMonitor starts with an empty drive window. Via the menu "Set up
an ONLINE connection..." the USS bus can be scanned for connected
devices:
Fig. 8-8
NOTE
Starting the USS bus scan
The "Set up an online connection” menu is only valid from Version 5.2
onwards.
Fig. 8-9
Search for online drives
During the search the USS bus is scanned with the set baudrate only.
The baud rate can be changed via "Tools Æ ONLINE Settings", see
section 8.5.2.1.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-17
Parameterization
8.5.2.3
08.2009
Creating a parameter set
With menu FileÆ New Æ... you can create a new drive for
parameterization (see Fig. 8-10). The system creates a download file
(*.dnl), in which the drive characteristic data (type, device version) are
stored. You can create the download file on the basis of an empty
parameter set or the factory setting.
Fig. 8-10
Creating a new drive
Based on factory setting:
♦ The parameter list is preassigned with the factory setting values
Empty parameter set:
♦ For compilation of individually used parameters
If the parameters of a parameter set that has already been created
have to be changed, this can be done by calling the corresponding
download file via the “FileÆ Open” menu function. The last four drives
can be opened via “Parameter sets last dealt with”.
When you create a new drive, the window "Drive Properties" (Fig. 8-11)
opens. Here you must enter the following data:
♦ In dropdown list box "Device type", select the type of device (e.g.
MASTERDRIVES MC). You can only select the devices stored.
♦ In dropdown list box "Device version", you can select the software
version of the device. You can generate databases for (new)
software versions that are not listed when you start online
parameterization.
♦ You must only specify the bus address of the drive during online
operation (switchover with button Online/Offline)
8-18
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
NOTE
Parameterization
The specified bus address must be the same as that of the
parameterized SST bus address in SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
(P700).
No bus address is assigned to the drive with the button "Disconnect
network connection".
NOTE
Field "Number of PCD" has no special significance for the
parameterization of MASTERDRIVES and should be left at "2".
If the value is changed, it must be/remain ensured that the setting value
in the program matches the value in parameter P703 of the drive at all
times.
Fig. 8-11
Create file; Drive properties
After confirming the drive properties with ok you have to enter the name
and storage location of the download file to be created.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-19
Parameterization
08.2009
8.5.3 Parameterization
8.5.3.1
Structure of the parameter lists, parameterization with DriveMonitor
Parameterization using the parameter list is basically the same as
parameterization using PMU (See Compendium, Chapter
"Parameterizing Steps"). The parameter list provides the following
advantages:
♦ Simultaneous visibility of a larger number of parameters
♦ Text display for parameter names, index number, index text,
parameter value, binectors, and connectors
♦ On a change of parameters: Display of parameter limits or possible
parameter values
The parameter list has the following structure:
Field
No.
1 P.
2
Field Name
Nr
Name
Function
Here the parameter number is displayed. You can only change the field in
menu Free parameterization.
Display of the parameter name, in accordance with the parameter list
Display of the parameter index for indexed parameters. To see more than
index 1, click on the [+] sign. The display is then expanded and all indices of
the parameter are displayed
3 Ind
4
Index text
Meaning of the index of the parameter
5
Parameter
value
Display of the current parameter value. You can change this by doubleclicking on it or selecting and pressing Enter.
6
Dim
Physical dimension of the parameter, if there is one
8-20
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
With buttons Offline, Online (RAM), Online (EEPROM) (Fig. 8-12 [1])
you can switch modes. When you switch to online mode, device
identification is performed. If the configured device and the real device
do not match (device type, software version), an alarm appears. If an
unknown software version is recognized, the option of creating the
database is offered. (This process takes several minutes.)
1
2
Fig. 8-12
Drive window/parameter list
The DriveMonitor drive window has a directory tree for navigation
purposes (Fig. 8-12 [2]). You can deselect this additional operating tool
in menu View - Parameter selection.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-21
Parameterization
08.2009
The drive window contains all elements required for the
parameterization and operation of the connected device. In the lower
bar, the status of the connection with the device is displayed:
Connection and device ok
Connection ok, device in fault state
Connection ok, device in alarm state
Device is parameterized offline
No connection with the device can be established (only offline
parameterization possible).
NOTE
8-22
If no connection with the device can be established because the device
does not physically exist or is not connected, you can perform offline
parameterization. To do so, you have to change to offline mode. In that
way, you can create an individually adapted download file, which you
can load into the device later.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Drive Navigator
Parameterization
This is used to quickly access important functions of the DriveMonitor.
Settings for Drive Navigator under Tools -> Options (Fig. 8-14):
Fig. 8-13
Drive Navigator
Fig. 8-14
Options menu display
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-23
Parameterization
08.2009
Toolbar of the Drive Navigator
=
=
=
ssisted commissioning
Direct to parameter list
Gene
ral diagnostics
=
Save drive parameters to a file
=
Download parameter file to drive
=
8-24
A
Load
standard application
=
Assisted F01 technology COMM
=
Basic positioner operating screens
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
8.5.3.2 Gener
Parameterization
al diagnostics
Via the Diagnostics Æ General diagnostics menu the following window
opens. This window gives a general overview of the active warnings
and faults and their history. Both the warning and the fault number as
well as plain text are displayed.
Fig. 8-15
General diagnostics
Via the Extended Diagnostics button you can reach the next
diagnostics window.
Fig. 8-16
Extended diagnostics
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-25
Parameterization
8.6
08.2009
Parameter reset to factory setting
The factory setting is the defined initial state of all parameters of a unit.
The units are delivered with this setting.
You can restore this initial state at any time by resetting the parameters
to the factory setting, thus canceling all parameter changes made since
the unit was delivered.
Grant parameter access
6: Parameter changes permitted via PMU and serial interface
SCom1 (OP1S and PC)
P053 = 6
P060 = 2
Select "Fixed settings" menu
P366 = ?
Select desired factory setting
0: Standard
Note:
This parameter was correctly set prior to delivery of
the unit and only needs to be changed in exceptional
cases.
Start parameter reset
0: Parameter reset
1: No parameter change
P970 = 0
Unit carries out parameter
reset and then leaves the
"Fixed settings" menu.
Fig. 8-17
8-26
Sequence for parameter reset to factory setting
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
8.7 Parameterizing
Downloading with
the OP1S
by download
The OP1S operator control panel is capable of upreading parameter
(Upread or Upload) sets from the units and storing them. These
parameter sets can then be transferred to other units by download.
Downloading with the OP1S is thus the preferred method of
parameterizing replacement units in a service case.
During downloading with the OP1S, it is assumed that the units are in
the as-delivered state. The parameters for the power section definition
are thus not transferred. If a PIN has been entered to release optional
technology functions, this is also not overwritten during downloading.
(Refer to Compendium, section "Detailed parameterization, power
section definition"). If a PIN has been entered to release optional
technology functions, this is also not overwritten during downloading.
With the "OP: Download" function, a parameter set stored in the OP1S
can be written into the connected slave. Starting from the basic menu,
the "OP: Download" function is selected with "Lower" or "Raise" and
activated with "P".
Ê
MotionControl
*Menu selection
OP: Upread
#OP: Download
P Ì
Download
*1909199701
MASTERDRIVES MC
Example: Selecting and activating the "Download" function
Now one of the parameter sets stored in the OP1S has to be selected
using the "Lower" or "Raise" keys (displayed in the second line). The
selected ID is confirmed with the "P" key. Now the slave ID can be
displayed with "Lower" or "Raise". The slave ID contains various
characteristic features of the unit such as rated output, order number,
software version, etc.
The "Download" procedure is then started with the "P" key. During
download, the OP1S displays the parameter currently being written.
Ê
Download
*1909199701
MASTERDRIVES MC
P Ì
Ê
Download
*1909199701
MASTERDRIVES MC
P Ì
MotionControl 00
Download
Pxxx
Example: Confirming the ID and starting the "Download" procedure
With "Reset", the procedure can be stopped at any time. If downloading
has been fully completed, the message "Download ok" appears and the
display returns to the basic menu.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-27
Parameterization
08.2009
After the data set to be downloaded has been selected, if the
identification of the stored data set does not agree with the identification
of the connected unit, an error message appears for approximately 2
seconds. The operator is then asked if downloading is to be
discontinued.
Ê
Download
*1909199701
MASTERDRIVES MC
P Ì
Ê
Download
*1909199701
MASTERDRIVES MC
P Ì
Ê
Error:
Different
IDs
2s Ì
MotionControl 00
Stop download?
#yes
no
Yes: Do wnloading is discontinued.
No:
Downloading is carried out.
8.8
Parameterizing with parameter modules
Pre-defined, function-assigned parameter modules are stored in the
units. These parameter modules can be combined with each other, thus
making it possible to adjust your unit to the desired application by just a
few parameter steps. Detailed knowledge of the complete parameter
set of the unit is not required.
Parameter modules are available for the following function groups:
1. Motors
2. Motor encoders
3. Control types
4. Setpoint and command sources
Parameterization is effected by selecting a parameter module from
each function group and then starting quick parameterization. A
parameter reset to the factory setting is performed and then, according
to your selection, the required device parameters are set to achieve the
required control functionality. The parameters necessary for fine
adjustment of the control structure (all the parameters of the respective
function diagrams) are automatically adopted in the user menu
(P060 = 0).
NOTE
8-28
If parameter changes have already been carried out on the unit, it is
recommended that you carry out a parameter reset to the factory
setting prior to performing "Quick parameterization".
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
P060 = 3
Select "Quick Parameterization" menu
Input of unit line voltage in V
AC Units: RMS value of AC voltage
DC Units: DC link voltage
P071 = ?
P095 = ?
P095 = 1
2
5
Input of motor type
0: No motor connected
1: 1FT6/1FK6 synchronous servo-motor
2: 1PH7(=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4 induction servo-motor
5: Torque motor 1FW3
Input the code number for the connected 1FK6/1FT6
motor (see section "Motor list")
P096 = ?
P097 = ?
P099 = ?
P130 = ?
0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7
4
P147.1 = ?
P367 = ?
Input the code number for the connected 1PH7(=1PA6), 1PH4,
1PL6 motor (see section "Motor list")
Input the code number for the connected 1FW3 motor
(see section "Motor list")
Select motor encoder
0: automatic encoder detection
1: 2-pole resolver
2: Resolver with pole pair number of motor
3: Encoder 2048/rev.
4: Multiturn encoder 2048/rev.
5: Pulse encoder 1024/rev.
7: Encoders without C/D track 2048/rev (SW V1.30 and later)
The absolute initial position is not set on encoders without
a C/D track. These can only be used on asynchronous
machines. The position is corrected via a zero pulse (if
connected).
1PA6, 1PL6, 1PH4 and 1PH7 asynchronous motors with
encoder:
These motors are normally supplied with an ERN1381
encoder without C/D track.
Selection of a multiturn enocder
1: EQN1325 (2048 lines)
2: ECN1313 (2048 lines)
6: EnDat
7: EQI1325 (32 lines)
8: EQN1125 (Heidenhain) EnDat
9: ECN1113 (Heidenhain) EnDat
Select type of control
0: V/f open-loop control
2: Torque control
3: Speed control
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-29
Parameterization
08.2009
Select setpoint and command source
0: PMU (not for Compact PLUS)
1: Analog input and terminal strip
2: Fixed setpoints and terminal strip
3: MOP and terminal strip
4: USS
5: not used
6: PROFIBUS (CBP2)
7: OP1S and fixed setpoints via SCom1
8: OP1S and MOP via SCom1
Input the USS address
P368 = ?
P368 =
0, 1, 2, 3
4 7, 8
6
P700.1 = ?
P918.1 = ?
P370 = 1
P060 = 0
Input the PROFIBUS address
Start of quick parameterization
0: No parameter change
1: Parameter change according to chosen
combination of parameter modules
Note:
After start-up an automatic factory setting of P366 = 0
takes place, followed by the associated parameterization.
Return to user menu
Fig. 8-18
Function diagram
modules
8-30
Sequence for parameterizing with parameter modules
Function diagram modules (function diagrams) are shown after the flow
chart for parameter modules stored in the unit software. On the first few
pages are the:
♦ setpoint and command sources, on the following pages are the
♦ analog outputs and the display parameters and the
♦ open-loop and closed-loop control types.
It is therefore possible to put together the function diagrams to exactly
suit the selected combination of setpoint/command source and
open/closed-loop control type. This will give you an overview of the
functionality parameterized in the units and of the necessary
assignment of the terminals.
The function parameters and visualization parameters specified in the
function diagrams are automatically adopted in the user menu and can
be visualized or changed there.
The parameter numbers of the user menu are entered in P360.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
Setpoint and command source
Terminal strip and
analog input
-X101/1
P24
-X101/2
M24
-X101/3
1 = Operation
-X101/4
0 = Fault
-X101/5
0 = Alarm
-X101/6
1 = Inverter relesae
-X101/7
1-Edge = Acknowledge
-X101/8
1 = ON 0 = OFF1
AnaIn Scale
P630
Differential input
+/- 10 V
-10 V ... + 10V
corresponds to
-100 % ... +100 %
AI+
-X101/9
A
AnaIn Smooth
P634
D
AI-
-X101/10
AnaIn Offset
P631
Control type:
Speed
control
r003 Output Volts
r004 Output Amps
r006 DC Bus Volts
Refspeed
P353
Norm.
n-Reg. Gain1 n-Reg. Time
P235.1 P240.1
FSetp
n(max, FWD speed)
Torq(Lim1)
P452.1
P263.1
Disp Speed Conn
r041.1
(= speed
setpoint)
Current
control
Analog output
+/- 10 V
-X101/11
AA
-X101/12
AnaOut Offset
P644.1
A
y
D
FSetp
Torq (Lim2)
P264.1
y[V]=
Motor
encoder
AnaOut Smooth
P642.1
AnaOut Scale
P643.1
Disp Speed Conn
r041.2
(=speed actual value )
x
x
P643.1
100 %
Accel
Time P462.1
n(max, REV speed)
P453.1
Decel
Time P464.1
Motor
3~
Type of encoder:
Data of resolver to be connected:
- 2-pole
Data of pulse encoder simulation:
- 1024 pulses/revolution
Pulse encoder simulation:
(only for SBR2)
Resolver
6
SBR1/2
-X410/90
Track A+
sin +
-X414/3
-X410/91
Track A-
sin -
-X414/4
-X410/92
Track B+
cos+
-X414/6
-X410/93
Track B-
cos-
-X414/7
-X410/94
Zero pulse +
Excitation
-X414/9
-X410/95
Zero pulse -
MExcitationg
-X414/11
Shield connection
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-31
Parameterization
8-32
08.2009
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
Setpoint and command source:
Terminal strip and fixed setpoints (FSetp)
-X101/1
P24
-X101/2
M24
-X101/3
1 = Operation
-X101/4
0 = Fault
-X101/5
FSetp Bit 0
-X101/6
FSetp Bit 1
-X101/7
1-Edge = Acknowledge
-X101/8
1 =ON 0 = OFF1
FSetp1
0 0
FSetp2
0 1
FSetp3
1 0
FSetp4
1 1
Control type:
Torque
control
r003 Output Volts
r004 Output Amps
Ref
Torque
P354
r006 DC Bus Volts
Norm
Disp Torq Conn
r039.1
FSetp Torq(Lim1)
(=Torque
P263
setpoint)
Current
control
FSetp Torq(Lim2)
P264
Speed
monitoring
n(max FWD speed)
P452
Analog output
+/- 10 V
-X101/12
AnaOut+
AnaOut-
A
y
D
AnaOut Scale AnaOut Smooth
P642.1
P643.1
y[V]=
x
x
P643
100 %
Motor
encoder
n(max REV speed)
P453
Disp Torq Conn
r039.2
(=Torque actual
value)
Disp Speed Conn
r041.2
(=speed actual value)
-X101/11
AnaOut Offset
P644.F
Motor
3~
Type of encoder:
Pulse encoder
Full information on pulse encoder connection is
given in the SBP operating instruction
(Order No. 6SE7087-6NX84-2FA0).
Data of pulse encoder to be connected:
- HTL encoder (15 V)
- 1024 Inc.
- without control track
SBP
UB
-X400/60
5
-X400/61
Track A+
-X401/68
Track B+
-X401/70
Zero pulse +
-X401/72
Shield
connection
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-33
Parameterization
8-34
08.2009
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
Setpoint and command source
Terminal strip and motorized potentiometer
-X101/1
P24
-X101/2
M24
-X101/3
1 = Operation
-X101/4
0 = Fault
-X101/5
1 = Raise MOP
-X101/6
1 = Lower MOP
-X101/7
1-Edge = Acknowledge
-X101/8
1 = ON 0 = OFF1
MOP Accel Time MOP Decel Time
P431 P432
MOP(max)
P421
MOPi(min)
P422
Conf MOP
P425
00x0 = ... Without storing after OFF
00x1 = ... Storing after OFF
Type of control
V/f control
r003 Output Volts
r004 Output Amps
r006 DC Bus Volts
Norm.
Ref Freq
P352
n(max, FWD speed)
P452.1
Volts Curve1
P327
U
.3 .4
Norm.
Boost
P325
n(max, REV speed)
P453.1
Accel Time Decel Time
P462.1 P464.1
Motor
3~
.2
.1
.1 .2
.3 .4
Freq Curve1
P326
Analog output
+/- 10 V
-X101/11
AA
AnaOut Offset
P644.1
A
-X101/12
y
D
AnaOut Scale
P643.1
y[V]=
x
P643.1
100 %
f
Motor
encoder
AnaOut Smooth
P642.1
x
Disp Freq Conn
r043.2
(=Frequency actual value)
Ref speed
P353
Type of encoder:
Without encoder
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-35
Parameterization
8-36
08.2009
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Ready for ON
Ready for operation
Operation
Fault effective
OFF2 effective
OFF3 effective
ON blocked
Alarm effective
Deviation
PZD control
PKW
Data word 1
Data word 2
PKW
PKW
Data word 1
Data word 2
Setpoint
ON/OFF1
OFF2
OFF3
1 1
Inverter relesae
RGen start
Actual value
0
1 1
RGen release
Software release
Acknowledge
1
Jog bit 1
1 0 0
Jog bit 2
Control word 1
PZD control
External fault
Proposal
15
0 0 0 1 1
FWD speed
Receive
PKW
REV speed
Tlg failure
time: 0 =
none
0
Status word 1
Raise MOP
RS485N
Transmit
Lower MOP
-X100/36
15
PKW:4
RS485P PZD:2
Baud rate:
9.6 KB
Comparison setp ok
1
<1>
-X100/35
Undervoltage fault
Reserve
<1> Interface parameters P700 to P704 remain
unchanged if parameter P370=1 is set
via SCom1 (e. g. DriveMonitor).
FWD/REV speed setp
USS
Setpoint and command source
Energize main contactor
Parameterization
Ramp generator active
08.2009
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-37
Parameterization
8-38
08.2009
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
CB Bus Address
0 ... 200
P918.01 (3)
CB/TB TlgOFF
0 ... 6500 ms
P722.01 (10)
P722.01 =0 :
No monitoring
CB Parameter 11
0 ... 65535
P721.01 to .05
CB Parameter 10
0 ... 65535
P720.01
••••••
CB Parameter 1
0 ... 65535
P711.01
PROFIBUS 1. CB
CB
configuration
Sheet [120]
Receive
Transmit
Sheet [125]
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15
PcD1 (Data word1)
StW 1
0
PKW
PKW
••
PKW
Reserved for read
operations of
parameter data
PZD1 (Data word 1)
PZD1 (Data word 1)
PZD2 (Data word 2)
Control word 1
Status word 1
PZD2 (Data word 2)
• • • • • •
1
••
Reserved for write operations of
parameter data
PKW
8-39
No RGen Stop
Setpoint Release
B3105
B3106
Positive Spd
Negative Spd
B3111
B3112
MOP lower
External fault
Bit15 B3115
MOP higher
PcD control
B3110
B3113
Jog Bit1
B3109
Jog Bit0
RGen Release
B3104
B3108
Inv. Release
B3103
Acknowledge
OFF3 (QStop)
B3102
B3107
OFF2 (electr.)
Bit14 B3114
Bit7
n(act)
from sheet [500a.8]
Status word1
r552
from sheet
[200]
Isq(act) from sheet [390.4]
f(set,V/f) from sheet [400.5]
P574.1
B (3114)
P573.1
B (3113)
• • • • • •
to sheet [180]
control word 1
r550
Src MOP lower
Src MOP higher
P572.1
Src Neg. Spd
B (3112)
P571.1
Src Pos. Spd
B (3111)
P569.1
Src Jog Bit1
B (3109)
P568.1
Src Jog Bit0
B (3108)
P566.1
Src2 Acknowledge
B (3107)
P564.1
Src Setp. Release
B (3106)
P563.1
Src No RGen Stop
B (3105)
P562.1
Src RGen Release
B (3104)
P561.1
Src Inv. Release
B (3103)
P558.1
Src1 OFF3 (QStop)
B (3102)
P555.1
Src1 OFF2
B (3101)
P554.1
Src ON/OFF1
B (3100)
Main setpoint
P443.B
to sheet [310.1]
K (3002)
K0032
B3101
ON/OFF1
Receive setpoints
K3002
1.CB Word2
r733.2
K3001
1.CB Word1
r733.1
P734.1(32)
K
Bit0
B3200
to Bit15
B3215
Bit0
B3100
Bit1
KK0200
KK0091
For torque control K0184
For V/f control
P734.2
K
Transmit actual values
PROFIBUS 1. CB
Reserve
pos./neg. speed setp
Ramp-function gen. active
Energize main cont.
Undervoltage fault
Comp. Setp reached
PZD control
Set/actual deviation
Alarm effective
Switch-on ihibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation
Ready
Ready for ON
••••••
Setpoint and command source:
08.2009
Parameterization
Setpoint and command source:
Parameterization
8-40
08.2009
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
8.9 Motor
lists
Synchronous
motors
1FK6 / 1FK7 /
1FT6 / 1FS6
NOTE
1FK7xxx HD (High Dynamic, P096=82-92) are new AC servo motors
based on the 1FK6 series. The data of 1FK7xxx HD (High Dynamic)
and 1FK6xxx therefore tally.
Input in
P096
Motor order number
(MPRD)
Speed
nn [rpm]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
Current
In [A]
Number
of pole
pairs
1 1F
K6032-6AK7
6000
0.8
1.5
3
2 1F
K6040-6AK7
6000
0.8
1.75
3
3 1F
K6042-6AF7
3000
2.6
2.4
3
4 1F
K6060-6AF7
3000
4.0
3.1
3
5 1F
K6063-6AF7
3000
6.0
4.7
3
6 1F
K6080-6AF7
3000
6.8
5.2
3
7 1F
K6083-6AF7
3000
10.5
7.7
3
8 1F
K6100-8AF7
3000
12.0
8.4
4
9 1F
K6101-8AF7
3000
15.5
10.8
4
10 1F
K6103-8AF7
3000
16.5
11.8
4
11 1F
T6031-4AK7_
6000
0.75
1.2
2
1FT6034-1AK7_-3A
1FT6034-4AK7_
6000
1.4
2.1
2
13 1F
T6041-4AF7_
3000
2.15
1.7
2
14 1F
T6041-4AK7_
6000
1.7
2.4
2
1FT6044-1AF7_-3A
1FT6044-4AF7_
3000
4.3
2.9
2
T6044-4AK7_
6000
3.0
4.1
2
12
15
16 1F
17 1F
T6061-6AC7_
2000
3.7
1.9
3
1FT6061-1AF7_-3A
1FT6061-6AF7_
3000
3.5
2.6
3
19 1F
T6061-6AH7_
4500
2.9
3.4
3
20 1F
T6061-6AK7_
6000
2.1
3.1
3
21 1F
T6062-6AC7_
2000
5.2
2.6
3
22
1FT6062-1AF7_-3A
1FT6062-6AF7_
3000
4.7
3.4
3
23
1FT6062-1AH7_
1FT6062-6AH7_
4500
3.6
3.9
3
24 1F
T6062-6AK7_
6000
2.1
3.2
3
25 1F
T6064-6AC7_
2000
8.0
3.8
3
18
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-41
Parameterization
08.2009
Input in
P096
26
1FT6064-1AF7_-3A
1FT6064-6AF7_
27
1FT6064-6AH7_
1FT6064-1AH71
Speed
nn [rpm]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
3000
7.0
4500 4.8
Current
In [A]
Number
of pole
pairs
4.9
3
5.5
3
28 1F
T6064-6AK7_
6000
2.1
3.5
3
29 1F
T6081-8AC7_
2000
7.5
4.1
4
30 1F
T6081-8AF7_
3000
6.9
5.6
4
31 1F
T6081-8AH7_
4500
5.8
7.3
4
32 1F
T6081-8AK7_
6000
4.6
7.7
4
33 1F
T6082-8AC7_
2000
11.4
6.6
4
34
1FT6082-1AF7_-1A
1FT6082-8AF7_
3000
10.3
8.7
4
35
1FT6082-1AH7_
1FT6082-8AH7_
4500
8.5
11.0
4
36 1F
T6082-8AK7_
6000
5.5
9.1
4
37 1F
T6084-8AC7_
2000
16.9
8.3
4
38
1FT6084-1AF7_-1A
1FT6084-8AF7_
3000
14.7
11.0
4
39
1FT6084-8AH7_
1FT6084-1AH71
4500 10.5
12.5
4
40
1FT6084-8AK7_
1FT6084-1AK71
6000 6.5
9.2
4
41 1F
T6084-8SC7_
2000
23.5
12.5
4
42 1F
T6084-8SF7_
3000
22.0
17.0
4
43 1F
T6084-8SH7_
4500
20.0
24.5
4
44 1F
T6084-8SK7_
6000
17.0
25.5
4
45 1F
T6086-8AC7_
2000
22.5
10.9
4
46
1FT6086-1AF7_-1A
1FT6086-8AF7_
3000
18.5
47
1FT6086-8AH7_
1FT6086-1AH71
4500 12.0
13.0
4
12.6
4
48 1F
T6086-8SC7_
2000
33.0
17.5
4
49 1F
T6086-8SF7_
3000
31.0
24.5
4
50 1F
T6086-8SH7_
4500
27.0
31.5
4
51 1F
T6086-8SK7_
6000
22.0
29.0
4
52 1F
T6102-8AB7_
1500
24.5
8.4
4
1FT6102-1AC7_-1A
1FT6102-8AC7_
2000
23.0
11.0
4
54 1F
T6102-8AF7_
3000
19.5
13.2
4
55 1F
T6102-8AH7_
4500
12.0
12.0
4
53
8-42
Motor order number
(MPRD)
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
Input in
P096
Motor order number
(MPRD)
Speed
nn [rpm]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
Current
In [A]
Number
of pole
pairs
T6105-8AB7_
1500
41.0
14.5
4
1FT6105-1AC7_-1A
1FT6105-8AC7_
2000
38.0
17.6
4
58 1F
T6105-8AF7_
3000
31.0
22.5
4
59 1F
T6105-8SB7_
1500
59.0
21.7
4
60 1F
T6105-8SC7_
2000
56.0
28.0
4
61 1F
T6105-8SF7_
3000
50.0
35.0
4
62 1F
T6108-8AB7_
1500
61.0
20.5
4
63 1F
T6108-8AC7_
2000
55.0
24.5
4
64 1F
T6108-8SB7_
1500
83.0
31.0
4
65 1F
T6108-8SC7_
2000
80.0
40.0
4
66 1F
T6132-6AB7_
1500
62.0
19.0
3
67 1F
T6132-6AC7_
2000
55.0
23.0
3
68 1F
T6132-6AF7_
3000
36.0
23.0
3
69 1F
T6132-6SB7_
1500
102.0
36.0
3
70 1F
T6132-6SC7_
2000
98.0
46.0
3
71 1F
T6132-6SF7_
3000
90.0
62.0
3
72 1F
T6134-6AB7_
1500
75.0
24.0
3
73 1F
T6134-6AC7_
2000
65.0
27.0
3
74 1F
T6134-6SB7_
1500
130.0
45.0
3
75 1F
T6134-6SC7_
2000
125.0
57.0
3
76 1F
T6134-6SF7_
3000
110.0
72.0
3
77 1F
T6136-6AB7_
1500
88.0
27.0
3
78 1F
T6136-6AC7_
2000
74.0
30.0
3
79 1F
T6136-6SB7_
1500
160.0
55.0
3
80 1F
T6136-6SC7_
2000
150.0
72.0
3
81 1F
T6108-8SF7_
3000
70.0
53.0
4
82
1FK6033-7AK71
1FK7033-7AK71
6000
0.9
1.5
3
83
1FK6043-7AK71
1FK7043-7AK71
6000 2.0
4.4
3
84
1FK6043-7AH71
1FK7043-7AH71
4500 2.6
4.0
3
85
1FK6044-7AF71
1FK7044-7AF71
3000 3.5
4.0
3
86
1FK6044-7AH71
1FK7044-7AH71
4500 3.0
4.9
3
56 1F
57
High Dynamic
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-43
Parameterization
08.2009
Input in
P096
Motor order number
(MPRD)
Speed
nn [rpm]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
Current
In [A]
Number
of pole
pairs
87
1FK6061-7AF71
1FK7061-7AF71
3000 5.4
5.3
3
88
1FK6061-7AH71
1FK7061-7AH71
4500 4.3
5.9
3
89
1FK6064-7AF71
1FK7064-7AF71
3000 8.0
7.5
3
90
1FK6064-7AH71
1FK7064-7AH71
4500 5.0
7.0
3
91
1FK6082-7AF71
1FK7082-7AF71
3000 8.0
6.7
4
92
1FK6085-7AF71
1FK7085-7AF71
3000 6.5
7.0
4
Water cooling
100 1F
T6132-6WB7
1500
150.0
58.0
3
101 1F
T6132-6WD7
2500
135.0
82.0
3
102 1F
T6134-6WB7
1500
185.0
67.0
3
103 1F
T6134-6WD7
2500
185.0
115.0
3
104 1F
T6136-6WB7
1500
230.0
90.0
3
105 1F
T6136-6WD7
2500
220.0
149.0
3
106 1F
T6138-6WB7
1500
290.0
112.0
3
107 1F
T6138-6WD7
2500
275.0
162.0
3
108 1F
T6163-8WB7
1500
450.0
160.0
4
109 1F
T6163-8WD7
2500
450.0
240.0
4
110 1F
T6168-8WB7
1500
690.0
221.0
4
111 1F
T6168-8WC7
2000
550.0
250.0
4
112 to 119 for future applications
8-44
120 1F
T6062-6WF7
3000
10.1
7.5
3
121 1F
T6062-6WH7
4500
10.0
11.0
3
122 1F
T6062-6WK7
6000
9.8
15.2
3
123 1F
T6064-6WF7
3000
16.1
11.4
3
124 1F
T6064-6WH7
4500
16.0
18.5
3
125 1F
T6064-6WK7
6000
15.8
27.0
3
126 1F
T6082-8WC7
2000
22.1
13.6
4
127 1F
T6082-8WF7
3000
21.6
19.1
4
128 1F
T6082-8WH7
4500
20.8
28.4
4
129 1F
T6082-8WK7
6000
20.0
32.6
4
130 1F
T6084-8WF7
3000
35.0
27.0
4
131 1F
T6084-8WH7
4500
35.0
39.0
4
132 1F
T6084-8WK7
6000
34.0
51.0
4
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
Input in
P096
Motor order number
(MPRD)
Speed
nn [rpm]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
Current
In [A]
Number
of pole
pairs
133 1F
T6086-8WF7
3000
46.0
37.0
4
134 1F
T6086-8WH7
4500
45.0
53.0
4
135 1F
T6086-8WK7
6000
44.0
58.0
4
136 1F
T6105-8WC7
2000
82.0
60.0
4
137 1F
T6105-8WF7
3000
78.0
82.0
4
138 1F
T6108-8WB7
1500
116.0
43.0
4
139 1F
T6108-8WC7
2000
115.0
57.0
4
140 1F
T6108-8WF7
3000
109.0
81.0
4
141 to 149 for future applications
Other types
150 1F
T6108-8AF7
3000
37.0
25.0
4
151 1F
T6105-8SH7
4500
40.0
41.0
4
152 1F
T6136-6SF7
3000
145.0
104.0
3
153 1F
T6021-6AK7
6000
0.3
1.1
3
154 1F
T6024-6AK7
6000
0.5
0.9
3
155 1F
T6163-8SB7
1500
385.0
136.0
4
156 1F
T6163-8SD7
2500
340.0
185.0
4
157 1F
T6168-8SB7
1500
540.0
174.0
4
158 to 159 for future applications
Compact
160 1F
K7022-5AK71
6000
0.6
1.4
3
161 1F
K7032-5AK71
6000
0.75
1.4
3
162 1F
K7040-5AK71
6000
1.1
1.7
4
163 1F
K7042-5AF71
3000
2.6
1.9
4
164 1F
K7042-5AK71
6000
1.5
2.4
4
165 1F
K7060-5AF71
3000
4.7
3.7
4
166 1F
K7060-5AH71
4500
3.7
4.1
4
167 1F
K7063-5AF71
3000
7.3
5.6
4
168 1F
K7063-5AH71
4500
3.0
3.8
4
169 1F
K7080-5AF71
3000
6.2
4.4
4
170 1F
K7080-5AH71
4500
4.5
4.7
4
171 1F
K7083-5AF71
3000
10.5
7.4
4
172 1F
K7083-5AH71
4500
3.0
3.6
4
173 1F
K7100-5AF71
3000
12.0
8.0
4
174 1F
K7101-5AF71
3000
15.5
10.5
4
175 1F
K7103-5AF71
3000
14.0
12.0
4
176 1F
K7042-5AH71
4500
2.2
2.2
4
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-45
Parameterization
08.2009
Input in
P096
Motor order number
(MPRD)
Speed
nn [rpm]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
Current
In [A]
Number
of pole
pairs
177 1F
K7105-5AC7
2000
37.0
16.0
4
178 1F
K7105-5AF7
3000
26.0
18.0
4
2000
7.2
3.4
3
179 to 199 for future applications
Explosion-proof
200 1F
S6074-6AC71
201 1F
S6074-6AF71
3000
6.3
4.4
3
202 1F
S6074-6AH71
4500
4.5
5.0
3
203 1F
S6074-6AK71
6000
1.9
3.2
3
204 1F
S6096-8AC71
2000
20.0
9.8
4
205 1F
S6096-6AF71
3000
17.0
12.0
4
206 1F
S6096-8AH71
4500
11.0
11.5
4
207 1F
S6115-8AB73
1500
37.0
13.0
4
208 1F
S6115-8AC73
2000
34.0
16.0
4
209 1F
S6115-8AF73
3000
28.0
20.0
4
210 1F
S6134-6AB73
1500
68.0
22.0
3
211 1F
S6134-6AC73
2000
59.0
24.0
3
212 1F
S6134-6AF73
3000
34.0
22.0
3
213 to
253
for future applications
Table 8-6
8-46
Motor list 1FK6 / 1FK7 / 1FT6 / 1FS6
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
Torque motors
1FW3
Input in
P099
Motor order
number (MPRD)
Speed
nn [rpm]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
Current
In [A]
Number
of pole
pairs
1 1F
W3201-1.H
300
300
22
14
2 1F
W3202-1.H
300
500
37
14
3 1F
W3203-1.H
300
750
59
14
4 1F
W3204-1.H
300
1000
74
14
5 1F
W3206-1.H
300
1500
117
14
6 1F
W3208-1.H
300
2000
152
14
7 1F
W3AH150 gen.
General template for customer-specific
1FW3
7
8 1F
W3AH200 gen.
General template for customer-specific
1FW3
14
9 1F
W3AH280 gen.
General template for customer-specific
1FW3
17
10 1F
W3281-1.G
250
2400
153
17
11 1F
W3283-1.G
250
3400
222
17
12 1F
W3285-1.G
250
4800
306
17
13 1F
W3288-1.G
250
6700
435
17
14 1F
W3281-1.E
150
2500
108
17
15 1F
W3283-1.E
150
3500
150
17
16 1F
W3285-1.E
150
5000
207
17
17 1F
W3288-1.E
150
7000
292
17
18 to 30
for future applications
31 1F
W3150-1.H
300
100
7
7
32 1F
W3150-1.L
500
100
11
7
33 1F
W3150-1.P
800
100
17
7
34 1F
W3152-1.H
300
200
14
7
35 1F
W3152-1.L
500
200
22
7
36 1F
W3152-1.P
800
200
32
7
37 1F
W3154-1.H
300
300
20
7
38 1F
W3154-1.L
500
300
32
7
39 1F
W3154-1.P
800
300
47
7
40 1F
W3155-1.H
300
400
28
7
41 1F
W3155-1.L
500
400
43
7
42 1F
W3155-1.P
800
400
64
7
43 1F
W3156-1.H
300
500
34
7
44 1F
W3156-1.L
500
500
53
7
45 1F
W3156-1.P
800
500
76
7
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-47
Parameterization
08.2009
Input in
P099
Motor order
number (MPRD)
46 to 60
for future applications
Speed
nn [rpm]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
Current
In [A]
Number
of pole
pairs
61 1F
W3201-1.E
150
300
12
14
62 1F
W3201-1.L
500
300
37
14
63 1F
W3202-1.E
150
500
21
14
64 1F
W3202-1.L
500
500
59
14
65 1F
W3203-1.E
150
750
30
14
66 1F
W3203-1.L
500
750
92
14
67 1F
W3204-1.E
150
1000
40
14
68 1F
W3204-1.L
500
1000
118
14
69 1F
W3206-1.E
150
1500
65
14
70 1F
W3206-1.L
500
1400
169
14
71 1F
W3208-1.E
150
2000
84
14
72 1F
W3208-1.L
500
1850
226
14
73 to 253 for future applications
Table 8-7
8-48
Motor list 1FW3
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
Asynchronous
motors
1PH7 / 1PL6 / 1PH4
For 1PH7, 1PH4, and 1PL6 motors, the up-to-date calculation data
have been stored in the unit. These might differ from the rating plate
slightly. Always use the data stored. The magnetization current is
determined by automatic parameterization.
NOTE
1PH7xxx is the new designation of what were formerly 1PA6xxx
motors. The 1PH7xxx and 1PA6xxx data therefore tally.
Input in
P097
Motor order
number
(MPRD)
Rated
speed
nn [rpm]
Pole pair Current
number
In [A]
Zp
Voltage
Un [V]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
Frequency
fn [Hz]
1 1PH7
101-2_F
1750
2
9.7
398
23.5
60.0
2 1PH7
103-2_D
1150
2
9.7
391
35.7
40.6
3 1PH7
103-2_F
1750
2
12.8
398
34.1
61.0
4 1PH7
103-2_G
2300
2
16.3
388
31.1
78.8
5 1PH7
105-2_F
1750
2
17.2
398
43.7
60.0
6 1PH7
107-2_D
1150
2
17.1
360
59.8
40.3
7 1PH7
107-2_F
1750
2
21.7
381
54.6
60.3
8 1PH7
131-2_F
1750
2
23.7
398
70.9
59.7
9 1PH7
133-2_D
1150
2
27.5
381
112.1
39.7
10 1PH7
133-2_F
1750
2
33.1
398
95.5
59.7
11 1PH7
133-2_G
2300
2
42.4
398
93.4
78.0
12 1PH7
135-2_F
1750
2
40.1
398
117.3
59.5
13 1PH7
137-2_D
1150
2
40.6
367
161.9
39.6
14 1PH7
137-2_F
1750
2
53.1
357
136.4
59.5
15 1PH7
137-2_G
2300
2
54.1
398
120.4
77.8
16 1PH7
163-2_B
400
2
28.2
274
226.8
14.3
17 1PH7
163-2_D
1150
2
52.2
364
207.6
39.2
18 1PH7
163-2_F
1750
2
69.1
364
185.5
59.2
19 1PH7
163-2_G
2300
2
77.9
374
157.8
77.4
20 1PH7
167-2_B
400
2
35.6
294
310.4
14.3
21 1PH7
167-2_D
1150
2
66.4
357
257.4
39.1
22 1PH7
167-2_F
1750
2
75.3
398
223.7
59.2
23 1PH7
184-2_B
400
2
51.0
271
390
14.2
24 1PH7
184-2_D
1150
2
89.0
383
366
39.2
25 1PH7
184-2_F
1750
2
120.0
388
327
59.0
26 1PH7
184-2_L
2900
2
158.0
395
265
97.4
27 1PH7
186-2_B
400
2
67.0
268
505
14.0
28 1PH7
186-2_D
1150
2
116.0
390
482
39.1
29 1PH7
186-2_F
1750
2
169.0
385
465
59.0
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-49
Parameterization
Input in
P097
08.2009
Motor order
number
(MPRD)
Rated
speed
nn [rpm]
Pole pair Current
number
In [A]
Zp
Voltage
Un [V]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
Frequency
fn [Hz]
30 1PH7
186-2_L
2900
2
206.0
385
333
97.3
31 1PH7
224-2_B
400
2
88.0
268
725
14.0
32 1PH7
224-2_D
1150
2
160.0
385
670
38.9
33 1PH7
224-2_U
1750
2
203.0
395
600
58.9
34 1PH7
224-2_L
2900
2
274.0
395
490
97.3
35 1PH7
226-2_B
400
2
114.0
264
935
14.0
36 1PH7
226-2_D
1150
2
197.0
390
870
38.9
37 1PH7
226-2_F
1750
2
254.0
395
737
58.9
38 1PH7
226-2_L
2900
2
348.0
390
610
97.2
39 1PH7
228-2_B
400
2
136.0
272
1145
13.9
40 1PH7
228-2_D
1150
2
238.0
390
1070
38.9
41 1PH7
228-2_F
1750
2
342.0
395
975
58.8
42 1PH7
228-2_L
2900
2
402.0
395
708
97.2
43 1PL6
184-4_B
400
2 69.0
300
585
14.4
44 1PL6
184-4_D
1150
2
121.0
400
540
39.4
45 1PL6
184-4_F
1750
2
166.0
400
486
59.3
46 1PL6
184-4_L
2900
2
209.0
400
372
97.6
47 1PL6
186-4_B
400
2 90.0
290
752
14.3
48 1PL6
186-4_D
1150
2
158.0
400
706
39.4
49 1PL6
186-4_F
1750
2
231.0
400
682
59.3
50 1PL6
186-4_L
2900
2
280.0
390
494
97.5
51 1PL6
224-4_B
400
2
117.0
300
1074
14.2
52 1PL6
224-4_D
1150
2
218.0
400
997
39.1
53 1PL6
224-4_F
1750
2
292.0
400
900
59.2
54 1PL6
224-4_L
2900
2
365.0
400
675
97.5
55 1PL6
226-4_B
400
2
145.0
305
1361
14.0
56 1PL6
226-4_D
1150
2
275.0
400
1287
39.2
57 1PL6
226-4_F
1750
2
350.0
400
1091
59.1
58 1PL6
226-4_L
2900
2
470.0
400
889
97.4
59 1PL6
228-4_B
400
2
181.0
305
1719
14.0
60 1PL6
228-4_D
1150
2
334.0
400
1578
39.2
61 1PL6
228-4_F
1750
2
470.0
400
1446
59.0
62 1PL6
228-4_L
2900
2
530.0
400
988
97.3
63 1PH4
103-4_F
1500
2
20.2
350
48
52.9
64 1PH4
105-4_F
1500
2
27.3
350
70
53.1
65 1PH4
107-4_F
1500
2
34.9
350
89
52.8
66 1PH4
133-4_F
1500
2
34.1
350
95
51.9
8-50
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Parameterization
Input in
P097
Motor order
number
(MPRD)
Rated
speed
nn [rpm]
Pole pair Current
number
In [A]
Zp
Voltage
Un [V]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
Frequency
fn [Hz]
67 1PH4
135-4_F
1500
2
51.2
350
140
51.6
68 1PH4
137-4_F
1500
2
60.5
350
172
51.6
69 1PH4
163-4_F
1500
2
86.3
350
236
50.9
70 1PH4
167-4_F
1500
2
103.3
350
293
51.0
71 1PH4
168-4_F
1500
2
113.0
350
331
51.0
72 1PH7
107-2_G
2300
2
24.8
398
50
78.6
73 1PH7
167-2_G
2000
2
88.8
350
196
67.4
1150
2
478.0
400
2325
38.9
74 to 99 for future applications
100 1PL6
101 to
253
284-..D.
for future applications
Table 8-8
Motor list 1PH7 / 1PL6 / 1PH4
For information about motor ratings and availability please see Catalog
DA65.3 "Synchronous and asynchronous servomotors for SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES".
The data stored under the motor numbers describe the design point of
the motor. In Chapter 3 "Induction servo motors" of Catalog DA65.3 two
operating points are indicated for operation with MASTERDRIVES MC.
The operating points are calculated for 400 V and 480 V AC line
voltage on the converter input side.
The data for the 480 V line voltage are stored in the control system as
the rated motor current is slightly lower for a few motors in this
operating point.
P293 "Field weakening frequency" is always decisive for the actual field
weakening operating point. The field weakening frequency P293 is
automatically calculated for a line voltage of 400 V.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-51
Parameterization
8.10 Motor
08.2009
identification
From Version V1.30 onwards, automatic motor identification is
available. In the case of Siemens motors (P095 = 1 or 2 ) the motor
type is first selected in P096 or P097. In the case of non-Siemens
motors (P095 = 3 or 4), the rating plate data and number of pole pairs
have to be entered, and then automatic paramterizing is called with
P115 = 1.
After exit from the "drive initial start-up" status with P060 = 1, P115 = 2
is set and hence motor identification is selected. The converter must
now be switched in within 30 s so that measuring can start. The alarm
A078 is set during the 30 s.
CAUTION
The motor shaft can move slightly during the measurement operation.
The motor cables are live. Voltages are present at the converter output
terminals and hence also at the motor terminals; they are therefore
hazardous to touch.
WARNING
It must be ensured that no danger for persons and equipment can
occur by energizing the power and the unit.
If measurement is not started within 30 s or if it is interrupted by an OFF
command, error F114 is set. The converter status during measurement
is "Motid-Still" (r001 = 18). Measurement is ended automatically, and
the converter reverts to the status "Ready for start-up” (r001 = 009).
In current-controlled mode (P290 = 0), automatic motor identification
should always be performed during initial start-up.
8.11 Complete
parameterization
To make full use of the complete functionality of the inverter/converter,
parameterization must be carried out in accordance with the
"Compendium". You will find the relevant instructions, function
diagrams and complete lists of parameters, binectors and connectors in
the Compendium.
8-52
Language Compe
ndium order number
German 6SE70
80-0QX70
English 6SE70
87-6QX70
French 6SE70
87-7QX70
Spanish 6SE70
87-8QX70
Italian 6SE70
87-2QX70
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Maintenance
9 Maintenance
DANGER
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES units are operated at high voltages.
All work carried out on or with the equipment must conform to all the
national electrical codes (BGV A3 in Germany).
Maintenance and service work may only be executed by qualified
personnel.
Only spare parts authorized by the manufacturer may be used.
The prescribed maintenance intervals and also the instructions for
repair and replacement must be complied with.
Hazardous voltages are still present in the drive units up to 5 minutes
after the converter has been powered down due to the DC link
capacitors. Thus, the unit or the DC link terminals must not be worked
on until at least after this delay time.
The power terminals and control terminals can still be at hazardous
voltage levels even when the motor is stationary.
If it is absolutely necessary that the drive converter be worked on when
powered-up:
♦ Never touch any live parts.
♦ Only use the appropriate measuring and test equipment and
protective clothing.
♦ Always stand on an ungrounded, isolated and ESD-compatible pad.
If these warnings are not observed, this can result in death, severe
bodily injury or significant material damage.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-1
Maintenance
9.1
08.2009
Replacing the fan
The fan is designed for an operating time of L10 ≥ 35 000 hours at an
ambient temperature of Tu = 40 °C. It should be replaced in good time
to maintain the availability of the unit.
The units have a fan which operates as soon as the unit is connected to
the voltage supply.
DANGER
To replace the fan the converter has to be disconnected from the
supply and removed.
DANGER
Make sure that the leads to the fan are connected the right way round.
Otherwise the fan will not operate!
Construction types
A to C
The fan is located on the bottom of the unit.
Replace the fan as follows:
♦ Undo the two M4x49 Torx screws
♦ Pull out the protective cover together with the fan from underneath
♦ Withdraw fan connector X20
♦ Install the fan in reverse sequence.
X20
24 V DC
M4 x 49
Torx T20
and
spring washer
Protective cover
Fan E1
M4 x 49 / Torx T20
and spring washer
Fig. 9-1
9-2
Cover and fan for housing size A to C
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Construction type D
Maintenance
The fan is screwed onto a bracket and is located at the bottom section
of the unit.
Replace the fan as follows:
♦ Withdraw fan connector X20.
♦ Unscrew the two M5x16 Torx screws at the bottom of the unit.
♦ Pull the bracket out of the unit from underneath.
♦ Unscrew the M4 fan screws.
♦ Install the fan in reverse sequence.
Fan
M4 screw (Torx T20)
Captive washer
Bracket
Washer
Spring washer
Washer
Spring washer
M5x16
Torx T25
Fig. 9-2
Replacing the fan
fuse (type D)
M5x16
Torx T25
Fan with bracket for housing size D
The fuses are located in the upper section of the unit in a fuse holder.
You have to open the fuse holder to replace the fuses.
Fuse link
Fuse holder
closed
Fig. 9-3
Fuse holder
open
Fuse holder for housing size D
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-3
Maintenance
9.2
08.2009
Replacing the PMU
Replacing the PMU
♦ Turn the snaps on the front cover by 90 °
♦ Open up the front cover
♦ Withdraw connector X108 on the CU (Control Unit)
♦ Remove ribbon cable from the guide hooks
♦ Carefully press the snap catches upwards on the inner side of the
front cover using a screwdriver
♦ Tilt the PMU and remove it
♦ Install new PMU in reverse sequence.
Rear side of the
front cover
Snap catches
PMU-board
Fig. 9-4
9-4
Replacing the PMU
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Forming
10 Forming
CAUTION
How the serial
number is made up
If a unit has been non-operational for more than one year, the DC link
capacitors have to be newly formed. If this is not carried out, the unit
can be damaged when the line voltage is powered up.
If the unit was started-up within one year after having been
manufactured, the DC link capacitors do not have to be re-formed. The
date of manufacture of the unit can be read from the serial number.
(Example: A-N60147512345)
Digit Examp
1 and 2
le
A-
3X
4
Meaning
Place of manufacture
2009
A
2010
B
2011
C
2012
D
2013
E
2014
F
2015
1 to 9
January to September
O
October
N
November
D
December
5 to 14
Not relevant for forming
The following applies for the above example:
Manufacture took place in June 2001.
During forming, the DC link of the unit is connected up via a rectifier, a
smoothing capacitor and a resistor.
During forming a defined voltage and a limited current are applied to
the DC link capacitors and the internal conditions necessary for the
function of the DC link capacitors are restored again.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
10-1
Forming
08.2009
3AC 400V
A
C
R
C / L+
D / L-
Forming
Motorconnection
Disconnect
U1/L1
U2/T1
V1/L2
V2/T2
W1/L3
W2/T3
Rectifier
Pre-charging
DC link
Inverter
PE1
PE2
Fig. 10-1
Components for the
forming circuit
(suggestion)
Forming circuit
Un
3AC 380 V to 480 V
ARC
SKD 62 / 16
470 Ω / 100 W
22 nF / 1600 V
DANGER
The unit has hazardous voltage levels up to 5 minutes after it has been
powered down due to the DC link capacitors. The unit or the DC link
terminals must not be worked on until at least after this delay time.
Procedure
♦ Before you form the unit, all mains connections must be
disconnected.
♦ The converter incoming power supply must be switched off.
♦ The unit is not permitted to receive a switch-on command (e.g. via
the keyboard of the PMU or the terminal strip).
♦ Connect the required components in accordance with the circuit
example.
♦ Energize the forming circuit. The duration of forming is approx. 1
hour.
10-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
11
Technical Data
Technical Data
EU low-voltage directives
73/23/EEC and RL93/68/EEC
EU directive EMC 89/336/EEC
EU machine directive
89/392/EEC
Approval
Switching at the input
Type of cooling
Permissible ambient and coolingmedium temperature
• during operation
• during storage
• during transport
Installation altitude
Permissible humidity rating
Climatic class
Degree of pollution
Overvoltage category
Degree of protection
Class of protection
Shock protection
Radio interference suppression
• Standard
• Options
Interference immunity
Paint finish
Mechanical specifications
- Vibrations
During stationary use:
Constant amplitude
• of deflection
• of acceleration
During transport:
• of deflection
• of acceleration
- Shocks
- Drop and topple
Miscellaneous
EN 50178
EN 61800-3
EN 60204-1
UL:
E 145 153
CSA: LR 21 927
2 switching operations per minute
Air cooling with built-in fan or
air-cooling with additional water cooling
0° C to +40° C ( 32° F to 104° F)
(up to 50° C see Fig. "Derating curves“)
-25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
-25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
≤ 1000 m above sea level (100 % load capability)
> 1000 m to 4000 m above sea level
(for load capability, see Fig. "Derating curves“)
Relative humidity
≤ 95 % during transport and storage
≤ 85 % during operation (moisture
condensation not permissible)
Class 3K3 to DIN IEC 721-3-3 (during operation)
Pollution degree 2 to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110. Part 1).
Moisture condensation during operation is not permissible
Category III to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110. Part 2)
IP20 to EN 60529
Class 1 to EN 536 (DIN VDE 0106. Part 1)
to EN 60204-1 and DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 (BGV A3)
to EN 61800-3
No radio interference suppression
Radio interference suppression filter for Class B1 or A1 to EN 55011
Industrial to EN 61800-3
For interior installation
to DIN IEC 68-2-6
0.075 mm in the frequency range 10 Hz to 58 Hz
9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 58 Hz to 500 Hz
3.5 mm in the frequency range 5 Hz to 9 Hz
9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 9 Hz to 500 Hz
to DIN IEC 68-2-27 / 08.89
30 g. 16 ms half-sine shock
to DIN IEC 68-2-31 / 04.84
on a surface and on a corner
The devices are ground-fault protected, short-circuit-proof and idlingproof on the motor side
Table 11-1
General data
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-1
Technical Data
08.2009
Complete fulfillment of the degree of
protection IP20 in accordance with
EN 60529 is dependent on how many
incoming and outgoing control cables
cover the opening area on the lower
section of the unit. If degree of
protection IP20 also has to be met in
operation, the opening may have to
be subsequently reduced.
NOTE
Permissible rated input voltage in %
acc. to VDE 0110 / IEC 664-1
(not necessary acc. to UL / CSA)
Permissible rated current in %
100
100
<1>
75
75
50
25
0
0
2
4
6
8
50
10
Pulse frequency in kHz
Permissible rated current in %
90
80
70
1000
2000
3000
1000
2000
3000
4000
Installation altitude above sea level in m
<1>
The more favourable derating curve is only applicable
for units of sizes B to D at a rated input voltage
of 380 - 400 V
100
60
0
0
4000
Altitude
[m]
Derating
factor K1
1000
1.0
2000
0.9
3000
0.845
4000
0.8
Temp
[°C]
Derating
factor K2
50
0.76
45
0.879
40
1.0
Installation altitude above sea level in m
Permissible rated current in %
100
75
50
25
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
35
1.125 *
30
1.25 *
25
1.375 *
* See
following
note
Coolant temperature in °C
Fig. 11-1
11-2
Derating curves
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Technical Data
The derating of the permissible rated current for installation altitudes of
over 1000 m and at ambient temperatures below 40 °C is calculated as
follows:
Total derating = Deratingaltitude x Deratingambient temperature
K = K1 x K2
NOTE
It must be borne in mind that total derating must not be greater than 1!
Example:
Altitude: 3000 m
K1 = 0.845
Ambient temperature: 35 °C
K2 = 1.125
→ Total derating = 0.845 x 1.125 = 0.95
Rating plate
Unit designation
List of unit options
Year of manufacture
Month of manufacture
Fig. 11-2
Date of manufacture
Rating plate
The date of manufacture can be derived as follows:
Character
Year of manufacture
Character
Month of manufacture
U
2006
1 to 9
January to September
V
2007
O
October
W
2008
N
November
X
2009
D
December
Table 11-2
Assignment of characters to the month and year of manufacture
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-3
Technical Data
08.2009
Option codes
Option Meaning Option
Meaning
SBP: Pulse encoder evaluation
C11
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
Slot A
G91
G92
G93
G95
G97
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G
SBR1: Resolver evaluation
without pulse encoder simulation
C23
Slot C
SBR2: Resolver evaluation with
pulse encoder evaluation
C33
Slot C
SBM2: Encoder and absolutevalue encoder evaluation
C41
C42
C43
Slot A
Slot B
Slot C
F01
Technology software
F02
"Power Extension PIN"
Activation of 2.5 kHz pulse
frequency
SLB: SIMOLINK
G41
G43
G44
G45
G46
G47
Slot A
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G
Table 11-3
11-4
CBP2: PROFIBUS (sync freq possible)
Slot A
Slot B
Slot C
Slot E
Slot G
CBC: CAN-Bus
G21
G23
G24
G25
G26
G27
Slot A
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G
EB1: Expansion Board 1
Slot A
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G
G61
G63
G64
G65
G66
G67
EB2: Expansion Board 2
Slot A
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G
G71
G73
G74
G75
G76
G77
K11
LBA backplane adapter installed in the
electronics box
K01
K02
Adapter board ADB
Mounting position 2 (Slot D, E)
Mounting position 3 (Slot F, G)
K80
“Safe STOP” option
Meaning of the option codes
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Technical Data
Designation
Value
Order number 6SE70...
Rated voltage
Input
Output
Rated frequency
Input
Output
Rated current
Input
Output
DC link voltage
Rated output
Aux. power supply
Pulse frequency
16-1EA 1
18-0EA 1
21-0EA 1
21-3EB 1
21-8EB 1
22-6EC 1
[V]
3 AC 380 to 480 (-15 % / +10 %)
3 AC 0 up to rated input voltage x 0.86
[Hz]
50/60 ± 6 %
0 ... 400
[A]
6.7
6.1
8.8
8.0
11.2
10.2
4.0...4.9
5.3...6.4
6.7...8.1
[V]
[kVA]
14.5
13.2
19.3
17.5
28.1
25.5
510 ... 650
[V]
8.7...10.5
11.5...13.9 16.8...20.3
DC 24 (20 -30) (2.0 A without options; more with options)
[kHz]
5.0 - 10.0 (see Fig. "Derating curves")
Load class II acc. to EN60146-1-1:
Base load current
0.91 x rated output current
Overload current
1.6 x rated output current
Cycle time
300 s
Overload duration
30 s
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
Line cosϕ1N
Converter cosϕU
> 0.98
> 0.98
> 0.98
> 0.98
> 0.98
> 0.98
< 0.92 ind. < 0.92 ind. < 0.92 ind. < 0.92 ind. < 0.92 ind. < 0.92 ind.
Efficiency η
Pulse frequency 5 kHz
0.97
0.97
0.97
0.98
0.98
0.98
Dissipated losses
[kW]
Pulse frequency 5 kHz
0.15
0.17
0.21
0.23
0.30
0.43
Cooling air required
0.009
0.009
0.009
0.022
0.022
0.028
[m³/s]
Sound pressure level, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level [dB(A)]
60
60
60
60
60
60
Type of construction
A
A
A
B
B
C
90
425
350
90
425
350
90
425
350
135
425
350
135
425
350
180
600
350
8.5
8.5
8.5
12.5
12.5
21
Dimensions
[mm]
Width
Height
Depth
Weight approx.
[kg]
= 5 corresponds to MASTERDRIVES Motion Control
= 7 corresponds to MASTERDRIVES Motion Control Performance 2
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-5
Technical Data
08.2009
Designation
Value
Order number 6SE70...
Rated voltage
Input
Output
Rated frequency
Input
Output
Rated current
Input
Output
DC link voltage
Rated output
Aux. power supply
Pulse frequency
23-4EC 1
23-8ED 1
24-7ED 1
26-0ED 1
27-2ED 1
[V]
3 AC 380 to 480 (-15 % / +10 %)
3 AC 0 up to rated input voltage x 0.86
[Hz]
50/60 ± 6 %
0 ... 400
[A]
37.4
34.0
41.3
37.5
51.7
47.0
[V]
64.9
59.0
79.2
72.0
510 ... 650
[kVA] 22.4...27.1 24.7...29.9 30.9...37.4 38.8...47.0 47.4...57.4
[V]
DC 24 (20 -30) (2.0 A without options; more with options)
[kHz]
5.0 - 10.0
Load class II acc. to EN60146-1-1:
Base load current
Overload current
Cycle time
Overload duration
0.91 x rated output current
1.6 x rated output current
300 s
30 s
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
Line cosϕ1N
Converter cosϕU
> 0.98
> 0.98
> 0.98
> 0.98
> 0.98
< 0.92 ind. < 0.92 ind. < 0.92 ind. < 0.92 ind. < 0.92 ind.
Efficiency η
Pulse frequency 5 kHz
0.98
0.97
0.98
0.98
0.98
Dissipated losses
[kW]
Pulse frequency 5 kHz
0.59
0.70
0.87
1.02
1.27
Cooling air required
0.028
0.054
0.054
0.054
0.054
[m³/s]
Sound pressure level, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level [dB(A)]
60
65
65
65
65
Type of construction
C
D
D
D
D
180
600
350
270
600
350
270
600
350
270
600
350
270
600
350
21
32
32
32
32
Dimensions
[mm]
Width
Height
Depth
Weight approx.
[kg]
= 5 corresponds to MASTERDRIVES Motion Control
= 7 corresponds to MASTERDRIVES Motion Control Performance 2
Table 11-4
11-6
Technical data
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Technical Data
Water-cooled
converter
Order No.
Power loss
(at 2.5 kHz)
[kW]
Coolingwater
requirement *)
[l/min]
Maximum
additional heatdissipation power
at Tair ≤ 30 °C
[kW]
Typical pressure drop
according to volumetric flow
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 1.2 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 1.2 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 2.6 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 2.6 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 6.0 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 6.0 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 6.0 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 6.0 l/min
Rated input voltage 3 AC 380 to 480
6SE7021-3EB
6SE7021-8EB
6SE7022-6EC
6SE7023-4EC
6SE7023-8ED
6SE7024-7ED
6SE7026-0ED
6SE7027-2ED
1-1AA1
1-1AA1
1-1AA1
1-1AA1
1-1AA1
1-1AA1
1-1AA1
1-1AA1
0.21
0.16
0.33
0.47
0.58
0.71
0.86
1.07
1.00
1.20
2.10
2.60
4.25
4.80
5.25
6.00
= 5 corresponds to MASTERDRIVES Motion Control
= 7 corresponds to MASTERDRIVES Motion Control Performance 2
Table 11-5
NOTE
Water-cooled converter
These units and the air-cooled converters are identically constructed.
Instead of the heat sink for air, an air/water cooler has been installed.
All the technical data not listed in Table 11-5 for a particular unit are the
same as those of the air-cooled converter. The first 12 positions of the
Order No. are identical. The supplement "-1AA1” indicates water
cooling.
*)
The cooling water requirement applies for the unit rating of the converter and 100%
utilization of the additional heat dissipation obtained from a water temperature rise
intake/return of ∆T = 5 K.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-7
Technical Data
11.1
08.2009
Notes regarding water-cooled units
Other conditions
affecting operation
The unit is to be connected to an existing external cooling-water circuit.
The construction of this cooling-water circuit under the aspects of
♦ open or closed circuit
♦ choice and juxtaposition of materials
♦ composition of cooling water
♦ cooling-water cooling (recooling, supply of fresh cooling water)
♦ and others
have an important effect on the safe functioning and service life of the
whole installation.
WARNING
The warnings given under “Standard units" apply.
Installation and servicing work on the water cooling system must be
performed with the power disconnected.
There must be no condensation on the units (also applies to standard
units).
11-8
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
11.1.1
Technical Data
Notes regarding installation and components
A closed-circuit water-cooling system of stainless steel with water/water
heat exchanger is recommended for the converters.
To prevent electrochemical corrosion and transfer of vibration,
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES are to be connected to water supply
and return lines by flexible, electrically non-conducting hose. The
hose length (in total) should be > 1.5 m.
If plastic piping is used in the installation, this hose is not necessary.
The water hoses should be connected up before the converter is
installed.
If hose clips are used, they should be checked for tightness at threemonthly intervals.
Filling
1 1/4"
Safety
valve
< 1 bar /
< 2.5 bar
1 bar/
2.5 bar
System
Control cubicle
Pump
FU1
Primary circuit
Diaphragm expansion
tank
FUn
Automatic
venting
Filter
Thermostatic controller
Fig. 11-3
Water-water heat
exchangers
V/E flow monitor
Water-to-water heat exchanger
If a water supply system is already available in the plant which does not
exceed temperatures above 35 °C but does not fulfil the cooling water
requirements, the two cooling systems can be connected using a waterwater heat exchanger.
The coolers of the frequency converters are connected via a manifold
so that the necessary flow rate is ensured but the pressure does not
exceed the permitted value. Factors such as height differences and
distances must be taken into account.
For devices without antifreeze, we recommend using Nalco 00GE 056
from ONDEO Nalco. This is an organic corrosion inhibitor specially
developed for semi-open and closed cooling systems. It protects metals
against corrosion by forming a protective organic film on the surface of
the metal.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-9
Technical Data
08.2009
The operating pressure is to be adjusted according to the flow
conditions in the supply and return sides of the water cooling system.
The user must take measures to ensure that the max. permissible
operating pressure is not exceeded. Use must be made of a pressure
regulating device.
Closed-circuit cooling systems are to be provided with pressure
balancing devices with safety valve *) and air venting devices.
The air must be let out of the cooling system while filling is in progress.
To ensure that the necessary volume keeps flowing, flushback filters
should be fitted instead of the normal pipe strainer. Flushback filters
automatically take care of the return flow.
These are manufactured by, for example, Reckitt Benckiser
Deutschland GmbH, D-68165 Mannheim, Tel.: ++490621/32460.
ASI 1 Information Bulletin E20125-C6038-J702-A1-7400 of February
1997 contains information about suggested plant configurations for
various applications.
Water piping must be laid with extreme care. The pipes must be
properly secured mechanically and checked for leakage.
Water pipes must under no circumstances make contact with live parts
(insulation clearance: at least 13 mm).
*)
11-10
≤ 1.2 bar at a permissible operating pressure of 1.0 bar
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Technical Data
11.1.2
Application
In application, the same general conditions apply as to standard units
(with air cooling), with the exception of the cooling conditions described
below.
Water is normally used as the cooling medium (see Section "Coolant").
Antifreeze is added only in exceptional cases.
Within a cooling water temperature range of from + 5 °C to + 38 °C, the
unit can be operated at 100% rated current.
If higher cooling water temperatures are necessary, the unit operating
current must be reduced as shown in Figures 11-4 and 11-5 (Curve 1).
This applies only where water is used as the cooling medium (see
notes in Section "Anti-condensation, Antifreeze").
Derating Curve IP22
Permissible rated current in %
105
100
95
1
90
85
80
75
70
65
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Supply temperature in °C
Water
20 % Mixture -10 °C
34 % Mixture -20 °C
44 % Mixture -30 °C
Fig. 11-4
Reduction curve applying to installation in IP22 cabinets
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-11
Technical Data
08.2009
Derating Curve Water IP54
Permissible rated current in %
105
100
95
1
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Supply temperature in °C
Water
20 % Mixture -10 °C
33 % Mixture -20 °C
44 % Mixture -30 °C
Fig. 11-5
Reduction curve 2 applying to installation in IP54 cabinets
NOTE
The maximum coolant temperature is 50 °C for IP22 cubicles and 46 °C
for IP54 cubicles!
11-12
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
11.1.3
Technical Data
Coolant
Normal service water with corrosion protection (see section "Corrosion
protection agent") or a water/antifreeze mixture (see section "Antifreeze
additive") can be used as a coolant.
11.1.3.1 Defini
tion of cooling water
The cooling water must meet the following requirements in the long
term:
Max. grain size of any entrained particles
≤ 0.1 mm
pH value
6.0 to 8.0
Chloride
< 40 ppm
Sulfate
< 50 ppm
Dissolved substances
< 340 ppm
Total hardness
< 170 ppm
Conductivity (water only, also see Section
"Antifreeze additive")
< 500 µS/cm
Cooling water inlet temperature
+ 5 ... 38 °C
Cooling water temperature rise per unit (rated
operation)
∆ T ≈ 5 °C
Operating pressure
1 bar
Alternatively, use deionized water (“battery water” in accordance with
DIN 43530, Part 4).
NOTICE
Operating pressures higher than 1 bar are not permissible!
If the system is operating at a higher pressure, the supply pressure
must be reduced to 1 bar at each unit.
The heat sink material is not seawater-proof, i.e. it must not be cooled
directly with seawater!
Filters (sieves) with a mesh size of < 100 µm are to be fitted in the unit
water systems (see Section “Notes regarding installation and
components”)!
If there is a risk of freezing, appropriate counter-measures should be
taken for operation, storage and transport, e.g. draining and blowing out
with air, extra heaters, etc.
WARNING
The warning notes for "standard units" apply.
Installation and servicing work on the water systems must always be
performed with the electric power disconnected.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-13
Technical Data
11.1.3.2 Anti
08.2009
freeze additive
By the use of antifreeze, the lower operating temperature limit can be
reduced from + 5 °C to 0 °C, and when not operating the system is
protected against freezing at temperatures down to − 30 °C.
Because of its physical properties (heat absorption, thermal
conductivity, viscosity), antifreeze reduces cooling system efficiency. It
should only be used when absolutely necessary.
Reduction curves for antifreeze are given in the Section "Application"
(Figs. 11-4 and 11-5). Without derating, premature aging of unit
components cannot be ruled out. Converter tripping by the
overtemperature protection must also be expected.
WARNING
Operation at temperatures of < 0 °C is not permitted, not even with
antifreeze!
Use of other media can shorten the service life.
If less that 20 % Antifrogen N is added to the cooling water, the risk of
corrosion is increased, which can shorten the service life.
If more than 30 % Antifrogen N is added to the cooling water, this will
have an adverse effect on heat dissipation and hence on the proper
functioning of the unit. It must always be kept in mind that a higher
pumping capacity is required when Antifrogen N is added to the cooling
water.
When antifreeze is used, no potential differences must occur in the
whole cooling system. If necessary, the components must be
connected with an equipotential bonding strip.
NOTE
Where antifreeze is concerned, pay attention to the information given in
the safety data sheet!
Antifrogen N (made by Clariant; www.clariant.com) is preferred for use
as antifreeze.
Background:
Antifrogen N was thoroughly analysed for this application. Special
attention was given to compatibility with other materials and to
environmental and health aspects. Furthermore, many years of
experience have been gained with Antifrogen N, and the definition of
cooling water is based on this antifreeze agent.
In order to obtain the benefit of the good anti-corrosive properties of
Antifrogen N and water mixtures, the concentration of the mixture must
be at least 20 %.
The use of antifreeze places higher demands on cooling system
tightness because the surface tension of the Antifrogen and water
mixture is about 100 times smaller than that of pure water.
11-14
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Technical Data
Hotwater-proof asbestos-based seals are suitable. For seals with
packing glands, graphite cord can be used. For pipe joints where hemp
is used, coating the hemp with fermit or fermitol has proved effective.
WARNING
Antifrogen N can give rise to leakage at polytetrafluorethylene seals.
Proportion of
Antifrogen N
added [%]
Kinematic
viscosity
[mm²/s]
Relative
pressure loss
0
1.8
1.09
20
3.5
1.311
-10
34
4.72
1.537
-20
45
7.73
1.743
-30
Table 11-6
Antifreeze
protection to
[°C]
Antifrogen N material data at T = 0 °C coolant temperature
More than 45 % impedes heat dissipation and hence proper functioning
of the unit.
It must always be kept in mind that the pumping capacity required
for using Antifrogen N additive must be adjusted, and the
backpressure arising in the unit must also be taken into account.
The necessary coolant flow volume must be attained under all
circumstances.
The electrical conductivity of the coolant is increased when antifreeze is
added to the cooling water. Antifrogen N contains inhibitors to
counteract the attendant increased propensity for electrochemical
corrosion.
To prevent weakening of the inhibitors and the corrosion that would
then result, the following measures are necessary:
1. When the cooling system is drained, it must either be refilled with
the same mixture within 14 days, or it must be flushed out with water
several times and the heat sinks must then be blow through with
compressed air.
2. The water and Antifrogen N mixture must be renewed every 3 to 5
years.
If other antifreeze agents are used, they must be ethylene glycol
based. They must also have been approved by reputable companies in
the automotive industry (GM, Ford, Chrysler).
Example: DOWTHERM SR-1.
Concerning the electrical conductivity of the antifreeze and water
mixture, the antifreeze manufacturer's guidelines apply.
The water that is mixed with the antifreeze must strictly comply with the
definition given in the Section "Definition of cooling water".
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-15
Technical Data
WARNING
08.2009
Use of other agents can shorten the service life.
Mixing different antifreeze agents is not permitted under any
circumstances.
11.1.3.3
Corrosion protection agent
We recommend the use of a corrosion protection inhibitor for the
cooling circuit, e.g. NALCO 00GE056 corrosion protection from
ONDEO Nalco (Nalco Deutschland GmbH, www.nalco.com,
D-60486 Frankfurt, Tel. +49-697934-0). Concentration of the corrosion
protection inhibitor in the cooling water 0.2 ... 0.25 %.
The cooling water should be checked 3 months after the first filling of
the cooling circuit and then once a year.
Control kits for testing the inhibitor concentration are available from
ONDEO Nalco.
NOTE
Always observe the manufacturer’s instructions when refilling the anticorrosion agent.
If any clouding, discoloration or bacteria are detected in the cooling
water, the cooling circuit has to be flushed out and refilled.
An inspection glass should be installed in the cooling circuit to be able
to monitor the cooling water easily.
11-16
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Technical Data
11.1.4
Protection against condensation
Special measures are necessary to prevent condensation.
Condensation occurs when the cooling water inlet temperature is
considerably lower than the room temperature (air temperature). The
permissible temperature difference between cooling water and air
varies according to the relative humidity φ of the room air. The
temperature at which moist air will deposit droplets of water is called
the dew point.
The following table lists the dew points (in °C) for an atmospheric
pressure of 1 bar (≈ height 0 to 500 m above sea level). If the cooling
water temperature is lower than the value given, condensation must be
expected, i.e. the cooling water temperature must always be ≥ dew
point.
Room
temp.
°C
φ=
20 %
φ=
30 %
φ=
40 %
φ=
50 %
φ=
60 %
φ=
70 %
φ=
80 %
φ=
85 %
φ=
90 %
φ=
95 %
φ=
100 %
10
<0
<0
<0
0.2
2.7
4.8
6.7
7.6
8.4
9.2
10
20
<0
2
6
9.3
12
14.3
16.4
17.4
18.3
19.1
20
25
0.6
6.3
10.5
13.8
16.7
19.1
21.2
22.2
23.2
24.1
24.9
30
4.7
10.5
14.9
18.4
21.3
23.8
26.1
27.1
28.1
29
29.9
35
8.7
14.8
19.3
22.9
26
28.6
30.9
32
33
34
34.9
38
11.1
17.4
22
25.7
28.8
31.5
33.8
34.9
36
36.9
37.9
40
12.8
19.1
23.7
27.5
30.6
33.4
35.8
36.9
37.9
38.9
39.9
45
16.8
23.3
28.2
32
35.3
38.1
40.6
41.8
42.9
43.9
44.9
50
20.8
27.5
32.6
36.6
40
42.9
45.5
46.6
47.8
48.9
49.9
Table 11-7
Dew point temperature as a function of relative humidity φ and room
temperature at an altitude of 0 m above sea level
The dew point also depends on the absolute pressure, i.e. on altitude.
The dew points for low atmospheric pressures lie below the value for
sea level, and it is therefore always sufficient to plan the cooling water
supply temperature for an altitude of 0 m.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-17
Technical Data
08.2009
Various measures can be taken to afford protection against
condensation:
1. Temperature control is recommended for this purpose (see Fig.
11-3). The water temperature is controlled as a function of room
temperature. This method is certainly to be preferred where there
are high room temperatures, low water temperatures and high
humidities.
2. Physical dehumidifying. This is only effective in closed rooms. It
comprises operating an air/water heat exchanger with cold water to
constantly condense the moisture out of the room air.
3. A humidity alarm can be installed to give a warning when
condensation is imminent. Such an alarm is available from
ENDRICH (www.endrich.com); when the temperature falls to within
2 K of dew point, a signal contact closes.
11.1.5
Notes on materials
Cooling water installations with copper pipes and/or copper joints are to
be avoided and are possible only if special measures are taken, e.g.
closed cooling circuit, full filtering (i.e. copper ions are filtered out),
water additives (such as the products of Nalco Deutschland GmbH;
www.nalco.com; D-60486 Frankfurt, Tel. +49-697934-0).
The hose connection nozzles on the heat sink side must be of stainless
steel or heavy gauge aluminium. Under no circumstances may the
connection nozzles be of brass or copper.
PVC hoses are not suitable for use with antifreeze!
Hard PVC pipes are suitable for use with the antifreeze agents listed in
Section "Antifreeze additive".
NOTICE
The water cooling system must not contain any zinc at all.
Where antifreeze is used, please note:
zinc reacts with all glycol-based inhibitors.
Never use galvanized pipes for this reason!
If the plant incorporates normal iron pipes or cast iron
accessories (e.g. motor housings), a separate cooling system with
water/water heat exchangers is to be installed for the converters.
If a heat exchanger made of CuNi 90/10 is used, be sure to pay
attention to the water conductivity (hose) (see Section "Note regarding
installation and components").
11-18
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Faults and Alarms
12 Fault
12.1 Fault
s and Alarms
s
Parameter r947
Fault number
r949
Fault value
r951
Fault list
P952
Number of faults
r782
Fault time
If a fault message is not reset before the electronic supply voltage is
switched off, then the fault message will be present again when the
electronic supply is switched on again. The unit cannot be operated
without resetting the fault message.
Number / Fault
F001
Main contactor
checkback
F002
Pre-charging fault
F006
DC link overvoltage
F008
DC link undervoltage
F011
Overcurrent
not Compact PLUS
Cause
The monitoring time of the main contactor
checkback (P600) has expired.
The monitoring time of pre-charging has
expired, i.e. the DC link voltage has not
reached the setpoint within 3 secs.
Due to excessive DC link voltage, shutdown
has occurred. The rated value of the shutdown
threshold is 819 V. Due to component
tolerances shutdown can take place in the
range from 803 V to 835 V.
In the fault value the DC link voltage upon
occurence of the fault is indicated
(normalization 0x7FFF corresponds to 1000V)
The lower limit value of 76% of the DC link
voltage has been fallen short of.
In the fault value the DC link voltage upon
occurence of the fault is indicated
(normalization 0x7FFF corresponds to 1000V)
Overcurrent shutdown has occurred.
The shutdown threshold has been exceeded.
The phase in which an overcurrent has
occurred is indicated in a bit-coded manner in
the fault value (see P949).
Phase U --> Bit 0 = 1--> fault value = 1
Phase V --> Bit 1 = 1--> fault value = 2
Phase W--> Bit 2 = 1--> fault value = 4
Counter-measure
- Check main contactor checkback
- Clear main contactor checkback
(P591.B = 0)
- Increase monitoring time (P600)
- Check voltage connection (AC or DC)
- Unit-dependent:
Check fuses
- Compare value in P070 and unit MLFB
Check the line voltage (AC-AC) or the input
direct voltage (DC-AC). Compare value with
P071 (Line Volts)
- Check the line voltage (AC-AC) or the input
direct voltage (DC-AC). Compare value with
P071 (Line Volts)
- Check input rectifier (AC-AC)
- Check DC link
- Check the converter output for short-circuit or
earth fault
- Check the load for an overload condition
- Check whether motor and converter are
correctly matched
- Check whether the dynamic requirements
are too high
If an overcurrent occurs simultaneously in
several phases, the total of the fault values of
the phases concerned is the resulting fault
value.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-1
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F015
Motor blocked
08.2009
Cause
Motor is blocked/overloaded (current control),
or has stalled (v/f characteristic):
Static load is too high
The fault is not generated until after the time
entered in P805.
Binector B0156 is set, in status word 2 r553
Bit 28.
Whether the drive is blocked or not can be
detected at P792 (Perm Deviation) and P794.
P806 enables detection to be limited to "at
standstill" (P806 = 1, only for current control)
or to be completely de-activated (P806 = 2).
In the case of current control, the precondition
for this fault is that the torque limits (B0234)
have been reached.
Counter-measure
- Reduce the load
- Release the brake
- Increase current limits
- Increase P805 Blocking Time
- Increase the response threshold for the
permissible deviation P792
- Increase torque limits or torque setpoint
- Check connection of motor phases including
correct phase assignment/sequence
v/f characteristic only:
- Reduce rate of acceleration
- Check characteristic setting.
In the case of slave drive, detection is deactivated.
F017
SAFE STOP
Compact PLUS only
F020
Excess temperature of
motor
F021
Motor I2t
F023
Excess temperature of
inverter
In the case of v/f control, the I(max) controller
must be active.
SAFE STOP operating or failure of the 24 V
power supply during operation (only for
Compact PLUS units)
The motor temperature limit value has been
exceeded.
r949 = 1 Motor temperature limit value
exceeded
Jumper applied for SAFE STOP?
SAFE STOP checkback connected?
On Compact PLUS units: check 24 V supply
- Temperature threshold adjustable in P381!
- P131 = 0 -> fault de-activated
- Check the motor (load, ventilation etc.)
r949 = 2 Short-circuit in the motor temperature
sensor cable or sensor defective
- The current motor temperature can be read
in r009 (Motor Temperat.)
r949 = 4 Wire break of motor temperature
sensor cable or sensor defective
Parameterized limit value of the I2t monitoring
for the motor (P384.002) has been exceeded
- Check the sensor for cable break, shortcircuit
Check: Thermal time constant of motor P383
Mot ThermT-Const or motor I2t load limit
P384.002.
The I2t monitoring for the motor is
automatically activated if P383 >=100s
(=factory setting) and P381 > 220°C is set.
Monitoring can be switched off by setting a
value <100s in P383.
- Measure the air intake and ambient
temperature
(Observe minimum and maximum ambient
temperature from 0°C to 45°C!)
The limit value of the inverter temperature has
been undershot or exceeded. In fault value
r949 the temperature at the time of the fault is
saved.
- Observe the derating curves at theta > 45 °C
(Compact PLUS) or 40 °C
- Check whether the fan is running
- Check that the air entry and discharge
openings are not restricted
- In the case of units ³ 22 kW
acknowledgement is only possible after 1
minute
12-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Fault
F025
Faults and Alarms
Cause
For Compact PLUS units: UCE upper switch
UCE upper switch/UCE For chassis type units: UCE Phase L1
Phase L1
F026
For Compact PLUS units:
UCE lower switch
UCE lower switch/UCE
Phase L2
For Compact and chassis type units: UCE
Phase L2
F027
For Compact PLUS AC/AC units: Pulse
resistance fault
Pulse resistor fault /
UCE Phase L3
For chassis type units: UCE Phase L3
F029
Meas. value sensing
Compact PLUS only
A fault has occurred in the measured value
sensing system:
- (r949 = 1) Offset adjustment in phase L1 not
possible
Counter-measure
- Check the converter outputs for earth fault
- Check the switch for "SAFE STOP" on
Compact units
- Check the converter outputs for earth fault
- Check the switch for "SAFE STOP" on
Compact units
- Check the converter outputs for earth fault
- Check the switch for "SAFE STOP" on
Compact DC/DC units and chassis units with
the option "SAFE STOP"
Fault in measured value sensing
Fault in power section (valve cannot block)
Fault on CU
- (r949 = 2) Offset adjustment in phase L3 not
possible.
- (r949 = 3) Offset adjustment in phases L1
and L3 not possible.
F035
External fault 1
F036
External fault 2
F038
Voltage OFF during
parameter storage
F040
Internal fault of
sequence control
F041
EEPROM fault
F042
Time slot overflow
- (r949=65) Autom. Adjustment of the analog
inputs is not possible
Parameterizable external fault input 1 has
been activated.
Parameterizable external fault input 2 has
been activated.
A voltage failure has occurred during a
parameter task.
- Check whether there is an external fault
- Check whether the cable to the
corresponding digital output is interrupted
- P575 (Src No ExtFault1)
- Check whether there is an external fault
- Check whether the cable to the
corresponding digital output is interrupted
- P576 (Src No ExtFault2)
Re-enter the parameter. The number of the
parameter concerned is indicated in fault value
r949.
Incorrect operating status
Replace the control board (CUMC) or the unit
(Compact PUS).
A fault has occurred during the storage of
values in the EEPROM.
Replace the control board (CUMC) or the unit
(Compact PLUS)
The available calculating time of the time slot
has been exceeded.
- Reduce pulse frequency
At least 10 failures of time slots T2, T3, T4 or
T5 (see also parameter r829.2 to r829.5)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
- Calculate individual blocks in a slower
sampling time
- The technology functions Synchronization
(U953.33) and Positioning (U953.32) must not
be enabled at the same time.
12-3
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F043
DSP link
08.2009
Cause
The link to the internal signal processor is
interrupted
Counter-measure
- Reduce pulse frequency (perhaps caused by
calculating time overflow)
- If fault re-occurs, replace the board/unit
The pulse frequency P340 should not be
adjusted to values larger than 7.5 kHz (for
60MHz - DSP) or 6 kHz (for 40MHz - DSP). If
higher values are set, indices 12 to 19 have to
be checked on visualization parameter r829.
The indicated free calculating time of the DSP
time slots always have to be greater than zero.
If the calculating time is exceeded, this is also
displayed by fault F043 (DSP coupling).
F044
BICO manager fault
A fault has occurred in the softwiring of
binectors and connectors
Remedy: Reduce pulse frequency (P340)
Fault value r949:
>1000: Fault during connector softwiring
>2000: Fault during binector softwiring
- Voltage OFF and ON
- Factory setting and new parameterization
- Exchange the board
1028:Link memory is full. The link area
between the two processors is full. No further
connectors can be transferred.
F045
HW fault on optional
boards
F046
Parameter coupling
fault
12-4
A hardware fault has occurred during access
to an optional board.
- Reduction of the linked connections between
the two processors. Interface between the two
processors is position control/setpoint
conditioning i.e. softwires from and to the
setpoint conditioning, position controller,
speed controller, torque interface and current
controller which are not necessary should be
dissolved to reduce the link (value 0).
- Replace CU board (Compact, chassis units)
- Replace the unit (Compact PLUS)
- Check the connection between the subrack
and the optional boards
A fault has occurred during the transfer of
parameters to the DSP.
- Replace optional boards.
If fault re-occurs, replace the board/unit
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Fault
F051
Encoder fault
Faults and Alarms
Cause
- Signal amplitude of resolver or encoder is
below the tolerance threshold.
- Power supply faults in the case of encoders
or multiturn encoders
- In the case of multiturn encoders
(SSI/Endat), connection fault of the serial
protocol
Counter-measure
Fault value r949:
10's and one's position:
09: Resolver signal missing (sin/cos track)
20: Position error: Alarm A18 was generated
during the change to the "operation" state.
(For remedial action see 29)
21: A/B track undervoltage:
Root(A^2+B^2)<0.01V (For remedial action
see 29)
22: A/B track overvoltage:
Root(A^2+B^2)>1.45V (For remedial action
see 29)
25: Encoder initial position not recognized
(C/D track missing)
- Check encoder cable (faulty / interrupted)?
- Correct encoder type parameterized?
- Is the correct cable used for encoder or
multiturn encoder? Encoders and multiturn
encoders need different cables!
- Encoder faulty?
26: Encoder zero pulse outside the permitted
range
27: No encoder zero pulse has occurred
28: Encoder/multiturn
Voltage supply Encoder fault
- Short-circuit in encoder connection?
- Encoder faulty?
- Encoder incorrectly connected up?
!!!Power off/on or in drive settings and back to
new initialization of the starting position!!!
29: A/B track undervoltage: In the zero
passage of one track the amount of the other
track was less than 0.025 V
- Check encoder cable (faulty/interrupted)?
- Is shield of encoder cable connected ?
- Encoder faulty?
- Replace SBR/SBM
- Replace unit or basic board
- Is the correct cable being used in each case
for the encoder/multiturn encoder? Encoders
and multiturn encoders require different
encoder cables!
!!!Power off/on or in drive settings and back to
new initialization of the starting position!!!
Multiturn (SSI/EnDat):
30: Protocol fault CRC/Parity Check (EnDat)
31: Timeout Protocol (EnDat)
32: No-load level error, data line (SSI/EnDat)
33: Initialization of timeout
- Check parameterization (P149)
- Check encoder cable (faulty / interrupted?
- Encoder cable shield connected?
- Encoder faulty?
- Replace SBR/SBM
- Replace unit or basic board
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-5
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
08.2009
Cause
Counter-measure
34: Address wrong (only EnDat)
- Writing or reading of parameters not
successful, check address and MRS code
(P149)
35: The difference between the serial protocol
and the pulse counter is greater than 0xFFFF
(2^16). A possible fault may be a jump in the
serial protocol. The fault can only be evaluated
if an absolute encoder with incremental tracks
(P149.01/.06 = X1XX) and multiturn portion is
concerned. (EnDat)
40: Alarm, lighting, EnDat encoder
41: Alarm, signal amplitude, EnDat encoder
42: Alarm. position value, EnDat encoder
43: Alarm, overvoltage, EnDat encoder
44: Alarm, undervoltage, EnDat encoder
45: Alarm, overcurrent, EnDat encoder
46: Alarm, battery failure, EnDat encoder
49: Alarm, check sum error, EnDat encoder
60: SSI protocol faulty (see P143)
100's position:
0xx: Motor encoder faulty
1xx: External encoder faulty
F054
Encoder board
initialization fault
A fault has occurred during initialization of the
encoder board.
1000's position: (from V1.50)
1xxx: Frequency exceeded, EnDat encoder
2xxx: Temperature, EnDat encoder
3xxx: Control reserve, light, EnDat encoder
4xxx: Battery charge, EnDat encoder
5xxx: Reference point not reached
Fault value r949:
1: Board code is incorrect
2: TSY not compatible
3: SBP not compatible
4: SBR not compatible
5: SBM not compatible (from V2.0 only the
SBM2 board is supported; see also r826
function diagram 517)
6: SBM initialization timeout
7: Board double
20: TSY board double
21: SBR board double
23: SBM board three-fold
24: SBP board three-fold
30: SBR board slot incorrect
31: SBM board slot incorrect
32: SBP board slot incorrect
40: SBR board not present
41: SBM board not present
42: SBP board not present
50: Three encoder boards or
two encoder boards, none of them on
Slot C
F056
SIMOLINK telegram
failure
Communication on the SIMOLINK ring is
disturbed.
60: internal fault
- Check the fibre-optic cable ring
- Check whether an SLB in the ring is without
voltage
- Check whether an SLB in the ring is faulty
- Check P741 (SLB TlgOFF)
12-6
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Fault
F058
Parameter fault
Parameter task
F059
Parameter fault after
factory setting/init.
F060
Faults and Alarms
Cause
Counter-measure
A fault has occurred during the processing of a No remedy
parameter task.
A fault has occurred in the initialization phase
during the calculation of a parameter.
Is set if parameter P070 is at zero when
INITIAL LOADING is exited.
MLFB is missing during
initial loading
F061
A parameter which has been entered during
drive setting is in the non-permissible range.
Incorrect
parameterization
F063
PIN is missing
F065
SCom telegram failure
The synchronization or positioning technology
functions have been activated without an
authorization being present (PIN)
No telegram has been received at an SCom
interface (SCom/USS protocol) within the
telegram failure time.
The number of the inconsistent parameter is
indicated in fault value r949. Correct this
parameter (ALL indices) and switch voltage off
and on again. Several parameters may be
affected, i.e. repeat process.
Enter correct MLFB after acknowledging the
fault (power section, initial loading)
The number of the inconsistent parameter is
indicated in fault value r949 (e.g. motor
encoder = pulse encoder in the case of
brushless DC motors) -> correct this
parameter.
- Deactivate synchronization or positioning
- Enter the PIN (U2977)
If technology functions are inserted in the time
slots without enabling the technology function
through the PIN, the message F063 is
generated. This fault can only be cleared by
putting in the correct PIN at U977.01 and
U977.02 and switching the power off and on
again, or by disabling the technology functions
(put U953.32 = 20 and U053.33 = 20).
Fault value r949:
1 = Interface 1 (SCom1)
2 = Interface 2 (SCom2)
Check the connection of PMU -X300 or X103 /
27,28 (Compact, chassis unit)
Check the connection of X103 or X100 / 35,36
(Compact PLUS unit)
F070
SCB initialization fault
F072
EB initialization fault
F073
A fault has occurred during initialization of the
SCB board.
A fault has occurred during initialization of the
EB board.
4 mA at analog input 1, slave 1 fallen short of
AnInp1SL1
Check "SCom/SCB TlgOff" P704.01 (SCom1)
or P704.02 (SCom2)
Fault value r949:
1: Board code incorrect
2: SCB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
(Check parameterization)
6: Initialization timeout
7: SCB board double
10: Channel error
Fault value r949:
2: 1st EB1 not compatible
3: 2nd EB1 not compatible
4: 1st EB2 not compatible
5: 2nd EB2 not compatible
21: Three EB1 boards
22: Three EB2 boards
110: Fault on 1st EB1
120: Fault on 2nd EB1
210: Fault on 1st EB2
220: Fault on 2nd EB2
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 4, 5.
not Compact PLUS
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-7
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F074
08.2009
Cause
4 mA at analog input 2, slave 1 fallen short of
Counter-measure
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 7, 8.
4 mA at analog input 3, slave 1 fallen short of
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 10, 11.
4 mA at analog input 1, slave 2 fallen short of
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 4, 5.
4 mA at analog input 2, slave 2 fallen short of
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 7, 8.
4 mA at analog input 3, slave 2 fallen short of
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 10, 11.
No telegram has been received by the SCB
(USS, peer-to-peer, SCI) within the telegram
failure time.
- Check the connections of the SCB1(2).
AnInp2 SL1
not Compact PLUS
F075
AnInp3 SL1
not Compact PLUS
F076
AnInp1 SL2
not Compact PLUS
F077
AnInp2 SL2
not Compact PLUS
F078
AnInp3 SL2
not Compact PLUS
F079
SCB telegram failure
not Compact PLUS
F080
TB/CB initialization
fault
F081
OptBrdHeartbeatCounter
F082
TB/CB telegram failure
- Check P704.03"SCom/SCB Tlg OFF"
- Replce SCB1(2)
Fault during initialization of the board at the
DPR interface
Heartbeat-counter of the optional board is no
longer being processed
No new process data have been received by
the TB or the CB within the telegram failure
time.
- Replace CU (-A10)
Fault value r949:
1: Board code incorrect
2: TB/CB board not compatible
3: CB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
6: Initialization timeout
7: TB/CB board double
10: Channel error
Check the T300/CB board for correct
contacting, check the PSU power supply,
check the CU / CB / T boards and check the
CB initialization parameters:
- P918.01 CB Bus Address,
- P711.01 to P721.01 CB parameters 1 to 11
Fault value r949:
0: TB/CB heatbeat-counter
1: SCB heartbeat-counter
2: Additional CB heartbeat-counter
- Acknowledge the fault (whereby automatic
reset is carried out)
- If the fault re-occurs, replace the board
concerned (see fault value)
- Replace ADB
- Check the connection between the subrack
and the optional boards (LBA) and replace, if
necessary
Fault value r949:
1 = TB/CB
2 = additional CB
- Check the connection to TB/CB
- Check P722 (CB/TB TlgOFF)
- Replace CB or TB
12-8
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Fault
F085
Add. CB initialization
fault
F087
SIMOLINK initialization
fault
F099
Friction characteristic
record
F109
Mld R(L)
F111
MId DSP
Faults and Alarms
Cause
A fault has occurred during initialization of the
CB board.
A fault has occurred during initialization of the
SLB board.
Recording of the friction characteristic was
interrupted or not done at all.
Counter-measure
Fault value r949:
1: Board code incorrect
2: TB/CB board not compatible
3: CB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
6: Initialization timeout
7: TB/CB board double
10: Channel error
Check the T300 / CB board for correct
contacting and check the CB initialization
parameters:
- P918.02 CB Bus Address,
- P711.02 to P721.02 CB Parameters 1 to 11
- Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)
- Replace SLB
Fault value r949 gives the cause (bit coded):
Bit Meaning
Value displayed
0
Pos. speed limit
1
1
Neg. speed limit
2
2 Releases
missing:
4
direction of rotation, inverter, controller
3 Speed
controller connecting
8
4
Interrupt through cancellation of the 16
rec
ord command
5
Illegal dataset changeover
32
6 Time
exceeded
64
7 Measuring
error
128
The rotor resistance determined during
- Repeat measurement
measurement of the direct current deviates too - Enter data manually
greatly.
A fault has occurred during the Mot Id.
- Repeat measurement
r949=1 The current does not build up when
voltage pulses are applied
r949=2 (only for P115=4) The difference
between speed setpoint and actual value is
too large during measurement
r949=3 (only for P115=4) The magnetizing
current determined is too high.
r949=4 (only for P115=4) Two phases of the
motor or the a/b tracks of the encoder were
swapped when they were connected.
- When r949=1 Check motor cables
- When r949=2 Avoid mechanical stressing of
the motor during the measurement; if the fault
occurs directly after the start of the motor
identification check the encoder and motor
cables.
- When r949=3: Check the motor rating plate
data stored (ratio Vrated / Irated does not
correspond with the measured inductance)
r949=121 The stator resistance P121 is not
determined correctly
r949=124 The rotor time constant P124 is
parameterized with the value 0 ms
F112
Mid X(L)
r949=347 The valve voltage drop P347 is not
determined correctly
A fault has occurred during measurement of
the motor inductances or leakages.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
- Repeat measurement
12-9
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F114
MId OFF
F116
08.2009
Cause
The converter has automatically stopped the
automatic measurement due to the time limit
up to power-up having been exceeded or due
to an OFF command during the measurement,
and has reset the function selection in P115.
Counter-measure
Re-start with P115 function selection = 2
"Motor identification at standstill". The ON
command must be given within 20 sec. after
the alarm message A078 = standstill
measurement has appeared.
See TB documentation
Cancel the OFF command and re-start
measurement.
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F117
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F118
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F119
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F120
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F121
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F122
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F123
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F124
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F125
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F126
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F127
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
12-10
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Fault
F128
Faults and Alarms
Cause
See TB documentation
Counter-measure
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F129
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F130
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F131
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F132
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F133
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F134
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F135
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F136
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F137
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F138
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F139
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F140
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-11
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F141
08.2009
Cause
See TB documentation
Counter-measure
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
An active signal is present at binector U061
(1).
Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
710
An active signal is present at binector U062
(1).
Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
710
An active signal is present at binector U063
(1).
Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
710
An active signal is present at binector U064
(1).
Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
710
After an appropriate number of invalid signs of
life, the sign of life monitoring block has gone
into fault status.
Check cause of fault, see function diagram
170
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F142
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F143
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F144
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F145
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F146
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F147
Technology board fault
not Compact PLUS
F148
Fault 1
Function blocks
F149
Fault 2
Function blocks
F150
Fault 3
Function blocks
F151
Fault 4
Function blocks
F152
Signs of life repeatedly
invalid.
F153
Within the monitoring time of the tool interface Cyclically execute write tasks from the tool
no valid sign-of-life has been received from the interface within the monitoring time whereby
No valid sign-of-life tool tool interface.
the sign-of-life has to be increased by 1 for
interface
every write task.
F255
A fault has occurred in the EEPROM.
Switch off the unit and switch it on again. If the
fault re-occurs, replace CU (-A10), or replace
Fault in EEPROM
the unit (Compact PLUS).
Table 12-1
12-12
Fault numbers, causes and their counter-measures
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Faults and Alarms
12.2 Alarms
The alarm message is periodically displayed on the PMU by A = alarm/
alarm message and a 3-digit number. An alarm cannot be
acknowledged. It is automatically deleted once the cause has been
eliminated. Several alarms can be present. The alarms are then
displayed one after the other.
When the converter is operated with the OP1S operator control panel,
the alarm is indicated in the lowest operating display line. The red LED
additionally flashes (refer to the OP1S operating instructions).
Number / Alarm
A001
Cause
The calculating time work load is too high.
Time slot overflow
a) At least 3 failures of time slots T6 or T7 (see - Calculate individual function blocks in slower
also parameter r829.6 or r829.7)
time slots (parameter U950 ff.)
A002
b) At least 3 failures of time slots T2, T3, T4 or
T5 (see also parameter r829.2 to r829.5)
Start of the SIMOLINK ring is not functioning.
SIMOLINK start alarm
A003
Drive not synchronous
A004
Alarm startup of 2nd
SLB
A005
Couple full
A014
Simulation active alarm
A015
External alarm 1
Counter-measure
- Reduce pulse frequency
- Check the fiber-optic cable ring for
interruptions
- Check whether there is an SLB without
voltage in the ring
Although synchronization has been activated,
the drive is not synchronous.
Possible causes are:
- Poor communication connection (frequent
telegram failures)
- Slow bus cycle times (in the case of high bus
cycle times or synchronization of slow time
slots, synchronizing can last for 1-2 minutes in
the worst case).
- Incorrect wiring of the time counter (only if
P754 > P746 /T0)
Startup of the 2nd SIMOLINK ring does not
function.
The closed-loop electronic system of
MASTERDRIVES MC consists of two
microprocessors. Only a limited number of
couple channels are provided for transferring
data between the two processors.
The alarm displays that all couple channels
between the two processors are busy. An
attempt has, however, been made to
interconnect another connector requireing a
couple channel.
The DC link voltage is not equal to 0 when the
simulation mode is selected (P372 = 1).
Parameterizable external alarm input 1 has
been activated.
- Check whether there is a faulty SLB in the
ring
SIMOLINK (SLB):
- Check r748 i002 and i003 = counters for
CRC faults and timeout faults
- Check the fiber-optic cable connection
- Check P751 on the dispatcher (connector
260 must be softwired); Check P753 on the
transceiver (corresponding SIMOLINK
connector K70xx must be softwired).
- Check the fiber optic cable ring for any
disconnections
- Check whether an SLB in the ring is without
voltage
- Check whether an SLB in the ring is faulty
None
- Set P372 to 0.
- Reduce DC link voltage (disconnect the
converter from the supply)
Check
- whether the cable to the corresponding
digital input has been interrupted.
- parameter P588 Src No Ext Warn1
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-13
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A016
External alarm 2
A017
Safe Stop alarm active
A018
Encoder adjustment
A019
Encoder data serial
protocol
A020
Encoder adjustment,
external encoder
A021
Encoder data of
external multiturn
encoder faulty
A022
Inverter temperature
08.2009
Cause
Parameterizable external alarm input 2 has
been activated.
Safe Stop is detected in the READY states.
Signal amplitude
Resolver/encoder in the critical range.
Counter-measure
Check
- whether the cable to the corresponding
digital input has been interrupted.
- parameter P589 Src No Ext Warn2
See F017 for causes/counter-measures.
See F051 for causes/counter-measures.
Connection fault of the serial protocol on
multiturn encoders (SSI/Endat)
The amplitude of an external encoder lies in
the critical range.
A fault has occurred during processing of the
serial protocol to an external code rotary
encoder (SSI- or Endat-Multiturn).
The threshold for tripping an alarm has been
exceeded.
As a general rule, it is necessary to initialize
the starting position again => power OFF/ON
or switch to the drive settings and back
again!!!
If alarm A18 occurs in the "Ready" status
(r001 = 009) while an encoder is in use, the
amplitude of the CD track signal is too small,
or the connection to CD_Track may be
interrupted, or an encoder without CD-Track is
in use.
In the case of an encoder without CD track,
the P130 must be correctly set.
Serial protocol is defective on multiturn
encoders. See F051 for causes/countermeasures.
As a general rule, it is necessary to initialize
the starting position again => power OFF/ON
or switch to the drive settings and back
again!!!
Cause/remedies see F051
As a general rule, it is necessary to initialize
the starting position again => power OFF/ON
or switch to the drive settings and back
again!!!
Faulty serial protocol in the case of an external
multiturn encoder. Cause/remedies see F051
As a general rule, it is necessary to initialize
the starting position again => power OFF/ON
or switch to the drive settings and back again!!
- Measure intake air and ambient temperature.
- Observe derating curves at theta > 45°C
(Compact PLUS) or 40°C derating curves
- Check whether the fan is operating
A023
Motor temperature
A025
I2t converter
12-14
The parameterizable threshold (P380) for
tripping an alarm has been exceeded.
If the current load state is maintained, a
thermal overload of the converter occurs.
The converter will lower the max. current limit
(P129).
- Check whether the air entry and discharge
openings are restricted.
Check the motor (load, ventilation, etc.). Read
off the current temperature in r009 Motor
Temperat.
- Reduce converter load
- Check r010 (Drive Utiliz)
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A028
Diagnostics counter
A029
I2t motor
A032
PRBS Overflow
A033
Overspeed
A034
Setpoint/actual value
deviation
A036
Brake checkback
"Brake still closed"
A037
Brake checkback
"Brake still open"
A042
Motor stall/block
A049
No slave
not Compact PLUS
A050
Slave incorrect
not Compact PLUS
A051
Peer baud rate
not Compact PLUS
A052
Peer PcD L
Faults and Alarms
Cause
The position of an encoder (motor encoder or
external encoder) was incorrect for one or
more samplings. This can result from EMC
faults or a loose contact.
Counter-measure
For test purposes, fault message F51 can be
triggered with the setting P847=2 in order to
obtain more information about fault variable
r949.
When faults start to occur at a certain rate,
fault message F51 is triggered by the
corresponding fault variable.
All indices can also be monitored in r849 in
order to find out which diagnostics counter
counts the fault. If alarm A28 is hidden for this
fault, then the corresponding index in P848
can be set to 1.
Motor load cycle is exceeded!
The parameterized limit value for the I2t
monitoring of the motor has been exceeded.
An overflow has occurred during recording
with noise generator PRBS
The positive or negative maximum speed has
been exceeded.
Bit 8 in r552 status word 1 of the setpoint
channel. The difference between frequency
setpoint/actual value is greater than the
parameterized value and the control
monitoring time has elapsed.
The brake checkback indicates the "Brake still
closed" state.
Check the parameters:
P382 Motor Cooling
P383 Mot Tmp T1
P384 Mot Load Limits
Repeat recording with lower amplitude
- Increase relevant maximum speed
- Reduce regenerative load (see FD 480)
Check
- whether an excessive torque requirement is
present
- whether the motor has been dimensioned too
small.
Increase values P792 Perm Deviation Frq/
set/actual DevSpeed and P794 Deviation Time
Check brake checkback (see FD 470)
The brake checkback indicates the "Brake still
open" state.
Check brake checkback (see FD 470)
Motor is stalled or blocked.
Check
The alarm cannot be influenced by P805
"PullOut/BlckTime", but by P794 "Deviation
Time"
At serial I/O (SCB1 with SCI1/2), no slave is
connected or fiber-optic cable is interrupted or
slaves are without voltage.
- whether the drive is blocked
At ser. I/O the slaves required according to a
parameterized configuration are not present
(slave number or slave type): Analog inputs or
outputs or digital inputs or outputs have been
parameterized which are not physically
present.
In a peer-to-peer connection a baud rate has
been selected which is too high or too
different.
- Whether the drive has stalled
P690 SSCI AnaIn Conf
- Check slave.
- Check cable.
Check parameter P693 (analog outputs), P698
(digital outputs). Check connectors
K4101...K4103, K4201...K4203 (analog inputs)
and binectors B4100...B4115, B4120...B4135,
B4200...B4215, B4220...B4235 (digital inputs)
for connecting.
Adjust the baud rate in conjunction with the
SCB boards P701 SCom/SCB Baud Rate
In a peer-to-peer connection, a PcD length has Reduce number of words P703 SCom/SCB
been set which is too high (>5).
PcD #
not Compact PLUS
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-15
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A053
Peer Lng f.
not Compact PLUS
A057
TB Param
not Compact PLUS
A061
Alarm 1
Function blocks
A062
Alarm 2
Function blocks
A063
Alarm 3
Function blocks
A064
Alarm 4
Function blocks
A072
Frict Char Init
A073
Interr InitFric
A074
Incompl FricChar
A075
Ls,Rr Dev.
A078
Stands. Meas
A081
CB alarm
08.2009
Cause
Counter-measure
In a peer-to-peer connection, the pcD length of Adjust the word length for transmitter and
transmitter and receiver do not match.
receiver
P703 SCom/SCB PcD #
Occurs when a TB is logged on and present,
but parameter tasks from the PMU, SCom1 or
SCom2 have not been answered by the TB
within 6 seconds.
Replace TB configuration (software)
An active signal is present at binector U065
(1).
Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
An active signal is present at binector U066
(1).
Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
An active signal is present at binector U067
(1).
Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
An active signal is present at binector U068
(1).
Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
Automatic initiation of the friction characteristic
has been selected, but the drive has not yet
been switched on.
Energize drive.
(Drive status "Operation" 014)
Note: If the ON command is not given within
30 seconds, the automatic initiation of the
friction characteristic is stopped with fault
F099.
Automatic initiation of the friction characteristic
has been interrupted (OFF command or fault).
Note:
If the drive is not switched on again within 5
minutes, the automatic initiation of the friction
characteristic is stopped (F099).
Incomplete initiation of friction characteristic.
As there is a lack of enables or due to
limitations, complete initiation of the friction
characteristic is not possible in both directions.
The measured values of the leakage
measurement or of rotor resistance deviate
significantly.
The standstill measurement is executed when
the converter is powered up. The motor can
align itself several times in a certain direction
with this measurement.
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see operating
instructions for CB board.
Rectifiy any causes of the fault.
Re-energize the drive.
Grant enable for both directions of rotation.
Set the speed limitations for both directions
such that all characteristic points can be
approached.
If individual measured values significantly
deviate from the average values, they are
automatically disregarded in the calculation
(for RI) or the value of the automatic
parameterization remains (for Ls).
It is only necessary to check the results for
their plausibility in the case of drives with high
requirements on torque or speed accuracy.
If the standstill measurement can be executed
without any danger:
- Power up the converter.
New configuration necessary
The ID byte combinations which are being
sent from the DP master in the configuration
telegram are not in conformance with the
permissible ID byte combinations. (See also
Compendium, Chapter 8, Table 8.2-12).
Consequence:
No connection is made with the PROFIBUS
master.
12-16
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A082
CB alarm
A083
CB alarm
A084
CB alarm
A085
CB alarm
A086
CB alarm
Faults and Alarms
Cause
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
No valid PPO type can be identified from the
configuration telegram of the DP master.
Consequence:
No connection is made with the PROFIBUS
master.
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
No net data or invalid net data (e.g. complete
control word STW1=0) are being received
from the DP master.
Consequence:
The process data are not passed on to the
dual port RAM. If P722 (P695) is not equal to
zero, this will cause the fault message F082 to
be tripped.
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
The telegram traffic between the DP master
and the CBP has been interrupted (e.g. cable
break, bus cable pulled out or DP master
powered down).
Consequence:
If P722 (P695) is not equal to zero, this will
cause the fault message F082 to be tripped.
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
The CBP does not generate this alarm!
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
CB alarm
Failure of the heartbeat counter on the basic
unit. The heartbeat counter on the basic unit is
no longer being incremented. The
communication between the CBP and the
basic board is disturbed.
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
A088
Fault in the DPS manager software of the
CBP.
See user manual for CB board
A087
CB alarm
A089
CB alarm
A090
CB alarm
A091
CB alarm
A092
CB alarm
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A81 of the 1st CB board
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A82 of the 1st CB board
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A83 of the 1st CB board
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A84 of the 1st CB board
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Counter-measure
New configuration necessary.
See operating instructions of the CB board
See operating instructions of the CB board
See operating instructions of the CB board
See operating instructions of the CB board
See operating instructions of the CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
12-17
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A093
CB alarm
A094
CB alarm
A095
CB alarm
A096
CB alarm
A097
08.2009
Cause
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A85 of the 1st CB board
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A86 of the 1st CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board. Corresponds to
A87 of the 1st CB board
Counter-measure
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
See operating instructions for CB board
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A88 of the 1st CB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for CB board
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A098
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A099
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A100
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A101
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A102
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A103
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A104
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A105
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A106
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A107
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
12-18
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A108
Faults and Alarms
Cause
See user manual for TB board
Counter-measure
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A109
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A110
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A111
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A112
TB alarm 1
not Compact PLUS
A113
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A114
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A115
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A116
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A117
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A118
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A119
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A120
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-19
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A121
08.2009
Cause
See user manual for TB board
Counter-measure
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
Machine data 1 (position encoder type/axis
type) is 0 (axis does not exist).
You must assign a valid value to machine data
1 in order to operate the axis.
Effect:
Operation of the axis is inhibited and the
position controller is deactivated.
The "in operation [IOP]" checkback signal was
missing when a traversing command was
initiated. The following causes inhibit the "in
operation" checkback signal (status bit No.2,
refer to function diagram sheet 200) :
Activate control signals [OFF1], [OFF2],
[OFF3] and "enable controller" [ENC].
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A122
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A123
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A124
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A125
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A126
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A127
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A128
TB alarm 2
not Compact PLUS
A129
Axis does not exist machine data 1 = 0
A130
Operating conditions
do not exist
-Control signals [OFF1], [OFF2], [OFF3]
and/or "enable controller" [ENC] are not
activated.
-Checkback signals [OFF2] and/or [OFF3] are
not activated.
-A fault [FAULT] is active.
Effect:
The traversing command is inhibited.
12-20
-If checkback signals [OFF2] and/or [OFF3]
are missing, check the supply of control word
1 (MASTERDRIVES function diagram, sheet
180).
-Analyze the queued fault number
[FAULT_NO], remedy the fault, and then
cancel the fault using the acknowledge fault
[ACK_F] control signal.
Note:
To activate the "in operation" [IOP] status
again, you must deactivate [OFF1] and then
activate it again.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A131
OFF1 missing
A132
OFF2 missing
Faults and Alarms
Cause
Control signal [OFF1] was deactivated while a
traversing command was being executed.
Effect:
The drive is brought to a standstill via a ramp
(P464 Deceleration Time). There is a
subsequent pulse disable. This also valid if
P443 =0 (function diagram 310) and the ramp
generator bypass (function diagram 320) is
used.
-Control signal [OFF2] was deactivated while a
traversing command was being executed.
Counter-measure
Check the activation of control signal [OFF1]
from the user program.
-Checkback signal [OFF2] was deactivated
while a traversing command was being
executed.
-If checkback signal [OFF2] is missing, check
the supply of control word 1 (MASTERDRIVES
function diagram, sheet 180).
-Check the activation of control signal [OFF2]
from the user program.
Effect:
The pulse disable is initiated immediately. If
the motor is not braked, it coasts down.
A133
OFF3 missing
A134
Enable Controller ENC
missing
A135
Actual position value
not o.k
A136
Machine data 1
changed - RESET
necessary
A137
Axis assignment
incorrect
Note:
To activate the "in operation" [IOP] status
again, you must deactivate [OFF1] and then
activate it again.
-Control signal [OFF3] was deactivated while a -Check the activation of control signal [OFF3]
traversing command was being executed.
from the user program.
-Checkback signal [OFF3] was deactivated
while a traversing command was being
executed.
-If checkback signal [OFF3] is missing, check
the supply of control word 1 (MASTERDRIVES
function diagram, sheet 180).
Effect:
The motor decelerates at the current limit.
There is a subsequent pulse disable.
Note:
To activate the "in operation" [IOP] status
again, you must deactivate [OFF1] and then
activate it again.
Check the activation of the "enable controller"
[ENC] control signal from the user program.
The "enable controller" [ENC] control signal
was deactivated while a traversing command
was being executed (control bit No.3 "Inverter
Enable", refer to function diagram, sheet 180)
Effect:
The pulse disable is initiated immediately. If
the motor is not braked, it coasts down.
Actual position value not o.k. from position
sensing (B0070 / B0071)
Machine data 1 (position encoder type/axis
type) was changed.
Effect:
The activation of traversing commands is
inhibited.
The same axis assignment (machine data 2)
was entered for several axes (M7 only, not
significant for the F01 technology option).
-Check interconnection of B0070 and B0071,
-check position encoder and evaluation board,
-check encoder cable.
If machine data 1 has been changed, the
"reset technology" [RST] control signal must
be activated. Alternatively switch the
MASTERDIVES electronic power supply off
and on again
A unique axis assignment must be entered for
all axes on an M7-FM. For example, it is not
allowed to define two X axes.
Effect:
The activation of traversing commands is
inhibited.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-21
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A138
Axis assignment of roll
feed incorrect
08.2009
Cause
The NC block contains an axis number which
is defined as a roll feed axis but the axis type
is defined as an incremental or absolute
position encoder (machine data 1 = 1 or 2).
(M7 only, not significant for the F01 technology
option).
Counter-measure
-Axis type 1 or 2:The block is not allowed to
contain an axis number which is defined as a
roll feed (M7 only).
-Axis type 3:The axis number of the roll feed
must be specified in every NC block.
The NC block for a roll feed axis type
(machine data 1 = 3) contains:
- No axis number (X, Y, Z...)
- An incorrect axis number
A139
Incorrect
parameterization
PosTrack MotorEnc
A140
Following error in
standstill
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted.
Alarm is tripped only for rotary axis of motor
encoder. The bit width of the product of the
gear denominator (U810.2 * P116.2) must not
be greater than the difference of the 32 bit
data width of the flipflop and the multiturn
resolution of the encoder. Example: Torque
motor with EQN1325
MT: Multiturn resolution = 12
P116: 2/7
U810.2max = 2^(32 - MT)/P116.2
U810.2max = 149796
The following error limit for standstill was
exceeded at standstill:
-Following error monitoring - at standstill
(machine data 14) was entered incorrectly.
In accordance with the adjacent formula
reduce the gear denominator of P116 and/or
U810 respectively.
-Check and correct the machine data.
-Optimize the speed/current controller,
-Rectify mechanical problem.
-The value entered for "in position - exact stop
window" (machine data 17) is greater than the
value in "following error monitoring - at
standstill" (machine data 14).
-The axis was pushed out of position
mechanically.
A141
Following error in
motion
Effect:
The position control system is deactivated and
the axis decelerates via "deceleration time
during errors" (machine data 43).
The following error limit for motion was
exceeded during a traversing movement:
-Check and correct the machine data.
-Following error monitoring - in motion
(machine data 15) was entered incorrectly.
-Check the actual position value (speedcontrolled operation); check position encoder,
evaluator module and encoder lead.
-The mechanical system cannot follow the
commands of the position controller.
-Optimize the position controller or the speed
controller.
-Actual position value invalid
-Check the mechanical system.
-Incorrect optimization of the position controller
or speed controller.
-The mechanical system is sluggish or
blocked.
Effect:
The position control system is deactivated and
the drive decelerates via "deceleration time
during faults" (machine data 43).
12-22
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A142
In position - timer
monitoring
Faults and Alarms
Cause
Counter-measure
The "in position - exact stop window" was not
-Check and correct the machine data.
reached within the time specified in "in position
- timer monitoring":
-Optimize the position controller or speed
controller.
-In position - exact stop window (machine data
17) too small
-Check the mechanical system.
-In position - timer monitoring (machine data
16) too short
-Position controller or speed controller not
optimized
-Mechanical causes
A145
Actual-value disable
not allowed - axis
standstill
A146
Direction of movement
not allowed
Effect:
The position control system is deactivated.
The "digital input" with the "disable actual
value" function was actuated while the roll
feed was running.
Effect:
The axis movement is stopped via the
deceleration ramp, the "disable actual value"
function is not executed.
A positioning movement was aborted. When
attempting to resume the movement at the
point of interruption, the roll feed would have
had to travel in the opposite direction to reach
the programmed target position. This is
inhibited by the setting of machine data 37
"response after abort".
The "digital input" for "disable actual value"
can only be actuated when the axis is
stationary.
Move the axis in front of the target position in
setup mode before continuing.
There are various possible reasons for the
axis crossing the target position when a
positioning movement is aborted:
-Motor coastdown
-The axis was moved intentionally, e.g. in
setup mode.
Deceleration = 0
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited.
The current deceleration value is 0, e.g.
because of a RAM storage error or an error in
the technology firmware.
A149
Effect:
The position control system is deactivated and
the drive is decelerated via the "deceleration
time during errors" (machine data 43).
Internal error in the technology software.
A148
Distance to go negative Effect:
The position control system is deactivated and
the drive is decelerated via the "deceleration
time during errors" (machine data 43).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
This fault should not normally occur. It is used
as an emergency stop feature for the
technology software.
Replace the hardware (M7; MCT).
This fault should not normally occur. It is used
as an emergency stop feature for the
technology software.
12-23
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A150
Slave axis already
allocated to other
master axis
A151
Slave axis operating
mode not allowed
A152
Slave axis operating
mode changed
A153
Error in slave axis
A154
Follow-up mode in
slave axis active
A155
Reset in slave axis
active
08.2009
Cause
The selected NC program contains a slave
axis which is already being used by another
master axis (M7 only, not significant for the
F01 technology option).
Counter-measure
The same slave axis cannot be used
simultaneously by several NC programs.
Example:
NC program 1, started in axis X, contains NC
blocks for axes X and Y. NC program 2 is
started in axis Z and contains NC blocks for
axes Z and Y. This program is denied with
warning 150, because axis Y is already being
used by program 1.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted.
The slave axis required by the master axis is
not in "slave" mode (M7 only, not significant
for the F01 technology option).
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The "slave" mode was deselected in the slave
axis during the traversing movement (M7 only,
not significant for the F01 technology option).
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
A warning is active in the slave axis required
by the master axis (M7 only, not significant for
the F01 technology option).
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The "follow-up mode" [FUM] control signal is
active in the slave axis required by the master
axis. A slave axis which is switched to followup mode cannot be operated by the master
axis (M7 only, not significant for the F01
technology option).
The slave axis must be switched to "slave"
mode.
The slave axis must remain switched to
"slave" mode.
The NC program will only run if all of the axes
it needs are error-free. To clear this warning,
you must first clear all the warnings in the
slave axis.
Deactivate follow-up mode in the slave axis.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The "reset" [RST] control signal is active in the Cancel the "reset" [RST] control signal in the
slave axis required by the master axis. A slave slave axis.
axis with an active reset cannot be used by the
master axis (M7 only, not significant for the
F01 technology option.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
12-24
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A156
Axis type (MD1) of
slave axis not allowed
Faults and Alarms
Cause
An NC program was started in which a slave
axis is defined as a roll feed axis type (M7
only, not significant for the F01 technology
option).
Counter-measure
Axes defined as roll feed axes can only be
used in dedicated NC programs.
The warning is output in the master axis and
indicates an illegal axis type in the slave axis.
A160
Setup speed = 0
A161
Reference approach
velocity = 0
A162
Reference point reducing velocity = 0
A165
MDI block number not
allowed
A166
No position has been
programmed in MDI
mode
A167
No velocity has been
programmed in MDI
mode
A168
G91 not allowed with
MDI on the fly
A169
Start conditions for
flying MDI do not exist
A170
Single block mode
block does not exist
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The value entered in level 1 or level 2 for the
[F_S] velocity level in setup mode is zero.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited.
The velocity value entered for "reference point
- approach velocity" (machine data 7) is zero.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited.
The velocity value entered for "reference point
- reducing velocity" (machine data 6) is zero.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited or stopped.
The MDI block number [MDI_NO] specified in
the control signals is greater than 11.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited.
The "start" [STA] control signal was activated
in MDI mode without initially transferring a
positional value to the selected MDI block.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited.
The "start" [STA] control signal was activated
in MDI mode without initially transferring a
velocity value to the selected MDI block.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited.
G91 (incremental dimensions) was defined in
the MDI block as the 1st G function for the
MDI on-the-fly function.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited or stopped via
the deceleration ramp.
-Control signal "reset technology" [RST]
activated
Define a permissible velocity level for level 1
and/or level 2. The permissible value range is
between 0.01 [1000*LU/min] and "traversing
velocity - maximum (machine data 23).
Enter a permissible value for the approach
velocity. The permissible value range is
between 0.01 [1000*LU/min] and "traversing
velocity - maximum (machine data 23).
Enter a permissible value for the reference
point -reducing velocity. The permissible value
range is between 0.01 and 1000
[1000*LU/min].
Define an MDI block number [MDI_NO]
between 0 and 10.
Use the correct sequence: data transfer
followed by axis start.
Use the correct sequence: data transfer
followed by axis start.
The MDI on-the-fly function only allows G90
(absolute dimensions) as the 1st G function.
Ensure that the control signals are activated
correctly.
-Control signal "follow-up mode" [FUM]
activated
Effect:
The "MDI on-the-fly" function is not executed.
An NC block was started in single-block mode
although a block has not yet been transferred.
Transfer the block.
Effect:
NC block execution is inhibited.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-25
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A172
Program with this
number does not exist
A173
Program number not
allowed
A174
Program number
changed during
traversing
A175
No block end
programmed
A177
Prog. number of block
search forwd. does not
exist
A178
Program number of
block search forward
not allowed
08.2009
Cause
The program number specified in [PROG_NO]
for automatic mode is not stored in the
memory of the technology.
Counter-measure
-Transfer the program to the technology.
-Select the correct program number.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
The program number specified in [PROG_NO]
for automatic mode is not allowed.
The permissible range for program numbers is
between 1 and 200.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
The program number [PROG_NO] was
changed while the program was running.
The program number must not be changed
while the program is running.
Effect:
NC program execution is aborted and the axis
or axes are brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The decoded NC block is not terminated with
the following block identifier "0".
You can use the "output actual values decoder error location" task to read out the
program number and block number where the
block decoder detected an error.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted.
Moving axes are stopped via the deceleration
ramp.
The program number for the main program
(level 0), which was transferred with the block
search function, does not exist.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
-The program number for the main program
(level 0), which was transferred with block
search, is different from the selected program
number.
Correct the block.
The last block in the sequence must contain
the following block identifier "0".
Specify an existing main program number.
For the block search function, the selected
program number [PROG_NO] must be
specified as the program number for the main
program.
-No breakpoint is known for the "automatic
block search" function (a program abort has
not yet occurred).
-A different program number is stored as the
breakpoint for the "automatic block search"
function.
A179
Prog.No.of block srch
fwd level 1/2 does not
exist
A180
Prog.no. of block
search forward level 1
<> cmd.
A181
Prog.no. of block
search forward level 2
<> cmd.
12-26
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
The subprogram number specified with block
search for level 1 or level 2 does not exist.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
The subprogram number transferred with
block search for level 1 is not the same as the
subprogram number in the NC block.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
The subprogram number transferred with
block search for level 2 is not the same as the
subprogram number in the NC block.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
For the block search function, an existing
program number must be specified as the
subprogram number for level 1 or level 2.
For the block search function, the subprogram
number specified in the NC block must be
specified as the subprogram number for level
1.
For the block search function, the subprogram
number specified in the NC block must be
specified as the subprogram number for level
2.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A183
Block no. of block
search fwd l. 0 does
not exist
A184
Block no. of block
search forward is no
UP call
A185
Block no. of block
search forward does
not exist
A186
Block no of block
search fwd lev 1 is no
SP call
A187
Block no of block
search fwd lev 2 does
not exist
A188
Rem. loop count bl.
search fwd lev1/2 not
allowed
A190
Digital input not
programmed
A191
Digital input not
actuated
Faults and Alarms
Cause
The block number for the main program (level
0), which was transferred with block search,
does not exist in the main program.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
The block number for the main program (level
0), which was transferred with block search,
does not contain a subprogram call for
subprogram level 1.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
The block number for subprogram level 1,
which was transferred with block search, does
not exist in the subprogram.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
The block number for subprogram level 1,
which was transferred with block search, does
not contain a subprogram call for subprogram
level 2.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
The block number for subprogram level 2,
which was transferred with block search, does
not exist in the subprogram.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
The remaining loop count transferred with
block search for subprogram level 1 or 2 is
greater than the programmed loop count.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited.
The NC block which was read in contains the
"inprocess measurement" or "set actual value
on-the-fly" function, although a digital input
has not been programmed for this function
(machine data 45).
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
Although the "external block change" function
was programmed, the digital input was not
actuated in order to trigger the external block
change.
Counter-measure
For the block search function, an existing
block number must be specified as the block
number for the main program.
For the block search function, a block number
with a subprogram call must be specified as
the block number for the main program (level
0) if a block search is to be performed in
subprogram level 1.
For the block search function, a block number
which exists in this subprogram must be
specified as the block number for subprogram
level 1.
For the block search function, a block number
with a subprogram call must be specified as
the block number for subprogram level 1 if a
block search is to be performed in subprogram
level 2.
For the block search function, a block number
which exists in this subprogram must be
specified as the block number for subprogram
level 2.
For the block search function, it is only allowed
to specify a remaining loop count between 0
and the programmed loop count-1.
Program the digital input for the desired
function.
-Correct the program.
-Check the actuation of the digital input.
Effect:
The NC program is interrupted, the axis is
brought to a standstill via the deceleration
ramp.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-27
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A195
Negative overtravel
reached
08.2009
Cause
-Negative software limit switch position
approached
-"Software limit switches - negative" (machine
data 12) entered incorrectly
Counter-measure
-Check the machine data and the NC program.
-Check the encoder actual value.
-The programmed position is less than the
negative software limit switch.
-"Reference point - coordinate" (machine data
3) is less than the negative software limit
switch.
-Incorrect encoder actual value
A196
Positive overtravel
reached
Effect:
The axis movement is stopped via the
deceleration ramp.
-Positive software limit switch position
approached
-Check the machine data and the NC
programs.
-"Software limit switches - positive" (machine
data 13) entered incorrectly¨
-Check the encoder actual value.
-The programmed position is greater than the
positive software limit switch
-"Reference point - coordinate" (machine data
3) is greater than the positive software limit
switch
-Incorrect encoder actual value
A200
No position has been
programmed in
Automatic mode
A201
No velocity has been
programmed in
Automatic mode
12-28
Effect:
The axis movement is stopped via the
deceleration ramp.
No position has been programmed in the NC
block for the roll feed version, although the
axis number of the roll feed is specified.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The decoded NC block needs a path or axis
velocity.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The axis number and the positional value must
be specified in every NC block for the roll feed
version.
When using linear interpolation with path
velocity (G01), a path velocity must be defined
with F. When using chaining with axis velocity
(G77), the axis velocities must be defined with
FX, FY, etc. When using roll feed with axis
velocity (G01), the velocity must be defined
with F.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A202
Axis unknown
Faults and Alarms
Cause
An axis which does not exist was detected in
the decoded NC block. A logical name (X, Y,
Z, A, B, C) must be assigned to each axis with
machine data 2 (axis assignment). Only these
logical axis names can be used in the NC
block. These errors cannot normally occur,
since the logical axis names are verified when
the NC blocks are entered.
Counter-measure
Correct the NC block.
Exception: Machine data 2 (axis assignment)
is changed afterwards.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values – decoder error location"
task.
A203
1st G-function not
allowed
A204
2nd G-function not
allowed
A205
3rd G-function not
allowed
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The NC block which was read in contains an
illegal 1st G function.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited or stopped via
the deceleration ramp.
The NC block which was read in contains an
illegal 2nd G function.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited or stopped via
the deceleration ramp.
The NC block which was read in contains an
illegal 3rd G function.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
-MDI mode:Only G90 (absolute dimensions) or
G91 (incremental dimensions) can be entered
as the 1st G function. Only G91 is allowed for
the roll feed version.
-Automatic/single-block mode: Define a legal
1st G function according to the table (see the
Programming Guide).
-MDI mode:Only G30 to G39 (acceleration
override) can be entered as the 2nd G
function.
-Automatic/single-block mode: Define a legal
2nd G function according to the table (see the
Programming Guide).
-MDI mode: No 3rd G function is allowed.
-Automatic/single-block mode: Define a legal
3rd G function according to the table (see the
Programming Guide).
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited or stopped via
the deceleration ramp.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-29
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A206
4th G-function not
allowed
A208
D-number is not
allowed
A210
Interpolation of 3 axes
not allowed
A211
Shortest distance G68
and G91 not allowed
08.2009
Cause
The NC block which was read in contains an
illegal 4th G function.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited or stopped via
the deceleration ramp.
A D number greater than 20 was found in the
decoded NC block.
Counter-measure
-MDI mode: No 4th G function is allowed.
-Automatic/single-block mode: Define a legal
4th G function according to the table (see the
Programming Guide).
Correct the NC block.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
Effect:
The axis movement is inhibited or stopped via
the deceleration ramp.
The decoded NC block contains an
interpolation of 3 or more axes.
Correct the NC block. Only 2D interpolation is
allowed.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
G function G68 (shortest path for rotary axis)
was detected in the decoded NC block,
although G91 (incremental dimensions) is
active.
Correct the NC block. Function G68 can only
be programmed in association with G90
(absolute dimensions).
Example: N10 G91 G68 X20.000
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
12-30
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A212
Special function and
axis combination not
allowed
Faults and Alarms
Cause
A different axis was programmed in the NC
block following a special function (M7 only).
Example:
N10 G50 X100 F1000
N15 G90 Y200 incorrect
N15 G90 X200 correct
Counter-measure
Correct the NC program. The axis used in the
NC block with the special function must also
be programmed in the next NC block.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
A213
Multiple D-number not
allowed
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The decoded NC block contains several D
numbers.
Correct the NC block.
Example:
N1 G41 D3 D5.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
A214
Multiple acceleration
behaviour not allowed
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The decoded NC block contains several
mutually exclusive G functions from the
acceleration override group (G30 to G39).
Correct the NC block.
Example:
N1 G34 G35
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
A215
Multiple special
functions not allowed
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The decoded NC block contains several
mutually exclusive G functions from the
special function group (G87, G88, G89, G50,
G51).
Correct the NC block.
Example:
N1 G88 G50
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-31
Faults and Alarms
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A216
Cause
The decoded NC block contains several
mutually exclusive G functions from the block
Multiple block transition transition group (G60, G64, G66, G67).
not allowed
Example:
N1 G64 G66 X1.000 FX100.00
Counter-measure
Correct the NC block.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
A217
Multiple axis
programming not
allowed
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The decoded NC block contains the same axis
more than once.
Correct the NC block.
Example:
N1 G90 G01 X100.000 X200.000 F100.00
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
A218
Multiple path condition
not allowed
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The decoded NC block contains several
mutually exclusive G functions from the
preparatory function group
(G00/G01/G76/G77).
Correct the NC block.
Example:
N1 G01 (linear interpolation) G77 (chaining)
X10 F100.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
A219
Multiple dimensions
specification not
allowed
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The decoded NC block contains several
mutually exclusive G functions from the
dimensional notation group (G90/G91).
Correct the NC block.
Example:
N1 G90 G91.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
12-32
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A220
Multiple zero offset
selection not allowed
Faults and Alarms
Cause
The decoded NC block contains several
mutually exclusive G functions from the zero
offset group (G53 to G59).
Counter-measure
Correct the NC block.
Example:
N1 G54 G58
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
A221
Multiple tool offset
selection not allowed
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The decoded NC block contains several
mutually exclusive G functions from the tool
offset selection group (G43/G44).
Correct the NC block.
Example:
N1 G43 G44 D2
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
A223
Subprogram number
does not exist
A224
Subprogram nesting
depth not allowed
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The decoded NC block contains a subprogram
call, however the NC program which was
called does not exist in the memory of the
technology.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The permissible nesting depth of subprograms
was exceeded. Recursive calling of
subprograms.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
Correct the NC block.
Correct the NC program.
The permissible nesting depth for
subprograms is 2 subprogram levels.
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-33
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A225
Status of collision
monitoring select. not
allowed
08.2009
Cause
The decoded NC block contains simultaneous
selection and deselection of collision
monitoring (G96/G97).
Counter-measure
Correct the NC block.
Example: N1 G96 G97 X100
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
A227
Negative overtravel
violated
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The look-ahead function of the decoder has
Correct the NC program.
detected that the negative software limit switch Check the machine data.
will be crossed. See also error message
"A195: Negative overtravel reached".
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
A228
Positive overtravel
violated
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The look-ahead function of the decoder has
detected that the positive software limit switch
will be crossed. See also error message
"A196: Positive overtravel reached".
Correct the NC program.
Check the machine data.
The NC program number and NC block
number in which the NC block decoder
detected the error can be read out with the
"output actual values - decoder error location"
task.
A241
Effect:
NC program execution is inhibited or aborted,
the axis is brought to a standstill via the
deceleration ramp.
The table assignment has been changed.
Table assignment
changed
Effect:
NC tables cannot be processed.
A242
Table 1 was not loaded correctly or has been
reset.
Table 1 invalid
A243
Table 2 invalid
12-34
Effect:
Table 1 cannot be processed.
Table 2 was not loaded correctly or has been
reset.
Effect:
Table 2 cannot be processed.
Load the table again.
Note:
A table can only be loaded again if it is not
selected. The warning is cleared automatically
when the table has been successfully loaded.
Load table 1 again.
Note:
Table 1 can only be loaded again if it is not
selected. The warning is cleared automatically
when table 1 has been successfully loaded.
Load table 2 again.
Note:
Table 2 can only be loaded again if it is not
selected. The warning is cleared automatically
when table 2 has been successfully loaded.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Number / Alarm
A244
Travel table 3 not valid
A245
Travel table 4 not valid
A246
Travel table 5 not valid
A247
Travel table 6 not valid
A248
Travel table 7 not valid
A249
Travel table 8 not valid
Faults and Alarms
Cause
Travel table 3 has not been correctly adopted
or has been reset.
Consequence:
Travel table 3 cannot be processed.
Travel table 4 has not been correctly adopted
or has been reset.
Consequence:
Travel table 4 cannot be processed.
Travel table 5 has not been correctly adopted
or has been reset.
Consequence:
Travel table 5 cannot be processed.
Travel table 6 has not been correctly adopted
or has been reset.
Consequence:
Travel table 6 cannot be processed.
Travel table 7 has not been correctly adopted
or has been reset.
Consequence:
Travel table 7 cannot be processed.
Travel table 8 has not been correctly adopted
or has been reset.
Consequence:
Travel table 8 cannot be processed.
Table 12-2
Counter-measure
Adopt travel table 3 again.
Note:
Travel table 3 can only be newly adopted if it is
not selected. When travel table 3 has been
successfully adopted, the alarm message is
automatically canceled.
Adopt travel table 4 again.
Note:
Travel table 4 can only be newly adopted if it is
not selected. When travel table 4 has been
successfully adopted, the alarm message is
automatically canceled.
Adopt travel table 5 again.
Note:
Travel table 5 can only be newly adopted if it is
not selected. When travel table 5 has been
successfully adopted, the alarm message is
automatically canceled.
Adopt travel table 6 again.
Note:
Travel table 6 can only be newly adopted if it is
not selected. When travel table 6 has been
successfully adopted, the alarm message is
automatically canceled.
Adopt travel table 7 again.
Note:
Travel table 7 can only be newly adopted if it is
not selected. When travel table 7 has been
successfully adopted, the alarm message is
automatically canceled.
Adopt travel table 8 again.
Note:
Travel table 8 can only be newly adopted if it is
not selected. When travel table 8 has been
successfully adopted, the alarm message is
automatically canceled.
Alarm numbers, causes and their counter-measures
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-35
Faults and Alarms
12.3
08.2009
Fatal errors (FF)
Fatal errors are serious hardware or software errors which no longer
permit normal operation of the unit. They only appear on the PMU in
the form "FF<No>". The software is re-booted by actuating any key on
the PMU.
Number / Fault
FF01
Time slot overflow
FF03
Access fault
Optional board
FF04
RAM
FF05
EPROM fault
FF06
Cause
A time slot overflow which cannot be remedied
has been detected in the high-priority time
slots.
At least 40 failures of time slots T2, T3, T4 or
T5 (see also parameter r829.2 to r829.5)
Serious faults have occurred while accessing
external option boards (CB, TB, SCB, TSY ..).
A fault has occurred during the test of the
RAM.
- Replace the option board
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
A fault has occurred during the test of the
EPROM.
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Stack has overflowed
For VC: Increase sampling time (P357)
For MC: Reduce pulse frequency (P340)
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Stack underflow
Stack Underflow
FF08
Undefined Opcode
FF09
Protection Fault
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
- Replace the LBA
Stack overflow
FF07
Counter-measure
- Reduce pulse frequency (P340)
- Replace CU
Invalid processor command should be
processed
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Invalid format in a protected processor
command
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
FF10
Word access to uneven address
Illegal Word Operand
Address
FF11
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Jump command to uneven address
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
A version conflict between the firmware and
the hardware has occurred.
- Replace firmware
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Unexpected fatal error
Replace the board
FF15
(During processing of the fatal errors, a fault
number has occurred which is unknown to
date).
Stack overflow (C-Compiler Stack)
Replace the board
CSTACK_OVERFLOW
FF16
NMI
Illegal Instruction
Access
FF13
Wrong firmware
version
FF14
FF processing
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
NMI error
not Compact PLUS
Table 12-3
12-36
Fatal errors
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD50 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
08.2009
Environmental Friendliness
13 Environment
al Friendliness
Environmental
aspects during the
development
The number of components has been significantly reduced over earlier
converter series by the use of highly integrated components and the
modular design of the complete series. Thus, the energy requirement
during production has been reduced.
Special significance was placed on the reduction of the volume, weight
and variety of metal and plastic components.
Plastic components
used
ABS:
PMU support panel
LOGO
LDPE: Cap acitor ring
PA6.6: Fuse holders, mounting rail,
capacitor holder, cable retainer,
connecting strips, terminal strip,
supports, PMU adapter, covers,
cable holder
PC: Covers
PP: Ins ulating boards
bus retrofit
PS: Fan housing
UP: Tensi oning profile
retaining bolts,
tensioning disk
Halogen-containing flame retardants were, for all essential
components, replaced by environmentally-friendly flame retardants.
Environmental compatibility was an important criterium when selecting
the supplied components.
Environmental
aspects during
production
Purchased components are generally supplied in recyclable packaging
materials (board).
Surface finishes and coatings were eliminated with the exception of the
galvanized sheet steel side panels.
ASIC devices and SMD devices were used on the boards.
The production is emission-free.
Environmental
aspects for disposal
The unit can be broken down into recyclable mechanical components
as a result of easily releasable screw and snap connections.
The plastic components are to DIN 54840 and have a recycling symbol.
After the service life has expired, the product must be disposed of in
accordance with the applicable national regulations.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD50
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-1
Bisher sind folgende Ausgaben erschienen:
The following versions have been published so far:
Ausgabe
Version
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
interne Sachnummer
Internal item number
475 944 4070 76 J AA-74
475 944 4070 76 J AB-74
475 944 4070 76 J AC-74
A5E00394438
A5E00394438
Ausgabe AE besteht aus folgenden Kapiteln:
Kapitel
1
Definitionen und Warnungen
2 Beschre ibung
3
Transportieren, Lagern, Auspacken über
4 Erstinbetri ebsetzung
5 Montag e
6 EMV-gerec hter Aufbau
7 Anschl ießen
8 Parametri erung
9 W artung
10 F ormieren
11 T echnische Daten
12 Störungen und Warnungen
13 Um weltverträglichkeit
Änderungen
Seitenzahl
Ausgabedatum
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
arbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
6
1
1
2
6
6
17
52
4
2
18
38
1
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
Changes
Pages
Version
date
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
6
1
1
2
6
6
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
17
52
4
2
18
36
1
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
08.2009
Version AE consists of the following chapters:
Chapter
1
Definitions and Warnings
2 Descripti on
3
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
4
First Start-up
5 Installati on
6
Installation in Conformance with EMC
Regulations
7 Con necting-up
8 Parameter ization
9 Mainte nance
10 F orming
11 Technical Data
12 Faults and Warnings
13 Environmental Friendliness
Änderungen von Funktionen, technischen Daten, Normen,
Zeichnungen und Parametern vorbehalten.
We reserve the right to make changes to functions, technical data,
standards, drawings and parameters.
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage, Verwertung
und Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrücklich zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte vorbehalten, insbesondere für den Fall der
Patenterteilung oder GM-Eintragung.
Wir haben den Inhalt der Druckschrift auf Übereinstimmung mit
der beschriebenen Hard- und Software überprüft. Dennoch
können Abweichungen nicht ausgeschlossen werden, so dass wir
für die vollständige Übereinstimmung keine Garantie
übernehmen. Die Angaben in dieser Druckschrift werden jedoch
regelmäßig überprüft und notwendige Korrekturen sind in den
nachfolgenden Auflagen enthalten. Für Verbesserungsvorschläge
SIMOVERT® ist ein Warenzeichen von Siemens
sind wir dankbar.
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by
patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that
they coincide with the described hardware and software.
However, differences cannot be completely excluded, so that we
do not accept any guarantee for complete conformance.
However, the information in this document is regularly checked
and necessary corrections will be included in subsequent editions.
SIMOVERT® Registered Trade Mark
We are grateful for any recommendations for improvement.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Motion Control Systems
P.O. Box 3180, D – 91050 Erlangen
Germany
www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
© Siemens AG 2009
Subject to change without prior notice
Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 6SE7087-6JD50
Printed in Germany
Betriebsanleitung / Operating Instructions
Ausgabe/Edition: AE
simovert
masterdrives
Vector Control
Frequenzumrichter (AC-AC) Bauform Kompakt
Frequency Converter (AC-AC) Compact Type
04.2006
Contents
Contents
1
DEFINITIONS AND WARNINGS ..................................................................... 1-1
2
DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 2-1
3
FIRST START-UP ............................................................................................ 3-1
4
TRANSPORT, STORAGE, UNPACKING........................................................ 4-1
5
INSTALLATION ............................................................................................... 5-1
5.1
Installing the units ............................................................................................. 5-1
5.2
Installing the optional boards............................................................................ 5-4
6
INSTALLATION IN CONFORMANCE WITH EMC REGULATIONS .............. 6-1
7
CONNECTING-UP ........................................................................................... 7-1
7.1
7.1.1
Power connections ........................................................................................... 7-4
Terminal strip X9 (only for units with a rated input voltage of
3-ph. AC 380 - 480 V and 3-ph. AC 500 - 600 V) without "safe stop" option ... 7-7
Terminal strip X9 (only for units with a rated input voltage of
3-ph. AC 200 - 230 V)....................................................................................... 7-8
Terminal strip X9 (only for units with a rated input voltage of
3-ph. 380 – 480 V with "safe stop" option) ....................................................... 7-9
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.2
Control connections ........................................................................................ 7-13
7.3
Fan fuses (only type D)................................................................................... 7-20
8
PARAMETERIZATION..................................................................................... 8-1
8.1
Parameter menus ............................................................................................. 8-1
8.2
Changeability of parameters............................................................................. 8-5
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.1.1
8.3.1.2
Parameter input with DriveMonitor ................................................................... 8-6
Installation and connection ............................................................................... 8-6
Installation......................................................................................................... 8-6
Connection........................................................................................................ 8-6
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1
Contents
04.2006
8.3.2
8.3.2.1
8.3.2.2
8.3.2.3
8.3.3
8.3.3.1
8.3.3.2
Establishing the connection between DriveMonitor and the device ................. 8-7
Setting the USS interface ................................................................................. 8-7
Starting the USS bus scan................................................................................ 8-9
Creating a parameter set ................................................................................ 8-10
Parameterization............................................................................................. 8-12
Structure of the parameter lists, parameterization with DriveMonitor ............ 8-12
General diagnostics ........................................................................................ 8-17
8.4
Parameter input via the PMU.......................................................................... 8-18
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.1.1
8.5.1.2
Parameter input via the OP1S........................................................................ 8-22
Connecting, run-up ......................................................................................... 8-24
Connecting...................................................................................................... 8-24
Run-up ............................................................................................................ 8-25
9
PARAMETERIZING STEPS............................................................................. 9-1
9.1
Parameter reset to factory setting .................................................................... 9-3
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
Quick parameterization procedures.................................................................. 9-9
Quick parameterization, P060 = 3 (Parameterizing with
parameter modules).......................................................................................... 9-9
Parameterizing with user settings................................................................... 9-38
Parameterizing by loading parameter files (download P060 = 6)................... 9-39
Parameterization by running script files.......................................................... 9-41
9.3
Motor list ......................................................................................................... 9-42
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
Detailed parameterization............................................................................... 9-45
Power section definition.................................................................................. 9-45
Board configuration......................................................................................... 9-47
Drive setting.................................................................................................... 9-51
9.5
9.5.1
9.5.2
Notes regarding parameterization .................................................................. 9-60
Drive setting according to process-related boundary conditions.................... 9-65
Changes to the function selection parameter (P052) VC(former) .................. 9-67
10
CONTROL WORD AND STATUS WORD..................................................... 10-1
10.1
Description of the control word bits ................................................................ 10-1
10.2
Description of the status word bits................................................................ 10-11
11
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 11-1
11.1
Replacing the fan............................................................................................ 11-2
11.2
Replacing the PMU......................................................................................... 11-4
2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Contents
12
FORMING ....................................................................................................... 12-1
13
TECHNICAL DATA ........................................................................................ 13-1
13.1
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.3.1
13.1.3.2
13.1.3.3
13.1.4
13.1.5
Notes regarding water-cooled units.............................................................. 13-12
Notes regarding installation and components .............................................. 13-13
Application .................................................................................................... 13-15
Coolant.......................................................................................................... 13-17
Definition of cooling water............................................................................. 13-17
Antifreeze additive ........................................................................................ 13-18
Corrosion protection agent ........................................................................... 13-20
Protection against condensation .................................................................. 13-21
Notes on materials........................................................................................ 13-22
14
FAULTS AND ALARMS ................................................................................ 14-1
14.1
Faults .............................................................................................................. 14-1
14.2
Alarms........................................................................................................... 14-18
14.3
Fatal errors (FF)............................................................................................ 14-26
15
ENVIRONMENTAL FRIENDLINESS............................................................. 15-1
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
3
04.2006
1
Definitions and Warnings
Definitions and Warnings
Qualified personnel
For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
a "Qualified person" is someone who is familiar with the installation,
mounting, start-up, operation and maintenance of the product. He or
she must have the following qualifications:
♦ Trained or authorized to energize, de-energize, ground and tag
circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
♦ Trained or authorized in the proper care and use of protective
equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
♦ Trained in rendering first aid.
DANGER
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death, serious injury and considerable damage to property.
WARNING
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death, serious injury and considerable damage to property.
CAUTION
used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.
NOTICE
NOTICE used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential
situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or
state.
NOTE
For the purpose of this documentation, "Note" indicates important
information about the product or about the respective part of the
documentation which is essential to highlight.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1-1
Definitions and Warnings
WARNING
04.2006
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during
operation.
Non-observance of the warnings can thus result in severe personal
injury or property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment
This personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warning and
maintenance procedures contained in this documentation.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on
correct transport, proper storage and installation as well as careful
operation and maintenance.
NOTE
This documentation does not purport to cover all details on all types of
the product, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in
connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems
arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes,
the matter should be referred to the local SIEMENS sales office.
The contents of this documentation shall not become part of or modify
any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales
contract contains the entire obligation of SIEMENS AG. The warranty
contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of
SIEMENS AG. Any statements contained herein do not create new
warranties or modify the existing warranty.
1-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Definitions and Warnings
Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)
CAUTION
The board contains components which can be destroyed by
electrostatic discharge. These components can be easily destroyed if
not carefully handled. If you have to handle electronic boards, please
observe the following:
Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary.
The human body must be electrically discharged before touching an
electronic board.
Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials - e.g.
plastic parts, insulated desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from
man-made fibers.
Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces.
Boards and components should only be stored and transported in
conductive packaging (e.g. metalized plastic boxes or metal
containers).
If the packing material is not conductive, the boards must be wrapped
with a conductive packaging material, e.g. conductive foam rubber or
household aluminium foil.
The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly shown again in the
following diagram:
♦ a = Conductive floor surface
♦ b = ESD table
♦ c = ESD shoes
♦ d = ESD overall
♦ e = ESD chain
♦ f = Cubicle ground connection
d
d
b
b
d
e
e
f
a
f
f
c
c
Sitting
Standing
Fig. 1-1
a
f
f
c
a
Standing / Sitting
ESD protective measures
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
1-3
Definitions and Warnings
04.2006
Safety and Operating Instructions
for Drive Converters
(in conformity with the low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC)
1. General
4. Installation
In operation, drive converters, depending on their
degree of protection, may have live, uninsulated, and
possibly also moving or rotating parts, as well as hot
surfaces.
The installation and cooling of the appliances shall be
in accordance with the specifications in the pertinent
documentation.
In case of inadmissible removal of the required covers,
of improper use, wrong installation or maloperation,
there is the danger of serious personal injury and
damage to property.
For further information, see documentation.
All operations serving transport, installation and
commissioninng as well as maintenance are to be
carried out by skilled technical personnel (Observe
IEC 60364 or CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100
and IEC 60664 or DIN VDE0110 and national accident
prevention rules!).
For the purposes of these basic safety instructions,
"skilled technical personnel" means persons who are
familiar with the installation, mounting, commissioning
and operation of the product and have the qualifications
needed for the performance of their functions.
2. Intended use
Drive converters are components designed for
inclusion in electrical installations or machinery.
In case of installation in machinery, commissioning of
the drive converter (i.e. the starting of normal
operation) is prohibited until the machinery has been
proved to conform to the provisions of the directive
98/37/EG (Machinery Safety Directive - MSD).
Account is to be taken of EN 60204.
Commissioning (i.e. the starting of normal opertion) is
admissible only where conformity with the EMC
directive (89/336/EEC) has been established.
The drive converters meet the requirements of the
low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC.
They are subject to the harmonized standards of the
series EN 50178 / DIN VDE 0160 in conjunction with
EN 60439-1 / DIN VDE 0660 part 500 and EN 60146 /
VDE 0558.
The drive converters shall be protected against
excessive strains. In particular, no components must
be bent or isolating distances altered in the course of
transportation or handling. No contact shall be made
with electronic components and contacts.
Drive converters contain electrostatic sensitive
components which are liable to damage through
improper use. Electric components must not be
mechanically damaged or destroyed (potential health
risks).
5. Electrical connection
When working on live drive converters, the applicable
national accident prevention rules (e.g. BGV A2) must
be complied with.
The electrical installation shall be carried out in
accordance with the relevant requirements (e.g. crosssectional areas of conductors, fusing, PE connection).
For further information, see documentation.
Instructions for the installation in accordance with EMC
requirements, like screening, earthing, location of filters
and wiring, are contained in the drive converter
documentation. They must always be complied with, also
for drive converters bearing a CE marking. Observance
of the limit values required by EMC law is the
responsibility of the manufacturer of the installation or
machine.
6. Operation
Installations which include drive converters shall be
equipped with additional control and protective devices
in accordance with the relevant applicable safety
requirements, e.g. Act respecting technical equipment,
accident prevention rules etc. Changes to the drive
converters by means of the operating software are
admissible.
3. Transport, storage
After disconnection of the drive converter from the
voltage supply, live appliance parts and power
terminals must not be touched immediately because of
possibly energized capacitors. In this respect, the
corresponding signs and markings on the drive
converter must be respected.
The instructions for transport, storage and proper use
shall be complied with.
During operation, all covers and doors shall be kept
closed.
The climatic conditions shall be in conformity with EN
50178.
7. Maintenance and servicing
The technical data as well as information concerning the
supply conditions shall be taken from the rating plate and
from the documentation and shall be strictly observed.
The manufacturer's documentation shall be followed.
KEEP SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IN A SAFE PLACE!
1-4
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
2
Description
Description
Range of application The frequency converter is a power electronics component for feeding
three-phase drives in the output range from 2.2 kW to 37 kW.
The unit can be operated from a three-phase system with a frequency
of 50/60 Hz and a voltage in the range of the values indicated on the
rating plate (200...230 / 380...480 / 500...600 V).
The three-phase current from the system is rectified, smoothed and fed
onto the capacitor DC link.
The inverter enables a variable output frequency between 0 Hz and a
maximum of 600 Hz to be generated from the DC current with the pulse
width modulation method (PWM).
The internal 24 V DC voltage is supplied through an integral power
supply unit from the DC link.
The unit is controlled by the internal closed-loop control electronics, the
functions are provided by the unit software.
Operator control is via the PMU operator control panel, the user-friendly
OP1S operator contol panel, the terminal strip or via the serial
interfaces of the bus system. For this purpose, the unit is provided with
a number of interfaces and six slots for the use of optional boards.
Pulse encoders and analog tachometers can be used as encoders on
the motor.
Optional
boards
Terminal strip
PMU
Control electronics
24 V
==
==
Serial
interface
Internal
power
supply
U1/L1
U2/T1
V1/L2
V2/T2
Motor
connecW2/T3 tion
W1/L3
PE
Rectifier
Pre-charging
DC link
Inverter
PE2
C / L+
D/LPE1
Fig. 2-1
Circuit principle of the frequency converter
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
2-1
04.2006
3
First Start-up
First Start-up
Unpack and check the
units
After removing the packaging, check that the unit is
intact and undamaged. Only intact units may be started
up. Also check the unit to ensure it is complete and that
the optional boards are correctly equipped on the basis
of the package label (on the outside of the packaging).
See section
"Transport,
Storage,
Unpacking"
Mount the unit and
install optional boards
which have not yet
been fitted
Retrofit any optional boards which have not yet been
installed, if necessary. Then install the units taking into
account the requirements at the point of installation and
the EMC instructions.
See section
"Installation"
and "Installation
in Conformance
with EMC
Regulations"
Form the DC link
capacitors,
if necessary
If the DC link of the unit was de-energized for more than
one year, you have to newly form the DC link capacitors
See section
"Forming"
Connect the protective
conductor, the power
cables or buses and, if
present, the ext. 24 V
supply
Beginning with the PE conductor connect the power
See section
cables or the DC link busbars and the 230 V~ for the fan.
"Connecting-up"
If configured, also connect the external 24 V incoming
and
power supply. Pay attention to EMC instructions when
"Installation in
laying the cables. Please do not at this stage connect
Conformance
any control, communication, encoder and motor cables
with EMC
(exception: cable for connecting up an OP1S, if
Regulations"
parameterization is to be effected via the OP1S).
Connect the control
cables, communication
cables, encoder cables
and motor cables
Please connect the remaining control, communication,
encoder and motor cables. Pay attention to the EMC
instructions when laying the cables.
Power up the external
24 V supply or the line
voltage
WARNING
See section
The device must be disconnected from
"Connecting-up"
its voltage supplies (24 V DC electronics
and "Installation
supply and DC link / mains voltage)
before the control and encoder leads are in Conformance
with EMC
connected or disconnected!
Failure to observe this advice can result in Regulations"
encoder defects, which may in turn cause
uncontrolled axis movements.
After checking that the cabling has been correctly
connected and that it sits properly, power up the
external 24 V supply or the line voltage. After the
electronics power supply has been started, the unit
initializes itself. The action can take several seconds.
The drive status is subsequently shown on the PMU.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
111
3-1
First Start-up
04.2006
If necessary, carry out
parameter reset to
factory setting
Parameterizing by
download or with
parameter modules
If the PMU does not show status °009 after completion
of the unit initialization, or if the unit has already been
See section
parameterized before, you should carry out a parameter "Parameterization"
reset to factory setting.
See section
"Parameterization"
AAA
De-energize 24 V
supply or line voltage
Function test
siehe
After checking the unit and the cabling once more, power "Anschließen"
und "EMVup the line voltage or DC link voltage and perform a
gerechter
function test according to your parameterization.
Aufbau"
WARNING It must be ensured that no danger for
persons and equipment can occur by
energizing the power and the unit. It is
recommended not to couple the driven
machine until the function test has
been successfully completed.
Further start-up and parameterization according to
your specific requirements
3-2
Operating Instructions
siehe "Ans
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
4
Transport
Storage
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
The units and components are packed in the manufacturing plant
corresponding to that specified when ordered. A packing label is
located on the outside of the packaging. Please observe the
instructions on the packaging for transport, storage and professional
handling.
Vibrations and jolts must be avoided during transport. If the unit is
damaged, you must inform your shipping company immediately.
The units and components must be stored in clean, dry rooms.
Temperatures between -25 °C (-13 °F) and +70 °C (158 °F) are
permissible. Temperature fluctuations must not be more than 30 K per
hour.
CAUTION
If the storage period of two years is exceeded, the unit must be newly
formed. See Section ”Forming".
Unpacking
The packaging comprises board and corrugated paper. It can be
disposed of corresponding to the appropriate local regulations for the
disposal of board products. The units and components can be installed
and commissioned after they have been unpacked and checked to
ensure that everything is complete and that they are not damaged.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
4-1
04.2006
Installation
5
Installation
5.1
Installing the units
WARNING
Safe converter operation requires that the equipment is mounted and
commissioned by qualified personnel taking into account the warning
information provided in these Operating Instructions.
The general and domestic installation and safety regulations for work
on electrical power equipment (e.g. VDE) must be observed as well as
the professional handling of tools and the use of personal protective
equipment.
Death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage could result if
these instructions are not followed.
NOTE
MASTERDRIVES components are designed in accordance with degree
of protection IP20 or IBXXB in accordance with EN 60529 and as opentype devices to UL 50, thus providing protection against electrical
shocks. In order to also ensure protection against mechanical and
climatic stresses the components have to be operated in
housings/cabinets/rooms that are designed according to the
requirements of’ EN 60529 and classified as enclosure type to UL 50.
Clearances
When positioning the units, it must be observed that the mains
connection is located at the top section of the unit and the motor
connection at the lower section of the unit.
The units can be mounted flush with each other.
In order to ensure an adequate supply of cooling air, a clearance of
100 mm must be left at the top of the unit and 250 mm at the bottom of
the unit respectively to components which may considerably affect the
flow of cooling air.
When mounting in switch cabinets, the cabinet cooling must be
dimensioned according to the dissipated power. Please refer to the
Technical Data in this regard.
Requirements at the
point of installation
♦ Foreign particles
The units must be protected against the ingress of foreign particles
as otherwise their function and operational safety cannot be
ensured.
♦ Dust, gases, vapors
Equipment rooms must be dry and dust-free. Ambient and cooling
air must not contain any electrically conductive gases, vapors and
dusts which could diminish the functionality. If necessary, filters
should be used or other corrective measures taken.
♦ Cooling air
The ambient climate of the units must not exceed the values of DIN
IEC 721-3-3 class 3K3. For cooling air temperatures of more than
40°C (104°F) and installation altitudes higher than 1000 m, derating
is required.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-1
Installation
04.2006
100 mm
Mounting
surface
250 mm
Cooling air
Fig. 5-1
Mounting
Minimum clearances for cooling
The unit is mounted directly to a mounting surface, for which you
require the following:
♦ G-type mounting rail according to EN50035 with screws for fixing at
the top
♦ One M6 screw for types A to C, two M6 screws for type D, for fixing
at the bottom
♦ Dimension drawing for types A, B and for types C, D.
5-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Installation
Mounting surface
425 mm
425 mm
G-type rail according to EN50035
Cutouts for
M6 screws
45 mm
90 mm
350 mm
Type A
Side view
67.5 mm
135 mm
Type B
Front view (without front panel)
Fig. 5-2
Mounting surface
600 mm
600 mm
G-type rail according to EN50035
Dimension drawings for installation of types A, B
Cutouts for
M6 screws
90 mm
180 mm
350 mm
Type C
Side view
45 mm
180 mm
270 mm
Type D
Front view (without front panel)
Fig. 5-3
Dimension drawings for installation of types C, D
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-3
Installation
5.2
WARNING
04.2006
Installing the optional boards
The boards may only be replaced by qualified personnel.
It is not permitted to withdraw or insert the boards under voltage.
Slots
A maximum of six slots are available in the electronics box of the unit
for installing optional boards. The slots are designated with the letters A
to G. Slot B is not provided in the electronics box. It is used in units of
the Compact PLUS type of construction.
If you wish to use slots D to G, you will additionally require the
following:
♦ Bus expansion LBA (Local Bus Adapter), which is used for mounting
the CU board and up to two adaption boards, and
♦ An adaption board (ADB - Adaption Board) on which up to two
optional boards can be mounted.
The slots are situated at the following positions:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Slot A
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G
CU board
CU board
Adaption board at mounting position 2
Adaption board at mounting position 2
Adaption board at mounting position 3
Adaption board at mounting position 3
Position: top
Position: bottom
Position: top
Position: bottom
Position: top
Position: bottom
Mounting
position 1
Mounting
position 3
Mounting
position 2
Fig. 5-4
NOTE
5-4
Position of the slots for Compact and chassis type units
Mounting position 2 can be used for technology boards (T100, T300,
TSY).
Mounting positions 2 and 3 can also be used for communication boards
SCB1 and SCB2.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Installation
DANGER
The unit has hazardous voltage levels up to 5 minutes after it has been
powered down due to the DC link capacitors.
The unit or the DC link terminals must not be worked on until at least
after this delay time.
CAUTION
The optional boards contain components which could be damaged by
electrostatic discharge. These components can be very easily
destroyed if not handled with caution. You must observe the ESD
cautionary measures when handling these boards.
Disconnecting the unit from the supply
DANGER
Preparing
installation
Disconnect the unit from the incoming power supply (AC or DC supply)
and de-energize the unit. Remove the 24 V voltage supply for the
electronics. Remove all connecting cables.
Open the front panel.
Remove the CU board or the adaption board from the electronics box
as follows:
♦ Disconnect the connecting cables to the CU board or to the optional
boards.
♦ Undo the two fixing screws on the handles above and below the CU
board or the adaption board.
♦ Pull the CU board or the adaption board out of the electronics box
using the handles.
Installing the
optional board
NOTE
♦ Place the CU board or the adaption board on a grounded working
surface.
Insert the optional board from the right onto the 64-pole system
connector on the CU board or on the adaption board. The view shows
the installed state.
Screw the optional board tight at the fixing points in the front section of
the optional board using the two screws attached.
The optional board must be pressed tightly onto the plug connector, it is
not sufficient to simply tighten the screws!
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
5-5
Installation
04.2006
Re-installing the unit Re-install the CU board or the adaption board in the electronics box as
follows:
♦ Insert the CU board into mounting position 1 and the adaption board
into mounting position 2 or 3.
NOTE
Mounting position 3 cannot be used until at least one adaption board
has been installed at mounting position 2. Boards should first be
installed in mounting position 2, before mounting position 3 is used.
♦ Secure the CU board/adaption board at the handles with the fixing
screws.
Re-connect the previously removed connections.
Check that all the connecting cables and the shield sit properly and are
in the correct position.
5-6
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
6
Rule 1
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
Installation in Conformance with EMC
Regulations
Basic EMC rules
Rules 1 to 13 are generally applicable. Rules 14 to 20 are particularly
important for limiting noise emission.
All of the metal cabinet parts must be connected through the largest
possible surface areas (not paint on paint). If required, use serrated
washers. The cabinet door must be connected to the cabinet through
grounding straps which must be kept as short as possible.
NOTE
Grounding installations/machines is essentially a protective measure.
However, in the case of drive systems, this also has an influence on the
noise emission and noise immunity. A system can either be grounded
in a star configuration or each component grounded separately.
Preference should be given to the latter grounding system in the case
of drive systems, i.e. all parts of the installation to be grounded are
connected through their surface or in a mesh pattern.
Rule 2
Signal cables and power cables must be routed separately (to eliminate
coupled-in noise). Minimum clearance: 20 cm. Provide partitions
between power cables and signal cables. The partitions must be
grounded at several points along their length.
Contactors, relays, solenoid valves, electromechanical operating hours
counters, etc. in the cabinet must be provided with quenching elements,
for example, RC elements, diodes, varistors. These quenching devices
must be connected directly at the coil.
Non-shielded cables associated with the same circuit (outgoing and
incoming conductor) must be twisted, or the surface between the
outgoing and incoming conductors kept as small as possible in order to
prevent unnecessary coupling effects.
Eliminate any unnecessary cable lengths to keep coupling
capacitances and inductances low.
Connect the reserve cables/conductors to ground at both ends to
achieve an additional shielding effect.
In general, it is possible to reduce the noise being coupled-in by routing
cables close to grounded cabinet panels. Therefore, wiring should be
routed as close as possible to the cabinet housing and the mounting
panels and not freely through the cabinet. The same applies for reserve
cables/conductors.
Tachometers, encoders or resolvers must be connected through a
shielded cable. The shield must be connected to the tachometer,
encoder or resolver and at the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES through a
large surface area. The shield must not be interrupted, e.g. using
intermediate terminals. Pre-assembled cables with multiple shields
should be used for encoders and resolvers (see Catalog DA65).
Rule 3
Rule 4
Rule 5
Rule 6
Rule 7
Rule 8
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
6-1
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
Rule 9
Rule 10
Rule 11
Rule 12
Rule 13
Rule 14
6-2
04.2006
The cable shields of digital signal cables must be connected to ground
at both ends (transmitter and receiver) through the largest possible
surface area. If the equipotential bonding is poor between the shield
connections, an additional equipotential bonding conductor with at least
10 mm² must be connected in parallel to the shield, to reduce the shield
current. Generally, the shields can be connected to ground (= cabinet
housing) in several places. The shields can also be connected to
ground at several locations, even outside the cabinet.
Foil-type shields are not to be favoured. They do not shield as well as
braided shields; they are poorer by a factor of at least 5.
The cable shields of analog signal cables can be connected to ground
at both ends if the equipotential bonding is good. Good equipotential
bonding is achieved if Rule 1 is observed.
If low-frequency noise occurs on analog cables, for example:
speed/measured value fluctuations as a result of equalizing currents
(hum), the shields are only connected for analog signals at one end at
the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES. The other end of the shield should
be grounded through a capacitor (e.g. 10 nF/100 V type MKT).
However, the shield is still connected at both ends to ground for high
frequency as a result of the capacitor.
If possible, the signal cables should only enter the cabinet at one side.
If SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES are operated from an external 24 V
power supply, this power supply must not feed several consumers
separately installed in various cabinets (hum can be coupled-in!). The
optimum solution is for each SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVE to have its
own power supply.
Prevent noise from being coupled-in through the supply.
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES and automation units/control electronics
should be connected-up to different supply networks. If there is only
one common network, the automation units/control electronics have to
be de-coupled from the supply using an isolating transformer.
The use of a radio interference suppression filter is obligatory to
maintain limit value class "First environment" or "Second environment",
even if sinusoidal filters or dv/dt filters are installed between the motor
and SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES.
Whether an additional filter has to be installed for further consumers,
depends on the control used and the wiring of the remaining cabinet.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Rule 15
Rule 16
Rule 17
Rule 18
Rule 19
Rule 20
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
A noise suppression filter should always be placed close to the fault
source. The filter must be connected to the cabinet housing, mounting
panel, etc. through a large surface area. A bare metal mounting panel
(e.g. manufactured from stainless steel, galvanized steel) is best, as
electrical contact is established through the entire mounting surface. If
the mounting panel is painted, the paint has to be removed at the screw
mounting points for the frequency converter and the noise suppression
filter to ensure good electrical contact.
The incoming and outgoing cables of the radio interference suppression
filter have to be spatially separated/isolated.
In order to limit the noise emitted, all variable-speed motors have to be
connected-up using shielded cables, with the shields being connected
to the respective housings at both ends in a low-inductive manner
(through the largest possible surface area). The motor feeder cables
also have to be shielded inside the cabinet or at least shielded using
grounded partitions. Suitable motor feeder cable e.g. Siemens
PROTOFLEX-EMV-CY (4 x 1.5 mm2 ... 4 x 120 mm2) with Cu shield.
Cables with steel shields are unsuitable.
A suitable PG gland with shield connection can be used at the motor to
connect the shield. It should also be ensured that there is a lowimpedance connection between the motor terminal box and the motor
housing. If required, connect-up using an additional grounding
conductor. Do not use plastic motor terminal boxes!
A line reactor has to be installed between the radio interference
suppression filter and the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES.
The line supply cable has to be spatially separated from the motor
feeder cables, e.g. by grounded partitions.
The shield between the motor and SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES must
not be interrupted by the installation of components such as output
reactors, sinusoidal filters, dv/dt filters, fuses, contactors. The
components must be mounted on a mounting panel which
simultaneously serves as the shield connection for the incoming and
outgoing motor cables. Grounded partitions may be necessary to shield
the components.
In order to limit the radio interference (especially for limit value class
"First environment "), in addition to the line supply cable, all cables
externally connected to the cabinet must be shielded.
Examples of these basic rules:
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
6-3
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
Cabinet 1
04.2006
Cabinet 2
Cabinet 3
Netz
*) Keep the radio interference
suppression filters away from
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
air discharge duct, e.g. by
mounting at another level
Netz
Rule
13
Rule
17
~
Rule
14
~
=
*)
*)
=
Rule 12
Control
Fig. 3.5.3
Rule
9, 10
Rule
4, 5, 7
Fig. 3.5.6
Rule
19
Fig 3.5.4
Rule 2
Z
Grounding rail
Fig. 3.5.2
Rule 16
Z
Rule 8
Fig. 6-1
Shield connection
Examples for applying the basic EMC rules
Connect at both ends to the
cabinet housing through the
largest possible surface area!
Shield rail
Cable retaining bar
Fig. 6-2
6-4
Connecting the motor cable shield where the cable enters the cabinet
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
PG gland
Motor terminal box
Fig. 6-3
Shield connection at the motor
The shield can be connected through a PG or metric gland (nickelplated brass) with a strain relief bar. Thus, the degree of protection IP
20 can be achieved.
For higher degrees of protection (up to IP 68), there are special PG
glands with shield connection, e.g.:
♦ SKINDICHT SHVE, Messrs. Lapp, Stuttgart
♦ UNI IRIS Dicht or UNI EMV Dicht, Messrs. Pflitsch, Hückeswagen
It is not permissible to use plastic motor terminal boxes!
Shield
clamp
Cable connector
Fig. 6-4
Connecting the signal cable shields for SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
6-5
Installation in Conformance with EMC Regulations
04.2006
♦ Every SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES has shield
clamps to connect the signal
cable shields.
♦ For chassis units (sizes ≥ E),
the shields can be additionally
connected using cable
connectors at the shield
connecting locations.
Cable connector
Serrated bar
Connect serrated bars
at both ends to the
cabinet housing
through the largest
possible surface area!
Fig. 6-5
Intermediate terminals
Connecting signal cable shields in the cabinet
Wherever possible, intermediate terminals should not be used as they
reduce the shielding effect!
6-6
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
7
DANGER
Connecting-up
Connecting-up
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES units are operated at high voltages.
The equipment must be in a no-voltage condition (disconnected from
the supply) before any work is carried out!
Only professionally trained, qualified personnel must work on or with
the units.
Death, severe bodily injury or significant property damage could occur if
these warning instructions are not observed.
Hazardous voltages are still present in the unit up to 5 minutes after it
has been powered down due to the DC link capacitors. Thus, the
appropriate delay time must be observed before working on the unit or
on the DC link terminals.
The power terminals and control terminals can still be live even when
the motor is stationary.
If the DC link voltage is supplied centrally, the converters must be
reliably isolated from the DC link voltage!
When working on an opened unit, it should be observed that live
components (at hazardous voltage levels) can be touched (shock
hazard).
The user is responsible that all the units are installed and connected-up
according to recognized regulations in that particular country as well as
other regionally valid regulations. Cable dimensioning, fusing,
grounding, shutdown, isolation and overcurrent protection should be
particularly observed.
NOTICE
Due to their physical characteristics, converters can produce DC
residual currents. If a residual-current protective device (residualcurrent-operated circuit-breaker) is used on the supply side of the
AC/AC converter - or of the rectifier unit in the case of multi-motor
drives - for protective purposes in case of indirect touching, only type B
to IEC 755 is permitted. Due to radio-interference suppression
capacitors and as a result of the parasitic capacity of the motor cable,
leakage currents flow which can lead to undesired responding of the
residual-current protective device.
In general, operation without faults is possible only under the following
conditions:
♦ Rated residual current of the residual-current protective
device ≥ 300 mA
♦ Short motor cables (l < 20 m)
♦ No radio-interference suppression filter built in
♦ Only one converter connected per residual-current protective device
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-1
Connecting-up
NOTE
04.2006
The converters are suitable for connecting to networks with an earthed
star point (TN networks and TT networks).
For connection to networks with a star point that is not earthed (IT
networks) or networks with an earthed outer conductor, converters with
option L20 are necessary.
The converters are designed for overvoltage category III in accordance
with IEC 60664-1.
Aux. contactor,
external DC24 Vsupply X9
DC link
connection X3
Mains connection X1
U 1 V1 W1 PE1 C
D
L1 L2 L3
L-
L+
Mounting position 3
Mounting position 2
Optional board
in slot A
PMU connection X108
Mount.pos. 1 (CUVC)
X101
X102
X103
Optional board
in slot C
Motor connection X2
Shield connection
for control cables
and tachometer cables
Cable connecting
adapter for EMC
(option)
Fig. 7-1
7-2
T1 T2 T3
U2 V2 W2 PE2
Connection overview of types A, B and C
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Connecting-up
Aux. contactor,
external DC24 Vsupply X9
DC link
connection X3
Mains connection X1
-F101
-F102
U1 V1 W1 PE1
C
D
Fan fuses
L1 L2 L3
L+ L-
Mount.pos. 1 (CUVC)
Optional board
in slot A
PMU connection X108
Mount. pos. 3
Mount. pos. 2
X101
X102
X103
Optional board
in slot C
T1 T2
T3
Motor connection X2
U2 V2 W2 PE2
Adjustment of
fan voltage
Shield connections for control
cables and tachometer cables
Cable connection
adapter for EMC
(Option)
Fig. 7-2
NOTE
Connection overview for type D
A 230 V fan is installed in drive converters, type of construction D. The
fan is supplied via the fan transformer. To supply the fan with 230 V,
the primary side of the fan transformer must be adjusted to the existing
line voltage via the plug connector (Connection 2). (For supply voltage
range, see terminal).
Transformer terminals
Connection 2
Connection 1
X2
0V
Fantransformer
Fig. 7-3
Transformer location (only for converters, type of construction D)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-3
Connecting-up
7.1
04.2006
Power connections
WARNING
Protective conductor
The protective conductor must be connected up both on the mains side
and on the motor side.
On account of leakage current through the interference-suppression
capacitors the following must be observed as per EN 50178
• A minimum cross-section of 10 mm2 Cu must be used or
• If supply connections with cross-sections less than 10 mm2 are
used, two protective conductors have to be connected up. The
cross-section of each of the protective conductors corresponds to
the cross-section of an outer conductor.
If the unit is mounted on a grounded mounting surface via a conductive
connection, the protective conductor cross section can be the same as
that of the phase conductor. The function of the second protective
conductor is afforded by the grounded mounting surface.
NOTE
Line voltage 3 AC 200 V to 230 V
Order No. Rated
input
Line side
Motor side
Line reactor
current cross-section Recommended fuse
6SE70...
21-1CA60
21-3CA60
21-8CB60
22-3CB60
23-2CB60
24-4CC60
25-4CD60
27-0CD60
28-1CD60
7-4
[A]
10.6
13.3
17.7
22.9
32.2
44.2
54
69
81
cross-section
VDE AWG gR (SITOR) gL lvhrc
[mm²]
[A] 3NE
[A]
3NA
2.5
14 − − − −
16 3805
4
10 − − − −
20 3807
6
8
25 1815-0 25 3810
10
6
35 1803-0 35 3814
16
4
40 1802-0 50 3820
25
2
50 1817-0 63 3822
25
2
80 1820-0 80 3824
35
0
80 1820-0 80 3824
50
00 100 1021-0 100 3830
North America
Type
[V]
AJT, LPJ 600
AJT, LPJ 600
AJT, LPJ 600
AJT, LPJ 600
AJT, LPJ 600
AJT, LPJ 600
AJT, LPJ 600
AJT, LPJ 600
AJT, LPJ 600
Operating Instructions
[A]
15
17.5
25
30
40
60
70
90
100
4EP..
3400-1UK
3500-0UK
3600-4UK
3600-5UK
3700-2UK
3800-2UK
3900-2UK
3900-2UK
3900-2UK
VDE AWG
[mm²]
1,5 16
1,5 16
2,5 14
4
10
10
6
16
4
25
2
25
2
35
0
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Connecting-up
Line voltage 3 AC 380 V to 480 V
Order No. Rated input
Line side
Motor side
Line reactor
current cross-section Recommended fuse
6SE70...
VDE AWG
[mm²]
1.5
16
cross-section
gR (SITOR) gL lvhrc
[A] 3NE
[A]
3NA
−−
−−
10 3803
North America
Type
[V]
AJT, LPJ 600
[A]
8
4EP..
VDE AWG
[mm²]
1.5
16
16-1EA61
[A]
6.1
18-0EA61
8.0
1.5
16
− −
−−
16
3805
AJT, LPJ 600
12
34002US00
1.5
16
21-0EA61
10.2
2.5
14
−−
−−
16
3805
AJT, LPJ 600
15
34001US00
1.5
16
21-3EB61
13.2
2.5
14
25 1815-0
25
3810
AJT, LPJ 600
17.5
35000US00
2.5
14
21-8EB61
17.5
4
10
25 1815-0
25
3810
AJT, LPJ 600
25
36004US00
2.5
14
22-6EC61
25.5
10
6
35 1803-0
35
3814
AJT, LPJ 600
35
36005US00
10
6
23-4EC61
34
16
4
40 1802-0
50
3820
AJT, LPJ 600
45
37002US00
10
6
23-8ED61
37.5
16
4
63 1818-0
63
3822
AJT, LPJ 600
50
37005US00
16
4
24-7ED61
47
25
2
63 1818-0
63
3822
AJT, LPJ 600
60
38002US00
16
4
26-0ED61
59
25
2
80 1820-0 100
3830
AJT, LPJ 600
80
38007US00
16
4
27-2ED61
72
50
00
80 1820-0 100
3830
AJT, LPJ 600
90
39002US00
25
2
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
32001US00
7-5
Connecting-up
04.2006
Line voltage 3 AC 500 V to 600 V
Order No. Rated input
Line side
Motor side
Line reactor
current cross-section Recommended fuse
cross-section
VDE AWG gR (SITOR)
[mm²]
[A]
3NE
1.5
16 − − − −
VDE AWG
[mm²]
1.5
16
6SE70...
14-5FB61
[A]
4.5
16-2FB61
6.2
1.5
15
−− −−
17-8FB61
7.8
1.5
15
21-1FB61
11
2.5
21-5FB61
15.1
22-2FC61
gL lvhrc
North America
[A]
3NA
Type
[V]
10 38031) AJT, LPJ
600
10
38031) AJT, LPJ
600
20
1814-0 20
38071) AJT, LPJ
600
14
20
1814-0 20
38071) AJT, LPJ
600
4
10
20
1814-0 20
38071) AJT, LPJ
600
22
10
6
35
1803-0 35
38141) AJT, LPJ
600
23-0FD61
29
10
6
40
1802-0 50
38201) AJT, LPJ
600
23-4FD61
34
16
4
40
1802-0 50
38201) AJT, LPJ
600
24-7FD61
46.5
25
2
40
1802-0 63
38221) AJT, LPJ
600
Table 7-1
[A] 4EP..
6
32002US00
8
33000US00
10 34003US00
15 36008US00
20 36002US00
30 36003US00
40 37006US00
45 37001US00
60 38001US00
1.5
16
1.5
16
2.5
14
2.5
14
4
10
10
6
10
6
16
4
Conductor cross-sections, fuses, line reactors
1): The indicated fuses are only valid for converters with AC 3-phase
500 V input voltage. For converterw with a higher input voltage,
fuses up to 660 V must be used. The order numbers of these fuses
can be obtained by adding on the corresponding 500 V fuse “-6”.
e.g.: for 500 V
3NA3803
for 660 V
3NA3803-6
NOTES
The connection cross-sections are determined for copper cables at
40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature and cables with a permissible
operating temperature at the conductor of 70 °C (installation type C in
accordance with DIN VDE 0298-4 / 08.03).
Both the cables and the semiconductors are protected by fuses with gR
characterstics.
WARNING
gL fuses only provide reliable protection to the cables, and not to the
semiconductors.
If the units are connected to the supply system without a main contactor
which can interrupt the incoming supply in the event of a fault, the unit
may suffer further damage.
7-6
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Connecting-up
Maximum possible
connection crosssections,
tightening torque
Type
Order number
Multi-stranded,
solid
Tightening
torque
mm2
AWG
mm2
AWG
Nm
A
6SE702_-__A__
1.5 to 10
12 to 6
2.5 to 16
12 to 4
2
B
6SE702_-__B__
1.5 to 10
12 to 6
2.5 to 16
12 to 4
2
C
6SE702_-__C__
4 to 16
10 to 4
10 to 25
6 to 2
2
D
6SE702_-__D__
10 to 35
6 to 2
10 to 50
6 to 0
3.5
Table 7-2
7.1.1
Finely-stranded
Maximum connectable cross-sections, tightening torque
Terminal strip X9 (only for units with a rated input voltage of
3-ph. AC 380 - 480 V and 3-ph. AC 500 - 600 V) without "safe
stop" option
X9 - External
DC 24 V supply,
main contactor
control
The 9-pole terminal strip is used for connecting up to a 24 V voltage
supply and for connecting up a main or bypass contactor.
The voltage supply is required if the converter is connected up via a
main or bypass contactor.
The connections for the contactor control are floating.
Terminal
9
9
8
8
Designation
Meaning
Range
Main contactor control Main contactor control AC 230 V, 1kVA
Not connected
Not used
7
7
6
6
Not connected
Not used
5
5
Not connected
Not used
3
4
Not connected
Not used
2
3
Not connected
Not used
1
2
0V
Reference potential
0V
1
+24 V (in)
24 V voltage supply
DC24 V ≤ 2.5 A
4
Main contactor control Main contactor control AC 230 V, 1kVA
Connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
Terminal 1 is at the front when installed.
Table 7-3
Connection of external aux. voltage supply DC24 V, main contactor
control
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-7
Connecting-up
04.2006
7.1.2
Terminal strip X9 (only for units with a rated input voltage of
3-ph. AC 200 - 230 V)
X9 - external
DC 24 V supply,
main contactor
control
1
2
3
4
5
The 5-pole terminal strip is used for connecting up a 24 V voltage
supply and a main or bypass contactor.
The voltage supply is required if the inverter is connected up via a main
or bypass contactor.
The connections for the contactor control are floating.
Terminal
Designation
Description
Range
1
+24 V (in)
24 V voltage supply
DC24 V ≥ 2.5 A
2
0V
Reference potential
0V
3
n.c.
Not connected
4
Main contactor control
Main contactor control
1 kVA
5
Main contactor control
Main contactor control
AC 230 V
Connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
Table 7-4
7-8
Connection of external aux. voltage supply DC24 V and main contactor
control (only for units for voltage supply 3-phase AC 200 V to 230 V)
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Connecting-up
7.1.3
Terminal strip X9 (only for units with a rated input voltage of
3-ph. 380 – 480 V with "safe stop" option)
X9 - External
DC 24 V supply,
"Safe STOP",
main contactor
control
The 9-pole terminal strip is used for connecting up a 24 V voltage
supply and for connecting up a main or bypass contactor and for the
"Safe STOP" function.
The voltage supply is required if the inverter is connected up via a main
or bypass contactor.
The connections for the contactor control are floating.
The “Safe STOP” function ensures that no rotating field can occurr at
the motor terminals, i.e. the motor cannot rotate. By opening the jumper
between terminals X9.5 and X9.6 (through an external contact), the
"Safe STOP" function is activated. The inverter is delivered with
jumpered terminals X9.5 and X9.6.
Terminal
Designation
Description
Range
1
+24 V (in)
24 V voltage supply
DC 24 V ≤ 2.5 A
2
0V
(DC 22 V ... 30 V)
3
3
Contact 1
"Safe STOP" checkback
DC 30 V
4
4
Contact 2
"Safe STOP" checkback
1A
5
5
P24 DC
Supply voltage "safe stop"
DC 24 V /
30 mA
6
Control input
"safe stop"
Rated resistance of field coil
≥ 823 Ω ± 10 % at 20 °C
DC 20 - 30 V
max. operating
frequency: 6/min
7
Main contactor
control
Main contactor control
DC 30 V
8
n.c.
Not connected
9
Main contactor
control
Main contactor control
1
2
6
7
8
9
0.5 A
Connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Table 7-5
WARNING
Connection of external aux. voltage supply DC 24 V, safe stop, main
contactor control
The power terminals may still be live even if the "Safe STOP" function
is activated!
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-9
Connecting-up
04.2006
The field coil of the safety relay is connected at one end to the
grounded electronics frame. When the field coil is supplied via an
external 24 V supply, its negative pole must be connected to ground
potential. The external 24 V supply must comply with the requirements
for PELV circuits to EN 50178 (DIN VDE 0160).
In the shipped state, a jumper is inserted between terminals 5 and 6.
The jumper must be removed before the "SAFE STOP" function can be
used and an external control for selecting the function connected.
If the safety relay is supplied via the internal supply at X9:5, the
external 24 V supply must deliver at least 22 V at terminal X9:1/2 to
ensure that the relay picks up reliably (internal voltage drop).
Terminal strip
- X9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
P24
electronic
P15
Optocoupler /
fibre optics
supply
7-10
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Connecting-up
The checkback contacts of the safety relay are capable of at least
100,000 switching cycles at the specified load (30 V DC / 1 A). The
mechanical service life is about 106 switching cycles. The safety relay is
an important component in ensuring reliability and availability of the
machine. For this reason, the pcb with the safety relay must be
replaced in the case of malfunction. In this case, the unit must be
returned for repair or replaced. Function checks must be carried out at
regular intervals, which must be defined in compliance with Employer's
Liability Insurance Regulation BGV A1 §39, para. 3. Accordingly,
function checks must be performed as required by the relevant service
conditions, but at least once a year and additionally after initial
commissioning and any modification and/or maintenance work.
P24
Request protective
device enable
open
S2
K2
-Y1
Emerg.
stop
closed
-S1
Mains
K2
Main switch
A1
Y10 Y11 Y12
Y21 Y22
13
23
31
47
57
A1
3TK2828
Y33 Y34
PE
A
2
Y10 Y11 Y12
Y21 Y22
13
23
31
47
3TK2828
14
24
32
48
58
Y33 Y34
Reset
PE
A
2
K1
14
24
32
48
58
S3
K1
-Q1
57
X9
3
4
5
6
U1 V1 W1
P2
4
PV
M
X101
X
Y
OFF3
n=0
-Cu control
board
-K1
-K2
OFF1
SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES
U2 V2 W2
M
X: Binary input, connect to OFF3
e. g. X101.8 --> P558 = 21
Y: Binary output, connect to "Comparison value
reached"
e. g. X101.6 --> P654 = 120; P796 = 0 (comparison value)
Fig. 7-4
3
M
Sample application of "safe stop" function with contactor safety
combination for monitoring a moving protective device in Safety Category
3 to EN 954-1
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-11
Connecting-up
04.2006
All external cables relevant to the safety function are protected, e.g.
installed in cable ducts, to preclude the possibility of short circuits.
Cables must be installed in compliance with the requirements of
EN 60204-1, Section 14.
In the circuit shown in Fig. 7-4, the tumbler does not release the moving
protective device until the drive has stopped. It may be possible to omit
the tumbler if the risk assessment of the machine deems this to be
safe. In this case, the NC contact of the protective device is connected
directly to terminals Y11 and Y12 and electromagnet Y1 is omitted.
Binary input X is negated with signal "OFF3", i.e. at 24 V, the converter
decelerates the motor to zero speed along the parameterized
deceleration ramp. The converter signals zero speed via binary output
Y, thus energizing relay K2.
Once the motor has stopped, the safety relay in the converter is opened
and the coil of main contactor K1 remains at 24 V via the checkback
contact. If contacts in the safety relay are sticking, the checkback
contacts do not close and the safety combination on the right
deenergizes main contactor K1 via delayed contacts 47/48 when the
set delay period expires.
7-12
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
7.2
Standard
connections
Connecting-up
Control connections
In the basic version, the unit has the following control connections on
the CUVC:
♦ Serial interface (RS232 / RS485) for PC or OP1S
♦ A serial interface (USS bus, RS485)
♦ A control terminal strip for connecting up a HTL unipolar pulse
encoder and a motor temperature sensor (PTC / KTY84)
♦ Two control terminal strips with digital and analog inputs and
outputs.
WARNING
Before the control cables and encoder cables are connected or
disconnected, the unit must be disconnected from the supply (24 V
electronic power supply and DC link/line voltage)!
If this measure is not observed, this can result in defects on the
encoder. A defective encoder can cause uncontrolled axis movements.
WARNING
The external 24 V infeed and all circuits connected to the control
terminals must meet the requirements for safety separation as
stipulated in EN 50178 (PELV circuit = Protective Extra Low Voltage).
NOTE
The earth of the control connections is connected inside the unit to the
PE conductor (earth) (PELV current circuit).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-13
Connecting-up
04.2006
X108
S1
S2
S3/3,4
S3/1,2
X101
X102
X103
Fig. 7-5
NOTE
S4/4,5,6
S4/1,2,3
View of the CUVC
Switches have been changed on CUVCs from 11/2005:
♦ S1, S2, S3: Slide switch design
For contact assignment refer to section "Switch settings for slide
switch design"
♦ Switches S4 or S41 and S42 are fitted. The contact assignment
differs depending on the switch design (see section "Switch
settings").
7-14
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Connecting-up
X101
Controller
P24V
2
M24
Out
In
Out
Out/In
5V
6
4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs
24V
8
Digital inputs
Ri = 3,4 kΩ
24V
9
24V
Inputs
In
5V
In
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5V
In
UART
RS485N
11
Reference potential RS485
5V
Out
In
RS485P
10
Serial interface 2
USS (RS485)
X300
Out
In
24V
7
PMU
Out
In
In
5
Slot G
BOOT
RS485P
RS232 RxD
n.c.
4
Outputs
Slot D
Slot E
In
Bidirectional
digital inputsand outputs
Iout ≤ 20 mA
Slot C
Slot F
3
Out
Slot A
Microcontroller
RS485N
RS232 TxD
P5V
Aux. power
supply
150 mA
1
BOOT
12
S2 *)
+5V
X102 Switch for USS bus connection
Reference voltage
P10 V / N10 V
I ≤ 5 mA
13
14
P10 AUX
S1 *)
15
Analog input 1
(non-floating)
11 bit + sign
U: Rin = 60 kΩ
I: Rin = 250 Ω
(Close S3)
≥1
N10 AUX
A
S3
1 2
D
AI 1
*)
In
+5V
Switch for USS bus connection
16
X103
17
A
S3
Analog input 2
(non-floating)
3 4
Tacho M
In
D
Track A
AI 2
*)
18
AO 1
19
Analog output 1
10 bit + sign
U: I ≤ 5 mA
I: R ≤ 500 Ω
Analog output 2
D
20
A
M
2
AO 2
D
21
22
S4 *)
1
3
A
M
S4
6
-10...+10 V
0...+20 mA
*)
4
5
-10...+10 V
0...+20 mA
A
S
I
C
Track B
Zero pulse
Control
Tacho P15
Mot. temp BS
Mot.temp
23
24
25
Pulse
encoder
I≤190 mA
26
27
28
29 Motor
temperature
30 sensor
KTY84
or PTC
thermistor
*) Contact assignment according to switch design, see section "Switch settings"
Fig. 7-6
Overview of the standard connections
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-15
Connecting-up
X101 – Control
terminal strip
04.2006
The following connections are provided on the control terminal strip:
♦ 4 optionally parameterizable digital inputs and outputs
♦ 3 digital inputs
♦ 24 V aux. voltage supply (max. 150 mA) for the inputs and outputs
♦ 1 serial interface SCom2 (USS / RS485)
WARNING
If the digital inputs are supplied by an external 24 V voltage supply, it
must be referred to ground terminal X101.2. Terminal X101.1 (P24
AUX) must not be connected to the external 24 V supply.
Terminal Designation
Meaning
Range
1
P24 AUX
Aux. voltage supply
DC 24 V / 150 mA
2
M24 AUX
Reference potential
0V
3
DIO1
Digital input/output 1
4
DIO2
Digital input/output 2
5
DIO3
Digital input/output 3
6
DIO4
Digital input/output 4
7
DI5
Digital input 5
8
DI6
Digital input 6
9
DI7
Digital input 7
10
RS485 P
USS bus connection SCom2
RS485
11
RS485 N
USS bus connection SCom2
RS485
12
M RS485
Reference potential RS485
24 V, 10 mA / 20 mA;
L ≤ 3 V, H ≥ 13 V
24 V, 10 mA;
L ≤ 3 V, H ≥ 13 V
Connectable cross-section: 0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Terminal 1 is at the top when installed.
Table 7-6
7-16
Control terminal strip X101
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
X102 – Control
terminal strip
Connecting-up
The following connections are provided on the control terminal strip:
♦ 10 V aux. voltage (max. 5 mA) for the supply of an external
potentiometer
♦ 2 analog inputs, can be used as current or voltage input
♦ 2 analog outputs, can be used as current or voltage output
Terminal
Designation
Meaning
Range
13
P10 V
+10 V supply for ext.
potentiometer
+10 V ±1.3 %,
Imax = 5 mA
14
N10 V
-10 V supply for ext.
potentiometer
-10 V ±1.3 %,
Imax = 5 mA
15
AI1+
Analog input 1 +
11 bit + sign
16
M AI1
Ground, analog input 1
Voltage:
17
AI2+
Analog input 2 +
± 10 V / Ri = 60 kΩ
18
M AI2
Ground, analog input 2
Current: Rin = 250 Ω
19
AO1
Analog output 1
10 bit + sign
20
M AO1
Ground, analog output 1
Voltage:
21
AO2
Analog output 2
± 10 V / Imax = 5 mA
22
M AO2
Ground, analog output 2
Current: 0...20 mA
R ≥ 500 Ω
Connectable cross-section: 0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Terminal 13 is at the top when installed.
Table 7-7
X103 – Pulse
encoder connection
Control terminal strip X102
The connection for a pulse encoder (HTL unipolar) is provided on the
control terminal strip.
Terminal Designation
Meaning
Range
23
- VSS
Ground for power supply
24
Track A
Connection for track A
25
Track B
Connection for track B
26
Zero pulse
Connection for zero pulse
27
CTRL
Connection for control track
28
+ VSS
Power supply pulse
encoder
15 V
Imax = 190 mA
29
+ Temp
Plus (+) connection
KTY84/PTC
KTY84: 0...200 °C
30
- Temp
Minus (-) connection
KTY84/PTC
HTL unipolar;
L ≤ 3 V, H ≥ 8 V
PTC: Rcold ≤ 1.5 kΩ
Connectable cross-section: 0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Terminal 23 is at the top when installed.
Table 7-8
Control terminal strip X103
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-17
Connecting-up
04.2006
Either an OP1S or a PC can be connected up via the 9-pole Sub D
socket.
X300 - Serial
interface
5
9
1
Pin
Name
Meaning
1
n.c.
Not connected
2
RS232 RxD
Receive data via RS232
RS232
3
RS485 P
Data via RS485
RS485
4
Boot
Control signal for software
update
Digital signal, low active
5
M5V
Reference potential to P5V
0V
6
P5V
5 V aux. voltage supply
+5 V, Imax = 200 mA
7
RS232 TxD
Transmit data via RS232
RS232
8
RS485 N
Data via RS485
RS485
9
M_RS232/485
Digital ground (choked)
6
Table 7-9
7-18
Range
Serial interface X300
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Switch settings for
DipFix switch
design
Connecting-up
Switch
S1
SCom1 (X300): Bus terminating resistor
•
open
•
Resistor open
•
closed
•
Resistor closed
S2
Switch settings for
slide switch design
NOTE
Meaning
SCom2 (X101/10,11): Bus terminating resistor
•
open
•
Resistor open
•
closed
•
Resistor closed
S3 (1,2)
AI1: Changeover current/voltage input
•
open
•
Voltage input
•
closed
•
Current input
S3 (3,4)
AI2: Changeover current/voltage input
•
open
•
Voltage input
•
closed
•
Current input
S4 (1,2,3)
AO1: Changeover current/voltage output
•
Jumper 1, 3
•
Voltage output
•
Jumper 2, 3
•
Current output
S4 (4,5,6)
AO2: Changeover current/voltage output
•
Jumper 4, 6
•
Voltage output
•
Jumper 5, 6
•
Current output
Switch
Contact
Status
Meaning
S1
1-4
open
Bus terminating resistor open
S1
1-4
closed
Bus terminating resistor closed
S2
2-3
open
Bus terminating resistor open
S2
2-3
closed
Bus terminating resistor closed
S3
1-4
open
AI1: Voltage input
S3
1-4
closed
AI1: Current input
S3
2-3
open
AI2: Voltage input
S3
2-3
closed
AI2: Current input
S41
1-2
closed
AO1: Current output
S41
2-3
closed
AO1: Voltage output
S42
1-2
closed
AO2: Current output
S42
2-3
closed
AO2:Voltage output
Contacts S41 (4, 5, 6) and contacts S42 (4, 5, 6) are not used.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-19
Connecting-up
7.3
04.2006
Fan fuses (only type D)
Line voltage 3 AC 200 V to 230 V
Order No.
6SE70..
Fan Fuse
(F101 / F102)
25-4CD60
25-4CD60-1AA1
FNQ-R-2
27-0CD60
27-0CD60-1AA1
FNQ-R-2
28-1CD60
28-1CD60-1AA1
FNQ-R-2
Manufacturer:
FNQ-R Bussmann
Line voltage 3 AC 380 V to 480 V
Order No.
6SE70..
Fan Fuse
(F101 / F102)
23-8ED61
23-8ED61-1AA1
FNQ-R-6/10
24-7ED61
24-7ED61-1AA1
FNQ-R-6/10
26-0ED61
26-0ED61-1AA1
FNQ-R-6/10
27-2ED61
27-2ED61-1AA1
FNQ-R-6/10
Manufacturer:
FNQ-R Bussmann
Line voltage 3 AC 500 V to 600 V
Order No.
6SE70..
23-0FD61
23-0FD61-1AA1
FNQ-R-6/10
23-4FD61
23-4FD61-1AA1
FNQ-R-6/10
24-7FD61
24-7FD61-1AA1
FNQ-R-6/10
Manufacturer:
7-20
Fan Fuse
(F101 / F102)
FNQ-R Bussmann
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Connecting-up
Connecting the fan
transformer
The following table shows how the existing line voltage is assigned for
adjustment by the fan transformer.
Rated input voltage
3 AC 200 V (- 15 %)
to 230 V (+ 15 %)
3 AC 380 V (- 15 %)
to 480 V (+ 10 %)
Supply
voltage
3 AC 500 V (- 15 %)
to 600 V (+ 10 %)
3 AC 660 V (- 15 %)
to 690 V (+ 15 %)
Transformer tappings
3 AC 170 V
200 V
3 AC 200 V
200 V
3 AC 220 V
220 V
3 AC 230 V
230 V
3 AC 264 V
230 V
3 AC 325 V
380 V
3 AC 380 V
380 V
3 AC 400 V
400 V
3 AC 415 V
400 V
3 AC 425 V
400 V
500 V
3 AC 440 V
440 V
500 V
3 AC 460 V
460 V
500 V
3 AC 480 V
460 V
500 V
3 AC 500 V
460 V
500 V
3 AC 525 V
460 V
525 V
3 AC 575 V
575 V
660 V
3 AC 600 V
575 V
660 V
3 AC 660 V
575 V
660 V
3 AC 690 V
690 V
3 AC 790 V
690 V
Table 7-10
Connecting the fan transformer
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
7-21
04.2006
8
Parameterization
Parameterization
It is possible to parameterize the units of the SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES series by various methods of parameter input. Every
unit can be set via the dedicated parameterizing unit (PMU) without the
need to use additional components.
Each unit is supplied with the user software DriveMonitor and
comprehensive electronic documentation on a CD. In the case of
installation on a standard PC the units can be parameterized via the
serial interface of the PC. The software provides extensive parameter
aids and a prompted start-up function.
The unit can be further parameterized by entering parameters with the
OP1S manual operator panel and via a controller at the field bus level
(e.g. Profibus).
8.1
Parameter menus
Parameters with related functions are compiled in menus for structuring
the parameter set stored in the units. A menu thus represents a
selection out of the entire supply of parameters of the unit.
It is possible for one parameter to belong to several menus. The
parameter list indicates which individual menus a parameter belongs to.
Assignment is effected via the menu number allocated to each menu.
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-1
Parameterization
P60
04.2006
Menu level 1
Select via
P60 Menu Select
Menu level 2
(only on OP1S)
Menu level 3
(only on OP1S)
User parameters
General parameters
SCom1/SCom2
Terminals
Field bus interfaces
Communication
SIMOLINK
Control and status words
SCB/SCI
Parameter menu
Setpoint channel
Motor data
Motor/encoder
Fixed settings
Encoder data
Control/gating unit
Position control
Quick
parameterization
Speed control
Current control
Sequence control
Board
configuration
V/f open-loop control
Gating unit
Drive setting
Download
Diagnostics
Upread/free access
Functions
Faults/alarms
Messages/displays
Trace
Power section
definition
Releases
Basic positioner 1)
Synchronism
1)
Positioning
1)
Free blocks
Technology 1)
Setting up/MDI 1)
By entering a password in P359,
access to the menus in the gray
shaded area can be prohibited to
unauthorized persons
1) only MASTERDRIVES Motion Control
P358 Key
Fig. 8-1
8-2
P359 Lock
Parameter menus
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterization
Menu levels
The parameter menus have several menu levels. The first level
contains the main menus. These are effective for all sources of
parameter inputs (PMU, OP1S, DriveMonitor, field bus interfaces).
The main menus are selected in parameter P60 Menu Selection.
Examples:
P060 = 0
"User parameters" menu selected
P060 = 1
"Parameter menu" selected
...
P060 = 8
"Power section definition" menu selected
Menu levels 2 and 3 enable the parameter set to be more extensively
structured. They are used for parameterizing the units with the OP1S
operator control panel.
Main menus
P060
Menu
Description
0
User parameters
•
Freely configurable menu
1
Parameter menu
•
Contains complete parameter set
•
More extensive structure of the functions achieved by using
an OP1S operator control panel
2
Fixed settings
•
Used to perform a parameter reset to a factory or user setting
3
Quick
parameterization
•
Used for quick parameterization with parameter modules
•
When selected, the unit switches to status 5 "Drive setting"
Board configuration
•
Used for configuring the optional boards
•
When selected, the unit switches to status 4 "Board
configuration"
•
Used for detailed parameterization of important motor,
encoder and control data
•
When selected, the unit switches to status 5 "Drive setting"
•
Used to download parameters from an OP1S, a PC or an
automation unit
•
When selected, the unit switches to status 21 "Download"
•
Contains the complete parameter set and is used for free
access to all parameters without being restricted by further
menus
•
Enables all parameters to be upread/upload by an OP1S, PC
or automation unit
•
Used to define the power section (only necessary for units of
the Compact and chassis type)
•
When selected, the unit switches to status 0 "Power section
definition"
4
5
6
7
8
Drive setting
Download
Upread/free access
Power section
definition
Table 8-1
Main menus
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-3
Parameterization
04.2006
User parameters
In principle, parameters are firmly assigned to the menus. However, the
"User parameters" menu has a special status. Parameters assigned to
this menu are not fixed, but can be changed. You are thus able to put
together the parameters required for your application in this menu and
structure them according to your needs. The user parameters can be
selected via P360 (Select UserParam).
Lock and key
In order to prevent undesired parameterization of the units and to
protect your know-how stored in the parameterization, it is possible to
restrict access to the parameters by defining your own passwords with
the parameters:
♦ P358 key and
♦ P359 lock.
8-4
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
8.2
Parameterization
Changeability of parameters
The parameters stored in the units can only be changed under certain
conditions. The following preconditions must be satisfied before
parameters can be changed:
Preconditions
Remarks
•
Either a function parameter or a BICO
parameter must be involved (identified
by upper-case letters in the parameter
number).
Visualization parameters
(identified by lower-case letters
in the parameter number)
cannot be changed.
•
Parameter access must be granted for
the source from which the parameters
are to be changed.
Release is given in P053
Parameter access.
•
A menu must be selected in which the
parameter to be changed is contained.
The menu assignment is
indicated in the parameter list
for every parameter.
•
The unit must be in a status which
permits parameters to be changed.
The statuses in which it is
possible to change parameters
are specified in the parameter
list.
Table 8-2
NOTE
Examples
Preconditions for being able to change parameters
The current status of the units can be interrogated in parameter r001.
Status (r001)
P053
Result
"Ready for ON" (09)
2
P222 Src n(act) can only be changed via the PMU
"Ready for ON" (09)
6
P222 Src n(act) can be changed via the PMU and
SCom1 (e.g. OP1S)
"Operation" (14)
6
P222 Src n(act) cannot be changed on account of
the drive status
Table 8-3
Influence of drive status (r001) and parameter access (P053) on the
changeability of a parameter
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-5
Parameterization
8.3
04.2006
Parameter input with DriveMonitor
NOTE
Please refer to the online help for detailed information on
DriveMonitor (
button or F1 key).
8.3.1
Installation and connection
8.3.1.1
Installation
A CD is included with the devices of the MASTERDRIVES Series when
they are delivered. The operating tool supplied on the CD (DriveMonitor) is automatically installed from this CD. If "automatic notification on
change" is activated for the CD drive on the PC, user guidance starts
when you insert the CD and takes you through installation of
DriveMonitor. If this is not the case, start file "Autoplay.exe" in the root
directory of the CD.
8.3.1.2
Connection
RS232 interface
There are two ways of connecting a PC to a device of the SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES Series via the USS interface. The devices of the
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Series have both an RS232 and an
RS485 interface.
The serial interface that PCs are equipped with by default functions as
an RS232 interface. This interface is not suitable for bus operation and
is therefore only intended for operation of a SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES device.
1
6
7
8
9
2
8
4
9
5
Fig. 8-2
8-6
7
3
To PC COMx
socket
NOTICE
6
1
2
3
4
5
X300:
1 Ground
2 RxD (RS232)
3 Rx+/Tx+ (RS485)
4
5 Ground
6 +5V (OP1S)
7 TxD (RS232)
8 Rx-/Tx- (RS485)
9 Ground
Device side
-X300 (compact PLUS -X103)
9-pin SUB-D connector
Connecting cable for connecting PC COM(1-4) to SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES X300
DriveMonitor must not be operated via the Sub-D socket X300 if the
SST1 interface parallel to it is already being used for another purpose,
e.g. bus operation with SIMATIC as the master.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterization
RS485 interface
The RS485 interface is multi-point capable and therefore suitable for
bus operation. You can use it to connect 31 SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES with a PC. On the PC, either an integrated RS485
interface or an RS232 ↔ RS485 interface converter is necessary. On
the device, an RS485 interface is integrated into the -X300 (compact
PLUS -X103) connection. For the cable: see pin assignment -X300 and
device documentation of the interface converter.
8.3.2
Establishing the connection between DriveMonitor and the device
8.3.2.1
Setting the USS interface
You can configure the interface with menu Tools Æ ONLINE Settings.
Fig. 8-3
Online settings
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-7
Parameterization
04.2006
The following settings (Fig. 8-4) are possible:
♦ Tab card "Bus Type", options
USS (operation via serial interface)
Profibus DP (only if DriveMonitor is operated under Drive ES).
♦ Tab card "Interface"
You can enter the required COM interface of the PC (COM1 to
COM4) and the required baudrate here.
NOTE
Set the baudrate to the baudrate parameterized in SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES (P701) (factory setting 9600 baud).
Further settings: operating mode of the bus in RS485 operation;
setting according to the description of the interface converter
RS232/RS485
♦ Tab card "Extended"
Request retries and Response timeout; here you can increase the
values already set if communication errors occur frequently.
Fig. 8-4
8-8
Interface configuration
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
8.3.2.2
Parameterization
Starting the USS bus scan
DriveMonitor starts with an empty drive window. Via the menu "Set up
an ONLINE connection..." the USS bus can be scanned for connected
devices:
Fig. 8-5
NOTE
Starting the USS bus scan
The "Set up an online connection” menu is only valid from Version 5.2
onwards.
Fig. 8-6
Search for online drives
During the search the USS bus is scanned with the set baudrate only.
The baud rate can be changed via "Tools Æ ONLINE Settings", see
section 8.3.2.1.
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-9
Parameterization
8.3.2.3
04.2006
Creating a parameter set
With menu FileÆ New Æ... you can create a new drive for
parameterization (see Fig. 8-7). The system creates a download file
(*.dnl), in which the drive characteristic data (type, device version) are
stored. You can create the download file on the basis of an empty
parameter set or the factory setting.
Fig. 8-7
Creating a new drive
Based on factory setting:
♦ The parameter list is preassigned with the factory setting values
Empty parameter set:
♦ For compilation of individually used parameters
If the parameters of a parameter set that has already been created
have to be changed, this can be done by calling the corresponding
download file via the “FileÆ Open” menu function. The last four drives
can be opened via “Parameter sets last dealt with”.
When you create a new drive, the window "Drive Properties" (Fig. 8-8)
opens. Here you must enter the following data:
♦ In dropdown list box "Device type", select the type of device (e.g.
MASTERDRIVES MC). You can only select the devices stored.
♦ In dropdown list box "Device version", you can select the software
version of the device. You can generate databases for (new)
software versions that are not listed when you start online
parameterization.
♦ You must only specify the bus address of the drive during online
operation (switchover with button Online/Offline)
8-10
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
NOTE
Parameterization
The specified bus address must be the same as that of the
parameterized SST bus address in SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
(P700).
No bus address is assigned to the drive with the button "Disconnect
network connection".
NOTE
Field "Number of PCD" has no special significance for the
parameterization of MASTERDRIVES and should be left at "2".
If the value is changed, it must be/remain ensured that the setting value
in the program matches the value in parameter P703 of the drive at all
times.
Fig. 8-8
Create file; Drive properties
After confirming the drive properties with ok you have to enter the name
and storage location of the download file to be created.
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-11
Parameterization
04.2006
8.3.3
Parameterization
8.3.3.1
Structure of the parameter lists, parameterization with DriveMonitor
Parameterization using the parameter list is basically the same as
parameterization using PMU (See Chapter 6 "Parameterizating Steps").
The parameter list provides the following advantages:
♦ Simultaneous visibility of a larger number of parameters
♦ Text display for parameter names, index number, index text,
parameter value, binectors, and connectors
♦ On a change of parameters: Display of parameter limits or possible
parameter values
The parameter list has the following structure:
Field
No.
Field Name
Function
1
P. Nr
Here the parameter number is displayed. You can only change the field in
menu Free parameterization.
2
Name
Display of the parameter name, in accordance with the parameter list
3
Ind
Display of the parameter index for indexed parameters. To see more than
index 1, click on the [+] sign. The display is then expanded and all indices of
the parameter are displayed
4
Index text
Meaning of the index of the parameter
5
Parameter
value
Display of the current parameter value. You can change this by doubleclicking on it or selecting and pressing Enter.
6
Dim
Physical dimension of the parameter, if there is one
8-12
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterization
With buttons Offline, Online (RAM), Online (EEPROM) (Fig. 8-9 [1]) you
can switch modes. When you switch to online mode, device
identification is performed. If the configured device and the real device
do not match (device type, software version), an alarm appears. If an
unknown software version is recognized, the option of creating the
database is offered. (This process takes several minutes.)
1
2
Fig. 8-9
Drive window/parameter list
The DriveMonitor drive window has a directory tree for navigation
purposes (Fig. 8-9 [2]). You can deselect this additional operating tool
in menu View - Parameter selection.
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-13
Parameterization
04.2006
The drive window contains all elements required for the
parameterization and operation of the connected device. In the lower
bar, the status of the connection with the device is displayed:
Connection and device ok
Connection ok, device in fault state
Connection ok, device in alarm state
Device is parameterized offline
No connection with the device can be established (only offline
parameterization possible).
NOTE
8-14
If no connection with the device can be established because the device
does not physically exist or is not connected, you can perform offline
parameterization. To do so, you have to change to offline mode. In that
way, you can create an individually adapted download file, which you
can load into the device later.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Drive Navigator
Parameterization
This is used to quickly access important functions of the DriveMonitor.
Settings for Drive Navigator under Tools -> Options (Fig. 8-11):
Fig. 8-10
Drive Navigator
Fig. 8-11
Options menu display
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-15
Parameterization
04.2006
Toolbar of the Drive Navigator
8-16
=
Assisted commissioning
=
Direct to parameter list
=
General diagnostics
=
Save drive parameters to a file
=
Download parameter file to drive
=
Load standard application
=
Assisted F01 technology COMM
=
Basic positioner operating screens
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
8.3.3.2
Parameterization
General diagnostics
Via the Diagnostics Æ General diagnostics menu the following window
opens. This window gives a general overview of the active warnings
and faults and their history. Both the warning and the fault number as
well as plain text are displayed.
Fig. 8-12
General diagnostics
Via the Extended Diagnostics button you can reach the next
diagnostics window.
Fig. 8-13
Extended diagnostics
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-17
Parameterization
8.4
04.2006
Parameter input via the PMU
The PMU parameterizing unit enables parameterization, operator
control and visualization of the converters and inverters directly on the
unit itself. It is an integral part of the basic units. It has a four-digit
seven-segment display and several keys.
The PMU is used with preference for parameterizing simple
applications requiring a small number of set parameters, and for quick
parameterization.
Raise key
Seven-segment display for:
Drive statuses
Alarms and
faults
Reversing key
ON key
Parameter numbers
Toggle key
OFF key
Parameter indices
Lower key
X300
Fig. 8-14
8-18
Parameter values
PMU parameterizing unit
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterization
Key
Meaning
Function
•
For energizing the drive (enabling motor activation).
•
If there is a fault: For returning to fault display
OFF key
•
For de-energizing the drive by means of OFF1, OFF2 or OFF3
(P554 to 560) depending on parameterization.
Reversing key
•
For reversing the direction of rotation of the drive.
The function must be enabled by P571 and P572
Toggle key
•
For switching between parameter number, parameter index
and parameter value in the sequence indicated (command
becomes effective when the key is released).
•
If fault display is active: For acknowledging the fault
ON key
Raise key
Lower key
Hold toggle key
and depress raise
key
Hold toggle key
and depress lower
key
Table 8-4
For increasing the displayed value:
•
Short press = single-step increase
•
Long press = rapid increase
For lowering the displayed value:
•
Short press = single-step decrease
•
Long press = rapid decrease
•
If parameter number level is active: For jumping back and forth
between the last selected parameter number and the
operating display (r000)
•
If fault display is active: For switching over to parameter
number level
•
If parameter value level is active: For shifting the displayed
value one digit to the right if parameter value cannot be
displayed with 4 figures (left-hand figure flashes if there are
any further invisible figures to the left)
•
If parameter number level is active: For jumping directly to the
operating display (r000)
•
If parameter value level is active: For shifting the displayed
value one digit to the left if parameter value cannot be
displayed with 4 figures (right-hand figure flashes if there are
any further invisible figures to the right)
Operator control elements on the PMU
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-19
Parameterization
Toggle key
(P key)
04.2006
As the PMU only has a four-digit seven-segment display, the 3
descriptive elements of a parameter
♦ Parameter number,
♦ Parameter index (if parameter is indexed) and
♦ Parameter value
cannot be displayed at the same time. For this reason, you have to
switch between the individual descriptive elements by depressing the
toggle key. After the desired level has been selected, adjustment can
be made using the raise key or the lower key.
With the toggle key, you can change
over:
•
from the parameter number to the
parameter index
•
from the parameter index to the
parameter value
•
from the parameter value to the
parameter number
Parameter number
P
P
Parameter
value
Parameter
index
P
If the parameter is not indexed, you
can jump directly to the parameter
value.
NOTE
If you change the value of a parameter, this change generally becomes
effective immediately. It is only in the case of acknowledgement
parameters (marked in the parameter list by an asterisk ‘ * ’) that the
change does not become effective until you change over from the
parameter value to the parameter number.
Parameter changes made using the PMU are always safely stored in
the EEPROM (protected in case of power failure) once the toggle key
has been depressed.
8-20
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterization
Example
The following example shows the individual operator control steps to be
carried out on the PMU for a parameter reset to factory setting.
Set P053 to 0002 and grant parameter access for PMU
Ì
P053
Ê
∇
P
Ì
0000
Ê
∇
Ê
Ì
0001
Ê
0002
P
Ì
P053
Select P060
∇
Ê
Ì
P053
P060
Set P060 to 0002 and select "Fixed settings" menu
P
Ì
P060
Ê
∇
Ê
Ì
1
Ê
P
Ì
2
P060
Select P970
Ì
Ê
∇
∇
Ê
P060
Ì
P366
P970
Set P970 to 0000 and start parameter reset
Ê
P970
P
Ì
Ê
1
∇
Ì
Ê
0
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
P
Ì
°009
8-21
Parameterization
8.5
04.2006
Parameter input via the OP1S
The operator control panel (OP1S) is an optional input/output device
which can be used for parameterizing and starting up the units. Plaintext displays greatly facilitate parameterization.
The OP1S has a non-volatile memory and can permanently store
complete sets of parameters. It can therefore be used for archiving sets
of parameters, but first the parameter sets must be read out (upread)
from the units. Stored parameter sets can also be transferred
(downloaded) to other units.
The OP1S and the unit to be operated communicate with each other via
a serial interface (RS485) using the USS protocol. During
communication, the OP1S assumes the function of the master whereas
the connected units function as slaves.
The OP1S can be operated at baud rates of 9.6 kBd and 19.2 kBd, and
is capable of communicating with up to 32 slaves (addresses 0 to 31). It
can therefore be used in a point-to-point link (e.g. during initial
parameterization) or within a bus configuration.
The plain-text displays can be shown in one of five different languages
(German, English, Spanish, French, Italian). The language is chosen by
selecting the relevant parameter for the slave in question.
Order numbers
8-22
Components
Order Number
OP1S
6SE7090-0XX84-2FK0
Connecting cable 3 m
6SX7010-0AB03
Connecting cable 5 m
6SX7010-0AB05
Adapter for installation in cabinet door incl. 5 m cable
6SX7010-0AA00
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterization
LCD (4 lines x 16 characters)
LED red
LED green
9-pole SUB-D connector
on rear of unit
Fault
Run
Reversing key
Raise key
ON key
I
OFF key
O
Jog key
Jog
Lower key
P
Key for toggling between control levels
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
+/-
Reset
0 to 9: number keys
Reset key (acknowledge)
Sign key
Fig. 8-15
View of the OP1S
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-23
Parameterization
04.2006
8.5.1
Connecting, run-up
8.5.1.1
Connecting
The OP1S can be connected to the units in the following ways:
♦ Connection via 3 m or 5 m cable (e.g. as a hand-held input device
for start-up)
♦ Connection via cable and adapter for installation in a cabinet door
♦ Plugging into MASTERDRIVES Compact units (for point-to-point
linking or bus configuration)
♦ Plugging into MASTERDRIVES Compact PLUS units (for bus
configuration)
The cable is plugged into the Sub D socket X103 on units of the
Compact PLUS type and into Sub D socket X300 on units of the
Compact and chassis type.
Connection via
cable
SIEMENS
Fault
Run
I
O
USS via RS485
P
USS-Bus
Jog
7
4
8
5
9
6
1
2
3
0
+/-
Reset
X300
OP1S
Connecting cable
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
OP1S-side:
Unit side:
9-pole SUB-D cocket
9-pole SUB-D connector
Fig. 8-16
8-24
9
8
7
6
The OP1S directly connected to the unit
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
8.5.1.2
Parameterization
Run-up
After the power supply for the unit connected to the OP1S has been
turned on or after the OP1S has been plugged into a unit which is
operating, there is a run-up phase.
NOTICE
The OP1S must not be plugged into the Sub D socket if the SCom1
interface parallel to the socket is already being used elsewhere, e.g.
bus operation with SIMATIC as the master.
NOTE
In the as-delivered state or after a reset of the parameters to the factory
setting with the unit's own control panel, a point-to-point link can be
adopted with the OP1S without any further preparatory measures.
When a bus system is started up with the OP1S, the slaves must first
be configured individually. The plugs of the bus cable must be removed
for this purpose.
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
8-25
Parameterization
04.2006
With the "OP: Download" function, a parameter set stored in the OP1S
can be written into the connected slave. Starting from the basic menu,
the "OP: Download" function is selected with "Lower" or "Raise" and
activated with "P".
Ê
VectorControl
*Menu Selection
OP: Upread
#OP: Download
P Ì
Download
*1909199701
MASTERDRIVES VC
Example: Selecting and activating the "Download" function
One of the parameter sets stored in the OP1S must now be selected
with "Lower" or "Raise" (displayed in the second line). The selected ID
is confirmed with "P". The slave ID can now be displayed with "Lower"
or "Raise" (see section "Slave ID"). The "Download" procedure is then
started with "P". During download, the OP1S displays the currently
written parameter.
Ê
Download
*1909199701
MASTERDRIVES VC
P Ì
Ê
Download
*1909199701
MASTERDRIVES VC
P Ì
VectorControl 00
Download
Pxxx
Example: Confirming the ID and starting the "Download" procedure
With "Reset", the procedure can be stopped at any time. If downloading
has been fully completed, the message "Download ok" appears and the
display returns to the basic menu.
After the data set to be downloaded has been selected, if the
identification of the stored data set does not agree with the identification
of the connected unit, an error message appears for approximately 2
seconds. The operator is then asked if downloading is to be
discontinued.
Ê
Download
*1909199701
MASTERDRIVES VC
Yes:
No:
8-26
P Ì
Ê
Download
*1909199701
MASTERDRIVES VC
P Ì
Error:
Different
IDs
Ê
2s Ì
VectorControl 00
Stop download?
#yes
no
Downloading is discontinued.
Downloading is carried out.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
9
Parameterizing Steps
Parameterizing Steps
The chapter entitled "Parameterizing Steps" describes the parameter
assignments to be made for starting up SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES:
In addition to this chapter, you should also refer to Chapter 3 (First
Start-Up) and Chapter 8 (Parameterization) in the operating
instructions.
The parameterizing steps are divided into different categories:
♦ Parameter reset to factory setting (9.1)
♦ Quick parameterization procedures (9.2)
♦ Detailed parameterization (9.4)
Parameter reset to
factory setting
The factory setting is the defined initial state of all the parameters of a
unit. The units are delivered with this setting.
A detailed description is given in section 9.1.
Quick
parameterization
procedures
The quick parameterization procedures can always be used when the
exact application conditions of the units are known and no tests with the
associated extensive parameter corrections are required.
The following quick parameterization procedures are described in
section 9.2:
1. Quick parameterization, P060 = 3
(Parameterizing with parameter modules)
2. Parameterizing with user settings
(Fixed settings or factory settings, P060 = 2)
3. Parameterizing with existing parameter files
(Download, P060 = 6)
Depending on the specific conditions prevailing in each case,
parameters can either be assigned in detail (see section 9.4) or with
one of the specified quick procedures.
By activating a fixed setting (P060 = 2) the parameters of the unit can
also be reset to the original values.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-1
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Detailed
parameterization
Detailed parameterization should always be used in cases where the
exact application conditions of the units are not known beforehand and
detailed parameter adjustments need to be made locally, e.g. on initial
start-up.
The description of detailed parameterization in section 9.4 is divided
into the following main steps:
1. Power section definition (P060 = 8)
2. Board definition
(P060 = 4)
3. Drive definition
(P060 = 5)
4. Function adjustment.
Supply
conditions
Power sections
CUVC
Optional
boards
Motor
Drive setting
(P060 = 5)
Function adjustment
Parameterizing with user settings (fixed setting, P060 = 2)
Factory settings (parameter reset) (P060 = 2)
Parameterizing with existing parameter files (download, P060 = 6)
Parameterizing with parameter modules(quick parameterization, P060 = 3)
Fig. 9-1
9-2
Procedures for
quick parameterization
Power section definition
(P060 = 8)
As-delivered state
Board configuration
(P060 = 4)
Detailed
parameterization
Motor
encoder
Detailed and quick parameterization
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
9.1
Parameterizing Steps
Parameter reset to factory setting
The factory setting is the defined initial state of all parameters of a unit.
The units are delivered with this setting.
You can restore this initial state at any time by resetting the parameters
to the factory setting, thus canceling all parameter changes made since
the unit was delivered.
The parameters for defining the power section and for releasing the
technology options and the operating hours counter and fault memory
are not changed by a parameter reset to factory setting.
Parameter number
Parameter name
P050
Language
P070
Order No. 6SE70..
P072
Rtd Drive Amps
P073
Rtd Drive Power
P366
Select FactSet
P947
Fault memory
P949
Fault value
Table 9-1
Parameters which are not changed by the factory setting
If the parameters are reset to the factory setting via one of the
parameters (SST1, SST2, SCB, 1.CB/TB, 2.CB/TB), the interface
parameters of that interface are not changed either. Communication via
that interface therefore continues even after a parameter reset to the
factory setting.
Parameter number
Parameter name
P053
Parameterization enable
P700
SST bus address
P701
SST baud rate
P702
SST PKW number
P703
SST PZD number
P704
SST frame failure
Table 9-2
The factory setting is made either via interface SST1 or SST2:
Parameters that are not changed by the factory setting either. None of
the indices of the parameters is changed.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-3
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Parameter number
Parameter name
P053
Parameterization enable
P696
SCB protocol
P700
SST bus address
P701
SST baud rate
P702
SST PKW number
P703
SST PZD number
P704
SST frame failure
Table 9-3
Parameter number
Parameter name
P053
Parameterization enable
P711 to P721
CB parameters 1 to 11
P722
CB/TB frame failure
P918
CB bus address
Table 9-4
NOTE
9-4
The factory setting is made via interface SCB2: Parameters that are not
changed by the factory setting either. None of the indices of the
parameters is changed.
The factory setting is made either via interface 1.CB/TB or 2.CB/TB:
Parameters that are not changed by the factory setting either. None of
the indices of the parameters is changed.
Parameter factory settings which are dependent on converter or motor
parameters are marked with '(~)' in the block diagrams.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
Grant parameter access
6: Parameter changes permitted via PMU and serial interface
SCom1 (OP1S and PC)
P053 = 6
P060 = 2
Select "Fixed settings" menu
Select desired factory setting
0: Standard with PMU, setpoint via MOP (BICO1)
1: Standard with OP1S, setpoints via fixed setpoints (BICO1)
2: Cabinet unit with OP1S, setpoint via fixed setpoints (BICO1)
3: Cabinet unit with PMU, setpoint via MOP (BICO1)
4: Cabinet unit with OP1S and NAMUR terminal strip (SCI),
setpoint via MOP (BICO1)
Note:
This parameter was correctly set prior to delivery of
the unit and only needs to be changed in exceptional
cases.
re 0 to 3: In BICO data set 2 activation/deactivation is carried
out via the terminal strip and the setpoint is specified
via fixed setpoint (P405).
Start parameter reset
0: Parameter reset
1: No parameter change
P366 = ?
P970 = 0
Unit carries out parameter
reset and then leaves the
"Fixed settings" menu
Fig. 9-2
Sequence for parameter reset to factory setting
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-5
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Factory settings
dependent on P366
Parameters
dependent on
P366
Designation of the
parameter on the
OP1S
(Src = Source)
Factory
setting with
PMU
Factory
setting with
OP1S
Cabinet unit
with
OP1S or
terminal strip
Cabinet unit
with PMU or
terminal strip
Cabinet unit
with NAMUR
terminal strip
(SCI)
P366 = 0
P366 = 1
P366 = 2
P366 = 3
P366 = 4
BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2
(i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002)
P443
Src MainSetpoint
KK058 KK040 KK040 KK040 KK040 KK040 KK058 KK040 KK058 K4102
P554
Src ON/OFF1
B0005 B0022 B2100 B0022 B2100 B0022 B0005 B0022 B2100 B4100
P555
Src1 OFF2
B0001 B0020 B0001 B0020 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001
P556
Src2 OFF2
B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B4108
P565
Src1 Fault Reset
B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107
P566
Src2 Fault Reset
B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B4107 B4107
P567
Src3 Fault Reset
B0000 B0018 B0000 B0018 B0000 B0010 B0000 B0010 B0000 B0000
P568
Src Jog Bit0
B0000 B0000 B2108 B0000 B2108 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000
P571
Src FWD Speed
B0001 B0001 B2111 B0001 B2111 B0001 B0001 B0001 B2111 B4129
P572
Src REV Speed
B0001 B0001 B2112 B0001 B2112 B0001 B0001 B0001 B2112 B4109
P573
Src MOP UP
B0008 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0008 B0000 B2113 B4105
P574
Src MOP Down
B0009 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0009 B0000 B2114 B4106
P575
Src No ExtFault1
B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0018 B0018 B0018 B0018 B0018 B0018
P588
Src No Ext Warn1
B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0020 B0020 B0020 B0020 B0020 B0020
P590
Src BICO DSet
B0014 B0014 B0014 B0014 B0012 B0012 B0012 B0012 B4102 B4102
P651
Src DigOut1
B0107 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0107 B0107
P652
Src DigOut2
B0104 B0104 B0104 B0104 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0104 B0104
P653
Src DigOut3
B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0000 B0000
P693.1 SCI AnaOutActV 1
K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 KK020 KK020
P693.2 SCI AnaOutActV 2
K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0022 K0022
P693.3 SCI AnaOutActV 3
K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0024 K0024
P698.1 Src SCI DigOut 1
B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0100 B0100
P698.2 Src SCI DigOut 2
B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0120 B0120
P698.3 Src SCI DigOut 3
B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0108 B0108
P698.4 Src SCI DigOut 4
B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0107 B0107
P704.3 SCom TlgOFF SCB
0 ms
0 ms
0 ms
0 ms
0 ms
0 ms
0 ms
0 ms 100 ms 100 ms
P796
Compare Value
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
2.0
2.0
P797
Compare Hyst
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.0
1.0
r229
r229
P405
P405
P405
P405
r229
r229
r229
r229
P049.4 OP OperDisp
Table 9-5
Factory setting dependent on P366
All other factory setting values are not dependent on P366 and can be
taken from the parameter list or from the block diagrams (in the
Compendium).
The factory settings for Index 1 (i001) of the respective parameter are
displayed in the parameter list.
9-6
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
Significance of the binectors and connectors for factory setting:
Entry
Description
See function diagram
(in Compendium)
B0000
Fixed binector 0
-15.4-
B0001
Fixed binector 1
-15.4-
B0005
PMU ON/OFF
-50.7-
B0008
PMU MOP UP
-50.7-
B0009
PMU MOP DOWN
-50.7-
B0010
DigIn1
-90.4-
B0012
DigIn2
-90.4-
B0014
DigIn3
-90.4-
B0016
DigIn4
-90.4-
B0018
DigIn5
-90.4-
B0020
DigIn6
-90.4-
B0022
DigIn7
-90.4-
B0100
Rdy for ON
-200.5-
B0104
Operation
-200.5-
B0107
No fault
-200.6-
B0108
No OFF2
-200.5-
B0120
CompV OK
-200.5-
B2100
SCom1 Word1 Bit0
-100.8-
B2115
SCom1 Word1 Bit15
-100.8-
B4100
SCI1 Sl1 DigIn
-Z10.7- / -Z30.4-
B4115
SCI1 Sl1 DigIn
-Z30.8-
r229
n/f(set,smooth)
-360.4- / -361.4- / -362.4- /
-363.4- / -364.4-
P405
Fixed setpoint 5
-290.3-
KK0020
Speed (smoothed)
-350.8- / -351.8- / -352.8-
K0022
Output Amps (smoothed)
-285.8- / -286.8-
K0024
Torque (smoothed)
-285.8-
KK0040
Current FixSetp
-290.6-
KK0058
MOP (Output)
-300.8-
...
...
Bxxxx =
Binector =
freely assignable digital signal
(values 0 and 1)
Kxxxx = Connector =
freely assignable 16-bit signal
(4000h = 100 %)
KKxxxx = Double connector = freely assignable 32-bit signal
(4000 0000h = 100 %)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-7
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Use of binectors for digital inputs in factory settings:
When B0010 to B0017 (DigIn1 to 4) are used, the corresponding digital
outputs cannot be used!
P366
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
BICO data
set
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
B0010
P567
B0012
B0014
P590
P590
P590
P590
P590
P567
P590
P590
P590
B0016
P580
P580
P580
P580
B0018
P567
P567
P575
P575
P575
P575
P575
P575
B0020
P555
P555
P588
P588
P588
P588
P588
P588
B0022
P554
P554
P554
P580
P554
Meaning of the parameters in the factory setting:
Entry
9-8
Description
See function diagram
(in Compendium)
P554
Src ON/OFF1
-180-
P555
Src1 OFF2(electr)
-180-
P567
Src3 Fault Reset
-180-
P575
Src No ExtFault1
-180-
P580
Src FixSetp Bit0
-190-
P588
Src No Ext Warn 1
-190-
P590
Src BICO DSet
-190-
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
9.2
Parameterizing Steps
Quick parameterization procedures
The following quick procedures are always used in cases where the
application conditions of the units are exactly known and no tests and
related extensive parameter corrections are required. Typical examples
of applications for quick parameterization are when units are installed in
standard machines or when a unit needs replacing.
9.2.1
Quick parameterization, P060 = 3
(Parameterizing with parameter modules)
Pre-defined, function-assigned parameter modules are stored in the
units. These parameter modules can be combined with each other, thus
making it possible to adjust your unit to the desired application by just a
few parameter steps. Detailed knowledge of the complete parameter
set of the unit is not required.
Parameter modules are available for the following function groups:
1. Motors (input of the rating plate data with automatic
parameterization of open-loop and closed-loop control)
2. Open-loop and closed-loop control types
3. Setpoint and command sources
Parameterization is effected by selecting a parameter module from
each function group and then starting quick parameterization. In
accordance with your selection, the necessary unit parameters are set
to produce the desired control functionality. The motor parameters and
the relevant controller settings are calculated using automatic
parameterization (P115 = 1).
NOTE
Parameterizing with parameter modules is carried out only in BICO
data set 1 and in function and motor data set 1.
Quick parameterization is effected in the "Download" converter status.
Since quick parameterization includes the factory settings for all
parameters, all previous parameter settings are lost.
Quick parameterization incorporates an abridged drive setting, (e.g.
pulse encoder always with pulse number/revolution 1024). The
complete procedure is given in the "Drive setting" section.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-9
Parameterizing Steps
Function diagram
modules
9-10
04.2006
Function diagram modules (function diagrams) are shown after the flow
chart for parameter modules stored in the unit software. On the first few
pages are the :
♦ setpoint and command sources (sheets s0 to s81), on the following
pages are the
♦ analog outputs and the display parameters (sheet a0) and the
♦ open-loop and closed-loop control types (sheets r0 to r5).
It is therefore possible to put together the function diagrams to exactly
suit the selected combination of setpoint/command source and
open/closed-loop control type. This will give you an overview of the
functionality parameterized in the units and of the necessary
assignment of the terminals.
The function parameters and visualization parameters specified in the
function diagrams are automatically adopted in the user menu
(P060 = 0) and can be visualized or changed there.
The parameter numbers of the user menu are entered in P360.
Reference is made in the function diagrams to the respective function
diagram numbers (Sheet [xxx]) of the detail diagrams (in the
Compendium).
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
P060 = 3
P071 = ?
P095 = ?
P095=2 P095=10
P095=11
P097 = ?
P100 = ?
P095=2
P097>0
Menu selection "Quick parameterization"
Input unit line voltage in V
AC units: r.m.s. alternating voltage
DC units: DC link voltage
The input is important, e.g. for voltage limitation control
(Vdmax control, P515 = 1)
Enter the motor type
2: Compact asynchronous motor 1PH7 (=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
10: Async./Sync. IEC (international Norm)
11: Async./Sync. NEMA (US-Norm)
Enter the code number for the connected motor of the
Range 1PH7(=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
(see "Motor List" section)
(Automatic parameter assignment is implemented as soon
as the settings P095 = 2 and P097 > 0 have been made)
Enter the open/closed-loop control type (sheet r0 to r5)
0: v/f open-loop control + n-controller with pulse encoder
(P130 = 11)
1: v/f open-loop control
2: v/f open-loop control, textile
3: Vector control without tachometer (f-control)
4: Vector control with tachometer (n-speed)
with pulse encoder (P130 = 11)
5: Torque control (M control)
with pulse controller (P130 = 11)
For v/f control (0..2) a linear curve is set in P330 (P330 = 1:
parabolic).
The pulse encoder has a pulse number of P151 = 1024 per
revolution.
The following inputs of motor data are necessary if the motor
deviates from the converter data, if one of the vector control
types (P100 = 3, 4, 5) has been selected or if speed feedback is
used (P100 = 0). In the case of motor outputs higher than
approx. 200 kW one of the vector control types should be used.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-11
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
P101 = ?
P102 = ?
P104=?
P105=?
P106=?
Enter the rated motor voltage in V
as per rating plate
1
Enter the rated motor current in A
as per rating plate
(group drives: total of all motor currents)
2
IEC motor: Cos (phi) as per rating plate
NEMA motor: nominal rating [Hp]
(group drives: total of all ratings)
3
NEMA motor: Enter the motor efficiency in %
as per rating plate
P107 = ?
Enter the rated motor frequency in Hz
as per rating plate
4
P108 = ?
Enter the rated motor speed in rpm
as per rating plate
5
P109 = ?
Enter the motor pole pair number
(is automatically calculated)
1
SIEMENS
4
50 Hz
7.5 kW
5
cos 0.82
3
1LA7133-4AA10
Nr.E H984 6148 01 002
EN 60034 Th.Cl. F
3 ~Mot.
IP 55
132 M/IM B3
/D
230 / 400V
26.5 / 15.3 A
1455 / min
60 Hz
8.6 kW
cos 0.83
220-240 / 380-420 V /
26.5-27.0 / 15.3-15.6 A
SF 1.1
CE
460 V
14.7 A
1755 / min
440/480 V
15.0-15.2 A
2
P114 = ?
P100=1,2
9-12
WARNING!
INCORRECT SETTINGS CAN BE DANGEROUS!
For vector control only:
Process-related boundary conditions for control
0: Standard drives
(default)
1: Torsion, gear play
2: Acceleration drives
3: Load surge
4: Smooth running characteristics
5: Efficiency optimization
6: Heavy-duty starting
7: Dynamic torque response in field-weakening range
See "Drive setting" section for description
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
System with motor protection according to UL regulation?
The motor temperature is calculated via the motor current.
(In the pre-setting, motor overload protection in accordance with
UL regulation is activated!)
Thermal motor
protection desired?
no
yes
P095=2
P097>0
P382 = ?
P383 = 0
P383 = ?
P368 = ?
P368 = 0,1,2,3
4,7 5
6
P700.01 = ?
P740 = ?
P918.01 = ?
P370 = 1
P060 = 0
Specify motor cooling
0: self-ventilated
1: forced-ventilated
(automatically pre-set for P095 = 2, P097 > 0)
Enter the thermal time constant of the motor in s
The values can be taken from the table on the next page
(automatically pre-set for P095 = 2, P097 > 0).
The motor load limit (P384.2) is pre-assigned to 100 %.
Select setpoint and command source (sheet s0...s4, s6, s7)
0: PMU + MOP (Operation via the operator panel,
see next page for description)
1: Analog and digital inputs on the terminal strip
2: Fixed setpoints and digital inputs on the terminal strip
3: MOP and digital inputs on the terminal strip
4: USS1 (e.g. with SIMATIC)
5: not used
6: PROFIBUS (CBP)
7: OP1S and fixed setpoints via SCom1 (X300: PMU)
8: OP1S and MOP via SCom1 (X300: PMU)
Enter the USS bus address
Enter the SIMOLINK module address
Enter the PROFIBUS address
Start of quick parameterization
0: No parameter change
1: Parameter change in acordance with selected combination
of parameter modules
(automatic factory setting according to P366)
(followed by automatic parameterization as for
P115 = 1)
Return to the user menu
End of quick parameterization
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-13
Parameterizing Steps
P368
setpoint source
04.2006
Settings PMU and motor-operated potentiometer (P368 = 0)
This setting allows the drive to be operated via the PMU:
ON / OFF
=
faster / slower
=
Arrow up / down
Anticlockwise /
clockwise
=
Arrow left / right
When the
/
key is pressed, the motor starts and runs up to the
minimum speed set in P457.
Afterwards, the speed can be increased by pressing the
The speed is decreased by pressing the
key.
key.
The selection of setpoint sources (P368) may be restricted by the type
of factory setting (P366).
Factory setting P366
Setpoint source P368
0 = PMU
0 ... 8 = All sources possible
1 = OP1S
7 = OP1S
2 = Cabinet unit OP1S
7 = OP1S
3 = Cabinet unit PMU
0 = PMU
4 = OP1S and SCI
8 = OP1S
P383 Mot Tmp T1
Thermal time constant of the motor
Setting notes
Activation of the i2t calculation is made by setting a parameter value >=
100 seconds.
Example: for a 1LA5063 motor, 2-pole design, the value 480 seconds
has to be set.
The thermal time constants for Siemens standard motors are given in
the following table in seconds:
9-14
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
1LA-/1LL motors
Parameterizing Steps
Type
2pole
4pole
6pole
8pole
10pole
12pole
1LA5063
480
780
-
-
-
-
1LA5070
480
600
720
-
-
-
1LA5073
480
600
720
-
-
-
1LA5080
480
600
720
-
-
-
1LA5083
600
600
720
-
-
-
1LA5090
300
540
720
720
-
-
1LA5096
360
660
720
840
-
-
1LA5106
480
720
720
960
-
-
1LA5107
-
720
-
960
-
-
1LA5113
840
660
780
720
-
-
1LA5130
660
600
780
600
-
-
1LA5131
660
600
-
-
-
-
1LA5133
-
600
840
600
-
-
1LA5134
-
-
960
-
-
-
1LA5163
900
1140
1200
720
-
-
1LA5164
900
-
-
-
-
-
1LA5166
900
1140
1200
840
-
-
1LA5183
1500
1800
-
-
-
-
1LA5186
-
1800
2400
2700
-
-
1LA5206
1800
-
2700
-
-
-
1LA5207
1800
2100
2700
3000
-
-
1LA6220
-
2400
-
3300
-
-
1LA6223
2100
2400
3000
3300
-
-
1LA6253
2400
2700
3000
3600
-
-
1LA6280
2400
3000
3300
3900
-
-
1LA6283
2400
3000
3300
3900
-
-
1LA6310
2700
3300
3600
4500
-
-
1LA6313
2700
3300
3600
4500
-
-
1LA6316
2880
3480
3780
4680
-
-
1LA6317
2880
3480
3780
4680
-
-
1LA6318
-
-
3780
4680
-
-
1LA831.
2100
2400
2700
2700
3000
3000
1LA835.
2400
2700
3000
3000
3300
3300
1LA840.
2700
3000
3300
3300
3600
3600
1LA845.
3300
3300
3600
3600
4200
4200
1LL831.
1500
1500
1800
1800
2100
2100
1LL835.
1800
1800
2100
2100
2400
2400
1LL840.
2100
2100
2100
2100
2400
2400
1LL845.
2400
2100
2400
2400
2700
2700
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-15
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Type
2pole
4pole
6pole
8pole
10pole
12pole
1LA135.
1800
2100
2400
-
-
-
1LA140.
2100
2400
2700
2700
-
-
1LA145.
2400
2700
3000
3000
3300
3300
1LA150.
3000
3000
3300
3300
3900
3900
1LA156.
3600
3300
3600
3600
4200
4200
1LL135.
1200
1200
1500
-
-
-
1LL140.
1500
1500
1800
1800
-
-
1LL145.
1800
1800
1800
1800
2100
2100
1LL150.
2100
1800
2100
2100
2400
2400
1LL156.
2400
2100
2100
2100
2400
2400
1LA7 motors
The data for 1LA5 motors are also applicable for 1LA7 motors with the
same designation.
1LG4 motors
Type
2pole
4pole
6pole
8pole
183
1200
1500
-
-
186
-
1500
1800
2100
188
1200
2100
2100
2400
206
1500
-
2100
-
207
1500
2100
2400
2400
208
1800
2700
2700
3000
220
-
2700
-
2700
223
2100
2400
2700
2700
228
2100
2700
3000
3300
253
2700
2700
3000
3000
258
2400
3000
3600
3000
280
2400
2700
3000
3300
283
2400
3000
2700
3300
288
2400
3300
3000
3300
310
2400
2700
3000
2700
313
2400
2400
3300
4200
316
2100
3600
3600
3600
317
3000
3600
4200
4500
318
3300
4200
4500
4800
9-16
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
1LG6 motors
1PH6 motors
Parameterizing Steps
Type
2pole
183
1800
1800
-
-
186
-
1800
2700
2100
206
1800
-
2700
-
207
1800
2700
2700
2700
220
-
2400
-
2700
223
2400
2700
3300
2400
253
2700
3000
2700
3000
280
2400
3300
3000
3600
283
2400
3000
3600
3900
310
2700
3300
3600
3900
313
2700
3900
3600
4200
316
2700
3900
4200
4200
317
2700
3900
4500
3900
318
3600
3900
4500
5700
Type
4pole
6pole
8pole
1PH610 1PH613 1PH616 1PH618 1PH620 1PH622
T1 in s
1500
1800
2100
2400
2400
2400
Exceptions: 1PH610 at n = 1150 rpm: T1 = 1200 n
1PA6 motors
(= 1PH7 motors)
1PL6 motors
1PH4 motors
NOTE
Shaft height
100
132
160
180
225
T1 in s
1500
1800
2100
2400
2400
Type
1PH7284
1PH7286
1PH7288
T1 in s
4500
5000
5400
Shaft height
180
225
T1 in s
1800
1800
Type
1PL6284
1PH6286
1PH6288
T1 in s
3200
3900
4300
Shaft height
100
132
160
T1 in s
1500
1800
2100
If 1PH7, 1PL6, or 1PH4 motors are parameterized in the list selection
(P097), both the motor cooling (P382) and the thermal motor time
constant (P383) are assigned the correct default values.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-17
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Reference quantities Display of function parameters, monitoring parameters, and connectors
are limited to double the reference value.
After fast parameterization, the reference and rated motor values are
identical. This enables signal representation (e.g. via connectors) up to
twice the rated motor values. If this is not sufficient, you can switch to
the menu "Drive setting" (P060 = 5) to adapt the reference values. The
following parameters are available for that purpose:
P350
Dependent
reference values
Reference current
in A
P351
Reference voltage
in V
P352
Reference frequency
in Hz
P353
Reference speed
in rpm
P354
Reference torque
in Nm
Speed reference frequency and reference speed are always coupled
via the number of pole pairs.
P353 = P352 ×
60
P109
If one of the two parameters is altered, the second is converted using
this equation.
The reference power (in W) is calculated from the reference torque and
reference speed:
R W,ref =
P354 × P353 × 2 × π
60
Power values of the closed-loop control are also stated as a percentage
and refer to the reference power stated. Conversion to rated motor
power is possible using the ratio PW,ref / Pmot,rated.
Pmot,rated =
P113 × 2 × π × P108
60
Automatic motor
identification
For exact determination of the motor parameters, it is possible to carry
out automatic motor identification and speed controller optimization.
For this purpose, the procedures of the "Drive setting" have to be
observed. If one of the vector control types (P100 = 3, 4, 5) of a
converter without a sinusoidal output filter and of an induction motor
without an encoder or with a pulse encoder (correct number of pulses in
P151) is used, the motor identification procedure can be shortened. In
this case, "Complete motor identification" has to be selected (P115 = 3)
and the converter has to be powered up accordingly if the alarms A078
and A080 appear.
WARNING
During motor identification inverter pulses are released and the drive
rotates!
For reasons of safety, identification should first be carried out without
coupling of the load.
9-18
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Sh.[50]
Lower key
OFF key
Toggle key
ON key
P
Reference to N-controller (see rXX-sheets)
Reference to T-controller (see rXX-sheets)
Reference to the current path sheet "a0"
"Analog outputs and display variables"
:
:
:
N
M
1
1
2
Setpoint source
PMU and MOP (P368=0)
See Compendium Sheet 300
The keys "Raise MOP" and "Lower MOP"
are only effective if the operating display
(r000) is selected.
X300
O
I
P48 PMU Operating Display
Sh. [300] :
Explanations:
PMU
Raise key
Reversing key
Note:
If P366 = 3
P590 = B0012
P651 = B0000
P652 = B0000
P653 = B0107
If used as digital outputs, B10 to B14 must
not be wired.
If used as digital inputs, the parameters
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have
to be set to 0!
Seven segment display
*)
Terminal strip Sh. [90]
3
MOP
I
/5
/4
B0014
P653.1 (0)
B
B0012
P652.1 (104)
B
B0010
P651.1 (107)
B
M24
P24
Lower MOP
Raise MOP
ON/OFF1
*)
*)
*)
B0009
B0008
B0005
B
6
0xx0 = ... without storing after OFF
0xx1 = ... Storing after OFF
P425
Conf.MOP
P422
MOP (min.)
9-19
MASTERDRIVES VC
7
8
- s0 -
M
(for T control)
N
Src.T Setp
P486.B (58) to sheet [320.1]
KK
to sheet [180]
from sheet [200]
n959.81 = 4
Src Main Setp
MOP(Outp) P443.B (58) to sheet [316.1]
KK058
KK
MOP(Outp)
r424
Src Lower MOP
Src Raise MOP
Src ON/OFF1
MOP (max)
P421
P574.1 (9)
B
P573.1 (8)
B
Src BICO DSet
operation
no fault
P554.1 (5)
P590 (14)
B
B0104
B0107
Accel Time MOP Decel Time MOP
P431
P432
Toggle key (acknowledge)
1=operation
0=fault
/3
/2
/1
4
5
Not valid for Compact PLUS!
Sheet [300]
O
P
-X101
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
9-20
Sheet [90]
Operating Instructions
A
A
D
-100 .... 100 %
corresponds to
0-10 ... 10 V
D
AnaIn2 Smoothing
P634.2
1
2
Setpoint source
Analog input and terminal strip (P368=1)
X102/18
X102/17
Analog input 2
<3>
<2>
Analog input 1
-X101
AnaIn1 Smoothing
P634.1
Sheet [80] / sheet [82]
If used as digital outputs, B10 to B14 must
not be wired.
If used as digital inputs, the parameters
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have
to be set to 0!
Analog inputs
*)
Terminal strip
B0022
B0020
B0018
B0016
P654.1
B
B0014
3
AnaIn2 Offset
P631.2
*)
*)
*)
*)
Src1 OFF2
P555.1 (20)
B
4
(only T-control)
5
Src.T setpoint
P486.B (11) to sheet[320.1]
KK
Src Main setpoint
P443.B (11)
to sheet[316.1]
KK
Src ON/OFF1
Src3 Acknowledge
P554.1 (22)
B
Src Inv Release
operation
no fault
P567.1 (18)
B
B0104
B0107
P561.1 (16)
B
AnaIn2 Setpoint
K0013
AnaIn2 Setpoint
r637.2
AnaIn1 Setpoint
K0011
AnaIn1 Setpoint
r637.1
P653.1 (0)
B
B0012
P652.1 (104)
B
B0010
P651.1 (107)
B
M24
P24
AnaIn1 Offset
P631.1
<1>
/8
/7
/6
/5
/4
1=operation
0=fault
/3
/2
/1
M
N
6
-20 ... 20 mA
-20 ... 20 mA
-04 ... 20 mA
-10 ... 10 V
-10 ... 10 V
closed
open
CUVC
S3
switch
4-5
5-6
Terminal X102/15
Terminal X101/9
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
MASTERDRIVES VC
7
<3> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X102/16
Compact PLUS type unit:
Terminal X101/10
<2> Compact/chassis type unit:
Compact PLUS type unit:
8
Compact PLUS
Jumper on EBV
S3 switch
<1> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X101/9
Compact PLUS type unit:
Terminal X102/19
Setting guide for gain and
offset of setpoint frequency/
speed values:
sheet[316]
2
3
4
0
1
AnaIn Conf.
P632
to sheet [180]
from sheet [200]
n959.82 = 4
- s1 -
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
P408.F
P406.F
Fixed setpoint7
P407.F
Fixed setpoint8
Fixed setpoint5
P405.F
Fixed setpoint6
Fixed setpoint3
P403.F
Fixed setpoint4
P404.F
Fixed setpoint1
P401.F
Fixed setpoint2
P402.F
Sheet [290]
If used as digital outputs, B10 to B14 must
not be wired.
KK0048
KK0047
KK0046
KK0045
KK0044
KK0043
KK0042
KK0041
<1>
/8
/7
/6
/5
1=operation
/4
0=fault
/3
/2
/1
B0022
B0020
B0018
B0016
P654.1
B
B0014
P653.1
B
B0012
P652.1
B
B0010
P651.1
B
M24
P24
*)
*)
*)
*)
Src1 OFF2
3
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
FSetp FSetp
Bit 2
Bit 3
P418.B P417.B
Src ON/OFF1
Src3 Acknowledge
P555.1 (20)
B
P554.1 (22)
B
Src FSetp Bit 1
P567.1 (18)
B
Src.FSetp Bit 0
operation
no fault
P581.1 (16)
B
P580.1 (14)
B
B0104
B0107
<1> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X101/9
Compact PLUS type unit:
Terminal X102/19
-X101
1
2
Setpoint source
Fixed setpoints and terminal strip (P368=2)
in Hz
in %
Sheet[90]
If used as digital inputs, the parameters
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have
to be set to 0!
Fixed setpoints
*)
Terminal strip
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
6
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
9-21
7
(for T control)
8
- s2 -
Src T setpoint
P486.B (40) to sh. [320.1]
KK
Src Main Setpoint
P443.B (40) to sh. [316.1]
KK
MASTERDRIVES VC
Act.FSetp
KK0040
Active FSetp
r420
to sheet [180]
from sheet [200]
n959.83 = 4
M
N
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
9-22
Operating Instructions
MOP MP
Sheet [300]
If used as digital inputs, the parameters
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have
to be set to 0!
Sheet [90]
1
2
Setpoint source
MOP and terminal strip (P368=2)
*)
MOP and
terminal strip
-X101
3
<1>
/8
/7
/6
/5
/4
B0012
B0022
B0020
B0018
B0016
P654.1
B
B0014
P653.1
B
*)
*)
Src3 Acknowledge
Src1 OFF2
Src ON/OFF1
P567.1 (18)
B
P555.1 (20)
B
P554.1 (22)
B
Lower MOP
Raise MOP
P422
MOP (min.)
4
5
0xx0 = ... without storing after OFF
0xx1 = ... storing after OFF
P425
Conf MOP
Accel Time MOPDecel Time MOP
P431
P432
MOP (max)
P421
Src Lower MOP
Src Raise MOP
operation
no fault
P574.1 (16 )
B
P573.1 (14)
B
B0104
)
P652.1 (104) *
B
B0010
B0107
)
P651.1 (107) *
B
M24
P24
<1> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X101/9
Compact PLUS type unit:
Terminal X102/19
1=operation
0=fault
/3
/2
/1
6
MOP (outp)
KK058
MOP (outp)
r424
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
MASTERDRIVES VC
7
(for T control )
Src T Setpoint
P486.B (58) to sheet [320.1]
KK
Src Main Setpoint
P443.B (58) to sheet [316.1]
KK
to sheet [180]
from sheet [200]
M
N
n959.84 = 4
8
- s3 -
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Baud rate:
9.6 kB
PKW: 4
PZD: 2
PKW #
P702.1
P704.1 = Tlg failure time
PcD #
P703.1
ZUW1
1
2
Setpoint source
USS1 (P368=4) with Simatic
PcD1 (Data word1)
PKW
•
PKW
Reserved for read
operations of
parameter data
0
3
4
PZD1 (Data word1)
5
PcD1 (Data word 1)
6
9-23
B (2112)
P572.1
B (2111)
P571.1
B (2108)
P568.1
B (2107)
P565.1
P555.1
B (2101)
MASTERDRIVES VC
7
External fault
Raise MOP
Negative Spd
Raise MOP
Positive Spd
B2111
B2113
PcD control
B2110
B2112
Jog Bit1
Jog Bit0
B2109
B2108
B2106
Acknowledge
No RGen Stop
Setpoint Release
B2105
B2107
Inv. Release
RGen Release
B2104
OFF3 (QStop)
B2102
M
8
- s4 -
to sheet [180]
control word 1
r550
Src Neg. Spd
Src Pos Spd
Src Jog Bit0
Src 1 Acknow
Src OFF2
P554.1
B (2100) Src ON/OFF1
N
from sheett
[200]
from sheet
[350.7], [351.7]
[352.7], [400.7]
Src T setpoint
P486.B
to sheet [320.1]
K
B2103
OFF2 (electr.)
ON/OFF1
B2101
B2100
B2215
B2200
Receive setpoints
For T control:
K2002
SComWord2
r709.2
K2001
ZUW1
r552
n/f(act)
n959.85 = 4
Main setpoint
to sheet [316.1]
P443.B
K (2002)
K0032
P707.1(32)
K
SCom1Word1
r709.1
KK0148
P707.2
K
Transmit actual values
Bit14 B2114
Bit15 B2115
Bit7
Bit1
Bit0
Bit0
up to Bit15
PZD2 (Data word 2)
Control word
Status word
PZD2 (Data word 2)
•
15
PKW
• • • • •
1
•
Reserved for write operations of
parameter data
PKW
<1> Only applicable for Compact/Chassis type unit
<2> Only applicable for Compact PLUS type unit
Sheet [100]
Receive
Transmit
Sheet [110]
•
Reserve
pos./neg. speed setp
Ramp-function gen. active
Energize main cont.
Undervoltage fault
Comp. Setp reached
PZD control
Set/actual deviation
Alarm effective
Switch-on ihibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation
Ready
Ready for ON
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
P700.1 = Bus address
<1> <2>
/11 / 36
RS485N
<1> <2>
/10 / 35
RS485P
<1>
<2>
-X101 / -X100
Baud rate
P701.1
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
• • • • •
CB Bus Address
0 ... 200
P918.01 (3)
CB/TB TlgOFF
0 ... 6500 ms
P722.01 (10)
P722.01 =0 :
No monitoring
CB Parameter 11
0 ... 65535
P721.01 to .05
CB Parameter 10
0 ... 65535
P720.01
••••••
CB
configuration
Sheet [120]
Receive
Transmit
Sheet [125]
Operating Instructions
ZUW1
1
2
Setpoint source
PROFIBUS 1st CB (P368=6)
0
3
PKW
•
PKW
Reserved for read
operations of
parameter data
4
PZD1 (Data word1)
5
PcD1 (Data word 1)
6
Src OFF2
P572.1
B (3112)
P571.1
B (3111)
P568.1
B (3108)
8
- s6 -
to sheet [180]
control word 1
r550
Src Neg. Spd
Src Pos Spd
Src Jog Bit0
P566.1
B (3107) Src 2 Acknow
P555.1
B (3101)
MASTERDRIVES VC
7
External fault
Raise MOP
Negative Spd
Raise MOP
Positive Spd
B3111
B3113
PcD control
B3110
B3112
Jog Bit1
B3109
Jog Bit0
B3108
B3106
Acknowledge
No RGen Stop
Setpoint Release
B3105
B3107
Inv. Release
RGen Release
B3104
OFF3 (QStop)
B3102
M
P554.1
B (3100) Src ON/OFF1
N
from sheett
[200]
from sheet
[350.7], [351.7]
[352.7], [400.7]
Src T setpoint
P486.B
to sheet [320.1]
K
B3103
OFF2 (electr.)
ON/OFF1
B3101
B3100
B3215
B3200
Receive setpoints
For T control:
K3002
1. CB Word2
r733.2
K3001
ZUW1
r552
n/f(act)
Main setpoint
to sheet [316.1]
P443.B
K (3002)
K0032
P734.1(32)
K
1. CB Word1
r733.1
KK0148
P734.2
K
Transmit actual values
Bit14 B3114
Bit15 B3115
Bit7
Bit1
Bit0
Bit0
up to Bit15
PZD2 (Data word 2)
Control word
Status word
PZD2 (Data word 2)
•
PcD1 (Data word1)
PKW
• • • • •
15
•
Reserved for write operations of
parameter data
PKW
•
1
Reserve
pos./neg. speed setp
Ramp-function gen. active
Energize main cont.
Undervoltage fault
Comp. Setp reached
PZD control
Set/actual deviation
Alarm effective
Switch-on ihibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation
Ready
Ready for ON
9-24
••••••
CB Parameter 1
0 ... 65535
P711.01
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
• • • • •
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
P704.1 = Tlg failure time
Baud rate:
9.6 kB
PKW:127
PcD: 2
Sheet [110]
Sheet [100]
Receive
Transmit
PcD #
P703.1
0
PKW
I
Jog
Reset
O
PcD1 (Data word1)
PcD2 (Data word 2)
6
PcD2 (Data word 2)
Control word 1
Status word 1
4
5
Not valid for Compact PLUS!
OP1S keys
P049 = OP operating display
•
1
2
3
Setpoint source
OP1S / DriveMonitor and fixed setpoints at USS1 (P368=7)
PZD1 (Data word1)
ZUW1
PKW
Reserved for read
operations of
parameter data
PcD1 (Data word1)
•
1
PKW
• • • • •
15
•
Reserved for write operations of
parameter data
PKW
•
Reserve
pos./neg. speed setp
Ramp-function gen. active
Energize main cont.
Undervoltage fault
Comp. setpoint reached
PcD control
Set/actual deviation
Alarm effective
Switch-on inhibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation
Ready
Ready for ON
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
P700.1 = Bus address
/11
RS485N
/10
RS485P
-X101
Baud rate PKW #
P701.1
P702.1
Bit15
Bit12
Bit11
Bit8
Bit7
Bit1
PcD control
B2110
Raise MOP
9-25
7
External fault
Src Jog Bit0
8
- s7 -
to sheet [180]
control word 1
r550
P572.1
Src negative spd
B (2112)
P571.1
Src positive spd
B (2111)
P568.1
B (2108)
P565.1
B (2107) Src1 Acknow.
MASTERDRIVES VC
B2115
Lower MOP
B2113
B2114
Negative Spd
B2112
Positive Spd
Jog Bit1
B2109
B2111
Jog Bit0
B2108
Acknowledge
No RGen Stop
Setp Release
B2106
B2107
RGen Release
B2105
Inv Release
B2103
B2104
OFF2 (electr.)
OFF3 (QStop)
P554.1
B (2100) Src ON/OFF1
M
B2102
ON/OFF1
N
Src T setpoint
P486.B
to sh. [320.1]
K
Main setpoint
to sh. [316.1]
from sh.
[200]
from sh.
[350.7], [351.7]
[352.7], [400.5]
P443.B
K (2002)
B2101
Bit0
B2200
bis Bit15
B2215
Bit0
B2100
Receive setpoints
for T control:
K2002
SCom1Word2
r709.2
K2001
ZUW1
r552
n/f(act)
Setpoint via process data
(only DriveMonitor):
K0032
P707.1
K
SCom1Word1
r709.1
KK0148
P707.2
K
Transmit actual values
n957.88 = 4
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
• • • • •
9-26
If P366 = 2
P590 = B0012
P651 = B0000
P652 = B0000
P653 = B0107
Operating Instructions
Fixed setpoint6
in Hz
1
2
Setpoint source
OP1S and fixed setpoints (P368=7)
P408.F
P407.F
Fixed setpoint8
Fixed setpoint7
P406.F
Fixed setpoint5
P405.F
P404.F
Fixed setpoint4
KK0048
KK0047
KK0046
KK0045
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
KK0044
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
6
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
7
(for T control)
- s71 -
8
Src T setpoint
P486.B (40) to sheet[320.1]
KK
Src Main Setpoint
P443.B (40) to sheet[316.1]
KK
n959.89 = 4
MASTERDRIVES VC
Act.FSetp
KK0040
Active FSetp
r420
to sheet [180]
from sheet [200]
FSetp FSetp FSetp
FSetp
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 1
Bit 0
P418.B P417.B P581.B
P580.B
Src BICO DSet
Operation
No fault
P403.F
5
P590 (14)
B
B0104
B0107
0
*)
*)
*)
KK0043
3
B0014
P653.1 (0)
B
B0012
P652.1 (104)
B
B0010
P651.1 (107)
B
M24
P24
(for n/f control or v/f control)
(for T control)
/5
/4
1=operation
0=fault
/3
/2
/1
P402.F
Fixed setpoint3
KK0042
KK0041
-X101
Fixed setpoint2
See P049.4
in %
P401.F
Fixed setpoint1
Sheet [290]
If used as digital outputs, B10 to B14 must
not be wired.
Fixed
setpoints
*)
Sheet [90]
If used as digital inputs, the parameters
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B must
be set to 0!
Terminal strip
M
N
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Baud rate:
9.6 kB
PKW:127
PZD: 2
PKW #
P702.1
P704.1 = Tlg failure time
Sheet [110]
Sheet [100]
Receive
Transmit
PZD #
P703.1
ZUW1
0
PKW
PKW
I
Jog
Reset
O
PcD1 (Data word 1)
PcD1 (Data word1)
PcD2 (Data word2)
6
PcD2 (Data word 2)
Control word 1
Status word 1
4
5
Not valid for Compact PLUS!
OP1S-keys
P049 = OP operating display
•
Reserved for read
operations of
parameter data
PKW
1
2
3
Setpoint source
OP1S / DriveMonitor and MOP at USS1 (P368=8)
PZD1 (Data word1)
1
•
Reserved for write operations of
parameter data
PKW
• • • • • •
15
Reserve
pos./neg. speed setp
Ramp-function gen. active
Energize main cont.
Undervoltage fault
Comp. setpoint reached
PcD control
Set/actual deviation
Alarm effective
Switch-on inhibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation
Ready
Ready for ON
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
P700.1 = Bus address
/11
RS485N
/10
RS485P
-X101
Baudrate
P701.1
Bit15
Bit12
Bit11
Bit8
Bit7
Bit1
No RGen Stop
Setp Release
B2105
B2106
9-27
7
External fault
Lower MOP
Raise MOP
Negative Spd
Positive Spd
to sh. [320.1]
M
N
P574.1
B (2114)
P573.1
B (2113)
8
- s8 -
Src Lower MOP
Src Raise MOP
P572.1
Src negative spd
B (2112)
P565.1
B (2107) Src1 Acknow.
to sh. [180]
Control word 1
r550
P554.1
B (2100) Src ON/OFF1
MASTERDRIVES VC
B2115
B2114
B2113
B2112
B2111
Jog Bit1
PcD control
B2110
Jog Bit0
B2109
B2108
Acknowledge
RGen Release
B2104
B2107
Inv Release
B2103
OFF2 (electr.)
OFF3 (QStop)
K
P486.B
Src T setpoint
B2102
ON/OFF1
from sh.
[200]
from sh.
[350.7], [351.7]
[352.7], [400.5]
to sh. [316.1]
Main setpoint
P443.B
K (2002)
B2101
Bit0
B2200
bis Bit15
B2215
Bit0
B2100
Receive setpoints
for T control:
K2002
SST1Word2
r709.2
K2001
ZUW1
r552
n/f(act)
Setpoint via process data
(only DriveMonitor):
K0032
P707.1
K
SST1Word1
r709.1
KK0148
P707.2
K
Transmit actual values
n957.90 = 4
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
• • • • •
9-28
Operating Instructions
Sheet [300]
Sheet [90]
1
2
Setpoint source
OP1S and MOP (P368=8)
MOP MP
Terminal strip
3
Lower MOP
Raise MOP
I
/5
/4
P24
Lower MOP
Raise MOP
Negative Spd
1 Acknowledge
B0014
B2114
B2113
B2112
B2107
B2100
P422
MOP (min.)
6
to sheet [180]
from sheet [200]
n959.91 = 4
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
7
M
N
MASTERDRIVES VC
(for T control )
Src T Setpoint
P486.B (58) to sheet [320.1]
KK
Src Main Setpoint
P443.B (58) to sheet [316.1]
KK
Src Lower MOP
Src Raise MOP
Src Negative Spd
Src1 Acknowledge
Src ON/OFF1
MOP(Outp.)
KK058
MOP(Outp.)
r424
B
P574.1 (9)
B
P573.1 (8)
B
P572
B
P565
B
Src BICO DSet
operation
no fault
P554.1 (5)
P590 (14)
B
B0104
B0107
4
5
Not valid for Compact PLUS!
0xx0 = ... without storing after OFF
0xx1 = ... storing after OFF
P425
Conf MOP
*)
*)
*)
MOP (max)
P421
P653.1 (0)
B
B0012
P652.1 (104)
B
B0010
P651.1 (107)
B
M24
ON/OFF 1
1=operation
0=fault
/3
/2
/1
Accel Time MOPDecel Time MOP
P431
P432
P
O
-X101
- s81 -
8
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
2s
30 ms
2s
2s
*)
DC Link Volts
r006
Torque
r007
Output power
Output voltage
1
2
Analog outputs and display variables
n/f(act)
KK148
Actual speed
KK020
3
UZk(ist)
K0240
DC Link Volts
K0025
)
*)
T(act) *
K0241
Torque
K0024
Output power
K0023
U(set,v/f)
K0204
Output voltage
K0021
I(Output Amps)
K0242
Output Amps
K0022
Actual Speed
r015
n/f (act)
r218
Output Amps
r004
Rot Freq
r002
*) Torque display only with n/f/T control
from sheet
[285.3]
[286.3]
6
from sheet
[285.7]
from sheet
[285.7]
[286.7]
from sheet
[285.3]
[286.3]
3
from sheet
[285.3]
[286.3]
4
from sheet
[350.7]
[351.7]
[352.7]
[400.5]
2
2s
Display variables
4
P038.x
K
K
P040.x
K
K
K
P042.x
K
K
K
.01
.02
.01
.02
.03
.01
.02
.03
y
y
AA2 Offset
P644.2
AA1 Offset
P644.1
D
D
%
5
Reference torque *)
P354
rpm
Reference speed
P353
Hz
Reference frequency
P352
Display torque
r039.1 to .2
Display speed
r041.1 to .3
Display frequency
r043.1 to .3
*)
6
Sheet [30]
Switch S4
1 +/- 10 V
3
0 ... 20 mA
A 5
4 +/- 10 V
6
Switch S4
0 ... 20 mA
A 2
<1>
Sheet [81]
-X102/22
-X102/21
-X102/20
-X102/19
AA2
AA1
0 mA ... 20 mA
-10 V ... 10 V
xB
Smax − Smin
Amin x Smax − Amax x Smin
Smax − Smin
Amax − Amin
9-29
7
8
AA2
5-6
4-6
- a0-
Reference to the current path of
rXX sheets
MASTERDRIVES VC
1
Sheet [300]: See Compendium sheet 300
Explanations:
P644 =
P643 =
Output values applying to output current:
4 mA ⇒ Amin = + 6 V
20 mA ⇒ Amax = - 10 V
2-3
1-3
AA1
Switches on CUVC S4:
n959.80 = 3
Note concerning the setting of analog outputs:
B = Reference variable (c.f. P350 ... P354)
Smin = smallest signal value (e.g. in Hz, V, A)
Smax = largest signal value (e.g. in Hz, V, A)
Amin = smallest output value in V
Amax = largest output value in V
<1> Only applicable for Compact/Chassis type unit,
for Compact PLUS Sheet [82] is applicable
y(v) = x / 100% * P643
AA2 Scaling
P643.2
y(v) = x / 100% * P643
AA1 Scaling
P643.1
Display parameters
Src Analog Output
P640.2
x
K (22)
Src Analog Output
P640.1
x
K (148)
Analog outputs
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
9-30
Operating Instructions
Normalization
Tacho M
Track A
Track B
Zero track
Control tr.
Tacho P15V
n/f(act,encoder)
KK091
Ana.tach.
Imp.tach.
Motor encoder
P130.M (11) *)
Sheet 250
P453.F (-110.0%) *)
n/f(max,neg.Spd)
1
2
3
V/f characteristic with speed controller (P100=0)
2
n/f(act)
KK148
n/f(act)
r218
Sheet 352
KK075
Smooth. n/f(act)
P223.M
r014
Setpoint speed
n/f(set,smooth)
r229
–
P240.M
n/f-Reg.Tn
P235.M
n/f-Reg.Gain1
Sheet 364
Speed controller
4
<1> Compact PLUS: X104
n/f(set)
r482
Sheet 318
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110.0%) *)
*) Parameter only adjustable in the "Drive setting" state (P60=5)
P138.M (3000)
Ana.TachScale
23
24
25
26
27
28
<1>
X103
Sheet 317
Setpoint channel
P462.F (10s) P464.F (10s)
Accel Time Decel Time
Pulse #
P151.M (1024) *)
N
Src main setpoint
P443.B
KK
Srce AddSetp1
P433.B (0)
KK
Ref.
Frequency: P352 *)
Speed:
P353 *)
Sheet 316
–
5
r129
–
4
Imax-Ctrl Gain
P331.M
Output
current
Current
Lim.
Maximum
current
P128.M
f(Slip)
KK0188
Imax-Ctrll.Tn
P332.M
Sheet 401
Speed limitation controller
6
1
N
M
:
:
Sh. [300] :
3
Motor
encoder
Smooth. vd(act)
P287.M
Sheet 286
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
MASTERDRIVES VC
7
Reference to current path sheet "a0"
"Analog outputs and display variables"
8
- r0 -
Reference to setpoint source (see sXX-sheets)
6
Asyc.
Mot. 3~
Gating unit
f(set,stator)
KK199
See Compendium Sheet 300
Explanations:
P330.M
Src SelCurve *)
–
Volts
mod
depth
FSetp Boost
P325.M
Mot.voltage
P101.M *)
max.Outp Volts
r346
Boost End
Field Weak
Freq
Mot.Freq.(n)
Freq
P326.M P107.M (50) *) P293.M
Sheet 405
v/f characteristic
n957.85 = 0
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s)
Accel time Decel time
Sheet 317
P453.F (-110.0%) * )
n/f(max,neg.spd)
1
2
V/f characteristic (P100=1)
3
KK075
n/f(set)
r482
Sheet 318
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) * )
Setpoint channel
*) Parameter only adjustable in the "Drive setting" status (P60=5)
N
Src main setpoint
P443.B
KK
Src add. setp.1
P433.B (0)
KK
Ref,
frequency: P352 *)
speed:
P353 *)
Sheet 316
r129
4
–
f(Slip)
KK188
4
Imax controller Tn
P332.M
Imax controller Kp
P331.M
Output Amps
Current
lim.
Maximum
current
P128.M
r014
Setpoint speed
n/f(set,smooth)
r229
Slip comp Kp
P336.M (0)
5
–
n/f(ist)
r218
Sheet 400
2
KK148
Current limitation controller
6
9-31
7
3
Sheet 286
8
f(set,Stator)
KK199
6
- r1 -
Asyc.
Mot. 3~
Gating unit
Smooth vd(act)
P287.M
MASTERDRIVES VC
P330.M
Src Select Char.
–
Volt.
Mod.
Depth
FSetp Boost
P325.M
Mot. Volts
P101.M *)
max.Outp Volts.
r346
Boost end
Field weak.
frequency Mot.Freq.(n) frequency
P326.M P107.M (50) *) P293.M
Sheet 405
V/f characteristic
n957.86 = 0
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
9-32
Operating Instructions
P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s)
Accel Time Decel Time
Sheet 317
Setpoint channel
P453.F (-110,0%) * )
n/f(max,neg.spd)
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) * )
Src Add Setp2
P438.B (0)
KK
KK075
1
2
V/f characteristic (P100=2)
Textile
n/f(set)
r482
Sheet 318
3
*) Parameter can only be adjusted in the "Drive setting" status (P60=5)
N
Src main setpoint
P443.B
KK
Src AddSetp.1
P433.B (0)
KK
Ref.
frequency: P352 *)
speed:
P353 *)
Sheet 316
r129
4
–
4
Imax controller Tn
P332.M
Imax controller Kp
P331.M
Output Amps
Current
lim.
Maximum
currents
P128.M
r014
Setpoint speed
n/f(set,smooth)
r229
5
n/f(act)
r218
Sheet 402
2
KK148
Current limitation controller
6
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
7
3
8
6
Asyc.
Mot. 3~
- r2 -
Smooth Vd(act)
P287.M
Sheet 286
Gating unit
f(set,stator)
KK199
MASTERDRIVES VC
P330.M
Src Select Char.
–
Volt.
Mod.
Depth
FSetp boost
P325.M *)
Mot.voltage
P101.M *)
max.outp. volts
r346
Boost end
Field weakening
frequency Mot.Freq.(n) frequency
P326.M P107.M (50) *) P293.M
Sheet 405
V/f characteristic
n957.87 = 0
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Scal.T(pre)
P471.M (0)
P493.B (170)
Src TorqLimit1
Src TorqLimit1 FSetp
P492.F (100%)
Sheet 319
KK075
Smooth.n/f(act)
P223.M
r014
Setpoint speed
–
n/f(set,smooth)
r229
P235.M
n/f-Reg.Kp1
Torque/current limit
Field weak. charac.
5
P127.M (80%)
R(rotor)Ktmp
Current
model
Sheet 396
Slip frequency
KK188
+
Smoothing I(set) P280.M
T(droop) P278.M
T(dynam.) P279.M
Sheet 382
x
y
max.mod. depth r346
ModDepth Headrm
P344.M
Sheet 381
Msoll,reg
K0153
K0165
T(set,limitr)
r269
TorqLImit2,act
K0173
TorqLimit1,act
K0172
Torque limitation
r129
Sheet 367
Sheet 372
Maximum current Pw,max(gen)
P128.M
P259.M
i-Anteil
K0155
P240.M
n/f-Reg.Tn
Sheet 362
Speed controller
1
2
3
4
Closed-loop speed control without encoder (frequency control) P100=3
Master drive (P587 = 0)
2
*) Parameter can only be
changed in the "Drive setting"
status (P60=5)
n/f(ist)
r218
P453.F (-110,0%) * )
n/f(max,neg.spd)
n/f(ist)
KK148
Sheet 351
Sheet 318
K
P499.B (171)
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) * ) n/f(set)
r482
K171
K170
K
Src TorqLimit2 FSetp
Src
TorqLimit2
P498.F (-100%)
P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s)
Accel Time Decel Time
Start-up time
P116.M
Sheet 317
Setpoint channel
The current injection of
P278 T(droop) (Fig. 382)
is only calculated for
frequencies below approx. 10%
of the rated motor frequency.
Note:
N
Src main setpoint
P443.B
KK
Src Add. Setp1
P433.B (0)
KK
P354 is referred to
P113 *)
Ref.
frequency: P352 *)
speed:
P353 *)
torque: P354 *)
Sheet 316
6
Tn
P284.M
EMF
model
Isd (act)
–
9-33
8
6
Asyc.
Mot. 3~
- r3 -
Smooth Vd(act)
P287.M
Sheet 285
Gating unit
f(set,stator)
KK199
MASTERDRIVES VC
7
i-comp.
+
P339.M *)
ModSystem
Release
Volt.
Mod.
Depth
3
P315.M P316.M
EMF Reg.Kp EMF-Reg.Tn
–
Kp
Tn
Isq(act) P283.M P284.M
K0184
–
Kp
P283.M
Isq(set)
K0168
Sheet 390
Current controller
n957.88 = 0
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
9-34
T-add. FSetp
P505.F (0.0)
Operating Instructions
Start-up time
P116.M (~)
P453.F (-110,0%) * )
n/f(max,neg.spd)
n/f(max,pos spd)
P452.F (110 %) *)
-1
2
n/f(soll)
r482
r502
Mgrenz2
n/f(act)
KK148
n/f(act)
r218
Sheet 351
KK075
Mgrenz2 FSW
P498.F (-100%)
TorqLimit1 FSetp
P492.F (100%) TorqLimit1
r496
Sheet 320
Smooth.n/f(act)
P223.M
r014
setpoint speed
–
n/f(setl,smooth)
r229
P235.M
n/f-Reg.Kp1
Field weak. charac.
5
P127.M (80%)
R(rotor)Ktmp
Current
model
Sheet 396
Slip frequency
KK188
+
SmoothingI (set) P280.M
T(droop) P278.M
T(dynam.) P279.M
Sheet 382
ModDepth Headrm
P344.M
max.Ausg.spg. r346
K0165
x
y
M(set,limitr)
r269
TorqLimit2, act
K0173
TorqLimit1,act
K0172
Torque limitation
Sheet 372
Maximum
current Pw,max(gen)
P128.M
P259.M
Torque/current limit
Sheet 381
Tset,reg
K0153
i-comp.
K0155
P240.M
n/f-Reg.Tn
Sheet 363
Speed controller
1
2
3
4
Closed-loop speed control without encoder (frequency control) P100=3
Slave drive (P587 = 1)
*) Parameter can only be
changed in the "Drive setting"
status (P60=5)
M
Src Torq Setp
P486.B
K
P354 is referred to
P113 *)
Ref.
frequency: P352 *)
speed: P353 *)
torque: P354 *)
Setpoint channel
6
Kp
P283.M
Tn
P284.M
–
P339.M *)
ModSystem
Release
Volt.
Mod.
Depth
3
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
+
Sheet 285
- r31 -
8
f(set,Stator)
KK199
6
Asyc.
Mot. 3~
Gating unit
Smooht. Vd(act)
P287.M
MASTERDRIVES VC
7
P315.M P316.M
EMF Reg Gain EMF Reg.Tn
EMF
Model
Isd (act)
–
Kp
Tn
Isq(act) P283.M P284.M
K0184
–
Isq(set)
K0168
Sheet 390
Current controller
n957.89 = 0
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Normalization
Tacho M
Track A
Track B
Zero track
Control track
Tacho P15V
n/f(act,encoder)
KK091
Ana.tach.
Imp.tach.
Motor encoder
P130.M (11) *)
P493.B (170)
Src TorqLimit1
Sheet 318
K
P499.B (171)
Smooth.n/f(pre)
P216.M
KK075
2
n/f(ist)
KK148
n/f(act)
r218
Sheet 350
P453.F (-110,0%)
n/f(max,neg.spd)
*)
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) *) n/f(set)
r482
Src Add Setp2
P438.B (0)
KK
K171
K170
K
TorqLimit2 FSetp
P498.F (-100%) Src TorqLimit2
TorqLimit1 FSetp
P492.F (100%)
Sheet 319
1
2
Closed-loop speed control (P100=4)
Master drive (P587 = 0)
3
*) Parameter can only be changed in the "Drive setting" status P60=5
P138.M (3000)
Ana.TachoComp
23
24
25
26
27
28
<1>
X103
Sheet250
P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s)
Accel Time Decel Time
Scal.Torq(pre.)
P471.M
Sheet 317
Setpoint channel
Start-up time
P116.M
Pulse #
P151.M (1024) *)
N
Src main setpoint
P443.B
KK
Src Add Setp.1
P433.B (0)
KK
P354 is referred to
P113 *)
Ref.
frequency: P352 *)
speed: P353 *)
torque: P354 *)
Sheet 316
–
4
<1> Compact PLUS: X104
Smooth n/f(act)
P223.M
r014
Setpoint speed
n/f(set,smooth)
r229
5
P127.M (80%)
R(rotor)Ktmp
Current
model
Blatt 395
ModDepth Headrm
P344.M
Sheet 380
Msoll,reg
K0153
Slip frequency
KK188
+
Field weakening
characteristic
max.outp.volt.
r346
x
y
K0165
T(set,limitr)
r269
TorqLimit2,act
K0173
TorqLimit1,act
K0172
Torque limitation
r129
Maximum current Pw,max(gen)
P128.M
P259.M
Sheet 370
Torque/current limit
Sheet 365
i-Anteil
K0155
P235.M
P240.M
n/f-Reg.Kp1 n/f-Reg.Tn
Sheet 360
Speed controller
6
Tn
P284.M
–
9-35
7
P316.M
EMF Reg.Tn
+
P339.M *)
ModSystem
Release
Volt.
Mod.
Depth
3
8
6
Asyc.
Mot. 3~
- r4 -
Motor
encoder
Smooth Vd(act)
P287.M
Sheet 285
Gating unit
f(set,Stator)
KK199
MASTERDRIVES VC
P315.M
EMF Reg Gain
EMF
Model
Isd (act)
–
Kp
Tn
Isq(act) P283.M P284.M
K0184
–
Kp
P283.M
Isq(set)
K0168
Sheet 390
Current controller
n957.90 = 0
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
9-36
Operating Instructions
Normalization
Tacho M
Track A
Track B
Zero track
Control track
Tacho P15V
n/f(act,encoder)
KK091
Ana.tach.
IPulse tach.
Motor encoder
P130.M (11) *)
Sheet 250
2
n/f(act)
KK148
n/f(act)
r218
Sheet 350
KK075
n/f(set)
r482
r502
P498.F (-100%) TorqLimit2
TorqLimit2 FSetp
Smooth.n/f(FWD)
P216.M
P453.F (-110,0%)
n/f(max,neg.spd) *)
n/f(max,pos spd)
P452.F (110 %) *)
-1
TorqLimit1 FSetp
P492.F (100%) TorqLimit1
r496
Sheet 320
Sheet 361
–
4
<1> Compact PLUS: X104
Smooth n/f(act)
P223.M
r014
Setpoint speed
5
P127.M (80%)
R(rotor)Ktmp
Current
model
Sheet 395
ModDepth Headrm
P344.M
Sheet 380
Tset,reg
K0153
Slip frequency
KK188
+
Field weakening
characteristic
max.outp. volts
r346
K0165
M(set,limitr)
r269
TorqLimit2,act
K0173
TorqLimit1,act
K0172
Torque limitation
x
y
Sheet 371
Torque/current limit
Maximum current Pw,max(gen)
P128.M
P259.M
i-comp.
K0155
P235.M
P240.M
n/f-Reg.Kp1 n/f-Reg.Tn
n/f(set, smooth)
r229
1
2
3
Closed-loop speed control / torque control (P100=4/5)
Slave drive (P587 = 1)
*) Parameter can only be changed in the "Drive setting" status (P60=5)
P138.M (3000)
Ana.TachoComp
23
24
25
26
27
28
<1>
X103
Pulse
P151.M (1024) *)
M
Src Torque Setp
P486.B
K
Torq Add. FSetp
P505.F (0.0)
P354 is referred to P113 *)
Ref.
frequency: P352 *)
speed:
P353 *)
torque:
P354 *)
Setpoint channel
Speed limitation
controller
6
Tn
P284.M
–
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
7
P316.M
EMF-Reg Tn
+
P339.M *)
Pulse system
release
Volt.
Mod.
Depth
3
Sheet285
8
f(set, stator)
KK199
- r5 -
Motor
encoder
6
Asyc.
Mot. 3~
Gating unit
Smooth. Vd(act)
P287.M
MASTERDRIVES VC
P315.M
EMF Reg Gain
EMF
model
Isd (act)
–
Kp
Tn
Isq(act) P283.M P284.M
K0184
–
Kp
P283.M
Isq(set)
K0168
Sheet 390
Current controller
n957.91 = 0
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
Parameter assignments depending on setpoint source (P368) and control type (P100):
P368 = Setpoint source
P368 = 0
PMU +
MOP
Parameter description
P554.1
Src ON/OFF1
P555.1
Src OFF2
P561.1
Src InvRelease
P565.1
Src1 Fault Reset
P567.1
P568.1
P368 = 6
PROFIBUS
P368 = 7
OP1S +
FSetp
P368 = 8
OP1S +
MOP
B2100
B2100
B0022
B0022
B0022
B2100
B3100
1
B0020
B0020
B0020
B2101
B3101
1
1
1
B0016
1
1
1
1
1
1
B2107
B2107
B2107
B2107
B2107
B2107
B2107
B2107
Src3 Fault Reset
0
B0018
B0018
B0018
0
0
0
0
Src Jog Bit0
0
0
0
0
B2108
B3108
B2108
0
P571.1
Src FWD Speed
1
1
1
1
B2111
B3111
B2111
1
P572.1
Src REV Speed
1
1
1
1
B2112
B3112
B2112
B2112
P573.1
Src MOP Up
B0008
0
0
B0014
0
0
0
B2113
P574.1
Src MOP Down
B0009
0
0
B0016
0
0
0
B2114
P580.1
Src FixSetp Bit0
0
0
B0014
0
0
0
0
0
P581.1
Src FixSetp Bit1
0
0
B0016
0
0
0
0
0
P590
Src BICO DSet
B0014 *
0
0
0
0
B0014
B0014 *
B0014 **
P651.1
Src DigOut1
B0107 *
B0107
B0107
B0107
B0107
B0107
B0107 *
B0107 *
P652.1
Src DigOut2
B0104 *
B0104
B0104
B0104
B0104
B0104
B0104 *
B0104 *
P653.1
Src DigOut3
0*
B0115
0
0
0
0
0*
0*
P654.1
Src DigOut4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
KK0058
K0011
KK0040
KK0058
K2002
K3002
KK0040
KK0058
Setpoint conn. parameter
B0005
P368 = 1 P368 = 2 P368 = 3 P368 = 4
Analog
FSetp +
MOP +
USS
inp. +
terminals terminals
terminals
* For factory setting P366 = 2, 3
♦ P590 = B0012
♦ P651 = B0000
♦ P652 = B0000
♦ P653 = B0107
** For factory setting P366 = 4:
♦ P590 = B4102
Bxxxx =
Kxxxx =
KKxxxx =
Binector (Digital signal; values 0 and 1)
Connector (16-bit signal; 4000h = 100 %)
Double connector (32-bit signal; 4000 0000h = 100 %)
v/f characteristic + n/f-control:
T-control + n/f control:
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Setpoint connector parameter
(Setp-KP) = P443
Setpoint connector parameter
(Setp-KP) = P486
9-37
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
P100 = control type
Parameter description
P100 = 0
V/f + n
P100 = 1
V/f
P100 = 2
Textile
f-Reg.
n-Reg.
(P587 = 0) (P587 = 0)
P100 = 5
T-Reg.
P038.1
DispTorqConn.r39.1
-
-
-
-
-
Sw-KP
P038.1
DispTorqConn.r39.2
-
-
-
-
-
K0165
P040.1
DispSpdConn.r41.1
Setp CP
Setp CP
Setp CP
Setp CP
Setp CP
KK0150
P040.2
DispSpdConn.r41.2
KK0148
KK0148
KK0148
KK0148
KK0148
KK0148
P040.3
Disp Freq Conn.r41.3
-
-
-
KK0091
KK0091
KK0091
P042.1
Disp Freq Conn.r43.1
Setp CP
Setp CP
Setp CP
Setp CP
Setp CP
KK0150
P042.2
Disp Freq Conn.r43.2
KK0148
KK0148
KK0148
KK0148
KK0148
KK0148
P042.3
Disp Freq Conn.r43.3
KK0199
KK0199
KK0199
KK0091
KK0091
KK0091
9.2.2
Parameterizing with user settings
During parameterization by selecting user-specific fixed settings, the
parameters of the unit are described with values which are permanently
stored in the software. In this manner, it is possible to carry out the
complete parameterization of the units in one step just by setting a few
parameters.
The user-specific fixed settings are not contained in the standard
firmware; they have to be compiled specifically for the customer.
NOTE
If you are interested in the provision and implementation of fixed
settings tailored to your own requirements, please get in contact with
your nearest SIEMENS branch office.
P060 = 2
Select "Fixed settings" menu
Select desired factory setting
0...4: Factory settings
5:
User setting 1 (currently as P366 = 0)
6:
User setting 2 (currently as P366 = 0)
:
10: Lift and lifting equipment
Start parameter reset
0: Parameter reset
1: No parameter change
P366 = ?
P970 = 0
Unit carries out parameter
reset and then leaves the
"Fixed settings" menu
Fig. 9-3
9-38
Sequence for parameterizing with user settings
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
9.2.3
Parameterizing by loading parameter files (download P060 = 6)
Download
When parameterizing with download, the parameter values stored in a
master unit are transferred to the unit to be parameterized via a serial
interface. The following can serve as master units:
1. OP1S operator control panel
2. PCs with DriveMonitor service program
3. Automation units (e.g. SIMATIC)
The interface SCom1 or SCom2 with USS protocol of the basic unit and
field bus interfaces used for parameter transfer (e.g. CBP for
PROFIBUS DP) can serve as serial interfaces.
Using download, all changeable parameters can be set to new values.
Operating mode
Type of construction
I
O
Individual operation Compact, chassis
X300
(SCom1)
Bus operation
Compact, chassis
X101
Operating mode
Type of construction Terminal
P
USS-Bus
Jog
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
+/-
Reset
SIEMENS
Terminal
Fault
Run
US
S
via
RS
48
5
OP1S
Individual operation Compact, chassis
USS via RS232
X300
X300
(SCom1)
Laptop
Operating mode
Type of construction
Terminal
Bus operation
Optional board CBx
e. g. X448
e. g. CBP for Profibus for CBP
bu
c
cifi
pe
s
s
Automation unit
(e. g. SIMATIC S7)
Fig. 9-4
Parameter transfer from various sources by download
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-39
Parameterizing Steps
Downloading with
the OP1S
04.2006
The OP1S operator control panel is capable of upreading parameter
sets from the units and storing them. These parameter sets can then be
transferred to other units by download. Downloading with the OP1S is
thus the preferred method of parameterizing replacement units in a
service case.
During downloading with the OP1S, it is assumed that the units are in
the as-delivered state. The parameters for power section definition are
thus not transferred. (Refer to Section "Detailed parameterization,
power section definition")
Parameter number
Table 9-6
Parameter name
P060
Menu selection
P070
Order No. 6SE70..
P072
Rtd Drive Amps(n)
P073
Rtd Drive Power(n)
Parameters you cannot overwrite during download
The OP1S operator control panel also stores and transfers parameters
for configuring the USS interface (P700 to P704). Depending on the
parameterization of the unit from which the parameter set was originally
upread, communication between the OP1S and the unit can be
interrupted on account of changed interface parameters after
downloading has been completed. To enable communication to recommence, briefly interrupt the connection between the OP1S and the
unit (disconnect OP1S or the cable). The OP1S is then newly initialized
and adjusts itself after a short time to the changed parameterization via
the stored search algorithm.
Download with
DriveMonitor
9-40
With the aid of the DriveMonitor PC program, parameter sets can be
upload from the units, saved to the hard disk or to floppy disks, and
edited offline. These parameter sets, stored in parameter files, can then
be downloaded to the units again.
The offline parameter editing facility can be used to produce special
parameter files to suit a particular application. In such cases, the files
need not contain the full set of parameters but can be limited to the
parameters relevant to the application in question. For further
information, see under "Upload / Download" in the "Parameterization"
section.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
NOTICE
Parameterizing Steps
Successful parameterization of the units by download is only ensured if
the unit is in the "Download" status when the data is being transferred.
Transition into this status is achieved by selecting the "Download"
menu in P060.
P060 is automatically set to 6 after the download function has been
activated in the OP1S or in the DriveMonitor service program.
If the CU of a converter is replaced, the power section definition has to
be carried out before parameter files are downloaded.
If only parts of the entire parameter list are transferred by download, the
parameters of the following table must always be transferred too, as
these automatically result during the drive setting from the input of other
parameters. During download, however, this automatic adjustment is
not carried out.
Parameter number
Table 9-7
Parameter name
P109
Pole pair number
P352
Reference frequency = P353 x P109 / 60
P353
Reference frequency = P352 x 60 / P109
Parameters which always have to be loaded during download
If parameter P115 = 1 is set during download, the automatic
parameterization is then carried out (according to the setting of
parameter P114). In automatic parameterization, the controller settings
are calculated from the motor rating plate data and the reference values
P350 to P354 are set to the motor rated values of the first motor data
set.
If the following parameters are changed during download, they are not
then re-calculated by the automatic parameterization:
P116, P128, P215, P216, P217, P223, P235, P236, P237, P240, P258,
P259, P278, P279, P287, P291, P295, P303, P313, P337, P339, P344,
P350, P351, P352, P353, P354, P388, P396, P471, P525, P536, P602,
P603.
9.2.4
Parameterization by running script files
Description
Script files are used to parameterize devices of the MASTERDRIVES
series as an alternative to downloading a parameter set. A script file is
a pure text file that must have the filename extension *.ssc. The script
file executes individual commands using a simple command syntax for
the purpose of device parameterization. (You can write the script files
using a simple text editor, such as WordPad.)
NOTE
Please refer to the online help for the scriptfiles.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-41
Parameterizing Steps
9.3
04.2006
Motor list
Asynchronous
motors 1PH7(=PA6) /
1PL6 / 1PH4
Voltage
Un [V]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
cos ϕ
iµ
[%]
9.7
398
23.5
0.748
58.3
40.6
9.7
391
35.7
0.809
51.8
1750
60.95
12.8
398
34
0.835
41.3
1PH7103-2_G_
2300
78.8
16.3
388
31
0.791
50.4
5
1PH7105-2_F_
1750
60.0
17.2
398
43.7
0.773
54.1
6
1PH7107-2_D_
1150
40.3
17.1
360
59.8
0.807
51.4
7
1PH7107-2_F
1750
60.3
21.7
381
54.6
0.802
48.8
8
1PH7131-2_F_
1750
59.65
23.7
398
71
0.883
34.2
Input in
P097
Motor order
number
(MPRD)
Rated
speed
nn [rpm]
Frequency Current
fn [Hz]
In [A]
1
1PH7101-2_F_
1750
60.0
2
1PH7103-2_D_
1150
3
1PH7103-2_F_
4
9
1PH7133-2_D_
1150
39.7
27.5
381
112
0.853
46.2
10
1PH7133-2_F_
1750
59.65
33.1
398
95.5
0.854
41.1
11
1PH7133-2_G_
2300
78.0
42.4
398
93
0.858
40.4
12
1PH7135-2_F_
1750
59.45
40.1
398
117
0.862
40.3
13
1PH7137-2_D_
1150
39.6
40.6
367
162
0.855
45.8
14
1PH7137-2_F_
1750
59.5
53.1
357
136
0.848
43.0
15
1PH7137-2_G_
2300
77.8
54.1
398
120
0.866
39.3
16
1PH7163-2_B_
400
14.3
28.2
274
227
0.877
40.4
17
1PH7163-2_D_
1150
39.15
52.2
364
208
0.841
48.7
18
1PH7163-2_F_
1750
59.2
69.0
364
185
0.855
41.2
19
1PH7163-2_G_
2300
77.3
78.5
398
158
0.781
55.3
20
1PH7167-2_B_
400
14.3
35.6
294
310
0.881
39.0
21
1PH7167-2_D_
1150
39.1
66.4
357
257
0.831
50.9
22
1PH7167-2_F_
1750
59.15
75.2
398
224
0.860
40.3
23
1PH7184-2_B_
400
14.2
49.5
271
390
0.840
52.5
24
1PH7184-2_D_
1150
39.1
87.5
383
366
0.820
48.0
25
1PH7184-2_F_
1750
59.0
120.0
388
327
0.780
52.9
26
1PH7184-2_L_
2900
97.4
158.0
395
267
0.800
48.7
27
1PH7186-2_B_
400
14.0
67.0
268
505
0.810
58.3
28
1PH7186-2_D_
1150
39.0
116.0
390
482
0.800
50.4
29
1PH7186-2_F_
1750
59.0
169.0
385
465
0.800
50.0
30
1PH7186-2_L_
2900
97.3
206.0
385
333
0.780
52.0
31
1PH7224-2_B_
400
14.0
88.0
268
725
0.870
41.5
32
1PH7224-2_D_
1150
38.9
160.0
385
670
0.810
49.4
33
1PH7224-2_U_
1750
58.9
203.0
395
600
0.840
43.4
9-42
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
Voltage
Un [V]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
cos ϕ
iµ
[%]
274.0
395
490
0.840
42.0
14.0
114.0
264
935
0.860
43.4
1150
38.9
197.0
390
870
0.840
44.4
1PH7226-2_F_
1750
58.9
254.0
395
737
0.820
47.4
1PH7226-2_L_
2900
97.2
348.0
390
610
0.830
44.4
Input in
P097
Motor order
number
(MPRD)
Rated
speed
nn [rpm]
Frequency Current
fn [Hz]
In [A]
34
1PH7224-2_L_
2900
97.3
35
1PH7226-2_B_
400
36
1PH7226-2_D_
37
38
39
1PH7228-2_B_
400
13.9
136.0
272
1145
0.850
45.2
40
1PH7228-2_D_
1150
38.9
238.0
390
1070
0.850
41.4
41
1PH7228-2_F_
1750
58.8
342.0
395
975
0.810
49.6
42
1PH7228-2_L_
2900
97.2
402.0
395
708
0.820
46.4
43
1PL6184-4_B_
400
14.4
69.0
300
585
0.860
47.8
44
1PL6184-4_D_
1150
39.4
121.0
400
540
0.860
46.3
45
1PL6184-4_F_
1750
59.3
166.0
400
486
0.840
41.0
46
1PL6184-4_L_
2900
97.6
209.0
400
372
0.850
37.8
47
1PL6186-4_B_
400
14.3
90.0
290
752
0.850
52.2
48
1PL6186-4_D_
1150
39.4
158.0
400
706
0.860
39.3
49
1PL6186-4_F_
1750
59.3
231.0
400
682
0.840
39.8
50
1PL6186-4_L_
2900
97.5
280.0
390
494
0.840
38.7
51
1PL6224-4_B_
400
14.2
117.0
300
1074
0.870
38.5
52
1PL6224-4_D_
1150
39.1
218.0
400
997
0.850
39.5
53
1PL6224-4_F_
1750
59.2
292.0
400
900
0.870
30.8
54
1PL6224-4_L_
2900
97.5
365.0
400
675
0.870
32.3
55
1PL6226-4_B_
400
14.0
145.0
305
1361
0.850
46.2
56
1PL6226-4_D_
1150
39.2
275.0
400
1287
0.870
33.5
57
1PL6226-4_F_
1750
59.1
355.0
400
1091
0.870
34.4
58
1PL6226-4_L_
2900
97.4
470.0
395
889
0.870
32.4
59
1PL6228-4_B_
400
14.0
181.0
305
1719
0.860
42.5
60
1PL6228-4_D_
1150
39.2
334.0
400
1578
0.880
30.5
61
1PL6228-4_F_
1750
59.0
470.0
400
1448
0.860
36.8
62
1PL6228-4_L_
2900
97.3
530.0
400
988
0.870
35.0
63
1PH4103-4_F_
1750
61.2
20.5
400
48
0.75
56.1
64
1PH4105-4_F_
1750
61.3
28.0
400
70
0.78
48.2
65
1PH4107-4_F_
1750
61.0
36.0
400
89
0.78
50.0
66
1PH4133-4_F_
1750
60.2
36.0
400
96
0.82
33.3
67
1PH4135-4_F_
1750
59.8
52.0
400
139
0.79
42.3
68
1PH4137-4_F_
1750
59.9
63.0
400
172
0.81
36.5
69
1PH4163-4_F_
1750
59.3
88.0
400
235
0.78
47.7
70
1PH4167-4_F_
1750
59.4
107.0
400
295
0.80
41.1
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-43
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Voltage
Un [V]
Torque
Mn [Nm]
cos ϕ
iµ
[%]
117.0
400
333
0.82
36.8
78.6
24.8
398
50
0.80
48.8
2300
77.4
85.0
398
183
0.84
47.1
1PH7284-_ _B_
500
17.0
144.0
400
1529
0.87
41.7
1PH7284-_ _D_
1150
38.6
314.0
400
1414
0.82
50.3
76
1PH7284-_ _F_
1750
58.7
393.0
400
1228
0.86
41.5
77
1PH7286-_ _B_
500
17.0
180.0
400
1909
0.86
43.3
78
1PH7286-_ _D_
1150
38.6
414.0
380
1745
0.81
52.7
79
1PH7286-_ _F_
1750
58.7
466.0
400
1474
0.87
39.5
80
1PH7288-_ _B_
500
17.0
233.0
400
2481
0.87
42.6
81
1PH7288-_ _D_
1150
38.6
497.0
385
2160
0.82
50.7
82
1PH7288-_ _F_
1750
58.7
586.0
400
1856
0.87
39.9
Input in
P097
Motor order
number
(MPRD)
Rated
speed
nn [rpm]
71
1PH4168-4_F_
1750
59.4
72
1PH7107-2_G_
2300
73
1PH7167-2_G_
74
75
83 to 99
Frequency Current
fn [Hz]
In [A]
for future applications
100
1PL6284-_ _D_
1150
38.9
478.0
400
2325
0.89
32.6
101
1PL6284-_ _F_
1750
59.0
616.0
400
2019
0.90
26.3
102
1PL6286-_ _D_
1150
38.9
637.0
380
2944
0.89
33.6
103
1PL6286-_ _F_
1750
59.0
736.0
400
2429
0.91
24.7
104
1PL6288-_ _D_
1150
38.9
765.0
385
3607
0.89
32.4
105
1PL6288-_ _F_
1750
59.0
924.0
400
3055
0.91
25.1
106 to
127
for future applications
Table 8
9-44
Motor list 1PH7 (=1PA6) / 1PL6 / 1PH4
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
9.4
Detailed parameterization
Detailed parameterization should always be used in cases where the
application conditions of the units are not exactly known beforehand
and detailed parameter adjustments need to be carried out locally. An
example of a typical application is initial start-up.
9.4.1
Power section definition
The power section definition has already been completed in the asdelivered state. It therefore only needs to be carried out if the CUVC
needs replacing, and is not required under normal circumstances.
During the power section definition, the control electronics is informed
which power section it is working with. This step is necessary for all
Compact, chassis and cabinet type units.
WARNING
If CUVC boards are changed over between different units without the
power section being re-defined, the unit can be destroyed when it is
connected up to the voltage supply and energized.
The unit has to be switched to the "Power section definition" state for
carrying out the power section definition. This is done by selecting the
"Power section definition" menu. The power section is then defined in
this menu by inputting a code number.
P060 = 8
P070 = ?
P060 = 1
Select "Power section definition" menu
Input the code number for the unit concerned
The code number is allocated to the order numbers (MLFB).
The order number can be read off the unit's rating plate.
The list of units is on the following pages.
Return to parameter menu
Fig. 9-5
NOTICE
Sequence for performing the power section definition
To check the input data, the values for the converter supply voltage in
P071 and the converter current in P072 should be checked after
returning to the parameter menu. They must tally with the data given on
the unit rating plate.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-45
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
PWE: Parameter value P070
In [A]: Rated output current in Ampere (P072)
3 AC 200 V to 230 V
3AC 380 V to 480 V
3AC 500 V to 600 V
9-46
Order number
In [A]
PWE
6SE7021-1CA60
10.6
14
6SE7021-3CA60
13.3
21
6SE7021-8CB60
17.7
27
6SE7022-3CB60
22.9
32
6SE7023-2CB60
32.2
39
6SE7024-4CC60
44.2
48
6SE7025-4CD60
54.0
54
6SE7027-0CD60
69.0
64
6SE7028-1CD60
81.0
70
In [A]
PWE
6SE7016-1EA61
6.1
3
6SE7018-0EA61
8.0
9
6SE7021-0EA61
10.2
11
6SE7021-3EB61
13.2
18
6SE7021-8EB61
17.5
25
6SE7022-6EC61
25.5
35
6SE7023-4EC61
34.0
42
6SE7023-8ED61
37.5
46
6SE7024-7ED61
47.0
52
6SE7026-0ED61
59.0
56
6SE7027-2ED61
72.0
66
In [A]
PWE
6SE7014-5FB61
4.5
1
6SE7016-2FB61
6.2
5
6SE7017-8FB61
7.8
7
6SE7021-1FB61
11.0
16
6SE7021-5FB61
15.1
23
6SE7022-2FC61
22.0
30
6SE7023-0FD61
29.0
37
6SE7023-4FD61
34.0
44
6SE7024-7FD61
46.5
50
Order number
Order number
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
9.4.2
Parameterizing Steps
Board configuration
During board configuration, the control electronics is informed in what
way the installed optional boards have to be configured. This step is
always necessary when CBx oder SLB optional boards are used.
The unit must be switched to the "Board configuration" status for this
purpose. This is done by selecting the "Board configuration" menu. In
this menu, parameters are set which are required for adapting the
optional boards to the specific application (e.g. bus addresses, baud
rates, etc.). After leaving the menu, the set parameters are transferred
and the optional boards are initialized.
Select "Board configuration" menu
P060 = 4
Serial communications board
SCB inserted ?
yes
no
P696 = ?
CBx inserted ?
no
SCB protocol
0: SCI
1: USS 4-wire
2: USS 2-wire
3: Peer-to-Peer
Communications board (e.g. Profibus-DP)
yes
P711.1...2 = ?
to
P721.1...10 = ?
Enter the CB parameters 1 to 11 necessary for the inserted
communications boards CBx
The necessary CB parameters and their significance can be
derived from the function diagrams of the individual
communications boards.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-47
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
SLB inserted ?
no
SIMOLINK bus interface
yes
P740 = ?
P741 = ?
Enter the SLB module address
0:
Unit operates as a dispatcher
greater than 0:
Unit operates as a transceiver
Enter the SLB telegram failure time in ms
0:
No monitoring
greater than 0:
Monitoring time in ms
Enter the SLB transmit power (for plastic fiber-optic cables)
1: weak
up to 15 m fiber-optic cable length
P740 > 0
P740 = 0
2: medium up to 25 m fiber-optic cable length
3: strong
up to 40 m fiber-optic cable length
NOTE:
If glass fiber-optic cables are used, the possible
lengths are increased by the factor 7.5.
Enter the number of modules (incl. dispatcher)
P743 = ?
in the SIMOLINK ring
P742 = ?
P745 = ?
Enter the number of channels per module
P746 = ?
Enter the SIMOLINK cycle time in ms
P749.1...8 = ?
Communications board (e.g. Profibus-DP)
CBx inserted ?
yes
no
P918.1...2 = ?
P060 = 1
9-48
Enter the SLB read addresses
Enter the CB bus addresses
Return to the parameter menu
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Board codes
Parameterizing Steps
The visualization parameter r826.x is used for displaying the board
codes. These codes enable the type of installed electronic boards to be
determined.
Parameter
Index
Position
r826
1
Basic board
r826
2
Slot A
r826
3
Slot B
r826
4
Slot C
r826
5
Slot D
r826
6
Slot E
r826
7
Slot F
r826
8
Slot G
If a T100, T300 or TSY technology board (mounting position 2) or an
SCB1 or SCB2 (mounting position 2 or 3) is used, the board code can
be found in the following indices:
General board
codes
Parameter
Index
Position
r826
5
Mounting position 2
r826
7
Mounting position 3
Parameter value
90 to 109
Meaning
Mainboards or Control Unit
110 to 119
Sensor Board (SBx)
120 to 129
Serial Communication Board (Scx)
130 to 139
Technology Board
140 to 149
Communication Board (Cbx)
150 to 169
Special boards (Ebx, SLB)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-49
Parameterizing Steps
Special board codes
04.2006
Board
Parameter
value
CUVC
Control Unit Vector Control
92
CUMC
Control Unit Motion Control
93
CUMC+
Control Unit Motion Control Compact PLUS
94
CUVC+
Control Unit Vector Control Compact PLUS
95
CUPM
Control Unit Motion Control Performance 2
96
CUMP
Control Unit Motion Control Compact PLUS
Performance 2
97
CUSA
Control Unit Sinus AFE
108
TSY
Tacho and synchronization board
110
SBP
Sensor Board Puls
111
SCB1
Serial Communication Board 1 (fiber-optic cable)
121
SCB2
Serial Communication Board 2
122
T100
Technology board
131
T300
Technology board
131
T400
Technology board
134
CBX
Communication Board
14x
CBP
Communication Board PROFIBUS
143
CBD
Communication Board DeviceNet
145
CBC
Communication Board CAN Bus
146
CBL
Communication Board CC-Link
147
Communication Board PROFIBUS 2
148
EB1
Expansion Board 1
151
EB2
Expansion Board 2
152
SLB
SIMOLINK bus interface
161
CBP2
9-50
Meaning
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
9.4.3
Parameterizing Steps
Drive setting
The drive setting function extends the start-up facilities of quick
parameterization.
During the drive setting, the control electronics is informed about the
incoming voltage supply with which the drive converter is operating,
about the connected motor and about the motor encoder. In addition,
the motor control (V/f open-loop control or vector control) and the pulse
frequency are selected. If required, the parameters necessary for the
motor model can be calculated automatically. Furthermore, the
normalization values for current, voltage, frequency, speed and torque
signals are determined during the drive setting.
For start-up of the induction motor, first enter the manufacturer's
parameters completely (see below):
♦ In doing so, you must observe whether the induction motor has a
star or a delta connection.
♦ You must always use the S1 data from the rating plate.
♦ You must enter the r.m.s. base frequency of the rated voltage and
not the total r.m.s. value (including harmonic content) for converter
operation.
♦ You must always enter the correct rated motor current P102 (rating
plate). If there are two different rated currents on the rating plate for
special fan motors, you must use the value for M ~ n for constant
torque (not M ~ n2). A higher torque can be set with the torque and
active-current limits.
♦ The accuracy of the rated motor current has a direct effect on the
torque accuracy, as the rated torque is normalized to the rated
current. If a rated current is increased by 4 %, this will also
approximately result in a 4 % increase in the torque (referred to the
rated motor torque).
♦ For group drives, you have to enter the total rated current
P102 = x*Imot,rated
♦ If the rated magnetizing current is known, you should enter it during
the drive setting in P103 (in % Imot,rated). If this is done, the results
of the "Automatic parameterization" (P115 = 1) will be more precise.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-51
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
♦ As the rated magnetizing current P103 (not to be confused with the
no-load current during operation with rated frequency P107 and
rated voltage P101) is usually not known, you can first enter 0.0 %.
With the aid of the power factor (cosPHI) P104, an approximate
value is calculated and displayed in r119.
Experience shows that the approximation supplies values which are
rather on the large side in the case of motors with a high rating (over
800 kW), whereas it supplies values which are slightly too low in the
case of motors with low rating (below 22 kW).
The magnetizing current is defined as a field-generating current
component during operation at the rated point of the machine
(U = P101, f = P107, n = P108, i = P102).
♦ The rated frequency P107 and the rated speed P108 automatically
result in the calculation of the pole pair number P109. If the
connected motor is designed as a generator and the generator data
are on the rating plate (oversynchronous rated speed), you have to
correct the pole pair number manually (increase by 1 if the motor is
at least 4-pole), so that the rated slip (r110) can be correctly
calculated.
♦ In the case of asynchronous motors, instead of the synchronous noload speed, enter the real motor rated speed in P108, i.e. the slip
frequency at nominal load has to be derived from parameters
P107...P109.
♦ The rated motor slip (1 - P108/60 x P109/P107) should usually be
greater than 0.35 % x P107.
These low values are, however, only achieved in the case of motors
with a very high rating (above approx. 1000 kW).
Motors with average rating (45..800 kW) have slip values around
2.0...0.6 %.
Motors with low rating (below 22 kW) can also have slip values up to
10 %.
♦ It is possible to achieve a more accurate evaluation of the rated slip
after standstill measurement (P115 = 2) by taking into account the
temperature evaluation for the rotor resistance P127.
On cold motors (approx. 20 °C), the value is usually around 70 %
(± 10 %) and on warm motors (operating temperature) around
100 % (± 10 %). If there are any large differences, you can proceed
on the assumption that the rated frequency P107 or the rated speed
P108 do not correspond to the real values.
♦ If the rated motor frequency (engineered!) is below 8 Hz, you have
to set P107 = 8.0Hz in the drive setting. The rated motor voltage
P101 has to be calculated in the ratio 8 Hz / fMot,N and the rated
motor speed P108 should result in the same slip:
P108 = ((8 Hz - P107old) x 60 / P109) + P108old.
WARNING
During motor identification (P115 = 2...7) inverter pulses are released
and the drive rotates!
For reasons of safety, identification should first be carried out without
coupling of the load.
9-52
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
P060 = 5
Select "Drive setting" menu
Output filter
P068 = ?
Input unit line voltage in V
AC units: r.m.s. alternating voltage
DC units: DC link voltage
P071 = ?
P095 = ?
P095=2 P095 =
10,12,13
P095=11
P097 = ?
P100 = ?
P095=2
P097>0
P101 = ?
P102 = ?
P103 = ?
IEC
0 = without output filter
1 = with sinusoidal output filter
2 = with dv/dt output filter
Enter type of motor
2: Compact asynchronous motor 1PH7(=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
10: Async./Sync. IEC (international standard)
11: Async./Sync. NEMA (US standard)
12: Sync. motor, separately excited (special applications,
not v/f characteristic)
13: Sync. motor, permanently excited (special applications,
not v/f characteristic)
Enter the code number for the connected motor of the
Range 1PH7(=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
(see "Motor list" section)
(Automatic parameter assignment is implemented as soon as
the settings P095 = 2 and P097 > 0 have been made)
Enter the type of open/closed-loop control
0: v/f control + n control
1: v/f control
2: v/f control, textile
3: Speed control without tachometer (f control)
4: Speed control with tachometer (n control)
5: Torque control (T control)
Note:
For motor ratings over approx. 200 kW one of the
vector control types should be used (P100 > 2).
Enter the rated motor voltage in V
as per rating plate
Enter the rated motor current in A
as per rating plate
(Group drives: total of all motor currents)
Enter the motor magnetizing current as a % of the rated
motor current
NEMA If value is not known, set P103 = 0, the value is then
automatically calculated when you exit Drive setting (see r119).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-53
Parameterizing Steps
P104=?
04.2006
P105=?
P106=?
IEC motor: Cos (phi) as per rating plate
NEMA motor: rated output [Hp]
(Group drives: total of all output ratings)
NEMA motor: Enter the motor efficiency in %
as per rating plate
P107 = ?
Enter the rated motor frequency in Hz
as per rating plate
P108 = ?
Enter the rated motor speed in rpm
as per rating plate
P109 = ?
Enter the motor pole pair number
(This is calculated automatically)
Enter the rated motor torque in Nm
as per rating plate or motor catalog (this is only used for
P100=0,1,2 P100 = 3,4,5 normalizing the process data and visualization parameters)
P113 = ?
P100>2
P100=1,2
P114 = ?
P115 = 1
9-54
WARNING!
INCORRECT SETTINGS CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Process-related conditions for closed-loop control
0: Drive for standard applications (e.g. pumps)
1: Drive with strong torsion, gear play, large moments of inertia
(e.g. paper machine)
2: Drive for very dynamic accelerations (without load inertia)
(e.g. shears)
3: Drive for strong schock stressing (e.g. roll drive)
4: Drive with high smooth running characteristics at low speeds.
5: Drives with modest response requirements, which can be
optimized in their efficiency with frequent part-load operation.
6: Drive with high starting torque.
7: Dynamic torque response in field-weakening range
See next section for description
Calculate motor model for "Automatic parameterization"
Reference values P350 to P354 are set to the rated motor
values.
The motor parameters and controller settings are calculated.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
P130 = ?
P130 =
10,13,14
P130 =
5
P130 =
11,12,15,16
Select the motor encoder
5: External SBP board
10: Without motor encoder
11: Pulse encoder (default if P095=2, P097>0)
12: Pulse encoder with control track
13: Analog input 1
14: Analog input 2
15: Pulse encoder with zero track
16: Pulse encoder with zero and control track
WARNING
Please check that the encoder has been connected
correctly!
Pulse encoder: Do not mix up tracks A and B!
Analog tachometer: Check voltage polarity (direction of
rotation) and amplitude!
In the event of faults the drive may involuntarily race to
maximum speed! For testing the encoder see parameter
P115=7 and P115=3 and 4.
P151 = ?
Enter the pulse number/revolution of the pulse encoder
Select TmpSensor
0: KTY84 (evaluation via P380/P381)
3: PT100 (evaluation only possible for SBP)
P131 = ?
Configuration of setpoint encoder
P139 = ?
Setpoint encoder pulse number
P140 = ?
Reference frequency of setpoint encoder
P141 = ?
P100 =
0,1,2
P330 = ?
P339 = ?
Characteristic 0: Linear characteristic (constant torque drives)
1: Parabolic characteristic (fans/pumps)
Release the edge modulation systems (FLM)
0: All systems
1: Edge modulation systems from 60 Hz
2: Edge modulation systems from 100 Hz
3: No edge modulation systems
4: Overmodulated space vector modulation
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-55
Parameterizing Steps
P340 = ?
P350 = ?
P351 = ?
P352 = ?
P353 = ?
P354 = ?
P357 = ?
9-56
04.2006
Enter the pulse frequency in kHz
Pulse frequency for asynchronous space vector modulation
Notes:
- The adjustable range depends on the converter/inverter
- An increase in the pulse frequency results in a reduction
of the maximum output current
(see "Technical Data", derating curves)
Enter the reference value for all current quantities in A
(Normalization quantity for current limitations as well as current
setpoints and actual values) (see example in section 9.2.1)
Enter the reference value for all voltage quantities in V
(Normalization quantity for voltage limitations as well as voltage
setpoints and actual values)
Enter the reference value for all frequency quantities in Hz
(Normalization quantities for frequency limitations, frequency
setpoints and actual values) (see example in section 9.2.1)
Note: The parameter P353 is automatically adjusted.
Enter the reference value for all speed quantities in rpm
(Normalization quantity for speed limitations, speed setpoints
and actual values) (see example in section 9.2.1)
Note: The parameter P352 is automatically adjusted.
Enter the reference value for all torque quantities in Nm
(Normalization quantity for torque limitations, torque setpoints
and actual values) (see example in section 9.2.1)
Enter the sampling time T0 in ms
The sampling time T0 is for determining the calculating
frequency of all functions.
The sampling times T1...T19 are multiples of sampling time T0
Note:
A very short sampling time T0 can lead to a calculation time overload if several function blocks are
activated at the same time!
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
Thermal motor
protection desired ?
no
yes
P380 = ?
P381 = ?
P095=2
P097>0
P382 = ?
P383 = 0
P383 = ?
P384.02 = 0
P384.02 = ?
P452 = ?
P453 = ?
P060 = 1
System with motor protection according to UL regulation?
The motor temperature is calculated via the motor current.
(Motor overload protection in accordance with UL regulation
activated as default setting!)
Enter the motor temperature for output of the alarm A023
"Motor overtemperature" (evaluation with KTY84)
(PTC evaluation: P380 = 1 °C)
Enter the motor temperature for output of the fault F020
"Motor overtemperature" (evaluation with KTY84)
(PTC evaluation: P381 = 1 °C)
Specify motor cooling
0: self-ventilated
1: force-ventilated (default if P095 = 2, P097 > 0)
Enter the thermal time constant of the motor in s
(< 100 s: monitoring deactivated)
(default if P095 = 2, P097 > 0)
Enter the motor load limit 1...300 %
Enter the maximum frequency or speed in positive
direction of rotation in %
The value is referred to P352 (reference frequency) and P353
(reference speed)
Enter the maximum frequency or speed in negative
direction of rotation in %
The value is referred to P352 (reference frequency) and P353
(reference speed)
Return to the parameter menu
Note
When the "Drive settings" menu is exited, the entered
parameter values are checked for their plausibility. Nonplausible parameter settings result in a fault. The erroneously
set parameters are entered in parameter r949 (fault value).
P128 = ?
Enter the maximum output current in A
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-57
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Enter the acceleration time from standstill up to reference
frequency (P352)
P462 = ?
Enter the unit for acceleration time P462
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
P463 = ?
Enter the deceleration time from reference frequency
(P352) up to standstill
P464 = ?
Enter the unit for deceleration time P464
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
P465 = ?
Sinusoidal filter (P068=1)
or
synchronous motor?
no
yes
Calculate motor model "Motor identification at standstill"
NOTICE:
Current flows through the motor and the rotor rotates!
After pressing the "P" key, the alarm message "A087" appears.
The converter must be turned on within 20 secs!
P115 = 2
Analog tachometer?
no
yes
Adjust
tachometer
9-58
Analog tachometer present?
Adjust tachometer
Tachometer to ATI: See operating instructions for ATI
Tachometer to terminal strip: See function diagrams for analog
inputs
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Parameterizing Steps
f, n, T control?
(P100 = 3, 4, 5)
no
yes
P115 = 4
Wait
P536 = ?
P115 = 5
Wait
Calculate motor model "No-load measurement"
NOTICE: Current flows through the motor and the rotor rotates!
After "P" key is pressed, the alarm message "A080" appears.
The converter must be switched on within 20 seconds!
Wait until the converter is "Ready for ON" again (°009)
For fault "Fxxx", refer to chapter "Faults and alarms"
Enter the dynamic performance of the speed control circuit
in %
Important for subsequent controller optimization.
Calculate motor model "Controller optimization"
NOTICE: Current flows through the motor, the rotor rotates!
After "P" is pressed, the alarm message "A080" appears.
The converter must be switched on within 20 seconds!
Wait until the converter is powered-down
(Operating status "Ready for ON" (°009))
For fault "Fxxx", see chapter "Faults and alarms"
Finished
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-59
Parameterizing Steps
9.5
04.2006
Notes regarding parameterization
The parameter im Kompendium list covers the setting parameters and
visualization parameters of all available motor types (induction motors
and synchronous motors), as well as all possible open-loop and closedloop control modes (e.g. V/f characteristic, speed control).
The constellation under which this parameter is influenced or whether it
is displayed at all is indicated under "Preconditions" in the parameter
description.
Unless otherwise specified, all percentage values refer to the reference
quantities in P350 to P354.
If reference quantities are changed, this will also change the
significance of the parameters with percentage normalization
(e.g. P352 = Maximum frequency).
Reference quantities Reference variables are intended as an aid to presenting setpoint and
actual value signals in a uniform manner. This also applies to fixed
settings entered as a "percentage". A value of 100 % corresponds to a
process data value of 4000h, or 4000 0000 h in the case of double
values.
All setpoint and actual value signals (e.g. set speed and actual speed)
refer to the physically applicable reference variables. In this respect, the
following parameters are available:
Speed and
frequency reference
values
P350
Reference current
in A
P351
Reference voltage
in V
P352
Reference frequency
in Hz
P353
Reference speed
in rpm
P354
Reference torque
in Nm
In quick parameterization mode and in automatic parameter
assignment mode (P115 = 1(2,3)), these reference variables are set to
the motor ratings. In case of automatic parameter assignment, this
occurs only if the "Drive setting" converter status is activated.
The reference speed and reference frequency are always connected by
the pole pair number.
P353 = P352 ×
60
P109
If one of the two parameters is changed, the other is calculated using
this equation.
Since this calculation is not made on download (see section 9.2.3),
these two quantities must always be loaded in the correct relationship.
If the setpoint and actual control signals are related to a desired
reference speed in rpm, P353 must be set accordingly (P352 is
calculated automatically). If a rotational frequency in Hz is to be used
as the reference (calculated using the pole pair number P109), P352
must be set.
9-60
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Torque reference
value
Parameterizing Steps
Since the torque signals and parameters in the control system are
always specified and displayed as a percentage, the ratio of the
reference torque (P354) to the rated motor torque (P113) is always
important for accuracy. If both values are the same, a display value of
100 % corresponds exactly to the rated motor torque, irrespective of the
values actually entered in P354 and P113.
For purposes of clarity, however, it is advisable to enter the true rated
torque of the drive in P113 (e.g. from catalog data).
P113 =
Reference power
value
PW (mot, rated)
2⋅π⋅n(mot,rated)
60
The reference power (in W) is calculated from the reference torque and
reference speed:
R W ,ref =
P354 ⋅ P353 ⋅ 2 ⋅ π
60
Power values for the control system are also always specified as a
percentage referred to the specified reference power. The ratio of
PW,ref / Pmot,rated can be used for conversion to the rated motor
power.
Pmot,rated =
P113 ⋅ 2 ⋅ π ⋅ P108
60
Reference current
value
If the reference torque P354 is increased, for example, the reference
current P350 must be increased by the same factor, because the
current increases at higher torque.
NOTE
Setting and visualization parameters in engineering units (e.g. Imax in
A) must also be no more than twice the reference value.
If the reference quantities are changed, the physical value of all
parameters specified as a percentage also changes; that is all the
parameters of the setpoint channel, as well as the maximum power for
the control system (P258, P259) and the static current for frequency
control (P278, P279).
If the reference values and the rated motor values are identical (e.g.
following quick parameterization), signal representation (e.g. via
connectors) up to twice the rated motor values is possible. If this is not
sufficient, you must change to the "Drive setting" menu (P060 = 5) to
change the reference quantities.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-61
Parameterizing Steps
Example
04.2006
P107 = 52.00 Hz
Rated motor frequency
P108 = 1500.0 rpm
Rated motor speed
P109 = 2
Motor pole pair number
Pre-assignment:
P352 = 52.00 Hz
Reference frequency
P353 = 1560 rpm
Reference speed
For a maximum speed of four times the rated motor speed you must set
the reference speed to at least 3000 rpm. The reference frequency is
adjusted automatically (P352 = P353 / 60 x P109).
P352 = 100.00 Hz
P353 = 3000 rpm
A setpoint speed of 1500 rpm corresponds to a setpoint frequency of
50.00 Hz or an automation value of 50.0 %.
The representation range ends at 6000 rpm (2 x 3000 rpm).
This does not affect the internal representation range of the control
system. Since the internal control signals refer to the rated motor
quantities, there is always sufficient reserve control capacity.
The reference speed should normally be set to the desired maximum
speed.
Reference frequencies of P352 = P107, P352 = 2 x P107,
P352 = 4 x P107 are favorable for the calculating time.
For a maximum torque of three times the rated motor torque (P113) it is
advisable to set the reference torque to between twice and four times
the value of parameter P113 (for four to eight times the representation
range).
Separately excited
synchronous
motors
9-62
Function diagrams and start-up instructions for separately excited
synchronous motors (with damping cage and excitation via sliprings)
are available as separate instructions.
The following parameters are only effective for these synchronous
motors:
P75 to P88; P155 to r168, P187, P258, P274, P297, P298, P301, r302,
P306 to P312.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Automatic
parameterization
and motor
identification
Parameterizing Steps
The following parameters are calculated or set to fixed values during
automatic parameterization (P115 = 1):
P116
P236
P295
P337
P117
P240
P303
P339
P120
P258
P306
P344
P121
P259
P313
P347
P122
P273
P315
P348
P127
P274
P316
P388
P128
P278
P319
P392
P161
P279
P322
P396
P215
P283
P325
P471
P216
P284
P326
P525
P217
P287
P334
P536
P223
P291
P335
P602
P235
P293
P336
P603
♦ P350 to P354 are only set to the rated motor quantities in the
converter status "Drive setting" (P060 = 5) or "Quick
parameterization (P060 = 3).
♦ In converter status "Drive setting" (but not in "Ready" status),
parameters are assigned automatically on selection of standstill
measurement P115 = 2, 3.
♦ During the standstill measurement P115 = 2, 3, the following
parameters are measured or calculated:
• P103, P120, P121, P122, P127, P347, P349.
The controller settings resulting from these values are in: P283,
P284, P315, P316.
♦ During the rotating measurement P115 = 3, 4, P103 and P120 are
adjusted.
♦ During the n/f controller optimization P115 = 5, the parameters
P116, P223, P235, P236, P240 and P471 are determined.
In principle, automatic parameterization (P115 = 1) or motor
identification (P115 = 2, 3) should be carried out as soon as one of the
following parameters are adjusted in the converter status "Drive setting"
(P060 = 5):
P068 = Output filter
P095 = Motor type
P097 = Motor number
P100 = Control type
P101...P109 = Motor rating plate data
P339 = Release of modulation system
P340 = Pulse frequency
P357 = Sampling time
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-63
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
In exceptional cases this is not necessary:
♦ If P068 is only adjusted between 0 and 2 (dv/dt filter).
♦ If P340 is adjusted in integer increments, e.g. from 2.5 kHz to
5.0 kHz...7.5 kHz... etc.
♦ If P339 is not set to over-modulated space vector modulation; if
P339 = 4, 5 (over-modulated space vector modulation), the
overrange limit P342 must also be reduced to limit torque ripple and
motor heating.
♦ If changeover is made between speed and torque control
(P100 = 4, 5).
♦ If changeover is made between speed and frequency control and
the following parameters are adapted:
f-control (P100 = 3)
n-control (P100 = 4)
2 x Kp
Kp
P216 = Smooth. n/f(pre)
≥ 0 ms
≥ 4.8 ms
≥ 4 ms
≥ 0.0 ms
P222 = Src n/f(act)
KK0000
KK0000 (KK0091)
P315 = EMF Reg.Kp
P223 = Smooth.n/f(act)
The speed controller dynamic response may have to be reduced in the
case of encoder-less speed control (frequency control) (Reduce gain
(P235); increase Tn (P240)).
Temperature
monitoring of the
motor
P380 / P381 / Sensor
°C
°C
Activation of the measured value or PTC thermistor monitoring for the
motor causes different fault and alarm signals depending on the setting
of parameters P380 and P381. These are listed in the following table:
r009
Alarm A23 in
ready
Alarm A23 in
operation
Fault F20 in
ready
Fault F20 in
operation
=0
=0
KTY84 for RL if P386 =
adapt.
2
-
-
-
-
=0
=1
PTC
no
-
-
-
yes 1)
=1
=0
PTC
no
yes 1)
yes 1)
-
-
-
-
yes 1)
=1
=1
PTC
no
yes 1)
=0
>1
KTY84
yes
-
-
-
yes 3)
>1
=0
KTY84
yes
yes 3)
yes 3)
yes 4)
yes 2)
>1
>1
KTY84
yes
yes 3)
yes 3)
yes 4)
yes 3)
=1
>1
KTY84
no
yes 1)
-
-
yes 3) 2)
no
yes 3)
yes 3)
yes 4)
yes 2)
>1
=1
KTY84
1) Alarm or fault are triggered on violation of the PTC thermistor temperature or on a
cable break (not a cable short circuit).
2) Fault is only triggered on cable break or cable short-circuit.
3) Fault or alarm on violation of the temperature limit..
4) Fault is only triggered on cable short-circuit.
9-64
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
9.5.1
Parameterizing Steps
Drive setting according to process-related boundary conditions
In order to support start-up, process-related characteristics can be
entered in P114. In a subsequent automatic parameterization
(P115 = 1) or motor identification (P115 = 2, 3) and controller
optimization (P115 = 3, 5), parameter adjustments are made in the
closed-loop control which are advantageous for the selected case, as
experience has shown.
The parameter adjustments can be taken from the following table. The
table clearly shows which parameters have a decisive influence on the
closed-loop control. The values themselves are understood to be
qualitative values and can be further adjusted according to the processrelated requirements.
If the type of process-related boundary conditions is not evident in the
current case (e.g. high smooth running characteristics at low speeds
with simultaneously fast acceleration processes), the parameter
settings can also be combined (manually). In any case, it is always
sensible to perform start-up with the standard setting in order to then
set the indicated parameters one after the other.
The settings of P114 = 2...4 are only possible if no gearless conditions
are present.
P114 =
0: Standard drive (e.g. pumps, fans)
1: Torsion, gear play and large moments of inertia
(e.g. paper machines)
2: Acceleration drives with constant inertia
(e.g. shears)
3: High load surge requirements
(in the case of f-control only possible from approx.
20%fmot,n)
4: High smooth running characteristics at low speeds
(in the case of n-control; with a high encoder pulse
numberl)
5: Efficiency optimization at partial load by flux reduction
(low dynamic loading drives)
6: High start-up torque (heavy-duty start-up)
7: Dynamic torque response in the field-weakening range
(e.g. motor test beds)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-65
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
Only deviations from the standard setting (P114 = 0) are indicated:
P216=Smooth n/f(FWD)
P114 = 0
P114 = 1
0ms (n-ctrl.)
4ms (f-ctrl.)
4.8ms
(n-ctrl.)
P217=Slip Fail Corr'n.
0=off
P223=Smooth n/f(act)
4ms (n-ctrl.)
0ms (f-ctrl.)
P114 = 2
P114 = 3
P114 = 4
P114 = 5
2=on
100ms
3.0 or 5.0
12.0 (n-ctrl.)
P236=n/f-Reg Gain2
3.0 or 5.0
12.0 (n-ctrl.)
6*P357 (T0)
P240=n/f-Reg Tn
400ms
P279=Torque (dynamic)
20.0%
P287=Smooth Vd(act)
9
P291=FSetp Flux(set)
100%
3*P357
40ms (n-ctrl.)
80% (f-ctrl.)
0
0
110%
P295=Efficiency Optim.
100%=off
99.9%
50%
P303=Smooth Flux(set)
10-20ms
60ms
100 (n-ctrl.)
500 (f-ctrl.)
P315=EMF Reg Gain
Gain(n)
1.5*Gain(n) 1.5*Gain(n)
(f-ctrl.)
(f-ctrl.)
0=All syst
3=only RZM 3=only RZM 3=only RZM 3=only RZM
P339=ModSystRelease
P114 = 7
2=on (n-ctrl)
P235=n/f-Reg Gain1
P273=Smooth Isq(set)
P114 = 6
P344=ModDepthHeadrm
0.0%
3.0%
P536=n/f RegDyn(set)
50%
20%
3=only RZM
3.0%
30.0%
100 (n-ctrl.) 200 (n-ctrl.) 200 (n-ctrl.)
50% (f-ctrl.) 100 (f-ctrl.) 50% (f-ctrl.)
25%
100 (n-ctrl.) 100% (n-ctrl.)
50% (f-ctrl.)
RZM = Space vector modulation
The gain Kp of the speed controller (P235, P236) depends on the
inertia of the drive and has to be adapted if necessary.
Symmetrical optimum:
P235 = 2 x P116 / P240
Kp = 2 x Tstart-up / Tn
The start-up time is the time taken by the drive to accelerate to rated
speed when the rated torque is specified. This is determined during
automatic speed controller optimization.
9-66
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
9.5.2
Parameterizing Steps
Changes to the function selection parameter (P052) VC(former)
The function selection parameter P052 of the firmware versions for the
previous MASTERDRIVES VC units was used to select the various
special functions and start-up steps. In order to make this important
parameter more comprehensible for the user, the function groups
"Special functions" and "Start-up steps" in the CUVC firmware have
now been stored in two different parameters as follows:
P060 Menu selection
(Special functions)
P052 Function selection
P115 Calculation of
motor parameters
Fig. 9-6
Division of parameter P052(former) into P060 and P115
In addition to this, the new special function "User parameter" has been
introduced, and the special function "Drive setting" (P052 = 5) has been
subdivided into the functions "Quick parameterization" and "Drive
setting". The new special function "Quick parameterization" involves
parameterization for standard applications, and the new special
function "Drive setting" involves parameterization for expert
applications.
The special function "Download/Upread" (P052 = 3) has been
subdivided into the functions "Download" and "Upread".
P060
Menu selection
P052 (former)
Function selection
0=
User parameter
--
See parameter list
P060
1=
Parameter menu
0=
Return
2=
Fixed settings 1)
1=
Param. Reset
3=
Quick parameterization
5=
Drive Setting
4=
Board configuration
4=
HW Config.
5=
Drive setting
5=
Drive Setting
6=
Download
3=
Download
7=
Upread
3=
Download
8=
Power section definition
2=
MLFB input
1) Selection in the factory setting menu (P366 Factory setting type, activation with P970)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
9-67
Parameterizing Steps
04.2006
P115
Calculation of motor model
P052
(former)
Function
selection
1=
Automatic parameterization
6=
Auto Param.
2=
Motor identification at standstill
7=
Mot ID Stop
3=
Complete motor identification
8=
Mot ID All
4=
No-load measurement
9=
No Load Meas
5=
n/f controller optimization
10=
Reg Optim.
6=
Self-test
11=
Auto Test
7=
Tachometer test
12=
Tach Test
The new special function P060 = 0 (User parameter) enables the user
to put together an important list of parameters especially for his own
application.
When P060 = 0 (User parameter) is selected, apart from parameters
P053, P060 and P358, only those parameters whose numbers have
been entered in indices 4 to 100 of parameter P360 are visible.
9-68
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Control Word and Status Word
10
Control Word and Status Word
10.1
Description of the control word bits
The operating statuses can be read in visualization parameter r001:
e.g. READY TO POWER-UP: r001 = 009
The function sequences are described in the sequence in which they
are actually realized.
Function diagrams 180 and 190 refer to further function diagrams in the
Compendium.
Bit 0: ON/OFF 1 command (↑ "ON") / (L "OFF1")
Condition
Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY TO POWERUP condition (009).
Result
♦ PRECHARGING (010)
Main contactor (option)/bypass contactor, if available, are switchedin (closed).
The DC link is pre-charged.
♦ READY (011)
If the drive was last powered-down with "OFF2", the next condition
is only selected after the de-energization time (P603) has expired
since the last shutdown
♦ GROUND FAULT TEST (012), only when the ground fault test has
been selected (P375).
♦ RESTART ON THE FLY (013), if restart on the fly (control word bit
23 via P583) has been enabled.
Condition
Result
♦ RUN (014).
LOW signal and P100 = 3, 4 (closed-loop frequency/speed control)
♦ OFF1 (015), if the drive is in a status where the inverter is enabled.
• For P100 = 3, 4 and slave drive, the system waits until the
higher-level open-loop/closed-loop control shuts down the drive.
• For P100 = 3, 4 and master drive, the setpoint at the rampfunction generator input is inhibited (setpoint = 0), so that the
drive decelerates along the parameterized down ramp (P464) to
the OFF shutdown frequency (P800).
After the OFF delay time (P801) has expired, the inverter pulses are
inhibited, and the main contactor (option/bypass contactor), if
available, are opened.
If the OFF1 command is withdrawn again when the drive is rampingdown, (e.g. as the result of an ON command), ramp-down is
interrupted, and the drive goes back into the RUN (014) condition.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
10-1
Control Word and Status Word
04.2006
♦ For PRECHARGING (010), READY (011), RESTART-ON-THE-FLY
(013) or MOT-ID-STANDSTILL (018), the inverter pulses are
inhibited, and the main contactor (option)/bypass contactor, if
available, is opened.
♦ SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008); compare status word 1, bit 6
Condition
Result
♦ READY-TO-POWER-UP (009), if "OFF2" or "OFF3" are not present.
Low signal and P100 = 5 (closed-loop torque control)
♦ An OFF2 command (electrical) is executed.
Bit 1: OFF2 command (L "OFF2") electrical
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited, and the main contactor
(option)/bypass contactor, if available, are opened.
♦ POWER-ON INHIBIT (008), until the command is removed.
Note
The OFF2 command is simultaneously connected from three sources
(P555, P556 and P557)!
Bit 2: OFF3 command (L "OFF3") (fast stop)
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ This command has two possible effects:
• DC braking is enabled (P395 = 1):
DC BRAKING (017)
The drive decelerates along the parameterized downramp for
OFF3 (P466) until the frequency for the start of DC braking is
reached (P398).
The inverter pulses are then inhibited for the duration of the deenergization time (P603).
After this, the drive DC brakes with an adjustable braking current
(P396) for a braking time which can be parameterized (P397).
The inverter pulses are then inhibited and the main contactor
(option)/bypass contactor, if available, is opened.
• DC braking is not enabled (P395 = 0):
The setpoint is inhibited at the ramp-function generator input
(setpoint = 0), so that the drive decelerates along the
parameterized downramp for OFF3 (P466) to the OFF shutdown
frequency (P800).
The inverter pulses are inhibited after the OFF delay time (P801)
has expired, and the main/bypass contactor, if used, is opened. If
the OFF3 command is withdrawn while the drive is decelerating,
the drive still continues to accelerate.
10-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Control Word and Status Word
♦ For PRE-CHARGING (010), READY (011), RESTART-ON-THEFLY (013) or MOT-ID STANDSTILL (018), the inverter pulses are
inhibited, and the main/bypass contactor, if used, is opened.
♦ If the drive operates as slave drive, when an OFF3 command is
issued, it automatically switches-over to the master drive.
♦ POWER-ON inhibit (008), until the command is withdrawn.
NOTE
The OFF3 command is simultaneously effective from three sources
(P558, P559 and P560)!
Priority of the OFF commands: OFF2 > OFF3 > OFF1
Bit 3: Inverter enable command (H "inverter enable")/(L "inverter inhibit")
Condition
HIGH signal, READY (011) and the de-energization time (P603) has
expired since the last time that the drive was shutdown.
Result
♦ RUN (014)
The inverter pulses are enabled and the setpoint is approached via
the ramp-function generator.
LOW signal
Condition
Result
♦ For RESTART-ON-THE-FLY (013), RUN (014), KINETIC
BUFFERING with pulse enable, OPTIMIZATION OF THE SPEED
CONTROLLER CIRCUIT (019) or SYNCHRONIZATION (020):
♦ The drive changes over into the READY (011), condition, and the
inverter pulses are inhibited.
♦ If OFF1 is active (015), the inverter pulses are inhibited, the
main/bypass contactor, if used, is opened, and the drive goes into
the POWER-ON INHIBIT (008) condition.
♦ If OFF3 is active (016 / fast stop), the inverter inhibit command is
ignored, fast stop is continued and, after shutdown (P800, P801),
the inverter pulses are inhibited.
Bit 4: Ramp-function generator inhibit command (L "RFG inhibit")
Condition
Result
LOW signal in the RUN (014) condition.
♦ The ramp-function generator output is set to setpoint = 0.
Bit 5: Ramp-function generator hold command (L "RFG hold")
Condition
Result
LOW signal in the RUN (014) condition.
♦ The actual setpoint is "frozen at the ramp-function generator output".
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
10-3
Control Word and Status Word
04.2006
Bit 6: Setpoint enable command (H "setpoint enable")
Condition
Result
HIGH signal and the de-energization time have expired (P602).
♦ The setpoint at the ramp-function generator input is enabled.
Bit 7: Acknowledge command (↑ "Acknowledge")
Condition
Rising (positive) edge change from L to H (L → H) in the FAULT
condition (007).
Result
♦ All of the current faults are deleted after they have been previously
transferred into the diagnostics memory.
♦ POWER-ON INHIBIT (008), if no actual faults are present.
♦ FAULT (007), if there are no faults.
NOTE
The Acknowledge command is simultaneously effective from the three
sources (P565, P566 and P567) and always from the PMU!
Bit 8: Inching 1 ON command (↑ "Inching 1 ON") / (L "Inching 1 OFF")
Condition
Positive (rising) edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY TO
POWER-UP (009) condition.
Result
♦ An ON command is automatically executed (refer to control word bit
0), and inching frequency 1 (P448) is enabled in the setpoint
channel.
The ON/OFF1 command (bit 0) is ignored for active inching
operation!
The system must wait until the de-energization time (P603) has
expired
LOW signal
Condition
Result
♦ An OFF1 command is automatically executed (refer to control word
bit 0).
Bit 9: Inching 2 ON command (↑ "Inching 2 ON") / (L "Inching 2 OFF")
Condition
Rising (positive) edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY TO
POWER-UP (009) condition.
Result
♦ An ON command is automatically executed (refer to control board
bit 0), and inching frequency 2 (P449) is enabled in the setpoint
channel.
The ON/OFF1 command (bit 0) is ignored if inching is active.
The system must wait until the de-energization time (P603) has
expired.
LOW signal
Condition
Result
10-4
♦ An OFF1 command is automatically executed (refer to control word
bit 0).
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Control Word and Status Word
Bit 10: Control from the PLC command (H "control from the PLC")
Condition
HIGH signal; the process data PZD (control word, setpoints) are only
evaluated if the command has been accepted; this data is sent via the
SST1 interface of the CU, the CB/TB interface (option) and the
SST/SCB interface (option).
Result
♦ If several interfaces are used, only the process data of the interfaces
are evaluated, which send an H signal.
♦ For an L signal, the last values are received in the appropriate dual
port RAM of the interface.
NOTE
An H signal appears in the visualization parameter r550 "control word
1", if one of the interfaces sends an H signal!
Bit 11: Clockwise rotating field command (H "clockwise rotating field")
Condition
Result
HIGH signal
♦ The setpoint is influenced in conjunction with bit 12 "counterclockwise rotating field".
Bit 12: Counter-clockwise rotating field command (H "counter-clockwise rotating field")
Condition
Result
HIGH signal
NOTE
The counter-clockwise rotating field and the clockwise rotating
field command have no influence on supplementary setpoint 2, which
is added after the ramp-function generator (RFG)!
♦ The setpoint is influenced in conjunction with bit 11 "clockwiserotating field".
Bit 13: Command to raise the motorized potentiometer (H "raise motorized
potentiometer")
Condition
Result
HIGH signal
♦ The motorized potentiometer in the setpoint channel is driven in
conjunction with bit 14 "motorized potentiometer, lower".
Bit 14: Command to lower the motorized potentiometer (H "lower motorized
potentiometer")
Condition
Result
HIGH signal
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ The motorized potentiometer in the setpoint channel is driven in
conjunction with bit 13 "raise motorized potentiometer".
Bit 15: Command external fault 1 (L "External fault 1")
♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F035).
The inverter pulses are inhibited, the main contactor/bypass
contactor, if used, is opened.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
10-5
Control Word and Status Word
04.2006
Bit 16: Function data set FDS bit 0 command
Result
♦ In conjunction with bit 17 "FDS BIT 1" one of the four possible
function data sets is energized.
Bit 17: Function data set FDS bit 1 command
Result
♦ In conjunction with bit 16 "FDS BIT 0" one of the four possible
function data sets is energized.
Bit 18: Motor data set, MDS bit 0 command
Condition
READY TO POWER-UP (009), PRE-CHARGING (010) or READY
(011)
Result
♦ One of the four possible motor data sets is energized in conjunction
with bit 19 "MDS BIT 1".
Bit 19: Motor data set, MDS bit 1 command
Condition
READY TO POWER-UP (009), PRE-CHARGING (010) or READY
(011)
Result
♦ One of the four possible motor data sets is energized in conjunction
with bit 18 "MDS BIT 0".
Bit 20: Fixed setpoint FSW bit 0 (LSB) command
Result
♦ In conjunction with bit 21 "FSW BIT 1", one of the four possible fixed
setpoints is energized to input as percentage fixed setpoints,
referred to the reference frequency P352 or reference speed P353.
Bit 21: Fixed setpoint FSW bit 1 (MSB) command
Result
♦ In conjunction with bit 20 "FSW BIT 0" one of the four possible fixed
setpoints is energized for input as percentage fixed setpoints,
referred to the reference frequency P352 or the reference speed
P353.
Bit 22: Synchronizing enable command (H "synchronizing enable")
Condition
Result
10-6
♦
For converter sychronization (P534 = 1):
HIGH signal, TSY (option) available and P100 = 2 (V/f
characteristic for textile applications).
♦
For line synchronization (P534 = 2):
HIGH signal, TSY (option) P100 = 1, 2 or 3
♦ The command enables the synchronizing function.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Control Word and Status Word
Bit 23: Restart-on-the-fly enable command (H "restart-on-the-fly enable")
Condition
Result
HIGH signal
♦ The command enables the restart-on-the-fly function.
Bit 24: Droop/technology controller enable command (H "droop/technology controller
enable")
Condition
Result
HIGH signal
♦ The command enables the droop function, if P100 (openloop/closed-loop control type) is assigned 3 (closed-loop frequency
control) or 4 (closed-loop speed control), parameter P246 <> 0 and
the inverted pulses of the drive converter are enabled.
The speed/frequency controller output, fed back as negative signal
to the speed/frequency setpoint, can be set via parameter P245
(source steady-state) and P246 (scaling steady-state)
Bit 25: Controller enable command (H "controller enable")
Condition
Result
HIGH signal and the drive converter inverter pulses are enabled.
♦ The speed controller output is enabled for the appropriate control
type (P100 = 0,4,5).
Bit 26: Command, external fault 2 (L "External fault 2")
Condition
LOW signal; it is only activated from the READY (011) condition
onwards and after an additional time delay of 200 ms.
♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F036).
The inverter pulses are inhibited, the main contactor, if available, is
opened.
Bit 27: Slave/master drive command (H "Slave drive")/(L "Master drive")
Result
Condition
HIGH signal, P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) = 3, 4 (closedloop frequency/speed control), and the drive inverter pulses are
enabled.
Result
♦ Slave drive: The closed-loop control acts as closed-loop torque
control (M closed-loop control). With f closed-loop control, precise
torque control is not possible until from about 10 % of motor rated
speed onwards.
LOW signal, P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) = 3, 4 (closedloop frequency/speed control), and the drive converter inverter pulses
are enabled.
Condition
Result
♦ Master drive: The closed-loop control operates as closed-loop
speed or frequency control (closed-loop frequency/speed control).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
10-7
Control Word and Status Word
04.2006
Bit 28: Command, external alarm 1 (L "External alarm 1")
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ The operating status is maintained. An alarm message is issued
(A015).
Bit 29: Command, external alarm 2 (L "External alarm 2")
Condition
Result
LOW signal
♦ The operating status is maintained. An alarm message is issued
(A016).
Bit 30: Select, BICO data sets (H "data set 2") / (L "data set 1")
Condition
Result
Condition
Result
HIGH signal
♦ The parameter settings of data set 2 for all binector and connector
commands and signals, are activated.
LOW signal
♦ The parameter settings of data set 1 for all binector and connector
commands and signals, are activated.
Bit 31: Main contactor checkback signal command (H "main contactor checkback
signal")
Condition
HIGH signal, corresponding to the wiring and parameterization of the
main contactor (option). The checkback time can be set in P600.
Result
♦ Checkback signal, "main contactor energized" (closed).
10-8
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
P556.B (1/1)
B
P557.B (1/1)
B
Src2 OFF2(coast)
Src3 OFF2(coast)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
P566.B (0/0)
B
P567.B (0/18)
B
Src2 Fault Reset
Src3 Fault Reset
1
Control word 1
2
Pre-assignment of the BICO parameters:
1. Binector valid for BICO data set 1
2. Binector valid for BICO data set 2
1) The sequence control is the internal
control (software) for realizing the
drive status (r001)
from PMU [50.7]
P565.B(2107)
B
Src1 Fault Reset
Src3 OFF3(QStop) P560.B (1/1)
B
Src2 OFF3(QStop) P559.B (1/1)
B
Src1 OFF3(QStop) P558.B (1/1)
B
"Safe STOP" checkback
P555.B (1/20)
B
Src1 OFF2(coast)
1
&
&
Bit 6
P564.B (1/1)
B
4
Bit 5
Src RampGen Stop P563.B (1/1)
B
Bit 9
P569.B (0/0)
B
Src Inching Bit1
3
5
0=External fault 1
1=No external fault
Bit 14 1=Lower mot. potentiometer
P575.B (1/1)
B
Src No ExtFault1
Bit 15
Bit 13 1=Raise mot. potentiometer
P574.B (9/0)
B
Src MOP DOWN
6
1=Counter-clockwise phase sequence
enable 0=Counter-clockwise phase sequence disable
P573.B (8/0)
B
Bit 12
P572.B (1/1)
B
Src REV Speed
1=Clockwise phase sequence enable
0=Clockwise phase sequence disable
1=Control requested
0=No control requested
1=Inching bit1
1=Inching bit0
0 =>1 Edge fault acknowledgement
1=Setpoint enable
0=Setpoint disable
1=Start ramp-function generator
0=Stop ramp-function generator
1=Ramp-function generator enable
0=Set ramp-function generator to 0
1=Inverter enable, pulse enable
0=Pulse disable
0=OFF3, quick stop
1=Operating condition
0=OFF2, pulse disable, motor coasts down
1=Operating condition
0=OFF1, Shutdown via ramp-function generator,
followed by pulse disable,
1=ON, operating condition (edge-controlled)
Meaning
Src MOP UP
Bit 11
P571.B (1/1)
B
Src FWD Speed
Bit 10
Bit 8
P568.B (0/0)
B
Src Inching Bit0
Bit 7
Bit 4
P562.B (1/1)
B
Src RampGen Rel
Src Setp Release
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
P561.B (1/1)
B
P554.B (5/22)
B
Src InvRelease
Src ON/OFF1
Bit No.
7
6 5
14 13
•
3
2 1
10 9
7
Function diagram
MASTERDRIVES VC
to sequence control 1)
to fault processing
to setpoint processing [300.1]
to setpoint processing [300.1]
- 180 -
8
to setpoint processing [316.4], [326.4]
to sequence control 1)
to setpoint processing
[316.1], [318.2], [326.1], [328.2]
Note:This bit must be set in the first PZD word of the
telegram received from serial interfaces, so that the
converter will accept the process data as being valid
(compare USS, PROFIBUS, etc.)
to setpoint processing [316.4], [326.4]
to sequence control 1)
to setpoint processing
[316.1], [318.2], [326.1], [328.2]
to sequence control 1)
to setpoint processing [317.1], [327.1]
to setpoint processing [317.6], [327.6]
to setpoint processing [317.6], [327.6]
to sequence control 1)
to sequence control 1)
to braking control [470.1]
to sequence control 1)
to braking control [470.1]
to setpoint processing [318.3], [328.3]
4
12 11
Display of r550 on PMU
15
to sequence control 1)
to braking control [470.1]
to setpoint processing [300.5]
Control word 1
r550
Control word 1
K0030
n959.25 = 4
0
8
04.2006
Control Word and Status Word
10-9
10-10
Operating Instructions
Bit 19
Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
Bit 23
Bit 24
Bit 25
Bit 26
Bit 27
Bit 28
P579.B (0/0)
B
P580.B (0/16)
B
P581.B (0/0)
B
P582.B(5002)
B
P583.B (0/0)
B
P584.B (0/0)
B
P585.B (1/1)
B
P586.B (1/1)
B
P587.B (0/0)
B
P588.B (1/1)
B
P589.B (1/1)
B
P590.B (14)
B
P591.B (0/0)
B
Src MotDSet Bit1
Src FixSetp Bit0
Src FixSetp Bit1
Src Sync Release
Src Fly Release
Src Droop Rel
Src n-Reg Rel
Src No ExtFault2
Src Master/Slave
Src No Ext Warn1
Src No Ext Warn2
Src BICO DSet
Src ContactorMsg
2
Bit 18
P578.B (0/0)
B
Src MotDSet Bit0
1
Control word 2
Bit 17
P577.B (0/0)
B
Src FuncDSetBit1
Bit 31
Bit 30
Bit 29
Bit 16
P576.B (0/0)
B
Src FuncDSetBit0
Bit No.
3
4
0=No checkback, waiting time P600 active
1=Checkback main contactor
0=Select BICO data set 1
1=Select BIC data set 2
0=External alarm 2
1=No external alarm 2
0=External alarm 1
1=No external alarm 1
0=Master drive (speed control)
1=Slave drive (torque control)
0=External fault 2
1=No external fault 2
1=Enable speed controller
0=Speed controller disabled
1=Enable droop, speed controller
0=Droop, speed controller disabled
1=Enable flying restart
0=Flying restart disabled
1= Enable synchronizing
0=Synchronizing disabled
Select fixed setpoint bit 1
Select fixed setpoint bit 0
Select motor data set bit 1
Select motor data set bit 0
Select fixed setpoint bit 1
Select fixed setpoint bit 0
Meaning
5
to sequence control 1)
to data sets [540.4]
to sequence control 1)
to alarm processing
to sequence control 1)
to alarm processing
to speed control
to fixed setpoints
to sequence control 1)
to fault processing
6
to speed control [360.5], [361.5]
to speed control [365.7], [367.4]
to sequence control 1)
to synchronization [X02]
to fixed setpoints [290.6]
to fixed setpoints [290.6]
to data sets [540.4]
to data sets [540.4]
to data sets [540.4]
to data sets [540.4]
Control word 2
r551
Control word 2
K0031
1
22 21
30 29
•
20 19
28 27
18 17
26 25
7
Function diagram
MASTERDRIVES VC
Pre-assignment of the BICO parameters:
1. Binector valid for BICO data set 1
2. Binector valid for BICO data set 2
1) The sequence control is the internal
control (software) for realizing the
drive status (r001).
Separate function diagrams are available for
master and slave drive control!
No.n-Reg Rel
B0099
23
31
Display of r551 on the PMU
n959.26 = 4
- 190 -
8
16
24
Control Word and Status Word
04.2006
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
10.2
Control Word and Status Word
Description of the status word bits
Bit 0: Message, "Ready to power-up" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
POWER-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO POWER-UP (009) status
♦ The power supply, the open- and closed-loop control are
operational.
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited.
♦ If an external power supply and a main contactor (option)/bypass
contactor are available, it is possible to bring the DC link into a novoltage condition, when the drive converter is in this status!
Bit 1: Message, "Ready" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
PRE-CHARGING (010) or READY (011) status
♦ The power supply, the open-loop and the closed-loop control are
operational.
♦ The unit is powered-up.
♦ Pre-charging has been completed.
♦ The DC link has been ramped-up to the full voltage.
♦ The inverter pulses are still inhibited.
Bit 2: Message, "Run" (H)
HIGH signal
GROUND-FAULT TEST (012), RESTART-ON-THE-FLY (013), RUN
(014), OFF1 (015) or OFF3 (016)
Significance
♦ The unit is functioning.
♦ The inverter pulses are enabled.
♦ The output terminals are live.
Bit 3: Message "Fault" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
Fault (007) status
♦ A fault has occurred.
Bit 4: Message "OFF2" (L)
LOW signal
Significance
OFF2 command available
♦ The OFF2 command was output (control word bit 1).
Bit 5: Message "OFF3" (L)
LOW signal
Significance
OFF3 (016) status, and/or OFF3 command available
♦ The OFF3 command was output (control word bit 2).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
10-11
Control Word and Status Word
04.2006
Bit 6: Message "Power-on inhibit" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
POWER-ON INHIBIT (008) status
♦ The power supply, open-loop and closed-loop control are
operational.
♦ If an external power supply and a main contactor (option)/bypass
contactor are available, it is possible to bring the DC link voltage in
this drive converter status into a no-voltage condition!
♦ The message is available as long as an OFF2 command is present
via control word bit 1 or an OFF3 command is available via control
word bit 2 after the setpoint has been ramped-down, or an ON
command is available via control word bit 0 (edge evaluation).
Bit 7: Message, "Alarm" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
Alarm (Axxx)
♦ An alarm has been issued.
♦ The signal is present until the cause has been resolved.
Bit 8: Message "Setpoint-actual value deviation" (L)
LOW signal
Significance
Alarm, "Setpoint-actual value deviation" (A034)
♦ The frequency actual value deviates from the frequency setpoint
(reference value, by a value which exceeds P794 (setpoint-actual
value deviation, frequency), for a time which is longer than P792
(setpoint-actual value deviation time).
♦ The bit is again set as H signal, if the deviation is less than
parameter value P792.
Bit 9: Message "PZD control requested" (H)
HIGH signal
Still present.
Bit 10: Message, "Comparison frequency reached" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
The parameterized comparison frequency has been reached.
♦ The absolute frequency actual value is greater than or equal to the
parameterized comparison frequency (P796).
♦ The bit is again set to L signal, as soon as the absolute value of the
comparison frequency (P796), minus the parameterized comparison
frequency hysteresis (P797 as %, referred to the comparison
frequency (P796)) is fallen below.
10-12
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Control Word and Status Word
Bit 11: Message "Undervoltage" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
"Undervoltage in the DC link"
♦ The DC link voltage has fallen below the permissible limit value.
From drive status (°011) fault message (F008) "DC link
undervoltage" is additionally output.
Refer to the Section "Fault- and alarm messages"
Bit 12: Message "Main contactor energized" (H)
HIGH signal
The main contactor (AC unit)/precharging contactor (DC unit) (option) is
operated.
Significance
♦ The main contactor/precharging contactor (option) can be driven
with the appropriate wiring and parameterization.
Bit 13: Message "RFG active" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
Ramp-function generator active
♦ The ramp-function generator output (r480 / KK0073) is not equal to
the ramp-function generator input (r460 / KK0072).
A hysteresis, which can be parameterized (P476 as %, referred to
the rated system frequency P352), can only be taken into account
for an analog setpoint input.
♦ When the "synchronizing" function is selected, alarm A069 is
initiated, as long as the ramp-function generator is active in the
setpoint channel of the synchronizing converter.
The synchronizing operation is not started as long as the rampfunction generator is active.
Bit 14: Message, "Clockwise rotating field" (H)/ "Counter-clockwise rotating field" (L)
HIGH signal
Significance
LOW signal
Significance
Clockwise rotating field
♦ The frequency setpoint for the closed-loop control (speed/frequency
setpoint, r482 / KK0075) is greater than or equal to 0.
Counter-clockwise rotating field
♦ The frequency setpoint for the closed-loop control (speed/frequency
setpoint, r482 / KK0075) is less than 0.
Bit 15: Message "KIP/FLN active" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
The kinetic buffering (KIP) function or flexible response (FLN) is active.
♦ KIP: A brief power failure is bypassed using the kinetic energy of
the connected load.
♦ FLN: The converter can be operated up to a minimum DC link
voltage of 50% of the rated value.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
10-13
Control Word and Status Word
04.2006
Bit 16: Message "Restart-on-the-fly active" (H)
HIGH signal
The restart-on-the-fly function is active, or the excitation time (P602) is
running.
Significance
♦ The drive converter is switched to a motor which is still rotating.
♦ Overcurrent is prevented as a result of the restart-on-the-fly
function.
♦ The excitation time (magnetization time) is active.
Bit 17: Message "Synchronism has been reached" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
Prerequisite
Synchronism has been reached.
♦ Synchronism has been reached.
TSY (option) available and P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) =
2 (V/f characteristic for textile applications) or P100 = 1, 2, 3 at line
synchronism (P534 = 2).
Bit 18: Message "Overspeed" (L)
LOW signal
Significance
Alarm "Overspeed" (A033)
♦ The frequency actual value is either:
♦ greater than the maximum frequency for the clockwise rotating field
(P452) plus a hysteresis (P804 as %, referred to P452) or
♦ less than the maximum frequency for the counter-clockwise rotating
field (P453) plus a hysteresis (P804 as %, referred to P453).
♦ The bit is again set to an H signal as soon as the absolute value of
the frequency actual value is less than or equal to the absolute
value of the appropriate maximum frequency.
Bit 19: Message "External fault 1" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
"External fault 1"
♦ A "External fault 1" is present in control word, bit 15.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.
Bit 20: Message "External fault 2" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
"External fault 2"
♦ A "External fault 2" is present in control word bit 26.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.
10-14
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Control Word and Status Word
Bit 21: Message "External alarm" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
"External alarm"
♦ An "external alarm 1" is present in control word bit 28, or, "external
alarm 2" in control word bit 29.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.
Bit 22: Message "Alarm i2t drive converter" (H)
HIGH signal
Alarm "i2t alarm, inverter" (A025)
Significance
♦ If the instantaneous load status is maintained, then the drive
converter will be thermally overloaded.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.
Bit 23: Message "Fault, converter overtemperature" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
"Inverter temperature too high" fault (F023)
♦ The limiting inverter temperature has been exceeded.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.
Bit 24: Message "Alarm, converter overtemperature" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
Alarm, "inverter temperature too high" (A022)
♦ The inverter temperature threshold to release an alarm has been
exceeded.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.
Bit 25: Message "Alarm, motor overtemperature" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
Alarm "Motor overtemperature"
♦ it involves an "I2t alarm, motor" (A029) or an overtemperature alarm
from the KTY (P380 > 1) or PTC thermistor (P380 = 1).
♦ The alarmis initiated either by calculating the motor load (r008 /
K0244) or from the KTY84 sensor (r009 / K0245).
♦ Parameters involved in the calculation:
P380 (mot. temp. alarm), P382 (motor cooling),
P383 (mot. temp.T1), P384 (mot. load limit).
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
10-15
Control Word and Status Word
04.2006
Bit 26: Message "Fault, motor overtemperature" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
Fault, "Motor overtemperature"
♦ It involves an "I2t fault, motor" (F021) or an overtemperature fault,
from KTY (P381 > 1) or PTC thermistor (P381 = 1).
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.
Bit 27: Reserve
Bit 28: Message, "Fault, motor stalled/locked" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
Fault, "Motor stalled or blocked" (F015)
Precondition
♦ Blocking recognition at P100 = 3, 4 f/n control:
setpoint/actual value deviation has occurred (bit 8), torque limit
(B0234) reached, speed < 2 % and time in P805 expired
♦ The drive has either stalled or is locked.
♦ In the case of M control (P100 = 5) or slave drive (P587), blocking is
not recognized.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.
Bit 29: Message "Bypass contactor energized" (H)
HIGH signal
The bypass contactor is energized after precharging has ended
(applies only to AC units equipped with bypass contactor).
Significance
♦ A bypass contactor (option) can be energized with the appropriate
wiring and parameterization.
Bit 30: Message "Alarm sync. error" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
Prerequisite
Alarm, "Synchronizing error" (A070)
♦ After successful synchronization, the phase deviation is greater than
the parameterized tolerance range (P531).
TSY (option) available and P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) =
2 (V/f characteristic for textile applications) or P100 = 1, 2, 3 at line
synchronism (P534 = 2).
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.
Bit 31: Message "Pre-charging active" (H)
HIGH signal
Significance
10-16
PRE-CHARGING (010) condition
♦ Pre-charging is realized after an ON command.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
from sequence control 1)
from sequence control 1)
from sequence control 1)
from sequence control 1)
from sequence control 1)
from alarm processing
from messages [480.7]
from sequence control 1)
from messages [480.7]
from fault processing
from sequence control 1)
from setpoint processing
[317.8], [327.8]
from messages [480.7]
From KIB/FLR control
[600.8], [605.8]
2
Bit 1
from sequence control 1)
1
Status word 1
Bit 0
from sequence control 1)
Bit No.
B0102
B0104
B0106
B0108
B0110
B0112
B0114
B0116
1=Ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses disabled)
0=Not ready for operation
1=Run (voltage at output terminals)
0=Pulses disabled
1=Fault active (pulses disabled)
0=No fault
0=OFF2 active
1=No OFF2
0=OFF3 active
1=No OFF3
1=Switch-on inhibit
0=No switch-on inhibit (possible to switch on)
1=Warning active
0=No warning
1=No setpoint/actual value deviation detected
0=Setpoint/actual value deviation
3
4
5
B0130
B0128
1=Positive speed setpoint
0=Negative speed setpoint
1=Kinetic buffering/flexible response active
0=Kinetic buffering/flexible response inactive
B0126
0=Ramp-function generator not active
1=Ramp-function generator active
0=No request to energize main contactor
B0124
B0122
1=Low voltage fault
0=No low voltge fault
1=Request to energize main contactor
B0120
1=Comparison value reached
0=Comparison value not reached
1=PZD control requested (always 1)
B0100
1=Ready to switch on
0=Not ready to switch on
Meaning
B0127
B0125
B0123
B0121
B0117
B0115
B0113
B0111
B0109
B0107
B0105
B0129
KIB/FLR active
1
6
B0131
Speed Setp FWD
1
B0101
B0103
RampGen active
1
Energize MCon
1
Low Voltage
1
CompV OK
1
No Deviation
1
Alarm
1
Blocked
1
No OFF3
1
No OFF2
1
Fault
1
Operation
1
Rdy for Oper
1
Rdy for ON
1
Status word 1
r552
Status word 1
K0032
6 5
4
•
3
12 11
2 1
10 9
0
8
- 200 -
8
1) The sequence control is the internal
control (software) for realizing the
drive status (r001).
7
14 13
7
Function diagram
MASTERDRIVES VC
KIB/FLR n.active
Speed Setp REV
RampGen n.act.
N.Energ.MCon
No Low Voltage
CompV not OK
Deviation
No alarm
Not blocked
OFF3
OFF2
No fault
Not operating
NotRdy for Oper
Not Rdy for ON
15
Display of r552 on the PMU
n959.27 = 4
04.2006
Control Word and Status Word
10-17
10-18
2
Bit 25
Bit 26
from alarm processing
from fault processing
Operating Instructions
Bit 28
Bit 29
Bit 30
Bit 31
from block/pullout
diagnosis [485.8]
from sequence control 1)
from synchronization [X01.6]
from sequence control 1)
1
Status word 2
B0150
B0152
1=Motor overtemperature warning active
0=No motor overtemperature warning
1=Motor overtemperature fault active
O=No motor overtemperature fault
5
B0162
1=Pre-charging active
0=Pre-charging not active
4
B0160
1=Fault during synchronization
0=No fault during synchronization
3
B0158
0=Bypass contactor not energized
1=Bypass contactor energized (only AC units)
0=No motor pulled out/blocked fault
1=Motor pulled out/blocked fault active
B0156
B0148
1=Converter overtemperature warning active
0=No converter overtemperature warning
Bit 27 Reserve
Bit 24
Bit 23
from fault processing
from alarm processing
Bit 22
from alarm processing
B0146
from sequence control 1)
1=Converter overtemperature fault active
0=No converter overtemperature fault
B0142
1=External warning active
Bit 21
0=No external warning
from sequence control 1)
B0144
B0140
1=External fault 2 active
Bit 20
0=No external fault 2
1=Converter overload warning active
0=No converter overload warning
B0138
1=External fault 1 active
0=No external fault 1
Bit 19
from sequence control 1)
B0136
0=Overspeed
1=No overspeed
Bit 18
from messages [480.7]
B0134
Bit 17
from synchronization [X01.6]
1=Synchronism achieved
0=Synchronism not achieved
Bit 16
from sequence control 1)
B0132
Meaning
1=Flying restart or excitation active
0=Flying restart not active or excitation finished
Bit No.
1
Prechrg active
1
Sync Fault
B0149
B0147
B0145
B0143
B0141
B0139
B0137
B0135
B0133
B0159
B0157
B0153
B0151
6
B0163
B0161
ChrgRelay close
1
Motor PullOut
1
TmpFltMotor
1
TmpWarnMotor
1
TmpWarn Drive
1
Tmp Flt Drive
1
Ovld Warn Drive
1
Ext Warning
1
Ext Fault 2
1
Ext Fault 1
1
Overspeed
1
Sync reached
1
Fly/Exc active
1
Status word 2
r553
Status word 2
K0033
22 21
•
20 19
28 27
18 17
26 25
16
24
2) in addition
ExcitationEnd
B0255
- 210 -
8
1) The sequence control is the internal
control (software) for realizing the
drive status (r001).
23
30 29
7
Function diagram
MASTERDRIVES VC
Prechrg n.act.
No Sync Fault
ChrgRelay open
No MotorPullOut
No TmpFltMotor
No TmpWarnMotor
No TmpWarn Drv
No Tmp Flt Drv
No OvldWarn Drv
No Ext Warning
No Ext Fault 2
No Ext Fault 1
No Overspeed
Sync n.reached
Fly/Exc n.act. 2)
31
Display of r553 on the PMU
n959.28 = 4
Control Word and Status Word
04.2006
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
11
DANGER
Maintenance
Maintenance
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES units are operated at high voltages.
All work carried out on or with the equipment must conform to all the
national electrical codes (BGV A2 in Germany).
Maintenance and service work may only be executed by qualified
personnel.
Only spare parts authorized by the manufacturer may be used.
The prescribed maintenance intervals and also the instructions for
repair and replacement must be complied with.
Hazardous voltages are still present in the drive units up to 5 minutes
after the converter has been powered down due to the DC link
capacitors. Thus, the unit or the DC link terminals must not be worked
on until at least after this delay time.
The power terminals and control terminals can still be at hazardous
voltage levels even when the motor is stationary.
If it is absolutely necessary that the drive converter be worked on when
powered-up:
♦ Never touch any live parts.
♦ Only use the appropriate measuring and test equipment and
protective clothing.
♦ Always stand on an ungrounded, isolated and ESD-compatible pad.
If these warnings are not observed, this can result in death, severe
bodily injury or significant material damage.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-1
Maintenance
11.1
04.2006
Replacing the fan
The fan is designed for an operating time of L10 ≥ 35 000 hours at an
ambient temperature of Tu = 40 °C. It should be replaced in good time
to maintain the availability of the unit.
The units have a fan which operates as soon as the unit is connected to
the voltage supply.
DANGER
To replace the fan the converter has to be disconnected from the
supply and removed.
Construction types
A to C
The fan is located on the bottom of the unit.
Replace the fan as follows:
♦ Undo the two M4x49 Torx screws
♦ Pull out the protective cover together with the fan from underneath
♦ Withdraw fan connector X20
♦ Install the fan in reverse sequence.
X20
M4 x 49
Torx T20
and
spring washer
Protective cover
Fan E1
M4 x 49 / Torx T20
and spring washer
Fig. 11-1
11-2
Cover and fan for housing size A to C
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Construction type D
Maintenance
The fan is screwed onto a bracket and is located at the bottom section
of the unit.
Replace the fan as follows:
♦ Withdraw fan connector X20.
♦ Unscrew the two M5x16 Torx screws at the bottom of the unit.
♦ Pull the bracket out of the unit from underneath.
♦ Unscrew the M4 fan screws.
♦ Install the fan in reverse sequence.
Fan
M4 screw (Torx T20)
Captive washer
Bracket
Washer
Spring washer
Washer
Spring washer
M5x16
Torx T25
Fig. 11-2
Replacing the fan
fuse (type D)
M5x16
Torx T25
Fan with bracket for housing size D
The fuses are located in the upper section of the unit in a fuse holder.
You have to open the fuse holder to replace the fuses.
Fuse link
Fuse holder
closed
Fig. 11-3
Fuse holder
open
Fuse holder for housing size D
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
11-3
Maintenance
11.2
04.2006
Replacing the PMU
Replacing the PMU
♦ Turn the snaps on the front cover by 90 °
♦ Open up the front cover
♦ Withdraw connector X108 on the CU (Control Unit)
♦ Remove ribbon cable from the guide hooks
♦ Carefully press the snap catches upwards on the inner side of the
front cover using a screwdriver
♦ Tilt the PMU and remove it
♦ Install new PMU in reverse sequence.
Rear side of the
front cover
Snap catches
PMU-board
Fig. 11-4
11-4
Replacing the PMU
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
12
Forming
Forming
CAUTION
How the serial
number is made up
If a unit has been non-operational for more than two years, the DC link
capacitors have to be newly formed. If this is not carried out, the unit
can be damaged when the line voltage is powered up.
If the unit was started-up within one year after having been
manufactured, the DC link capacitors do not have to be re-formed. The
date of manufacture of the unit can be read from the serial number.
(Example: A-N60147512345)
Digit
Example
Meaning
1 and 2
A-
Place of manufacture
3
N
2001
P
2002
R
2003
S
2004
T
2005
U
2006
V
2007
W
2008
4
1 to 9
January to September
O
October
N
November
D
December
5 to 14
Not relevant for forming
The following applies for the above example:
Manufacture took place in June 2001.
During forming, the DC link of the unit is connected up via a rectifier, a
smoothing capacitor and a resistor.
During forming a defined voltage and a limited current are applied to
the DC link capacitors and the internal conditions necessary for the
function of the DC link capacitors are restored again.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
12-1
Forming
04.2006
3AC
A
C
R
C / L+
D / L-
Forming
Motorconnection
Disconnect
U1/L1
U2/T1
V1/L2
V2/T2
W1/L3
W2/T3
Rectifier
Pre-charging
DC link
Inverter
PE1
PE2
Fig. 12-1
Components for the
forming circuit
(suggestion)
Forming circuit
Vrated
A
R
C
3AC 200 V to 230 V
SKD 50 / 12
220 Ω / 100 W
22 nF / 1600 V
3AC 380 V to 480 V
SKD 62 / 16
470 Ω / 100 W
22 nF / 1600 V
3AC 500 V to 600 V
SKD 62 / 18
680 Ω / 100 W
22 nF / 1600 V
DANGER
The unit has hazardous voltage levels up to 5 minutes after it has been
powered down due to the DC link capacitors. The unit or the DC link
terminals must not be worked on until at least after this delay time.
Procedure
♦ Before you form the unit, all mains connections must be
disconnected.
♦ The converter incoming power supply must be switched off.
♦ The unit is not permitted to receive a switch-on command (e.g. via
the keyboard of the PMU or the terminal strip).
♦ Connect the required components in accordance with the circuit
example.
♦ Energize the forming circuit. The duration of forming is approx. 1
hour.
12-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2006
13
Technical Data
Technical Data
EU low-voltage directives
73/23/EEC and RL93/68/EEC
EU directive EMC 89/336/EEC
EU machine directive
89/392/EEC
Approval
Switching at the input
Type of cooling
Permissible ambient and coolingmedium temperature
• during operation
• during storage
• during transport
Installation altitude
Permissible humidity rating
Climatic class
Degree of pollution
Overvoltage category
Degree of protection
Class of protection
Shock protection
Radio interference suppression
• Standard
• Options
Interference immunity
Paint finish
Mechanical specifications
- Vibrations
During stationary use:
Constant amplitude
• of deflection
• of acceleration
During transport:
• of deflection
• of acceleration
- Shocks
- Drop and topple
Miscellaneous
EN 50178
EN 61800-3
EN 60204-1
UL:
E 145 153
CSA: LR 21 927
2 switching operations per minute
Air cooling with built-in fan or
air-cooling with additional water cooling
0° C to +40° C ( 32° F to 104° F)
(up to 50° C see Fig. "Derating curves")
-25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
-25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
≤ 1000 m above sea level (100 % load capability)
> 1000 m to 4000 m above sea level
(for load capability. see Fig. "Derating curves")
Relative humidity
≤ 95 % during transport and storage
≤ 85 % during operation (moisture
condensation not permissible)
Class 3K3 to DIN IEC 721-3-3 (during operation)
Pollution degree 2 to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110. Part 1).
Moisture condensation during operation is not permissible
Category III to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110. Part 2)
IP20 EN 60529
Class 1 to EN 536 (DIN VDE 0106. Part 1)
to EN 60204-1 and DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 (BGV A2)
to EN 61800-3
No radio interference suppression
Radio interference suppression filter for Class B1 or A1 to EN 55011
Industrial to EN 61800-3
For interior installation
to DIN IEC 68-2-6
0.075 mm in the frequency range 10 Hz to 58 Hz
9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 58 Hz to 500 Hz
3.5 mm in the frequency range 5 Hz to 9 Hz
9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 9 Hz to 500 Hz
to DIN IEC 68-2-27 / 08.89
30 g. 16 ms half-sine shock
to DIN IEC 68-2-31 / 04.84
on a surface and on a corner
The devices are ground-fault protected, short-circuit-proof and idlingproof on the motor side
Table 13-1
General data
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-1
Technical Data
05.2006
Complete fulfillment of the degree of
protection IP20 in accordance with
EN 60529 is dependent on how many
incoming and outgoing control cables
cover the opening area on the lower
section of the unit. If degree of
protection IP20 also has to be met in
operation, the opening may have to
be subsequently reduced.
NOTE
Permissible rated current in %
100
100
Permissible rated input voltage in %
acc. to VDE 0110 / IEC 664-1
(not necessary acc. to UL / CSA)
<1>
75
75
50
25
0
0
3
6
9
12
50
15 16
Pulse frequency in kHz
Permissible rated current in %
90
80
70
1000
2000
3000
1000
2000
3000
4000
Installation altitude above sea level in m
<1>
The more favourable derating curve only applies
to units of sizes B to D at a rated input voltage
of 380 - 400 V
100
60
0
0
4000
Altitude
[m]
Derating
factor K1
1000
1,0
2000
0,9
3000
0,845
4000
0,8
Temp
[°C]
Derating
factor K2
50
0,76
45
0,879
Installation altitude above sea level in m
Permissible rated current in %
100
75
50
40
25
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
1,0
35
1,125 *
30
1,25 *
25
1,375 *
* See
the
following
Note
Cooling-medium temp. in °C
Fig. 13-1
13-2
Derating curves
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2006
Technical Data
The derating of the permissible rated current for installation altitudes of
over 1000 m and at ambient temperatures below 40 °C is calculated as
follows:
Total derating = Deratingaltitude x Deratingambient temperature
K = K1 x K2
NOTE
It must be borne in mind that total derating must not be greater than 1!
Example:
Altitude: 3000 m
Ambient temperature: 35 °C
K1 = 0.845
K2 = 1.125
→ Total derating = 0.845 x 1.125 = 0.95
Rating plate
Unit designation
List of unit options
Year of manufacture
Month of manufacture
Fig. 13-2
Rating plate
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-3
Technical Data
05.2006
Meaning of the
option codes
Option
Meaning
Option
CBP: Profibus
G11
G13
G14
G15
G16
G17
EB1: Expansion Board 1
Slot A
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G
G61
G63
G64
G65
G66
G67
CBP2: PROFIBUS (sync freq
possible)
G91
G93
G95
G97
Slot A
Slot C
Slot E
Slot G
The CBP2 module takes the place of
the CB.
CBC: CAN-Bus
G21
G23
G24
G25
G26
G27
Slot A
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G
SLB: SIMOLINK
G41
G43
G44
G45
G46
G47
Slot A
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G
EB2: Expansion Board 2
G71
G73
G74
G75
G76
G77
Slot A
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G
LBA backplane bus adapter
K11
installed in the electronics box
ADB adapter board
K01
K02
Mounting pos. 2 (slot D, E)
Mounting pos. 3 (slot F, G)
K80
Option "Safe stop", only type of
construction D
Slot A
Slot C
Slot D
Slot E
Slot F
Slot G
Table 13-2
13-4
Meaning
Meaning of the option codes
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2006
Technical Data
Designation
Value
Order No.
6SE70...
Rated voltage
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
[Hz]
• Input
• Output:
V/f = constant
V = constant
Rated current
[A]
• Input
• Output
DC link voltage
[V]
Rated output
[kVA]
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
21-1CA60
21-3CA60
21-8CB60
22-3CB60
23-2CB60
24-4CC60
3 AC 200 (- 10 %) to 230 (+ 15 %)
3 AC 0 up to rated input voltage
50 / 60 ± 6 %
0 to 600
8 to 300
11.7
10.6
3.7 to 4.2
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
Standard version at 20 V
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
Maximum version at 20 V
14.6
13.3
19.5
25.2
35.4
17.7
22.9
32.2
270 (- 10 %) to 310 (+ 15 %)
4.7 to 5.2
6.0 to 6.9 8.0 to 9.1 11.2 to 12.8
DC 24 (20 - 30)
1.5
15.4 to 17.6
2.5
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
1.5 to 16 (see Fig. „Derating curves“)
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1 (additional)
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
270
Overload current
[A]
1.6 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
30
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
• Line cosϕ1L
≥ 0.98
• Converter cosϕC
< 0.92 ind.
Efficiency η (rated operation)
≥ 0.97
Power loss (at 2.5 kHz)
[kW]
0.13
0.16
0.20
0.25
0.32
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.009
0.009
0.022
0.022
0.022
Pressure drop ∆p
[Pa]
10
10
32
32
32
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level [dB(A)]
60
60
60
60
60
Type of construction
A
A
B
B
B
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
90
90
135
135
135
• Height
425
425
425
425
425
• Depth
350
350
350
350
350
Weight approx.
[kg]
8.5
8.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
Table 13-3
48.6
44.2
0.41
0.028
30
60
C
180
600
350
21
Air-cooled converter (part 1)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-5
Technical Data
05.2006
Designation
Value
Order No.
6SE70... 25-4CD60 27-0CD60 28-1CD60
Rated voltage
[V]
• Input
3 AC 200 (- 10 %) to 230 (+ 15 %)
• Output
3 AC 0 up to rated input voltage
Rated frequency
[Hz]
• Input
50 / 60 ± 6 %
• Output:
V/f = constant
0 to 600
V = constant
8 to 300
Rated current
[A]
• Input
59.4
75.9
89.1
• Output
54.0
69.0
81.0
DC link voltage
[V]
270 (- 10 %) to 310 (+ 15 %)
Rated output
[kVA] 18.8 to 21.5 24.0 to 27.4 28.1 to 32.2
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
DC 24 (20 - 30)
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
1.5
Standard version at 20 V
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
Maximum version at 20 V
2.5
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
1.5 to 16 (see Fig. „Derating curves“)
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1 (additional)
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
270
Overload current
[A]
1.6 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
30
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
• Line cosϕ1L
≥ 0.98
• Converter cosϕC
< 0.92 ind.
Efficiency η (rated operation)
≥ 0.97
Power loss (at 2.5 kHz)
[kW]
0.59
0.74
0.81
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.054
0.054
0.054
Pressure drop ∆p
[Pa]
230
230
230
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level [dB(A)]
65
65
65
Type of construction
D
D
D
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
270
270
270
• Height
600
600
600
• Depth
350
350
350
Weight approx.
[kg]
32
32
32
Table 13-4
13-6
Air-cooled converter (part 2)
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2006
Technical Data
Designation
Value
Order No.
6SE70...
Rated voltage
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
[Hz]
• Input
• Output:
V/f = constant
V = constant
Rated current
[A]
• Input
• Output
DC link voltage
[V]
Rated output
[kVA]
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
16-1EA61
18-0EA61
21-0EA61
21-3EB61
21-8EB61
22-6EC61
3 AC 380 (- 15 %) to 480 (+ 10 %)
3 AC 0 up to rated input voltage
50 / 60 ± 6 %
0 to 600
8 to 300
6.7
6.1
4.1 to 5.0
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
Standard version at 20 V
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
Maximum version at 20 V
8.8
8.0
11.2
14.5
19.3
28.1
10.2
13.2
17.5
25.5
510 (- 15 %) to 650 (+ 10 %)
5.3 to 6.6
6.8 to 8.4 8.7 to 10.9 11.6 to 14.5 16.8 to 21.2
DC 24 (20 - 30)
1.5
2.5
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
1.5 to 16 (see Fig. „Derating curves“)
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1 (additional)
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
270
Overload current
[A]
1.6 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
30
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
• Line cosϕ1L
≥ 0.98
• Converter cosϕC
< 0.92 ind.
Efficiency η (rated operation)
≥ 0.97
≥ 0.98
Power loss (at 2.5 kHz)
[kW]
0.11
0.12
0.16
0.16
0.24
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.009
0.009
0.009
0.022
0.022
Pressure drop ∆p
[Pa]
10
10
10
32
32
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level [dB(A)]
60
60
60
60
60
Type of construction
A
A
A
B
B
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
90
90
90
135
135
• Height
425
425
425
425
425
• Depth
350
350
350
350
350
Weight approx.
[kg]
8.5
8.5
8.5
12.5
12.5
Table 13-5
0.36
0.028
30
60
C
180
600
350
21
Air-cooled converter (part 3)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-7
Technical Data
05.2006
Designation
Value
Order No.
6SE70...
Rated voltage
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
[Hz]
• Input
• Output:
V/f = constant
V = constant
Rated current
[A]
• Input
• Output
DC link voltage
[V]
Rated output
[kVA]
Auxiliary current supply
23-4EC61
23-8ED61
24-7ED61
26-0ED61
27-2ED61
3 AC 380 (- 15 %) to 480 (+ 10 %)
3 AC 0 up to rated input voltage
50 / 60 ± 6 %
0 to 600
8 to 300
37.4
34.0
22.4 to
28.2
[V]
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
Standard version at 20 V
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
Maximum version at 20 V
41.3
37.5
51.7
64.9
47.0
59.0
510 (- 15 %) to 650 (+ 10 %)
24.7 to
31.0 to
38.9 to
31.1
39.0
49.0
DC 24 (20 - 30)
1.5
79.2
72.0
47.4 to
59.8
2.5
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
1.5 to 16 (see Fig. „Derating curves“)
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1 (additional)
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
270
Overload current
[A]
1.6 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
30
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
• Line cosϕ1L
≥ 0.98
• Converter cosϕC
< 0.92 ind.
Efficiency η (rated operation)
≥ 0.98
≥ 0.97
≥ 0.98
Power loss (at 2.5 kHz)
[kW]
0.49
0.58
0.73
0.86
1.05
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.028
0.054
0.054
0.054
0.054
Pressure drop ∆p
[Pa]
30
230
230
230
230
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level [dB(A)]
60
65
65
65
65
Type of construction
C
D
D
D
D
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
180
270
270
270
270
• Height
600
600
600
600
600
• Depth
350
350
350
350
350
Weight approx.
[kg]
21
32
32
32
32
Table 13-6
13-8
Air-cooled converter (part 4)
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2006
Technical Data
Designation
Value
Order No.
6SE70...
Rated voltage
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
[Hz]
• Input
• Output:
V/f = constant
V = constant
Rated current
[A]
• Input
• Output
DC link voltage
[V]
Rated output
[kVA]
Auxiliary current supply
[V]
14-5FB61
16-2FB61
17-8FB61
21-1FB61
21-5FB61
22-2FC61
3 AC 500 (- 15 %) to 600 (+ 10 %)
3 AC 0 up to rated input voltage
50 / 60 ± 6 %
0 to 600
8 to 300
5.0
4.5
3.9 to 4.6
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
Standard version at 20 V
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
Maximum version at 20 V
6.8
6.2
8.6
12.1
16.6
24.2
7.8
11.0
15.1
22.0
675 (- 15 %) to 810 (+ 10 %)
5.4 to 6.4
6.8 to 8.1 9.6 to 11.4 13.1 to 15.6 19.1 to 22.8
DC 24 (20 - 30)
1.5
2.5
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
1.5 to 16 (see Fig. „Derating curves“)
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
240
Overload current
[A]
1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
60
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1 (additional)
Base load current
[A]
0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration
[s]
270
Overload current
[A]
1.6 x rated output current
Overload duration
[s]
30
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
• Line cosϕ1L
≥ 0.98
• Converter cosϕC
< 0.92 ind.
Efficiency η (rated operation)
≥ 0.97
≥ 0.98
Power loss (at 2.5 kHz)
[kW]
0.09
0.14
0.12
0.15
0.23
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.022
0.022
0.022
0.022
0.022
Pressure drop ∆p
[Pa]
32
32
32
32
32
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level [dB(A)]
60
60
60
60
60
Type of construction
B
B
B
B
B
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
135
135
135
135
135
• Height
425
425
425
425
425
• Depth
350
350
350
350
350
Weight approx.
[kg]
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
Table 13-7
0.33
0.028
30
60
C
180
600
350
21
Air-cooled converter (part 5)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-9
Technical Data
05.2006
Designation
Value
Order No.
6SE70...
Rated voltage
[V]
• Input
• Output
Rated frequency
[Hz]
• Input
• Output:
V/f = constant
V = constant
Rated current
[A]
• Input
• Output
DC link voltage
[V]
Rated output
[kVA]
Auxiliary current supply
23-0FD61
23-4FD61
24-7FD61
3 AC 500 (- 15 %) to 600 (+ 10 %)
3 AC 0 up to rated input voltage
50 / 60 ± 6 %
0 to 600
8 to 300
31.9
29.0
37.4
34.0
51.2
46.5
675 (- 15 %) to 810 (+ 10 %)
29.5 to
40.3 to
35.3
48.3
DC 24 (20 - 30)
1.5
25.2 to
30.1
[V]
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
Standard version at 20 V
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A]
Maximum version at 20 V
2.5
Pulse frequency
[kHz]
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current
[A]
Base load duration
[s]
Overload current
[A]
Overload duration
[s]
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1 (additional)
Base load current
[A]
Base load duration
[s]
Overload current
[A]
Overload duration
[s]
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor
• Line cosϕ1L
• Converter cosϕC
Efficiency η (rated operation)
≥ 0.97
1.5 to 16 (see Fig. „Derating curves“)
0.91 x rated output current
240
1.36 x rated output current
60
0.91 x rated output current
270
1.6 x rated output current
30
≥ 0.98
< 0.92 ind.
≥ 0.98
Power loss (at 2.5 kHz)
[kW]
0.62
0.70
0.87
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s]
0.054
0.054
0.054
Pressure drop ∆p
[Pa]
230
230
230
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level [dB(A)]
65
65
65
Type of construction
D
D
D
Dimensions
[mm]
• Width
270
270
270
• Height
600
600
600
• Depth
350
350
350
Weight approx.
[kg]
32
32
32
Table 13-8
13-10
Air-cooled converter (part 6)
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2006
Technical Data
Water-cooled
converter
Order No.
Power loss
(at 2.5 kHz)
[kW]
Rated input voltage 3 AC 380 to 480 V
6SE7021-3EB61-1AA1
6SE7021-8EB61-1AA1
6SE7022-6EC61-1AA1
6SE7023-4EC61-1AA1
6SE7023-8ED61-1AA1
6SE7024-7ED61-1AA1
6SE7026-0ED61-1AA1
6SE7027-2ED61-1AA1
0.21
0.16
0.33
0.47
0.58
0.71
0.86
1.07
Coolingwater
requirement *)
[l/min]
Maximum
additional heatdissipation power
at Tair ≤ 30 °C
[kW]
Typical pressure drop
according to volumetric flow
1.00
1.20
2.10
2.60
4.25
4.80
5.25
6.00
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 1.2 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 1.2 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 2.6 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 2.6 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 6.0 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 6.0 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 6.0 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 6.0 l/min
0.80
0.85
0.90
1.00
1.20
2.00
3.10
3.45
4.15
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 1.2 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 1.2 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 1.2 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 1.2 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 1.2 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 2.6 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 6.0 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 6.0 l/min
0.15 to 0.2 bar at 6.0 l/min
Rated input voltage 3 AC 500 to 600 V
6SE7014-5FB61-1AA1
6SE7016-2FB61-1AA1
6SE7017-8FB61-1AA1
6SE7021-1FB61-1AA1
6SE7021-5FB61-1AA1
6SE7022-2FC61-1AA1
6SE7023-0FD61-1AA1
6SE7023-4FD61-1AA1
6SE7024-7FD61-1AA1
0.09
0.11
0.12
0.16
0.21
0.32
0.59
0.69
0.87
Table 13-9
NOTE
Water-cooled converter
These units and the air-cooled converters are identically constructed.
Instead of the heat sink for air, an air/water cooler has been installed.
All the technical data not listed in Table 13-9 for a particular unit are the
same as those of the air-cooled converter. The first 12 positions of the
Order No. are identical. The supplement "-1AA1” indicates water
cooling.
*)
The cooling water requirement applies for the unit rating of the converter and 100%
utilization of the additional heat dissipation obtained from a water temperature rise
intake/return of ∆T = 5 K.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-11
Technical Data
13.1
05.2006
Notes regarding water-cooled units
Other conditions
affecting operation
The unit is to be connected to an existing external cooling-water circuit.
The construction of this cooling-water circuit under the aspects of
♦ open or closed circuit
♦ choice and juxtaposition of materials
♦ composition of cooling water
♦ cooling-water cooling (recooling, supply of fresh cooling water)
♦ and others
have an important effect on the safe functioning and service life of the
whole installation.
WARNING
The warnings given under “Standard units" apply.
Installation and servicing work on the water cooling system must be
performed with the power disconnected.
There must be no condensation on the units (also applies to standard
units).
13-12
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2006
13.1.1
Technical Data
Notes regarding installation and components
A closed-circuit water-cooling system of stainless steel with water/water
heat exchanger is recommended for the converters.
To prevent electrochemical corrosion and transfer of vibration,
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES are to be connected to water supply
and return lines by flexible, electrically non-conducting hose. The
hose length (in total) should be > 1.5 m.
If plastic piping is used in the installation, this hose is not necessary.
The water hoses should be connected up before the converter is
installed.
If hose clips are used, they should be checked for tightness at threemonthly intervals.
Filling
1 1/4"
Safety
valve
< 1 bar /
< 2.5 bar
1 bar/
2.5 bar
System
Control cubicle
Pump
FU1
Primary circuit
Diaphragm expansion
tank
FUn
Automatic
venting
Filter
Thermostatic controller
Fig. 13-3
Water-water heat
exchangers
V/E flow monitor
Water-to-water heat exchanger
If a water supply system is already available in the plant which does not
exceed temperatures above 35 °C but does not fulfil the cooling water
requirements, the two cooling systems can be connected using a waterwater heat exchanger.
The coolers of the frequency converters are connected via a manifold
so that the necessary flow rate is ensured but the pressure does not
exceed the permitted value. Factors such as height differences and
distances must be taken into account.
For devices without anti-freeze, we recommend using VARIDOSTOP
available from Schilling Chemie. VARIDOSTOP is an organic corrosion
inhibitor specially developed for semi-open and closed cooling systems.
It protects metals against corrosion by forming a protective organic film
on the surface of the metal.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-13
Technical Data
05.2006
The operating pressure is to be adjusted according to the flow
conditions in the supply and return sides of the water cooling system.
The user must take measures to ensure that the max. permissible
operating pressure is not exceeded. Use must be made of a pressure
regulating device.
Closed-circuit cooling systems are to be provided with pressure
balancing devices with safety valve *) and air venting devices.
The air must be let out of the cooling system while filling is in progress.
To ensure that the necessary volume keeps flowing, flushback filters
should be fitted instead of the normal pipe strainer. Flushback filters
automatically take care of the return flow.
These are manufactured by, for example, Benckiser GmbH,
Industriestrasse 7, D-69198 Schriesheim Tel.: +49-6203-730.
ASI 1 Information Bulletin E20125-C6038-J702-A1-7400 of February
1997 contains information about suggested plant configurations for
various applications.
Water piping must be laid with extreme care. The pipes must be
properly secured mechanically and checked for leakage.
Water pipes must under no circumstances make contact with live parts
(insulation clearance: at least 13 mm).
*)
13-14
≤ 1.2 bar at a permissible operating pressure of 1.0 bar
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2006
Technical Data
13.1.2
Application
In application, the same general conditions apply as to standard units
(with air cooling), with the exception of the cooling conditions described
below.
Water is normally used as the cooling medium (see Section "Coolant").
Antifreeze is added only in exceptional cases.
Within a cooling water temperature range of from + 5 °C to + 38 °C, the
unit can be operated at 100% rated current.
If higher cooling water temperatures are necessary, the unit operating
current must be reduced as shown in Figures 13-4 and 13-5 (Curve 1).
This applies only where water is used as the cooling medim (see notes
in Section "Anti-condensation, Antifreeze").
Derating Curve IP22
Permissible rated current in %
105
100
95
1
90
85
80
75
70
65
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Supply temperature in °C
Water
20 % Mixture -10 °C
34 % Mixture -20 °C
44 % Mixture -30 °C
Fig. 13-4
Reduction curve applying to installation in IP22 cabinets
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-15
Technical Data
05.2006
Derating Curve Water IP54
Permissible rated current in %
105
100
95
1
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Supply temperature in °C
Water
20 % Mixture -10 °C
33 % Mixture -20 °C
44 % Mixture -30 °C
Fig. 13-5
Reduction curve 2 applying to installation in IP54 cabinets
NOTE
The maximum coolant temperature is 50 °C for IP22 cubicles and 46 °C
for IP54 cubicles!
13-16
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2006
13.1.3
Technical Data
Coolant
Normal service water or a water-antifreeze mixture (see Section
"Antifreeze additive") can be used as coolant.
13.1.3.1
Definition of cooling water
The cooling water must meet the following requirements in the long
term:
Max. grain size of any entrained particles
NOTICE
≤ 0.1 mm
pH value
6.0 to 8.0
Chloride
< 40 ppm
Sulfate
< 50 ppm
Dissolved substances
< 340 ppm
Total hardness
< 170 ppm
Conductivity (water only, also see Section
"Antifreeze additive")
< 500 µS/cm
Cooling water inlet temperature
+ 5 ... 38 °C
Cooling water temperature rise per unit (rated
operation)
∆ T ≈ 5 °C
Operating pressure
1 bar
Operating pressures higher than 1 bar are not permissible!
If the system is operating at a higher pressure, the supply pressure
must be reduced to 1 bar at each unit.
The heat sink material is not seawater-proof, i.e. it must not be cooled
directly with seawater!
Filters (sieves) with a mesh size of < 100 µm are to be fitted in the unit
water
systems (see Section “Notes regarding installation and components”)!
If there is a risk of freezing, appropriate counter-measures should be
taken for operation, storage and transport, e.g. draining and blowing out
with air, extra heaters, etc.
WARNING
The warning notes for "standard units" apply.
Installation and servicing work on the water systems must always be
performed with the electric power disconnected.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-17
Technical Data
13.1.3.2
05.2006
Antifreeze additive
By the use of antifreeze, the lower operating temperature limit can be
reduced from + 5 °C to 0 °C, and when not operating the system is
protected against freezing at temperatures down to − 30 °C.
Because of its physical properties (heat absorption, thermal
conductivity, viscosity), antifreeze reduces cooling system efficiency. It
should only be used when absolutely necessary.
Reduction curves for antifreeze are given in the Section "Application"
(Figs. 13-4 and 13-5). Without derating, premature aging of unit
components cannot be ruled out. Converter tripping by the
overtemperature protection must also be expected.
WARNING
Operation at temperatures of < 0 °C is not permitted, not even with
antifreeze!
Use of other media can shorten the service life.
If less that 20 % Antifrogen N is added to the cooling water, the risk of
corrosion is increased, which can shorten the service life.
If more than 30 % Antifrogen N is added to the cooling water, this will
have an adverse effect on heat dissipation and hence on the proper
functioning of the unit. It must always be kept in mind that a higher
pumping capacity is required when Antifrogen N is added to the cooling
water.
When antifreeze is used, no potential differences must occur in the
whole cooling system. If necessary, the components must be
connected with an equipotential bonding strip.
NOTE
Where antifreeze is concerned, pay attention to the information given in
the safety data sheet!
Antifrogen N (made by Clariant; www.clariant.com) is preferred for use
as antifreeze.
The safety data sheet is appended.
Background:
Antifrogen N was thoroughly analysed for this application. Special
attention was given to compatibility with other materials and to
environmental and health aspects. Furthermore, many years of
experience have been gained with Antifrogen N, and the definition of
cooling water is based on this antifreeze agent.
In order to obtain the benefit of the good anti-corrosive properties of
Antifrogen N and water mixtures, the concentration of the mixture must
be at least 20 %.
The use of antifreeze places higher demands on cooling system
tightness because the surface tension of the Antifrogen and water
mixture is about 100 times smaller than that of pure water.
13-18
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2006
Technical Data
Hotwater-proof asbestos-based seals are suitable. For seals with
packing glands, graphite cord can be used. For pipe joints where hemp
is used, coating the hemp with fermit or fermitol has proved effective.
WARNING
Antifrogen N can give rise to leakage at polytetrafluorethylene seals.
Proportion of
Antifrogen N
added [%]
Kinematic
viscosity
[mm²/s]
Relative
pressure loss
Antifreeze
protection to
[°C]
0
1.8
1.09
20
3.5
1.311
-10
34
4.72
1.537
-20
45
7.73
1.743
-30
Table 13-10
Antifrogen N material data at T = 0 °C coolant temperature
More than 45 % impedes heat dissipation and hence proper functioning
of the unit.
It must always be kept in mind that the pumping capacity required
for using Antifrogen N additive must be adjusted, and the
backpressure arising in the unit must also be taken into account.
The necessary coolant flow volume must be attained under all
circumstances.
The electrical conductivity of the coolant is increased when antifreeze is
added to the cooling water. Antifrogen N contains inhibitors to
counteract the attendant increased propensity for electrochemical
corrosion.
To prevent weakening of the inhibitors and the corrosion that would
then result, the following measures are necessary:
1. When the cooling system is drained, it must either be refilled with
the same mixture within 14 days, or it must be flushed out with water
several times and the heat sinks must then be blow through with
compressed air.
2. The water and Antifrogen N mixture must be renewed every 3 to 5
years.
If other antifreeze agents are used, they must be ethylene glycol
based. They must also have been approved by reputable companies in
the automotive industry (GM, Ford, Chrysler).
Example: DOWTHERM SR-1.
Concerning the electrical conductivity of the antifreeze and water
mixture, the antifreeze manufacturer's guidelines apply.
The water that is mixed with the antifreeze must strictly comply with the
defnition given in the Section "Definition of cooling water".
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-19
Technical Data
WARNING
05.2006
Use of other agents can shorten the service life.
Mixing different antifreeze agents is not permitted under any
circumstances.
13.1.3.3
Corrosion protection agent
We recommend the use of a corrosion protection inhibitor for the
cooling circuit, e.g. NALCO 00GE056 corrosion protection from
ONDEO Nalco (Nalco Deutschland GmbH, www.nalco.com,
D-60486 Frankfurt, Tel. +49-697934-410). Concentration of the
corrosion protection inhibitor in the cooling water 0.1 ... 0.14 %.
The cooling water should be checked 3 months after the first filling of
the cooling circuit and then once a year.
If any clouding, discoloration or bacteria are detected in the cooling
water, the cooling circuit has to be flushed out and refilled.
An inspection glass should be installed in the cooling circuit to be able
to monitor the cooling water easily.
13-20
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
05.2006
Technical Data
13.1.4
Protection against condensation
Special measures are necessary to prevent condensation.
Condensation occurs when the cooling water inlet temperature is
considerably lower than the room temperature (air temperature). The
permissible temperature difference between cooling water and air
varies according to the relative humidity φ of the room air. The
temperature at which moist air will deposit droplets of water is called
the dew point.
The following table lists the dew points (in °C) for an atmospheric
pressure of
1 bar (≈ height 0 to 500 m above sea level). If the cooling water
temperature is lower than the value given, condensation must be
expected, i.e. the cooling water temperture must always be ≥ dew point.
Room
temp.
°C
φ=
20 %
φ=
30 %
φ=
40 %
φ=
50 %
φ=
60 %
φ=
70 %
φ=
80 %
φ=
85 %
φ=
90 %
φ=
95 %
φ=
100 %
10
<0
<0
<0
0.2
2.7
4.8
6.7
7.6
8.4
9.2
10
20
<0
2
6
9.3
12
14.3
16.4
17.4
18.3
19.1
20
25
0.6
6.3
10.5
13.8
16.7
19.1
21.2
22.2
23.2
24.1
24.9
30
4.7
10.5
14.9
18.4
21.3
23.8
26.1
27.1
28.1
29
29.9
35
8.7
14.8
19.3
22.9
26
28.6
30.9
32
33
34
34.9
38
11.1
17.4
22
25.7
28.8
31.5
33.8
34.9
36
36.9
37.9
40
12.8
19.1
23.7
27.5
30.6
33.4
35.8
36.9
37.9
38.9
39.9
45
16.8
23.3
28.2
32
35.3
38.1
40.6
41.8
42.9
43.9
44.9
50
20.8
27.5
32.6
36.6
40
42.9
45.5
46.6
47.8
48.9
49.9
Table 13-11
Dew point temperature as a function of relative humidity φ and room
temperature at an altitude of 0 m above sea level
The dew point also depends on the absolute pressure, i.e. on altitude.
The dew points for low atmospheric pressures lie below the value for
sea level, and it is therefore always sufficient to plan the cooling water
supply temperature for an altitude of 0 m.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
13-21
Technical Data
05.2006
Various measures can be taken to afford protection against
condensation:
1. Temperature control is recommended for this purpose (see Fig.
13-3). The water temperature is controlled as a function of room
temperature. This method is certainly to be preferred where there
are high room temperatures, low water temperatures and high
humidities.
2. Physical dehumidifying. This is only effective in closed rooms. It
comprises operating an air/water heat exchanger with cold water to
constantly condense the moisture out of the room air.
3. A humidity alarm can be installed to give a warning when
condensation is imminent. Such an alarm is available from
ENDRICH (www.endrich.com); when the temperature falls to within
2 K of dew point, a signal contact closes.
13.1.5
Notes on materials
Cooling water installations with copper pipes and/or copper joints are to
be avoided and are possible only if special measures are taken, e.g.
closed cooling circuit, full filtering (i.e. copper ions are filtered out),
water additives (such as the products of Nalco Deutschland GmbH;
www.nalco.com; D-60486 Frankfurt, Tel. +49-697934-410).
The hose connection nozzles on the heat sink side must be of stainless
steel or heavy gauge aluminium. Under no circumstances may the
connection nozzles be of brass or copper.
PVC hoses are not suitable for use with antifreeze!
Hard PVC pipes are suitable for use with the antifreeze agents listed in
Section "Antifreeze additive".
NOTICE
The water cooling system must not contain any zinc at all.
Where antifreeze is used, please note:
zinc reacts with all glycol-based inhibitors.
Never use galvanized pipes for this reason!
If the plant incorporates normal iron pipes or cast iron
accessories (e.g. motor housings), a separate cooling system with
water/water heat exchangers is to be installed for the converters.
If a heat exchanger made of CuNi 90/10 is used, be sure to pay
attention to the water conductivity (hose) (see Section "Note regarding
installation and components").
13-22
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Faults and Alarms
14
Faults and Alarms
14.1
Faults
General information regarding faults
For each fault, the following information is available:
Parameter
r947
Fault number
r949
Fault value
r951
Fault list
P952 Number of faults
r782
Fault time
If a fault message is not reset before the electronic supply voltage is
switched off, then the fault message will be present again when the
electronic supply is switched on again. The unit cannot be operated
without resetting the fault message. (Exception: Automatic restart has
been selected, see P373).
Number / Fault
F001
Main contactor
checkback
F002
Pre-charging
Cause
If a main contactor checkback is configured,
no checkback occurs within the time set in
P600 after the power-up command. In the
case of externally excited synchronous motors
(P095 = 12), there is no checkback for the
excitation current unit.
When pre-charging, the minimum DC link
voltage (P071 Line Volts x 1.34) of 80 % has
not been reached.
The maximum pre-charging time of 3 seconds
has been exceeded.
F006
Shutdown has occurred due to excessive DC
link voltage.
DC link overvoltage
Line voltage I DC voltage range I Shutdown
value
------------------------------------------------------------200 V - 230 V I 270 V - 310 V I appr. 410 V
380 V - 480 V I 510 V - 650 V I appr. 820 V
500 V - 600 V I 675 V - 810 V I appr. 1020 V
660 V - 690 V I 890 V - 930 V I appr. 1220 V
Counter-measure
P591 Src Contactor Msg
Parameter value must be in conformance with
the connection of the main contactor
checkback.
Check the checkback loop of the main
contactor (or the checkback of the excitation
current unit in the case of synchronous
motors).
Check the supply voltage,
Compare witth P071 Line Volts (Compare
P071 with the DC link voltage on DC units).
Check the rectifier/regenerative unit on DC
units. The rectifier/regenerative unit must be
switched on before the inverter is switched on.
Check the supply voltage or input DC voltage.
Converter is operating in regenerative mode
without feedback possibility.
If the converter supply voltage is at the upper
tolerance limit and it is operating at full load,
F006 can also be caused by a line phase
failure.
Possibly
For parallel-connected converters (BF M,N)
r949 = 1: Overvoltage in the DC link of the
master
r949 = 2: Overvoltage in the DC link of the
slave.
- Increaase P464 Decel Time,
- Activate P515 DC Bus Volts Reg (check
P071 beforehand)
- Reduce P526 Fly Search Speed.
- Reduce P259 Max Regen Power (only for
P100 = 3, 4 or 5)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-1
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F008
DC link undervoltage
04.2006
Cause
The lower limit value of 76 % of the DC link
voltage (P071 Line Volts), or of 61 % when
kinetic buffering has been enabled, has been
fallen short of.
Counter-measure
Check
- Input DC voltage
- DC link
Undervoltage in the DC link in 'normal'
operation (i.e. no SIMULATION).
Undervoltage in the DC link with active kinetic
buffering and speed less than 10 % of the
rated motor speed.
F010
DC link overvoltage
It was a 'brief power failure' which was not
detected until system recovery (auto restart
flag).
Due to excessive DC link voltage, shutdown
has taken place:
Line voltage
DC link range Shutdown
value
380 V - 480 V 510 V - 650 V
740 V
Check the supply voltage
Check the braking resistor
Converter operates regeneratively without a
feedback possibility. Braking unit must be set
to the lower response threshold (673 V)
Note:
Only at U800 = 1 and f(Pulse) > f(derating)
F011
Lower threshold value than F006 !
Overcurrent shutdown has occurred.
The shutdown threshold has been exceeded.
- Check the converter output for short-circuit or
earth fault
Overcurrent
- Check the load for an overload condition
- Check whether motor and converter are
correctly matched
F012
I too low
F014
I too low
During excitation of the induction motor, the
current did not rise above 12.5 % of the
setpoint magnetizing current for no-load
operation.
During excitation of the motor, the current
component is less than 25 % of the motor noload current.
- Check whether the dynamic requirements
are too high
Only for closed loop n/f/T control (P100 = 3, 4
or 5)
If no motor is connected, go into the simulation
mode P372.
Check current detection, check power section.
Check the output contactor
Check the motor cable
Note:
Only for U800 = 1
Irrespective of the type of control
(Difference to F012)
14-2
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F015
Cause
Motor has stalled or is locked:
Counter-measure
- Reduce load
Motor stall
- if the static load is too high
- Release brake
- if the acceleration or deceleration time is too
fast, or if load change is too fast and too great,
- Increase current limits
- Increase P805 PullOut/BlckTime
- due to incorrect parameterization of the pulse
encoder pulse number P151 or of the analog
- Increase P792 response threshold for
tachometer scaling P138
set/actual deviation
- due to disturbed speed signals (tachometer
shield not connected)
Only for f/n/T control (P100 = 3, 4, 5)
- Increase torque limits or torque setpoint
The fault is only generated after the time set in
P805.
The binector B0156 is set in the status word 2
r553 Bit 28.
To detect whether the drive is blocked, see
P792 (Perm Deviation) and P794. With n/f
control, this fault is tripped if the torque limits
have been reached (B0234).
With speed control (P100 = 4) and master
drive (see P587), the fault can also point to an
interruption in the encoder cable. This case
has the same significance as if the drive is
locked.
Only n/T control or v/f control with speed
controller: (P100 = 0, 4, 5)
- Check tachometer cable break
- Check pulse encoder pulse number
- Check analog tachometer scaling
- Connect shield of tachometer cable on motor
side and converter side
- Reduce smoothing of speed pre-control P216
(only n/T control)
only frequency control:(P100 = 3)
With v/f control, the I(max) controller has to be
activated (P331). The monitor does not
operate with v/f textile applications (P100 = 2).
Motor has stalled or is locked:
- Slow down acceleration time (see also P467
ProtRampGen Gain)
- Increase current in the lower frequency range
(P278, P279, P280)
In the case of synchronous motors (P095 =
12, 13): by reaching the maximum frequency
- Switch in speed controller pre-control
(P471>0)
- Set EMF controller more dynamically (315) to
max. approx. 2
In the case of externally excited synchronous
motors (P095 = 12): as a result of missing or
excessively high excitation current (flux is too
small or too great).
When the maximum frequency (including
control reserves) (B0254) has been reached
on synchronous motors, the fault is generated
immediately. If the deviations in the rotor flux
are too great, first of all, the converter current
is switched to zero, the excitation current is
reduced and, after some time, the fault
message is tripped at the level of the double
damping time constant (2*r124.1). During this
wait time, the status word bit B0156 (r553.28)
is set already.
- Increase changeover frequency for the EMF
model (P313)
- Replace by speed control with pulse encoder
in the case of overmodulated n/f controller
- Track speed setpoint with the speed actual
value so that the set/actual deviation is always
less than that set in P792.
Only for synchronous motor: (P095 = 12)
- Check current limits of the excitation unit.
- Check excitation current setpoint and actual
value (incl. wiring)
- Check voltage limits of the excitation unit
during dynamic current changes.
F018
F set fly
The found set frequency could not be
implemented. Reasons:
- Additional setpoint 2 too high
- Speed actual-value at standstill negative
(signal ripple) and negative direction of
rotation locked.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
- Check drive system for resonance
oscillations.
- Check additional setpoint 2
- Release negative directions of rotation with
low maximum speed.
14-3
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F019
Motor not found
F020
04.2006
Cause
During flying restart without tachometer:
Search in both directions of rotation not
possible (one direction blocked) and motor has
not been found.
The motor temperature limit value has been
exceeded.
Motor temperature
r949 = 1 limit value of motor temperature
exceeded
r949 = 2 short-circuit in the cable to the motor
temperature sensor or sensor defective
Counter-measure
Power up after coasting.
Possibly increase P525 Fly Search Amps.
Enable both directions of rotation (P571,
P572)
Check the motor (load, ventilation, etc.). The
current motor temperature can be read in r009
Motor Temperature.
Check P381 Mot Tmp
Fault - check the KTY84 input at connector
-X103:29,30, or X104:29,30 (Compact PLUS)
for short-circuit.
r949 = 4 wire break in the cable to the motor
temperature sensor or sensor defective
F021
Motor I2t
F023
r949 = 5 wire break and limit value exceeded
Parameterized limit value of the I2t monitoring
for the motor has been exceeded.
The limit value of the inverter temperature has
been exceeded.
Inverter temperature
Alarm: (r949):
Bit0 Inverter overtemperature
Check: P383 Mot Tmp T1
- Measure the air intake and ambient
temperature
(Observe minimum and maximum ambient
temperature!)
- Observe the derating curves at theta >45°C
(Compact PLUS type) or 40°C.
Bit1 Wire break of cable to
temperature sensor
Bit4 Number of the temperature sensor
Bit5
Bit6
- On Compact PLUS units: ≥ 22 kW
acknowledgement is only possible after
1 minute
Check:
Bit8 Multiparallel circuit: Slave number
Bit9
Bit10
Examples:
r949 = 1: Limit value of inverter temperature
has been exceeded.
- whether the fan -E1 is connected and is
rotating in the correct direction
- that the air entry and discharge openings are
not restricted
- temperature sensor at -X30
r949 = 2: Sensor 1: wire break of sensor cable
or sensor defective
r949 = 18: Sensor 2: wire break of sensor
cable or sensor defective
r949 = 34: Sensor 3: wire break of sensor
cable or sensor defective
F025
UCE upper switch/
UCE Ph. L1
r949 = 50: Sensor 4: wire break of sensor
cable or sensor defective.
UCE upper switch (Compact PLUS) / or UCE
has tripped in phase L1
Check:
- phase L1 for short-circuit or ground fault
(-X2:U2 - including motor)
- that CU is correctly inserted
- that the switch for "SAFE STOP" (X9/5-6) is
open (only for units with order No. ...-11,
...-21,...-31, ...-61).
14-4
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Number / Fault
F026
Faults and Alarms
Cause
UCE lower switch (Compact PLUS) / or UCE
has tripped in phase L2
UCE lower switch /
UCE Ph. L2
Counter-measure
Check:
- phase L2 for short-circuit or ground fault
(-X2:V2 - including motor)
- that CU is correctly inserted
F027
Fault pulse resistor (Compact PLUS) / or UCE
has tripped in phase L3
Fault pulse resistor /
UCE Ph. L3
- that the switch for 'SAFE STOP' (X9/5-6) is
open (only for units with order Nos....-11,
...-21,...-31, ...-61)
Check:
- phase L3 for short-circuit or ground fault
(-X2:W2 - including motor)
- that CU is correctly inserted
F028
Supply phase
F029
The frequency and the amplitude of the DC
link ripple indicate a single-phase power
failure.
A fault has occurred in the measured value
sensing system:
Meas. value sensing
The measured variable at which a fault
occurred during offset adjustment is bit-coded
and stored in r949 :
Bit 0: Current phase L1
Bit 1: Current phase L2
Bit 2: DC link voltage
Bit 3: Inverter temperature
Bit 4: Motor temperature
Bit 5: Analog input 1
Bit 6: Analog input 2
- that the switch for 'SAFE STOP' (X9/5-6) is
open (only for units with order Nos....-11,
...-21,...-31, ...-61)
Check the supply voltage.
Causes in phase L1 and L2:
- Fault in measured value sensing system
- Fault in power section (valve cannot block)
- Fault on CU
Causes on all other measured variables:
- Fault on CU (SIMA) -> replace CU
Examples:
- (r949 = 1) Offset adjustment in phase L1 not
possible
- (r949 = 2) Offset adjustment in phase L3 not
possible.
F035
- (r949 = 3) Offset adjustment in phases L1
and L3 not possible.
Parameterizable external fault input 1 has
been activated
Ext. Fault 1
Check:
- whether there is an external fault
- whether the cable to the appropriate digital
input has been interrupted
F036
Parameterizable external fault input 2 has
been activated
Ext. Fault 2
- P575 Src No ExtFault1
Check:
- whether there is an external fault
- whether the cable to the appropriate digital
input has been interrupted
- P585 Src No ExtFault2
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-5
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F037
Analog input
04.2006
Cause
An analog input is taking place in operating
mode 4..20 mA and a wire break has
occurred. The number of the analog input
concerned is shown in fault value (r949).
Counter-measure
Check the connection to
- Analog input 1 -X102:15, 16,
or -X101:9,10 (Compact PLUS).
- Analog input 2 -X102: 17, 18.
Check parameters
F038
Voltage OFF during
parameter storage
F040
AS internal
F041
EEPROM fault
F042
Calculating time
During a parameter task, a voltage failure has
occurred on the board.
Incorrect operating status
- P632 CU AnaIn Conf
- P634 CU AnaIn Smooth
- P631 CU AnaIn Offset
Re-enter the parameter. The number of the
parameter concerned can be seen in fault
value r949.
Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)
A fault has occurred when storing the values in Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
the EEPROM.
(Compact PLUS)
Calculating time problems
Reduce the calculating time load:
At least 10 failures of time slots T2, T3, T4 or
T5 (see also parameters r829.2 to r829.5)
- Increase P357 Sampling Time
- Calculate individual blocks in a slower
sampling time
F044
A fault has occurred during the softwiring of
binectors and connectors.
BICO manager fault
F045
Observe r829 CalcTimeHdroom.
Fault value r949:
>1000 : Fault during softwiring of connectors
>2000 : Fault during softwiring of binectors
- Voltage OFF and ON
- Factory setting and new parameterization
- Replace the board
A hardware fault has occurred when accessing - Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
an option board
(Compact PLUS)
Opt. Board HW
F046
A fault has occurred during the transfer of
parameters to the gating unit processor.
Par. Task
F047
The calculating time in the gating unit
computer is not sufficient
- Check connection of the board subrack to the
option boards and replace if necessary.
Power the unit down and up again.
Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)
Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS)
Gating Calc Time
F048
Gating Pulse Freq
F049
SW version
F050
TSY Init.
14-6
The pulse frequency set in P340 is not
permissible.
In case of synchronous motors (P095 = 12):
Pulse frequency set too high (P340>2kHz).
Change P340 Pulse Frequency.
The firmware versions on the CU have
different firmware release.
Use uniform firmware
Error when initializing the TSY board
Check:
- Whether the TSY is correctly inserted
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Number / Fault
F051
Faults and Alarms
Cause
Digital tachometer or analog tachometer
sensing are faulty
Speed encoder
Counter-measure
Check the parameters:
- P130 Src SpdActV
- P151 Pulse #
- P138 AnalogTachScale
- P109 Motor #PolePairs
The product of P109 and P138 must be
smaller than 19200. Check or replace
tachometer. Check connection to tachometer.
F052
n-Cntr.Input
Control track input (-X103/27, or -X104/27
Compact PLUS) is not high:
- Tachometer line broken
- Tachometer fault
- Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)
Unselect tachometer with control track (P130
select motor encoder)
Check control track connection (-X103/27, or
X104/27 Compact PLUS)
The fault input on the TSY was activated.
F053
Tachometer dn/dt
The permissible change value of the speed
encoder signal P215 dn(act,perm) has been
doubly exceeded.
Exchange TSY
Check tachometer cables for interruptions.
Check earthing of tachometer shield.
- The shield must be connected both at the
motor and the converter side.
- The encoder cable must not be interrupted.
- The encoder cable must not be laid together
with the power cables.
- Only recommended encoders should be
used.
- In the case of a signal fault, the DT1 board
may have to be used. If necessary, change
P215
F054
A fault has occurred during initialization of the
encoder board.
Sensor board
initialization fault
- With P806
(observe parameter description) it is possible
during operation to switch over to encoder-free
operation.
Fault value r949
1. Board code incorrect
2. TSY not compatible
3. SBP not compatible
7. Board double
20: TSY board double
F056
Communication on the SIMOLINK ring is
disturbed.
SIMOLINK telegram
failure
60: Internal error
- Check the fiber-optic cable ring
- Check whether an SLB in the ring is without
voltage
- Check whether an SLB in the ring is faulty
- Check P741 (SLB TlgOFF)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-7
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F057
Brake does not open
F058
Parameter fault
Parameter task
F059
04.2006
Cause
The brake has not opened, the output current
of the converter has exceeded the
parameterized current threshold (U840) for
longer than one second (with the rotor locked)
Note:
Only with U800 = 1
A fault has occurred during the processing of a No remedy
parameter task.
A fault has occurred in the initialization phase
during the calculation of a parameter.
Parameter fault after
factory setting/init.
F060
MLFB is missing
F061
Incorrect
parameterization
14-8
Counter-measure
Check brake
Check I(max) brake (U840). The set threshold
must be at least 10% above the maximum
possible acceleration current.
This is set if the MLFB = 0 after exiting
INITIALIZATION (0.0 kW). MLFB = order
number.
A parameter entered during drive setting (e.g.
P107 Mot Rtd Freq, P108 Mot Rtd Speed,
P340 Pulse Frequency) is not in a permissible
range (depending on control type)
The number of the inconsistent parameter is
indicated in fault value r949. Correct this
parameter (ALL indices) and switch voltage off
and on again. Several parameters may be
affected, i.e. repeat process.
After acknowledgement, in INITIALIZATION
enter a suitable MLFB in parameter P070
MLFB (6SE70..). (Only possible with the
corresponding access stages to both access
parameters).
Acknowledge the fault and change the
corresponding parameter value. The missing
parameter is indicated in r949 as a fault value.
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Number / Fault
F062
Faults and Alarms
Cause
Fault in connection with the multi-parallel
circuit or board ImP1 has been detected.
Multi-parallel circuit
Counter-measure
r949 = 10:
Communications card does not reply. When
writing the control word, BUSY is not active if
CSOUT is inactive. Communications card is
probably not inserted.
R949 = 11,12:
Timeout during BUSY during initialization.
BUSY does not become active within 1 sec.
R949 = 15:
Timeout during BUSY during normal
communication. BUSY does not become
active within 1 sec.
R949 = 18:
Timeout when reading out the fault information
from the ImPIs. Within one second after
activation of FAULT no fault cause can be
supplied by the IMP1.
R949 = 20+i:
HW conflict. This is set if bit HWCONF is set in
status word of slave i. (Fault in the
configuration of the multi-parallel circuit)
r949 = 30+i:
HW version of ImPI isnot compatible. The
relevant slave number is contained in i.
R949 = 40:
Number of slaves does not tally with the
setpoint number of slaves of the unit.
R949 = 50+i
Inconsistency in the number of slaves. The
number of slaves notified by the ImPI is not in
conformance with the number of status words
or with the setpoint number of slaves of the
MLFB.
Counter-measure:
- Check ImPI or communications card and
replace, if necessary.
- Check configuration of multi-parallel circuit.
- Check parameterization.
- Replace CU.
F065
Scom Telegram
No telegram was received at an Scom
interface (Scom/USS protocol) within the
telegram failure time.
- Replace ImPI.
Fault value r949:
1 = interface 1 (SCom1)
2 = interface 2 (SCom2)
- Check the connection CU -X100:1 to 5 and
check the connection PMU -X300.
- Check the connection CU -X103, or
X100/ 35,36 (Compact PLUS type)
- Check "SCom/SCB TLG OFF" P704.01
(SCom1) and P704.02 (SCom2)
- Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-9
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F070
04.2006
Cause
A fault has occurred during initialization of the
SCB board.
SCB initialization fault
F072
A fault has occurred during initialization of the
EB board.
EB initialization fault
Counter-measure
Fault value r949:
1: Board code incorrect
2: SCB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
(Check parameterization)
6: Initialization timeout
7: SCB board double
10: Channel error
Fault value r949:
2: 1st EB1 not compatible
3: 2nd EB1 not compatible
4: 1st EB2 not compatible
5: 2nd EB2 not compatible
21: Three EB1 boards
22: Three EB2 boards
110: Fault on 1st EB1 (Analog input)
120: Fault on 2nd EB1 (Analog input)
210: Fault on 1st EB2 (Analog input)
220: Fault on 2nd EB2 (Analog input)
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 4, 5.
F073
4 mA at analog input 1, slave 1 fallen short of
AnInp1SL1
F074
4 mA at analog input 2, slave 1 fallen short of
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 7, 8.
AnInp2 SL1
F075
4 mA at analog input 3, slave 1 fallen short of
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 10, 11.
AnInp3 SL1
F076
4 mA at analog input 1, slave 2 fallen short of
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 4, 5.
AnInp1 SL2
F077
4 mA at analog input 2, slave 2 fallen short of
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 7, 8.
AnInp2 SL2
F078
4 mA at analog input 3, slave 2 fallen short of
Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 10, 11.
No telegram has been received by the SCB
(USS, peer-to-peer, SCI) within the telegram
failure time.
- Check the connections of the SCB1(2).
AnInp3 SL2
F079
SCB telegram failure
- Check P704.03"SCom/SCB Tlg OFF"
- Replce SCB1(2)
F080
TB/CB initialization
fault
Fault during initialization of the board at the
DPR interface
- Replace CU (-A10)
Fault value r949:
1: Board code incorrect
2: TB/CB board not compatible
3: CB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
6: Initialization timeout
7: TB/CB board double
10: Channel error
Check the T300/CB board for correct
contacting, check the PSU power supply,
check the CU / CB / T boards and check the
CB initialization parameters:
- P918.01 CB Bus Address,
- P711.01 to P721.01 CB parameters 1 to 11
14-10
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Number / Fault
F081
Faults and Alarms
Cause
Heartbeat-counter of the optional board is no
longer being processed
OptBrdHeartbeatCounter
F082
TB/CB telegram failure
No new process data have been received by
the TB or the CB within the telegram failure
time.
Counter-measure
Fault value r949:
0: TB/CB heatbeat-counter
1: SCB heartbeat-counter
2: Additional CB heartbeat-counter
- Acknowledge the fault (whereby automatic
reset is carried out)
- If the fault re-occurs, replace the board
concerned (see fault value)
- Replace ADB
- Check the connection between the subrack
and the optional boards (LBA) and replace, if
necessary
Fault value r949:
1 = TB/CB
2 = additional CB
- Check the connection to TB/CB
- Check P722 (CB/TB TlgOFF)
F085
A fault has occurred during initialization of the
CB board.
Add. CB initialization
fault
F087
SIMOLINK initialization
fault
F090
Mld Param.
F091
Mld Time
F095
Mld n(set)
A fault has occurred during initialization of the
SLB board.
An error occurred when attempting to change
a parameter from the standstill measurement
or the rotating measurement (Mot ID).
The rotating measurement takes longer than
programmed in a measured status. The
relevant measuring interval is encrypted in
parameter r949. Possible causes:
Load torque too high
Load torque not uniform
Ramp-function generator disabled
Due to entries for
- Permissible phase sequence
- Maximum frequency,
- Minimum speed,
- Changeover frequency between V and I
model,
- Start of field-weakening frequency,
- Frequency suppression bandwidth
it was not possible to determine a permissible
frequency range for the rotating measurement.
- Replace CB or TB
Fault value r949:
1: Board code incorrect
2: TB/CB board not compatible
3: CB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
6: Initialization timeout
7: TB/CB board double
10: Channel error
Check the T300 / CB board for correct
contacting and check the CB initialization
parameters:
- P918.02 CB Bus Address,
- P711.02 to P721.02 CB Parameters 1 to 11
- Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)
- Replace SLB
Power down and power up again. If it
reoccurs, replace CU (-A10), or replace the
unit (Compact PLUS type)
Eliminate the cause and re-start the
measurement (power up the converter again).
If it re-occurs, replace CU (-A10), or replace
the unit (Compact PLUS type).
There must be a 10 % frequency range which
lies above 1.1 times the changeover frequency
and below 0.9 times the start of fieldweakening frequency.
Possible counter-measures
- Permit both phase sequences
- Increase maximum frequency
- Reduce minimum speed,
- Reduce changeover frequency between the
V and I model.
- Reduce or remove the frequency
suppression bandwidth.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-11
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F096
04.2006
Cause
The rotating measurement was aborted due to
the inadmissible external intervention.
Counter-measure
The fault value in r949 defines the type of
intervention:
Mld abort
4 Setpoint inhibit
5 Changeover, setpoint channel
8 Unexpected change in the converter status
12 Motor data set changeover (for function
selection "Compl. Mot ID")
13 Changeover to slave drive
14 Motor data set changeover to data set with
v/f_charac
15 Controller inhibit is set
16 Ramp-function generator is disabled
17 Selection "Tacho test" for F controller
18 Ramp-function generator stopped
Eliminate cause
F097
Mld meausred value
F098
Mld Tachof
The measured values for the nominal ramp-up
time when optimizing the controller deviate too
greatly.
Cause: very unsteady load torque
The rotating measurement has detected a fault
in the speed actual value signal. The fault
value defines the type of fault.
The fault measurement may have been
erroneously generated if the drive speed is
externally forced (e.g. completely locked drive
generates the "no signal" message)
22 Inverter inhibit:
Check inverter release (P561)
If necessary, increase the torque limit values
to 100 percent
The fault value in r949 defines the type of
intervention
4 No speed signal present
5 Sign of the signal is incorrect
6 A track signal is missing
7 Incorrect gain
8 Incorrect pulse number
Checking the measurement cables.
F100
GRND Init
During the ground fault test, a current not
equal to zero has been measured, or an UCE
or overcurrent monitoring has responded,
although no value has yet been triggered.
Checking the parameters
- P130 Src Speed ActV
- P1151 Encoder Pulse #
The cause of the fault can be read out from
r376 "GrdFltTestResult".
Check the converter output for short-circuit or
ground fault
(-X2:U2, V2, W2 - including motor).
Check that the CU is inserted correctly.
Sizes 1 and 2:
- Check the transistor modules on the PEU
board -A23 for short-circuit.
Size 3 and 4:
- Check the transistor modules -A100, -A200,
-A300 for short-circuit
14-12
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Number / Fault
F101
GRND UCE
F102
GRND Phase
Faults and Alarms
Cause
During the ground fault test, the UCE
monitoring has responded in a phase in which
no valve has been triggered.
During the ground fault test, a current flows in
a phase in which no valve has been triggered
or the UCE monitoring has responded in the
phase in which the valve has been triggered.
Counter-measure
Check valves in the power section for shortcircuit, and on converters with fiber-optic
gating, check the gating unit wiring and the
UCE checkbacks for correct assignment.
R376 can be interrogated to indicate which
UCE monitoring has responded.
The fault value can be read out from r949. The
digit of the xth position indicates the valve
where the fault occurred at power-up.
X O O O x = 1 = V+ x = 2 = V- x = 3 = U+
x = 4 = U- x = 5 = W+ x = 6 = WThe figure of the xth digit indicates the phase
in which I is 0 and thus a valve must be
defective (always conductive).
O O O X x = 1 Phase 1 (U)
x = 3 = Phase 3 (W)
x = 4 = Phase 1 (U) or 3 (W)
F103
There is a ground fault or a fault in the power
section.
Ground fault
During the ground fault test, a current flows
from the phase in which a valve has been
triggered, the overcurrent comparator has
responded, or a UCE monitoring has
responded in a phase in which a valve has
been triggered.
Examine phase for defective valves (always
conductive).
Read out fault value from r949. The digit of the
xth position indicates the valve where the fault
occurred at power-up.
XOOO
XOOO
x = 1 = V+ x = 2 = V- x = 3 =U+
x = 4 = U- x = 5 = W+ x = 6 = W-
Check the motor including the feeder cable for
short-circuit. If no ground fault is present,
check the power section for defective valves
(always conductive).
The digit of the xth position indicates the
phase in which I is 0 and therefore a valve
must be defective (always conductive).
OOOX
1 = Current in phase 1 (U)
2 = UCE in phase 2 (V)
3 = Current in phase 3 (W)
4 = Only overcurrent occurred
The speed of the motor shaft during the
ground-fault test should be less than 10 % of
the rated speed!
1) In phase V there is a ground fault or a
defective valve or the "SAFE STOP" switch
(X9/5-6) is open (only for units with Order No.
...-11, ...-21, ...-31).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-13
Faults and Alarms
Number / Fault
F107
04.2006
Cause
A fault has occurred during the test pulse
measurement
MLd = 0
Counter-measure
Read out fault value from r949. The figures of
the grey shaded areas indicate which fault has
occurred.
OOXX
xx = 01: Both current actual values
remain 0
xx = 02: Motor-converter cable
phase U interrupted
xx = 03: Motor converter phase V
interrupted
xx = 04: Motor-converter phase W
interrupted
xx = 05: Current actual value I1
remains 0
xx = 06: Current actual value I3
remains 0
xx = 07: Valve U+ does not trigger
xx = 08: Valve U- does not trigger
xx = 09: Valve V+ does not trigger
xx = 10: Valve V- does not trigger
xx = 11: Valve W+ does not trigger
xx = 12: Valve W- does not trigger
xx = 13: Sign I1 incorrect
xx = 14: Sign I3 incorrect
xx = 15: Sign I1 and I3 incorrect
xx = 16: Sign I1 confused with I3
xx = 17: I1 confused with I3 and
both currents have an
incorrect sign
The digit of the xth digit indicates where the
fault has occurred.
XOOO
F108
Mld Unsym
During the DC measurement, the
measurement results for the individual phases
differ significantly. The fault value indicates
which quantity(ies) is(are) concerned and in
which phase the greatest deviation occurred.
x = 0 = Single converter
x = 1 = Inverter 1
x = 2 = Inverter 2
x = 3 = Inverters 1 and 2
Check that all 3 motor feeder cables and the
motor windings do not have any interruption.
Check the connection between the current
converter and the electronics and check the
current converter itself. Check the correct input
of the rating plate data for the motor data set
valid during the measurement.
Read out fault value from r949. The digit of the
xth position indicates;
OOOX
Transverse voltage too high
x = 1 = phase R
x = 2 = phase S
x = 3 = phase T
OOXO
Dev. stator resistance
(1, 2, 3 as above)
XOOO
Dev. dead-time compensation
(1, 2, 3 as above)
X O O O O Dev. valve voltage
(1, 2, 3 as above)
F109
Mld R(L)
14-14
The rotor resistance determined during DC
measurement deviates too significantly from
the value which was calculated by the
automatic parameterization from the rated slip.
The motor, power section or actual-value
sensing are significantly non-symmetrical.
- Incorrect input of rated speed or rated
frequency
- Pole pair number incorrect
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Number / Fault
F110
Mld di/dt
Faults and Alarms
Cause
During test pulse measurement, the current
has increased significantly faster than was
expected. Thus for the 1st test pulse, an
overcurrent condition occurred within the first
half of the minimum switch-on time
Counter-measure
- There may be a short-circuit between two
converter outputs.
- The motor rating plate data have not been
correctly parameterized.
- The motor leakage is too low.
F111
Fault e_Func
F112
Unsym I_sigma
F114
A fault has occurred while calculating the
equalization function.
The individual leakage test results deviate too
significantly.
The converter has automatically stopped the
automatic measurement due to the time limit
up to power-up having been exceeded or due
to an OFF command during the measurement,
and has reset the function selection in P115.
Re-start with P115 function selection = 2
"Motor identification at standstill". The ON
command must be given within 20 sec. after
the alarm message A078 = standstill
measurement has appeared.
A fault has occurred during calculations in the
context of the MotID.
Cancel the OFF command and re-start
measurement.
Power-down the converter and electronics and
power-up again.
KF internal
F116
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F117
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F118
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F119
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F120
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F121
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F122
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F123
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F124
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F125
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F126
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F127
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F128
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F129
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
MId OFF
F115
Technology board fault
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-15
Faults and Alarms
04.2006
Number / Fault
F130
Cause
See TB documentation
Counter-measure
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F131
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F132
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F133
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F134
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F135
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F136
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F137
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F138
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F139
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F140
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F141
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F142
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F143
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F144
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F145
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F146
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
Technology board fault
F147
See TB documentation
See TB documentation
An active signal is present at binector U061
(1).
Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
710
An active signal is present at binector U062
(1).
Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
710
An active signal is present at binector U063
(1).
Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
710
Technology board fault
F148
Fault 1
Function blocks
F149
Fault 2
Function blocks
F150
Fault 3
Function blocks
14-16
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Number / Fault
F151
Faults and Alarms
Cause
An active signal is present at binector U064
(1).
Counter-measure
Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
710
Fault 4
Function blocks
F153
Within the monitoring time of the tool interface Cyclically execute write tasks from the tool
no valid sign-of-life has been received from the interface within the monitoring time whereby
No valid sign-of-life tool tool interface.
the sign-of-life has to be increased by 1 for
interface
every write task.
F243
Fault in internal linking. One of the two linked
Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
partners does not reply.
(Compact PLUS).
Link int.
F244
Fault in the internal parameter linking
Release comparison of gating unit software
and operating software regarding the transfer
ParaLink int.
parameters.
F255
A fault has occurred in the EEPROM.
Fault in EEPROM
Table 14-1
Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type).
Switch off the unit and switch it on again. If the
fault re-occurs, replace CU (-A10), or replace
the unit (Compact PLUS).
Fault numbers, causes and their counter-measures
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-17
Faults and Alarms
14.2
04.2006
Alarms
The alarm message is periodically displayed on the PMU by A = alarm/
alarm message and a 3-digit number. An alarm cannot be
acknowledged. It is automatically deleted once the cause has been
eliminated. Several alarms can be present. The alarms are then
displayed one after the other.
When the converter is operated with the OP1S operator control panel,
the alarm is indicated in the lowest operating display line. The red LED
additionally flashes (refer to the OP1S operating instructions).
Number / Alarm
A001
Calculating time
A002
Cause
The calculating time utilization is too high
Counter-measure
- Observe r829 CalcTimeHdroom
- Increase P357 Sampling Time or
a) At least 3 failures of time slots T6 or T7 (see - Reduce P340 Pulse Frequency
also parameter r829.6 or r829.6)
b) At least 3 failures of time slots T2, T3, T4 or
T5 (see also parameter r829.2 to r829.5)
Start of the SIMOLINK ring is not functioning.
- Check the fiber-optic cable ring for
interruptions
SIMOLINK start alarm
- Check whether there is an SLB without
voltage in the ring
A014
The DC link voltage is not equal to 0 when the
simulation mode is selected (P372 = 1).
Simulation active alarm
A015
Parameterizable external alarm input 1 has
been activated.
External alarm 1
A016
Safe Stop alarm active
A020
- Reduce DC link voltage (disconnect the
converter from the supply)
Check
- whether the cable to the corresponding
digital input has been interrupted.
Parameterizable external alarm input 2 has
been activated.
External alarm 2
A017
- Check whether there is a faulty SLB in the
ring
- Set P372 to 0.
- parameter P588 Src No Ext Warn1
Check
- whether the cable to the corresponding
digital input has been interrupted.
The switch for blocking the inverter pulses (X9
terminal 5-6) has been opened (only for units
with Order No. ...-11, ...-21, ...-31, ...61)
An overcurrent condition has occurred.
- parameter P589 Src No Ext Warn2
Close switch X9 5-6 and thus release the
inverter pulses.
Check the driven load for an overload
condition.
Overcurrent
- Are the motor and the converter matched?
A021
An overvoltage condition has occurred.
- Have the dynamic performance requirements
been exceeded.
Check the supply voltage. The converter
regenerates without regeneration possibility.
Overvoltage
14-18
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Number / Alarm
A022
Faults and Alarms
Cause
The threshold for initiating an alarm has been
exceeded.
Inverter temperature
Counter-measure
- Measure intake air or ambient temperature.
- Observe the derating curves at theta >45°C
(Compact PLUS) or 40°C.
Check
- Whether the fan -E1 is connected and is
rotating in the correct direction.
-The air intake and discharge openings for
blockage.
- The temperature sensor at -X30.
- r833 indicates the maximum converter
temperature of all existing measuring points
(Compact/chassis type unit).
A023
The parameterizable threshold for initiating an
alarm has been exceeded.
Motor temperature
A024
Motor movement
A025
I2t Inverter
A026
Ud too high
A029
The motor has moved during motor data
identification.
If the instantaneous load condition is
maintained, then the inverter will be thermally
overloaded.
Ud is above the continuously permissible DC
link voltage for more than 30sec in a time
interval of 90sec
The parameterized limit value for the I2t
monitoring of the motor has been exceeded.
- r833.01 indicates the actual converter
temperature (Compact PLUS type).
Check the motor (load, ventilation, etc.). The
current temperature can be read in r009 Motor
Tmp.
Check the KTY84 input at connector
-X103:29,30, or -X104:29,30 (Compact PLUS
type) for short-circuit.
Lock the motor.
Check:
- P72 Rtd Drive Amps
- MLFB P70
- P128 Imax
- r010 Drive Utilizat
Motor load cycle is exceeded!
I2t motor
Check the parameters:
A033
P382 Motor Cooling
P383 Mot Tmp T1
P384 Mot Load Limits
P804 Overspeed Hys plus
Overspeed
Bit 3 in r553 status word 2 of the septoint
channel. The speed actual value has
exceeded the value of maximum speed plus
the set hysteresis.
P452 n/f(max, FWD Spd) or
P453 n/f(max, REV Spd) has been exceeded
A034
Setpoint/actual value
deviation
Bit 8 in r552 status word 1 of the setpoint
channel. The difference between freqeuncy
setpoint/actual value is greater than the
parameterized value and the control
monitoring time has elapsed.
Increase the parameter for the maximum
frequencies or reduce the regenerative load.
Check
- whether an excessive torque requirement is
present
- whether the motor has been dimensioned too
small.
A035
Wire break
The clockwise and/or the counter-clockwise
rotating field is not enabled, or a wire
breakage is present in the terminal wiring
(both control word bits are zero).
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Increase values P792 Perm Deviation Frq/
set/actual DevSpeed and P794 Deviation Time
Check whether cable(s) to the corresponding
digital input(s) P572 Src FWD Spd / P571 Src
REV Spd is (are) interrupted or released
14-19
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A036
Brake checkback
"Brake still closed"
A037
04.2006
Cause
The brake checkback indicates the "Brake still
closed" state.
Counter-measure
Check brake checkback (see FD 470)
The brake checkback indicates the "Brake still
open" state.
Check brake checkback (see FD 470)
Brake checkback
"Brake still open"
A041
The line voltage is too high or the drive line
voltage (P071) is incorrectly parameterized.
Vdmax controller inhibit The Vdmax controller is disabled despite
parameter access (P515), as otherwise the
motor would accelerate immediately in
operation to the maximum frequency.
A042
Motor is stalled or blocked.
Check
Motor stall/lock
- whether the drive is locked
The alarm cannot be influenced by P805
"PullOut/BlckTime", but by P794 "Deviation
Time"
- the line voltage
- P071 Line Volts
Check
- whether the encoder cable is interruped
during speed control and whether the shield is
connected.
- Whether the drive has stalled
A043
The permissible change value of the speed
encoder signal (P215) has been exceeded.
n-act jump
Additionally for synchronous motors
(P095=12):
The motor rotates with more than 2% of the
rated speed at the time of inverter release.
The inverter status "Ready for operation" is not
exited.
- For synchronous motors (P095=12):
excitation current injection
Check the tachometer cables for interruptions.
Check the earthing of the tachometer shield.
- The shield must be connected both on the
motor and on the converter side.
- The encoder cable must not be interrupted.
- The encoder cable must not be laid with the
power cables.
- Only the recommended encoders should be
used.
- If there is a signal fault, use the DTI board if
necessary. If required, change P215.
A044
I too low
Only for synchronous motors (P095=12) in
operation:
The difference smoothed with P159 between
excitation current setpoint and actual value
(r160 - r156) deviates from zero by more than
25 % of the rated magnetizing current.
- Additionally for synchronous motors
(P095=12):
Do not grant inverter release until the motor is
at standstill
Only for synchronous motors P095=12)
Check:
- whether the current limitation of the excitation
current control is too small,
- whether the dynamic performance of the
excitation current injection is too low,
- whether the excitation current injection
function is operating,
- whether the wiring of excitation current
actual-value P155 is correct,
- whether the wiring of excitation current
setpoint r160 is correct,
- whether there is a wire break between
MASTERDRIVES and the excitation device,
- whether the voltage limitation is too low for
dynamic excitation current control,
- whether the analog output for r160 takes
place without isolating amplifiers (despite
cable length > 4 m)
14-20
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Number / Alarm
A045
DC braking activated
A049
No slave
A050
Slave incorrect
A051
Peer baud rate
A052
Peer PcD L
A053
Peer Lng f.
A057
TB Param
A061
Alarm 1
Function blocks
A062
Alarm 2
Function blocks
A063
Alarm 3
Function blocks
A064
Alarm 4
Function blocks
A065
Auto restart active
A066
fsyn > fmax
A067
fsyn < fmin
A068
fsyn<>fsoll
Faults and Alarms
Cause
The DC braking function has been activated
and the motor frequency is still above the
frequency at which DC braking begins (P398).
At serial I/O (SCB1 with SCI1/2), no slave is
connected or fiber-optic cable is interrupted or
slaves are without voltage.
At ser. I/O the slaves required according to a
parameterized configuration are not present
(slave number or slave type): Analog inputs or
outputs or digital inputs or outputs have been
parameterized which are not physically
present.
In a peer-to-peer connection a baud rate has
been selected which is too high or too
different.
In a peer-to-peer connection, a PcD length has
been set which is too high (>5).
Counter-measure
- Increase frequency at which DC braking
begins
P690 SSCI AnaIn Conf
- Check slave.
- Check cable.
Check parameter P693 (analog outputs), P698
(digital outputs). Check connectors
K4101...K4103, K4201...K4203 (analog inputs)
and binectors B4100...B4115, B4120...B4135,
B4200...B4215, B4220...B4235 (digital inputs)
for connecting.
Adjust the baud rate in conjunction with the
SCB boards P701 SCom/SCB Baud Rate
Reduce number of words P703 SCom/SCB
PcD #
In a peer-to-peer connection, the pcD length of Adjust the word length for transmitter and
transmitter and receiver do not match.
receiver
P703 SCom/SCB PcD #
Occurs when a TB is logged on and present,
Replace TB configuration (software)
but parameter tasks from the PMU, SCom1 or
SCom2 have not been answered by the TB
within 6 seconds.
An active signal is present at binector U065
Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
(1).
An active signal is present at binector U066
(1).
Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
An active signal is present at binector U067
(1).
Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
An active signal is present at binector U068
(1).
Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
The auto restart option (P373) restarts the
drive. A possibly parameterized power-up
delay time (P374) expires if flying restart is not
selected. During pre-charging of the DC link,
there is no time monitoring i.e. with an external
electronics power supply, it is also switched-in
again.
The measured target frequency of the external
converter (or supply) is greater than the
parameterized maximum frequency of the
synchronizing converter.
Caution!
The measured target frequency of the external
converter (or supply) is less than the minimum
frequency required for synchronizing.
The setpoint frequency of the synchronizing
converter deviates too significantly from the
measured target frequency of the external
converter (or supply). The permissible
deviation can be set in P529.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
Personnel could be in danger when the drive
automatically restarts. Check whether the auto
restart function is really required!
Check:
- P452 n/f(max, FWD Spd)/ P453 n/f(max,REV
Spd) are correct and
- correct motor data set P578 Src MotDSet
Bit0 are selected
Check:
- r533 Sync Target Freq
- Synchronizing cable.
Adjust total setpoint (main and additional
setpoints) to the target frequency displayed in
visualization parameter r533.
14-21
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A069
RGen active
A070
Sync error
A071
tSY missing
A075
Ls, Rr Dev.
A076
04.2006
Cause
Synchronizing is not started as long as the
ramp-function generator in the synchronizing
converter setpoint channel is active. This
alarm is only output if synchronizing is
selected.
This alarm is output if the phase difference
goes outside the synchronizing window (P531)
after successful synchronization.
An attempt has been made to start
synchronization with either the synchronizing
board not inserted or not parameterized.
The measured values of the leakage
measurement or of rotor resistance deviate
significantly.
Counter-measure
Wait until acceleration has been completed.
Check whether
- P462 Accel Time
- P463 Accel Time Unit have been correctly
set.
The alarm can only be deleted after
synchronization has been exited.
Insert the TSY board in the subrack
Usually the leakage reactance P122 is the
average value resulting from the measured
values in r546.1...12, and the rotor resistance
r126 from the values in r542.1..3.
The determined compensation time was
limited to the value range of 0.5 µs - 1.5 µs.
If individual measured values significantly
deviate from the average values, they are
automatically not taken into account for the
calculation (for RI) or the value of the
automatic parameterization remains (for Ls).
It is only necessary to check the results for
their plausibility in the case of drives with high
requirements on torque or speed accuracy.
Converter output and motor output are too
different.
The measured resistance has been limited to
the maximum value of 49 %.
Check motor data input P095 to P109.
Converter output and motor output are too
different.
t-comp lim
A077
r-g limit
A078
Stands. Meas
A079
Mld Inv Stop
A080
MotId:Dr.M
A081
CB alarm
A082
CB alarm
The standstill measurement is executed when
the converter is powered up. The motor can
align itself several times in a certain direction
with this measurement.
The rotating measurement has been aborted
or cannot commence because an inverter stop
command is present.
When the converter is powered up, the
rotating measurement automatically
accelerates the drive. The drive can then only
be externally controlled in a restricted fashion.
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see operating
instructions for CB board.
The ID byte combinations which are being
sent from the DP master in the configuration
telegram are not in conformance with the
permissible ID byte combinations. (See also
Compendium, Chapter 8, Table 8.2-12).
Consequence:
No connection is made with the PROFIBUS
master.
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
Check motor data input P095 to P109.
If the standstill measurement can be executed
without any danger:
- Power up the converter.
P561 Src InvRelese - Release the inverter
If necessary, re-start the measurement by
powering-up the converter.
If the rotating measurement can be executed
without any danger:
- Power up the converter.
New configuration necessary
New configuration necessary.
No valid PPO type can be identified from the
configuration telegram of the DP master.
Consequence:
No connection is made with the PROFIBUS
master.
14-22
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Number / Alarm
A083
CB alarm
A084
CB alarm
A085
CB alarm
A086
CB alarm
Faults and Alarms
Cause
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
No net data or invalid net data (e.g. complete
control word STW1=0) are being received
from the DP master.
Consequence:
The process data are not passed on to the
dual port RAM. If P722 (P695) is not equal to
zero, this will cause the fault message F082 to
be tripped.
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
The telegram traffic between the DP master
and the CBP has been interrupted (e.g. cable
break, bus cable pulled out or DP master
powered down).
Consequence:
If P722 (P695) is not equal to zero, this will
cause the fault message F082 to be tripped.
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
The CBP does not generate this alarm!
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
CB alarm
Failure of the heartbeat counter on the basic
unit. The heartbeat counter on the basic unit is
no longer being incremented. The
communication between the CBP and the
basic board is disturbed.
The following description refers to the 1st
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
operating instructions for the CB board.
A088
Fault in the DPS manager software of the
CBP.
See user manual for CB board
A087
CB alarm
A089
CB alarm
A090
CB alarm
A091
CB alarm
A092
CB alarm
A093
CB alarm
A094
CB alarm
A095
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A81 of the 1st CB board
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A82 of the 1st CB board
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A83 of the 1st CB board
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A84 of the 1st CB board
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A85 of the 1st CB board
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A86 of the 1st CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board. Corresponds to
A87 of the 1st CB board
Counter-measure
See operating instructions of the CB board
See operating instructions of the CB board
See operating instructions of the CB board
See operating instructions of the CB board
See operating instructions of the CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for CB board
CB alarm
See operating instructions for CB board
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-23
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A096
04.2006
CB alarm
A097
Cause
See user manual for CB board
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
A88 of the 1st CB board
See user manual for TB board
Counter-measure
See user manual for CB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A098
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A099
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A100
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A101
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A102
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A103
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A104
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A105
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A106
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A107
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A108
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A109
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A110
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A111
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A112
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
A113
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A114
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A115
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A116
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A117
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
14-24
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
Faults and Alarms
Number / Alarm
A118
Cause
See user manual for TB board
Counter-measure
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A119
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A120
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A121
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A122
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A123
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A124
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A125
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A126
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A127
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
A128
See user manual for TB board
See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 2
Table 14-2
Alarm numbers, causes and their counter-measures
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
14-25
Faults and Alarms
14.3
04.2006
Fatal errors (FF)
Fatal errors are serious hardware or software errors which no longer
permit normal operation of the unit. They only appear on the PMU in
the form "FF<No>". The software is re-booted by actuating any key on
the PMU.
Number / Fault
FF01
Time slot overflow
FF03
Cause
A time slot overflow which cannot be corrected
has been detected in the higher-priority time
slots.
Serious faults have occurred while accessing
external option boards (CB, TB, SCB, TSY ..).
Access fault
Optional board
FF04
RAM
FF05
EPROM fault
FF06
Counter-measure
- Increase sampling time (P357 or reduce
pulse frequency (P340)
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
- Replace the LBA
A fault has occurred during the test of the
RAM.
- Replace the option board
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
A fault has occurred during the test of the
EPROM.
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Stack has overflowed
For VC: Increase sampling time (P357)
For MC: Reduce pulse frequency (P340)
Stack overflow
FF07
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Stack underflow
Stack Underflow
FF08
Invalid processor command should be
processed
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Invalid format in a protected processor
command
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Undefined Opcode
FF09
Protection Fault
FF10
Word access to uneven address
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Illegal Word Operand
Address
FF11
Jump command to uneven address
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
A version conflict between the firmware and
the hardware has occurred.
- Replace firmware
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Unexpected fatal error
Replace the board
FF15
(During processing of the fatal errors, a fault
number has occurred which is unknown to
date).
Stack overflow (C-Compiler Stack)
Replace the board
CSTACK_OVERFLOW
FF16
NMI
Illegal Instruction
Access
FF13
Wrong firmware
version
FF14
FF processing
- Replace firmware
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
NMI error
Table 14-3
14-26
Fatal errors
Operating Instructions
6SE7087-6JD60 Siemens AG
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
04.2006
15
Environmental Friendliness
Environmental Friendliness
Environmental
aspects during the
development
The number of components has been significantly reduced over earlier
converter series by the use of highly integrated components and the
modular design of the complete series. Thus, the energy requirement
during production has been reduced.
Special significance was placed on the reduction of the volume, weight
and variety of metal and plastic components.
Plastic components
used
PC:
ABS:
PP:
PA6:
LDPE:
Front cover
Fan mesh, PMU support board , logo
Hinges, insulating board, handle, bus retrofit
Insulating foils, terminal housing, support
Capacitor ring
Halogen-containing flame retardants were, for all essential
components, replaced by environmentally-friendly flame retardants.
Environmental compatibility was an important criterium when selecting
the supplied components.
Environmental
aspects during
production
Purchased components are generally supplied in recyclable packaging
materials (board).
Surface finishes and coatings were eliminated with the exception of the
galvanized sheet steel side panels.
ASIC devices and SMD devices were used on the boards.
The production is emission-free.
Environmental
aspects for disposal
The unit can be broken down into recyclable mechanical components
as a result of easily releasable screw and snap connections.
The plastic components are to DIN 54840 and have a recycling symbol.
After the service life has expired, the product must be disposed of in
accordance with the applicable national regulations.
Siemens AG
6SE7087-6JD60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
Operating Instructions
15-1
Bisher sind folgende Ausgaben erschienen:
The following versions have been published so far:
Ausgabe
Version
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
interne Sachnummer
Internal item number
475 844 4070 76 J AA-74
475 844 4070 76 J AB-74
475 844 4070 76 J AC-74
A5E00370506
A5E00370506
Ausgabe AE besteht aus folgenden Kapiteln:
Kapitel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Definitionen und Warnungen
Beschreibung
Erstinbetriebsetzung
Transportieren, Lagern, Auspacken
Montage
EMV-gerechter Aufbau
Anschließen
Parametrierung
Parametrierschritte
Steuerwort und Zustandswort
Wartung
Formieren
Technische Daten
Störungen und Warnungen
Umweltverträglichkeit
Änderungen
Seitenzahl
Ausgabedatum
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
überarbeitete Ausgabe
4
1
2
1
6
6
21
26
68
18
4
2
22
26
1
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
05.2006
04.2006
04.2006
Changes
Pages
Version
date
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
4
1
2
1
6
6
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
reviewed edition
21
26
68
18
4
2
22
26
1
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
04.2006
05.2006
04.2006
04.2006
Version AE consists of the following chapters:
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Definitions and Warnings
Description
First Start-up
Transport, Storage, Unpacking
Installation
Installation in Conformance with EMC
Regulations
Connecting-up
Parameterization
Parameterizing Steps
Control Word and Status Word
Maintenance
Forming
Technical Data
Faults and Warnings
Environmental Friendliness
Änderungen von Funktionen, technischen Daten, Normen,
Zeichnungen und Parametern vorbehalten.
We reserve the right to make changes to functions, technical data,
standards, drawings and parameters.
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage, Verwertung
und Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrücklich zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte vorbehalten, insbesondere für den Fall der
Patenterteilung oder GM-Eintragung.
Wir haben den Inhalt der Druckschrift auf Übereinstimmung mit
der beschriebenen Hard- und Software überprüft. Dennoch
können Abweichungen nicht ausgeschlossen werden, so dass wir
für die vollständige Übereinstimmung keine Garantie
übernehmen. Die Angaben in dieser Druckschrift werden jedoch
regelmäßig überprüft und notwendige Korrekturen sind in den
nachfolgenden Auflagen enthalten. Für Verbesserungsvorschläge
SIMOVERT® ist ein Warenzeichen von Siemens
sind wir dankbar.
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by
patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that
they coincide with the described hardware and software.
However, differences cannot be completely excluded, so that we
do not accept any guarantee for complete conformance.
However, the information in this document is regularly checked
and necessary corrections will be included in subsequent editions.
SIMOVERT® Registered Trade Mark
We are grateful for any recommendations for improvement.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Motion Control Systems
P.O. Box 3180, D – 91050 Erlangen
Germany
www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
© Siemens AG 2006
Subject to change without prior notice
Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 6SE7087-6JD60
Printed in Germany
Similar pages